Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)

Table of Contents Revision: 0

18/05/2000
Page 1 of 447

1 PURPOSE AND RESPONSIBILITIES 16

1.1 PURPOSE OF DRILLING OPERATIONS MANUAL 16
1.2 RESPONSIBILITIES 16
1.2.1 Drilling Manager 16
1.2.2 Drilling Superintendent 16
1.2.3 Offshore Installation Manager 16
1.2.4 Company Drilling Supervisor 16
1.2.5 Offshore Drilling Engineer / Night Drilling Supervisor 17
1.2.6 Senior / Day Toolpusher 17
1.2.7 Night Toolpusher 17
1.2.8 Drillers 17
1.2.9 Wellsite Geologist 17
1.2.10 Log Analyst 17
1.2.11 Well Test Engineer 17
1.2.12 Onshore Drilling Engineer 17
1.2.13 Logistics Co-ordinator 17
1.3 TUBING NOMENCLATURE 18
1.3.1 Hole and Tubular Sizes 18
1.3.2 Economic Alternatives 18
1.4 UNITS 19
1.5 ABBREVIATIONS 21
2 PRE-DRILLING PROGRAMME DATA PACKAGE (PDDP) 23
2.1 DRILLING PROGRAMME 26
3 SITE SURVEY 28
3.1.1 Offshore 28
3.1.2 Onshore 29
3.2 LOCATION ACCEPTANCE 30
3.2.1 Offshore 30
3.2.2 Onshore 30
3.3 RIG SELECTION 32
3.4 RIG ACCEPTANCE 32
3.4.1 Offshore 32
3.4.2 Onshore 36
3.5 RIG MOVE 37
3.5.1 Offshore 37
3.5.2 Onshore 37
3.6 RIG POSITIONING 37
3.6.1 Offshore 37
3.6.2 Onshore 38
3.7 SITE RESTORATION 39
3.7.1 Offshore 39
3.7.2 Onshore 39
4 PRE-SPUD CHECK 41
4.1 PRE-SPUD RIG MEETING 41
5 GENERAL DRILLING OPERATIONS-PROCEDURES 42
5.1 DRILLING OPERATIONS-EQUIPMENT 44
6 WELLHEAD SYSTEMS 48
6.1.1 Subsea Wellhead 48
6.1.2 Jack-Up Wellhead 51
6.1.3 Land Rig Wellhead 53
6.1.4 Summary 53
6.1.5 Wearbushing And Bore Protectors 53
6.1.6 Subsea Surveillance 54
6.2 CONDUCTOR, CASING AND LINER CEMENTING EQUIPMENT 54
 Allomax Ltd 2000
 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Table of Contents Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Page 2 of 447

6.2.1 Conductor 54
6.2.2 Surface Casing 54
6.3 INTERMEDIATE AND PRODUCTION CASING 55
6.3.1 Drilling Liner 55
6.3.2 Production Liner 56
7 DRILLING FLUIDS 57
7.1 SOLIDS CONTROL EQUIPMENT 58
7.2 CORROSION CONTROL 58
7.2.1 Corrosion Control Checklist 58
7.3 SUPERVISION OF THE MUD ENGINEER 59
8 GENERAL CASING RUNNING PROCEDURE 60
8.1 RUNNING LINER 61
9 CEMENTING 64
9.1 GENERAL CEMENTING REQUIREMENTS 64
9.1.1 Cement Coverage 64
9.1.2 Testing of Cement Slurries 64
9.2 RESPONSIBILITIES 65
9.2.1 General 65
9.2.2 Drilling Engineer 65
9.2.3 Drilling Contractor 65
9.2.4 Drilling Supervisor 66
9.2.5 Cementer 67
9.2.6 Cement Engineer 68
9.2.7 Mud Engineer 68
9.2.8 Mud Loggers 68
9.3 SAFETY CRITICAL ISSUES 68
9.3.1 Cements in Use in Nimir Petroleum Ltd. (NPL) 69
9.4 CEMENT ADDITIVES 69
9.4.1 Introduction 69
9.4.2 Accelerators 69
9.4.3 Retarders 70
9.4.4 High Density Additives 70
9.4.5 Low Density Additives (Extenders) 70
9.4.6 Fluid Loss Control Additives 71
9.4.7 Additives for Thixotropic Slurries 71
9.4.8 Defoamers and Antifoams 71
9.5 SPACERS - INTRODUCTION 72
9.5.1 Definition 72
9.5.2 Objectives 72
9.5.3 Guidelines for Application 72
9.6 SPACERS - PREFLUSH FORMULATIONS 72
9.6.1 Scavenger Slurry 72
9.7 SPACERS - RECOMMENDED PREFLUSHES FOR WATER BASED MUDS 73
9.7.1 High Annular Velocity Displacements 73
9.7.2 Cement Plugs and Squeezes 73
9.8 SPACERS - RECOMMENDED PREFLUSHES FOR OIL BASED MUDS 73
9.8.1 Introduction 73
9.8.2 High and Low Annular Velocity Displacements 73
9.9 SPACERS – POSTFLUSHES 73
9.9.1 Standard Cementations 73
9.9.2 Cementations Using Stinger 73
9.10 CEMENT TESTING - INTRODUCTION 73
9.10.1 General Guidelines 73
9.11 CEMENT TESTING - DESPATCH OF CEMENT, ADDITIVES AND WATER SAMPLES 74
9.11.1 Sampling Guidelines74
9.11.2 Sample Labelling 75
9.12 CEMENT TESTING - CEMENT TEST FORM 75

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Table of Contents Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Page 3 of 447

9.12.1 Introduction 75
9.12.2 Consistometer Test Conditions 75
9.13 PRE-JOB PREPARATION - CEMENT PROGRAMME 75
9.13.1 General Guidelines 75
9.13.2 Objective 76
9.13.3 Non Standard Operations 76
9.13.4 Cement Programme Design Considerations 78
9.13.5 Time Estimate / Thickening Time 78
9.14 PRE-JOB PREPARATION - TREATMENT OF MUD PRIOR TO CEMENTING 79
9.14.1 General Guidelines 79
9.15 PRE-JOB PREPARATION - HOLE VOLUMES AND SLURRY VOLUME CALCULATIONS 79
9.15.1 General Guidelines 79
9.16 PRE-JOB PREPARATION - CIRCULATION TEST 79
9.16.1 General Guidelines 79
9.17 CASING CEMENTATION - INNER STRING (STINGER/STAB IN) CEMENTATION PROCEDURE80
9.17.1 Introduction 80
9.18 CASING CEMENTATION - SINGLE STAGE (PLUG TYPE) CEMENTATION PROCEDURE 83
9.18.1 Introduction 83
9.19 CASING CEMENTATION - SPECIAL CASES 87
9.19.1 Cementing in Weak Formations 87
9.19.2 Cementing Over Permeable, Depleted Reservoirs 87
9.19.3 Cementing in Deviated Wells 87
9.19.4 Cementing Production Strings in a Sub Hydrostatic Zone 87
9.20 LINER CEMENTATION 87
9.20.1 Procedure 87
9.21 REMEDIAL CEMENTATION - INTRODUCTION 92
9.21.1 Application of Remedial Cementation 92
9.21.2 Types of Remedial Cementation 92
9.22 REMEDIAL CEMENTATION - PREPARATION OF CEMENT PROGRAMME 92
9.22.1 General Guidelines 92
9.23 REMEDIAL CEMENTATION - CEMENT SLURRY REQUIREMENTS FOR SQUEEZE CEMENTING 92
9.23.1 Requirements 92
9.24 REMEDIAL CEMENTATION - SQUEEZE CEMENTING 93
9.24.1 General Guidelines 93
9.24.2 Block Squeeze Without Packer 94
9.24.3 Block Squeeze Using a Retrievable Packer 94
9.24.4 Straight Squeeze Using a Cement Retainer 95
9.24.5 Straight Squeeze Using a Retrievable Packer 96
9.24.6 Testing of Squeezed-Off Perforations 96
9.24.7 Squeezing Off a Leaking Liner Lap 97
9.25 REMEDIAL CEMENTATION - CIRCULATION / SQUEEZE CEMENTATION REPAIR 97
9.25.1 Application 97
9.25.2 Procedure 97
9.26 CEMENT PLUGS - INTRODUCTION 100
9.26.1 General Guidelines 100
9.27 CEMENT PLUGS - GENERAL GUIDELINES WHEN SETTING CEMENT PLUGS 100
9.27.1 Job Design 100
9.27.2 Volume and Excess Requirements 100
9.27.3 Slurry Requirements for Cements Plugs 101
9.28 CEMENT PLUGS - PROCEDURE FOR SETTING BALANCED PLUGS 101
9.29 CEMENT PLUGS 4 - PROCEDURE FOR SETTING SHORT PLUGS 103
9.30 REPORTING REQUIREMENTS 104
9.30.1 Cement Programme 104
APPENDIX A 105

10 BITS 106
10.1.1 Bit Selection 106
10.1.2 Optimising Bit Performance 106
10.1.3 Bit Grading 107

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Table of Contents Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Page 4 of 447

10.2 HYDRAULICS 107

10.2.1 Swab and Surge Pressure 107
10.2.2 Hydraulics Programme 107
11 FORMATION EVALUATION 109
11.1 HOLE CONDITIONING 109
11.2 PREJOB PLANNING 109
11.3 WIRELINE LOGGING 109
11.3.1 Process/Safety 109
11.3.2 Notification / Responsibilities Requirements 110
11.4 CORING 110
11.4.1 Hole Conditioning 110
11.4.2 Coring Process 110
12 WELL CONTROL 112

13 DRILL STRING DESIGN 113

13.1 INTRODUCTION 113
13.2 PURPOSE 113
13.3 COMPONENTS 113
13.4 OBJECTIVES OF DRILLING DESIGN 113
13.5 DESIGN ASSUMPTIONS 114
13.6 TENSION AND BENDING 114
13.6.1 Methods of Reducing Fatigue 115
13.7 DRILLSTRING DESIGN FACTORS 116
13.7.1 Tension(DFT) 116
13.7.2 Margin of Overpull (MOP) 116
13.7.3 Excess BHA Weight (DFBHA) 116
13.7.4 Torsion 116
13.7.5 Collapse Pressure (DFc) 116
13.7.6 Burst Pressure (DFB) 117
13.7.7 DS-1 Drill Stem Design and Inspection Standard 117
13.8 DRILLSTRING DESIGN PROCEDURES - SELECT DRILL COLLAR DIAMETER 117
13.8.1 Introduction 117
13.8.2 General Guidelines 117
13.9 DRILLSTRING DESIGN PROCEDURES – BHA CONNECTIONS AND FEATURES 117
13.9.1 Application 117
13.9.2 Bending Strength Ratio 117
13.9.3 BHA Connection Thread Form 118
13.9.4 Stress Relief Features 118
13.9.5 BHA Connection Torsional Strength 118
13.9.6 BHA Connection Torsional Strength 119
13.10 DRILLSTRING DESIGN PROCEDURES – DETERMINE LENGTH OF DRILL COLLAR SECTION 120
13.10.1 Introduction 120
13.10.2 Types of BHA Configurations 120
13.11 DRILLSTRING DESIGN PROCEDURES - DETERMINE LENGTH OF DRILL COLLAR SECTION 121
13.11.1 Type A BHA’s 121
13.11.2 Type B and C BHA’s 121
13.11.3 Type A BHA’s 121
13.11.4 Type B and C BHA’s 121
13.12 DRILLSTRING DESIGN PROCEDURES – CALCULATE STIFFNESS RATIO 122
13.13 DRILLPIPE TENSION DESIGN NOMENCLATURE 122
13.13.1 Calculate Allowable Load (PA) 123
13.13.2 Set Margin of Overpull (MOP) 123
13.13.3 Calculate Working Load (PW) 124
13.13.4 Calculate the Maximum Length of the Drillpipe Sections 124
13.13.5 Burst and Collaspe Pressure 126
13.13.6 Derating Collapse Pressure Capacity for Simultaneous Tension 126
13.14 DRILLSTRING VIBRATION 128

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Table of Contents Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Page 5 of 447

13.14.1 Introduction 128

13.14.2 Slip-Stick 129
13.14.3 Bit Whirl 129
13.14.4 Bit Bounce 129
13.14.5 Parametric Resonance 129
13.14.6 BHA Whirl 129
13.14.7 BHA Forced Vibration 129
13.14.8 Critical Rotating Speeds 129
13.14.9 Description 130
13.15 DRILLSTRING MONITORING 130
13.15.1 Introduction 130
13.15.2 Tool Inspection 130
13.15.3 Mud Logging Data 130
13.15.4 MWD Data 130
13.15.5 Deviated Wells 131
13.15.6 Wireline Log 131
13.15.7 High Frequency Surface Measurements 131
13.15.8 General Guidelines 131
13.16 VIBRATIONS CAUSES AND CURES 133
13.16.1 Introduction 133
13.16.2 Slip-Stick 133
13.16.3 Bit Whirl 133
13.16.4 Bit Bounce 133
13.16.5 Parametric Resonance 133
13.16.6 BHA Whirl 134
13.17 JARS GENERAL GUIDELINES 134
13.17.1 Introduction 134
13.17.2 Operational Efficiency 134
13.17.3 Tensile Strength 134
13.17.4 Jar ID 135
13.17.5 Torque Considerations 135
13.17.6 Temperature Rating 135
13.17.7 Abnormal Operating Conditions Suitability 135
13.18 OPTIMUM DRILLING JAR POSITION 135
13.18.1 Introduction 135
13.18.2 Jar Position 135
13.18.3 Jar Tension - Compression Set-up 135
13.19 EFFECTS OF CIRCULATING WHEN JARRING 136
13.19.1 Introduction 136
13.19.2 Jarring Up While Circulating 136
13.20 JARRING PRACTICES AND CALCULATIONS 136
13.20.1 Reference 136
13.20.2 Inspection 136
13.21 JAR INSPECTION/CERTIFICATION REQUIREMENTS 136
13.21.1 Equipment Design 136
13.21.2 Quality Assurance 136
13.21.3 Inspection 136
13.21.4 Traceability 136
13.22 JARS SPECIFIC APPLICATIONS 136
13.22.1 Temperature 136
13.22.2 Pressure137
13.22.3 Angle 137
13.22.4 Abnormal Service Conditions 137
13.23 SHOCK SUBS 137
13.23.1 Function 137
13.23.2 Application 137
13.23.3 Placement 138
APPENDIX A 139
NOTE: ENTER DRILL COLLAR AND HWDP INFORMATION ON THE SUMMARY TABLE IN SECTION 9 141

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Table of Contents Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Page 6 of 447

APPENDIX B 144

APPENDIX C 148

APPENDIX D 150

14 STUCK PIPE 154

14.1 CURRENT SITUATION 154
14.2 REQUIREMENTS OF DRILLING PERSONNEL 154
14.3 CAUSES OF STUCK PIPE 154
14.3.1 Introduction 154
14.3.2 Pressure Differential 154
14.3.3 Indications of Differential Sticking 155
14.4 CAUSES OF MECHANICAL STICKING 155
14.4.1 Inadequate Hole Cleaning 155
14.4.2 Formation Instability 155
14.4.3 Key Seating 156
14.4.4 Undergauge Hole and Assembly Changes 157
14.4.5 Accumulation of Cuttings 157
14.4.6 Drilling Plastic Formations 157
14.4.7 Large Boulders Falling into the Hole 157
14.4.8 Running Large Gauge Tools 158
14.5 STUCK PIPE PREVENTION - PLANNING REQUIREMENTS 158
14.5.1 Drilling Programmes 158
14.5.2 Awareness Training 158
14.5.3 Stuck Pipe Pre-Section Meeting 158
14.5.4 Stuck Pipe Investigation 158
14.5.5 Rig Site Precautions 159
14.6 GENERAL PREVENTION 159
14.6.1 Introduction 159
14.6.2 Personnel Knowledge 159
14.6.3 BHA Selection 160
14.6.4 Mud System 160
14.6.5 Circulation and Downhole Monitoring160
14.6.6 Tripping 160
14.6.7 Overpull 161
14.6.8 Surveying 161
14.7 STUCK PIPE PREVENTION - DIFFERENTIAL STICKING (PLANNING PHASE) 161
14.7.1 Use and Acquisition of Data 161
14.7.2 Drilling Fluid 162
14.8 STUCK PIPE PREVENTION - DIFFERENTIAL STICKING (OPERATIONS PHASE) 162
14.8.1 BHA 162
14.8.2 Differential Pressure 162
14.8.3 Drilling Fluid 162
14.8.4 Reciprocation / Rotation 163
14.8.5 Measurement While Drilling 163
14.8.6 Well Control Activities 163
14.9 STUCK PIPE PREVENTION - MECHANICAL STICKING (HOLE CLEANING) 163
14.9.1 Introduction 163
14.9.2 Hole Cleaning Problems 163
14.9.3 Solutions to Hole Cleaning Problems 164
14.9.4 Deviated Wells 164
14.10 STUCK PIPE PREVENTION - MECHANICAL STICKING (FORMATION INSTABILITY) 165
14.10.1 Formation Instability 165
14.11 STUCK PIPE PREVENTION - MECHANICAL STICKING (BOTTOM HOLE ASSEMBLY CHANGES) 166
14.11.1 Bottom Hole Assembly Changes 166
14.12 STUCK PIPE PREVENTION - MECHANICAL STICKING (KEY SEAT) 166
14.12.1 Key seat 166
14.12.2 Preventing Key Seating 166

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Table of Contents Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Page 7 of 447

14.12.3 Eliminating a Key Seat 166

14.12.4 Freeing 166
14.13 FREEING STUCK PIPE - DIFFERENTIALLY STUCK PIPE 167
14.13.1 Initial Action 167
14.13.2 Reducing Hydrostatic Pressure 167
14.13.3 Mud Weight Reduction 167
14.13.4 Spotting Pipe Release Agents 167
14.13.5 Spotting Pipe Release Agents, 167
14.14 FREEING STUCK PIPE - MECHANICALLY STUCK PIPE 168
14.14.1 Jarring 168
14.15 FREEING STUCK PIPE - DRILLING JAR PRACTICES 168
14.15.1 Introduction 168
14.15.2 Jarring Theory 168
14.15.3 Jar Placement 168
14.15.4 Jarring Practices 168
14.15.5 Circulating While Jarring 169
14.15.6 Accelerators 169
14.16 FREEING STUCK PIPE - ECONOMIC LIMITATIONS 170
14.16.1 When to Give Up Attempts to Free the Pipe 170
14.16.2 Economics 170
14.17 FREE POINT DETERMINATION AND BACK - OFF PROCEDURES 170
14.17.1 Determining the Free Point 170
14.18 GUIDELINES FOR RUNNING FPIT 173
14.19 FREE POINT DETERMINATION AND BACK - OFF PROCEDURES – GENERAL BACK-OFF PROCEDURES 174
14.19.1 String Shot Size 174
14.19.2 Weight, Torque and Turns on the String 174
14.19.3 Working Torque Down the Hole in Straight Holes 174
14.20 FREE POINT DETERMINATION AND BACK - OFF PROCEDURES - DETAILED BACK-OFF PROCEDURES 176
14.20.1 Completing the Back-off 177
APPENDIX A179
STUCK PIPE ANALYSIS / DECISION CHARTS 179
14.20.2 Indications of Differential Rather than Mechanical Sticking 179
APPENDIX B 189

15 SURVEYING 191
15.1 INTRODUCTION 191
15.1.1 Surveying Objectives 191
15.2 DIRECTIONAL DRILLING AND SURVEYING RESPONSIBILITIES 192
15.2.1 Drilling Superintendent 192
15.2.2 Drilling Engineer 192
15.2.3 Drilling Supervisor 192
15.2.4 Directional Contractor Survey Personnel 193
15.2.5 Directional Drilling Engineer194
15.2.6 Directional Drilling Contractor 194
15.2.7 Deviation Survey Database 194
15.3 DIRECTIONAL OPERATION PREPARATION AND CONTROL RESPONSIBILITIES 195
15.3.1 Information Required from the Drilling Programme 196
15.4 WELL PLOTS 196
15.4.1 Introduction 196
15.4.2 Well Plot Format 197
15.4.3 Standard Directional Plot Contents 197
15.4.4 Vertical Section View 197
15.4.5 Checks of Final Well Plots 198
15.5 ADDITIONAL DATA REQUIREMENTS 199
15.5.1 Introduction 199
15.5.2 Tie-in Data 199
15.5.3 Foresight Reference 199
15.6 EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS 199
15.6.1 Equipment List 199

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Table of Contents Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Page 8 of 447

15.6.2 Equipment Availability 199

15.6.3 Equipment Checks 199
15.7 NPL SPECIFIC SURVEY DEFINITIONS 200
15.7.1 Declination and Grid Convergence Definition 200
15.7.2 Well Co-ordinates and Topographical Definition 200
15.7.3 Depth Reference 201
15.7.4 North Reference 201
15.7.5 Anti-Collision Preferences 201
15.7.6 Separation Factor Ratio 201
15.7.7 Geomagnetic Model 202
15.7.8 Minimum Curvature Calculations 202
15.8 GENERAL DRILLING PROGRAMME REQUIREMENTS 202
15.8.1 Introduction 202
15.8.2 Relief Well Drilling 202
15.8.3 Target Tolerances 202
15.8.4 Additional Considerations 202
15.8.5 Electronic Magnetic Multi Shot ( EMMS) Surveys 202
15.8.6 Totco Surveys 203
15.8.7 Gyro Surveys and Magnetic Interference 203
15.8.8 Survey QC and Reporting 203
15.8.9 Availability of Well Plots 203
15.9 BOREHOLE SURVEYING PROGRAMME REQUIREMENTS 203
15.9.1 Survey Frequency 203
NOTES: 205
15.9.2 Verification of EMMS, MWD and GMS Data 205
15.10 POSITIONAL UNCERTAINTY IN BOREHOLE SURVEYING 205
15.10.1 Introduction 205
15.10.2 Reference 205
15.11 SURVEYING TECHNIQUES QA/QC - WELL SITE QUALITY CONTROL 205
15.11.1 Survey Data and Reported Values 205
15.11.2 Repeat Surveys 206
15.11.3 Survey Misruns 206
15.12 SURVEYING TECHNIQUES QA/QC - ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA 206
15.12.1 Introduction 206
15.12.2 Survey Acceptance Criteria & Values 206
15.13 SURVEYING TECHNIQUES QA/QC - DEVIATION SURVEY QUALITY CONTROL 207
15.13.1 Introduction 207
15.13.2 General Quality Control Process 207
15.13.3 Quality Control Guidelines 208
15.13.4 Deviations Survey Database 208
15.14 SURVEYING TECHNIQUES QA/QC - SURVEY TOOLS 208
15.15 MAGNETIC SURVEYS - NON-MAGNETIC DRILL COLLARS 209
15.15.1 Introduction 209
15.15.2 NMDC Length 209
15.15.3 Compass Spacing209
15.15.4 Note: The compass should not be placed within 3 ft of a connection. If tandem instruments are run, the bottom
compass should be spaced according to the requirements detailed above. 209
15.15.5 Magnetic Interference 209
15.15.6 Typical Configurations 210
15.15.7 Magnetic Hotspots 210
15.16 MAGNETIC SURVEYS - CORRECTION OF MAGNETIC AZIMUTHS 210
15.16.1 Magnetic North Vs Grid North 210
15.17 MAGNETIC SURVEYS - MAGNETIC SINGLE SHOTS (MSS) 211
15.17.1 Recording and Maintaining Accurate MSS Results 211
15.18 MAGNETIC SURVEYS - ELECTRONIC MAGNETIC MULTI-SHOTS (EMMS) 211
15.18.1 Applications 211
15.18.2 Running Guidelines 211
15.19 STEERING TOOLS 212
15.19.1 Introduction 212
15.19.2 Accuracy and Application 212

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Table of Contents Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Page 9 of 447

15.20 MEASUREMENT WHILE DRILLING (MWD)212

15.20.1 Introduction 212
15.21 RUNNING GUIDELINES 213
15.21.1 Surveys 213
15.21.2 Steering with MWD 213
15.21.3 MWD Accuracy 214
15.21.4 Tool Failures 214
15.21.5 Well Deepening 214
15.22 GYRO SURVEYS - INTRODUCTION 214
15.22.1 Application 214
15.22.2 Depth Reference 214
15.23 GYRO SURVEYS - GYRO SINGLE SHOT SURVEYS 214
15.23.1 Application 214
15.24 GYRO SURVEYS - GYRO MULTI-SHOT SURVEYS 214
15.24.1 Application 214
15.24.2 Frequency 214
15.25 GYRO SURVEYS - GYRO INSTRUMENTS 215
15.25.1 Introduction 215
15.25.2 Surface Referenced Gyros 215
15.25.3 North Seeking Gyros 215
APPENDICES 216

APPENDIX A - BOTTOM HOLE ASSEMBLIES 217

APPENDIX B – TYPICAL SPACING FOR MAGNETIC SURVEY INSTRUMENTS 218

APPENDIX C - DEVIATION SURVEY QUALITY CONTROL SHEET (GMS) 219

APPENDIX D -DEVIATION SURVEY QUALITY CONTROL SHEET (MWD AND EMT) 221

16 SPECIAL OPERATIONS 223

16.1 MILLING - GENERAL GUIDELINES 223
16.1.1 Guidelines During Milling 223
16.1.2 Reading Cuttings 224
16.1.3 Recording 224
16.1.4 Stabilisers 224
16.1.5 String Casing Protectors 224
16.1.6 General Operating Recommendations 225
16.1.7 Expected Milling Rates 225
16.1.8 Factors Affecting Milling Rates 226
16.1.9 Rubber 226
16.1.10 Rough Operation 226
16.1.11 Centralisers and Scratchers 226
16.2 MILLING - JUNK MILL 227
16.2.1 Junk Mill 227
16.2.2 Junk in Open Hole 227
16.2.3 Junk Inside Casing 228
16.3 MILLING - PILOT MILL 228
16.3.1 Uses of Pilot Mills 228
16.3.2 Procedure 228
16.3.3 General Guidelines 229
16.3.4 Considerations When Milling Liner, Hangers and Adapters 229
16.3.5 Pilot Mill Ideal for Wash Pipe 229
16.3.6 Drillpipe and Drill Collars 229
16.3.7 Casing 229
16.4 MILLING - TAPER MILLS 230
16.4.1 Uses of Taper Mills 230
16.4.2 Procedures 230
16.4.3 Optimising Taper Mills 230
 Allomax Ltd 2000
 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Table of Contents Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Page 10 of 447

16.4.4 Whipstock Windows 230

16.4.5 Reaming Out Collapse Casing 231
16.4.6 Enlarging Restrictions Through Retainers and Adapters 231
16.5 FISHING - PLANNING AND PREPARATION 232
16.5.1 Considerations Prior to Fishing 232
16.6 FISHING ECONOMICS 233
16.6.1 Alternative Method 233
16.6.2 Example : Land rig scenario 233
16.6.3 When the Fish is Located Between Communicating Reservoirs 234
16.6.4 Considerations When the Fish is Abandoned 234
16.6.5 Tool Selection 235
16.6.6 Equipment Availability 236
16.6.7 Requirements 236
16.6.8 Certification 237
16.6.9 Recommendations 237
16.7 FISHING – GENERAL PRACTICES 237
16.7.1 Guidelines 237
16.7.2 Recommended Fishing Assembly 238
16.8 FISHING - FORCE MULTIPLYING TOOLS 238
16.8.1 Purpose 238
16.8.2 Operation 238
16.8.3 Types of Force Multiplying Fishing Tools 238
16.8.4 Drilling/Fishing Jars 238
16.8.5 Accelerators (Jar Intensifiers) 238
16.8.6 Bumper Subs 239
16.8.7 Bump Down in the Hole 239
16.8.8 Releasing Fish by Applying Torque 239
16.9 FISHING - OVERSHOTS 240
16.9.1 General Considerations 240
16.9.2 Generic Procedure 241
16.9.3 Overshot with Spiral Grapple241
16.9.4 Overshot with Basket Grapple and Grapple Control Packer 241
16.9.5 Fishing Procedure with Overshot 241
16.9.6 Fish Release 242
16.10 FISHING - SPEARS 243
16.10.1 General Considerations 243
16.10.2 Generic Procedures 243
16.10.3 Release from the Fish 244
16.10.4 Fishing - Washover Strings 244
16.10.5 Purpose 244
16.10.6 Feasibility 244
16.10.7 Shoe Selection 244
16.10.8 General Guidelines 245
16.10.9 Procedure 245
16.11 FISHING - JUNK RETRIEVERS 246
16.11.1 Types of Junk Retrievers 246
16.11.2 Coring Type Basket 246
16.11.3 Reverse Circulation Junk Basket or Jet Retriever 246
16.12 FISHING – JUNK SUBS 247
16.12.1 Structure 247
16.12.2 Guidelines 247
16.13 FISHING - MISCELLANEOUS FISHING TOOLS 247
16.13.1 Magnets 247
16.13.2 Lead Impression Blocks 248
16.13.3 Rope Spears 248
16.13.4 Taper Taps and Die Collar 248
16.14 UNDERREAMING 249
16.14.1 Considerations 249
16.15 SIDETRACKING - GENERAL GUIDELINES 249
16.15.1 Introduction 249

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Table of Contents Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Page 11 of 447

16.15.2 Requirements 249

16.15.3 BHA Geometry 249
16.15.4 Guidelines for Successful Kick-off 249
16.15.5 Kick-off Point Selection 249
16.15.6 Kick-off Plugs 249
16.15.7 Casing Windows 250
16.15.8 BHA Composition 250
16.15.9 Side-tracking on the Low Side of the Hole 250
16.15.10 Maximising Kick-off Success 251
16.16 SIDETRACKING - SIDETRACKING OUT OF CASING 251
16.16.1 ‘Window Master’ Whipstock 251
16.16.2 Introduction 251
16.16.3 Dogleg Severity 251
16.16.4 Torque and Directional Control 251
16.16.5 Pre-Job Planning251
16.16.6 Introduction 251
16.16.7 Gyro’s 251
16.16.8 Sidetracking 251
16.16.9 Whipstock and Milling Assembly 252
16.17 RUNNING AND ORIENTATING WHIPSTOCK 253
16.17.1 Setting Whipstock253
16.17.2 Milling Window 254
16.18 CHEMICAL CUTTERS 255
16.18.1 Chemical Cutters for Stuck Tubing or Drillpipe 255
16.18.2 Safety Precautions 255
17 ABANDONMENT AND SUSPENSION 256
17.1 INTRODUCTION 256
17.2 ABANDONMENT 256
17.2.1 Background 256
17.2.2 General requirements 256
17.3 ONSHORE ABANDONMENT 257
17.3.1 Surface Cement Plug and Wellhead 257
17.3.2 Location Abandonment 257
17.4 OFFSHORE ABANDONMENT 258
17.4.1 Wellhead Severance for Semi-Submersibles 258
17.5 SUSPENSION 262
17.5.1 General Requirements 262
17.6 LONG TERM SUSPENSION 263
17.6.1 Normal Circumstances 263
17.6.2 Emergency Suspension 264
18 COMPLETIONS AND WORKOVERS 267
18.1 INTRODUCTION 267
18.2 BACKGROUND 267
18.2.1 Hazardous Operations 267
18.3 WELL CONTROL REQUIREMENTS 267
18.3.1 Packer Fluid Gradients 267
18.3.2 Downhole Safety Valves 267
18.4 OPERATING REQUIREMENTS 268
18.4.1 General 268
18.4.2 Casing Cementation 268
18.4.3 Hazard Analysis 268
18.4.4 NORM (LSA) - Normally Occurring Radioactive Material 268
18.4.5 First Hydrocarbons to Surface 268
18.4.6 Radioactive Sources 268
18.4.7 Explosives Handling268
18.4.8 Clean Out Trips 268
18.4.9 Tubing Make Up 268
18.4.10 Brine Filtration 268

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Table of Contents Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Page 12 of 447

18.5 RE-ENTRY - PREPARATION 269

18.5.1 Short Term Suspension 269
18.5.2 Well Kill Requirements 269
18.5.3 Xmas Tree Removal 270
18.6 RE-ENTRY PROCEDURES - PULLING THE COMPLETION 270
18.6.1 Introduction 270
18.6.2 Guidelines 270
18.7 RE-ENTRY PROCEDURES - MILLING PACKERS 271
18.7.1 Milling Permanent Packers (see DOM 16 – Special Operations) 271
18.7.2 Guidelines when Running in Hole 271
18.7.3 After Milling 272
18.7.4 Well Clean Up 272
18.8 RE-ENTRY PROCEDURES - TESTING CASING 273
18.8.1 Calculate Casing Burst 273
18.8.2 Pressure Test Casing 273
18.9 RE-ENTRY PROCEDURES - NON-ROUTINE PROCEDURES 274
18.9.1 Cut and Pull Casing 274
18.9.2 Installing a Casing Patch 275
18.9.3 Milling on Junk 276
18.9.4 Wash over Operations 276
18.9.5 Cutting Pipe 277
18.9.6 Remedial Cement Squeeze (see DOM 9.21 Remedial Cementation) 277
18.9.7 Remedial Cement Squeeze 278
18.10 COMPLETION PROCEDURES - EQUIPMENT PREPARATION 279
18.10.1 Introduction 279
18.10.2 Manufacturing Standards and QC 279
18.10.3 Handling in the Yard 279
18.10.4 Sub Assemblies 279
18.10.5 Installation 280
18.11 COMPLETION PROCEDURE - TCP OPERATIONS 280
18.11.1 Preparation Procedures 280
18.11.2 Radioactive Markers 280
18.11.3 Depth Correlation 281
18.12 COMPLETION FLUIDS 281
18.12.1 Use of Completion Fluids 281
18.12.2 Use of Water 281
18.12.3 Inhibition 281
18.12.4 Responsibilities 281
18.12.5 Gradient 282
18.12.6 Filtration 282
18.12.7 Definitions 282
18.12.8 Disposal282
18.12.9 Health, Safety and Environment considerations 282
18.12.10 Programme requirements 282
18.12.11 Responsibilities 282
18.13 COMPLETION FLUIDS - MUD DISPLACEMENT 283
18.13.1 Objective 283
18.13.2 General 283
18.14 NTU TESTS 283
18.15 ELECTRIC LINE OPERATIONS - RIG UP 284
18.15.1 General Guidelines 284
18.15.2 Types of Wireline Perforating Operations 284
18.15.3 Rig Up for Pressure 284
18.15.4 Rig Up with No Pressure 288
18.16 OPERATIONS REQUIRING PRESSURE CONTROL EQUIPMENT 290
18.16.1 Use of Wireline BOP’s 290
18.16.2 Open Hole Logging Operations 290
18.16.3 Cement Bond Logging with Pressure Applied to Casing 290
18.16.4 Perforating overbalanced 290
18.16.5 Perforating Underbalanced 290

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Table of Contents Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Page 13 of 447

18.16.6 Running Packers, Bridge Plugs in Perforated Wells 290

18.16.7 BOP Rig UP 290
18.16.8 Shooting Nipple Rig Up 290
18.16.9 Installation and Testing of Shooting Nipple 291
18.17 ELECTRIC LINE OPERATIONS - HANDLING OF EXPLOSIVES 292
18.17.1 General 292
18.17.2 Types of Explosives 292
18.17.3 Storage 292
18.17.4 Radio Silence 292
18.18 ELECTRIC LINE OPERATIONS – PERFORATING 293
18.18.1 Responsibilities 293
18.18.2 Operating Procedures 294
18.19 ELECTRIC LINE OPERATIONS - WIRELINE SET PACKERS 296
18.19.1 Gauge Ring and Junk Basket Run 296
18.20 SLICK LINE PROCEDURES - RIG UP 296
18.20.1 General 296
18.20.2 Equipment 297
18.20.3 Rigging Up and Down 297
18.20.4 Circulating Heads 297
18.20.5 Testing Wireline Lubricators 297
18.21 SLICK LINE PROCEDURES - SAFETY 298
18.21.1 Responsibilities 298
18.21.2 General Precautions 298
18.21.3 Personnel Precautions 299
18.21.4 Quick Lock Connections 299
18.22 SLICK LINE PROCEDURES - OPERATING CONSIDERATIONS 299
18.22.1 Rig Up Variations 299
18.22.2 Plugs for Well Suspensions 299
18.22.3 Drift Runs 300
18.23 TUBING RUNNING AND HANDLING - SUB ASSEMBLIES 301
18.23.1 Introduction 301
18.23.2 Yard Testing 301
18.23.3 Rig Checks 301
18.23.4 Rig Pressure Testing 301
18.24 TUBING RUNNING AND HANDLING - RUNNING EQUIPMENT PREPARATION 302
18.24.1 Power Tongs 302
18.24.2 Torque Gauges 302
18.24.3 Torque Gauge Calibration303
18.24.4 Elevators 303
18.24.5 Stabbing Guides 304
18.24.6 Tubing Drifts 304
18.24.7 Pipe Clamps 304
18.24.8 Pipe Wipers 304
18.25 TUBING RUNNING AND HANDLING - CARBON STEEL TUBING304
18.25.1 General Handling 304
18.25.2 Preparation 305
18.25.3 Running Carbon Tubing 307
18.25.4 Doping Procedures for Premium Threads 308
18.25.5 Make Up 308
18.25.6 Acceptance of Make Up 309
18.25.7 Pulling Carbon Steel Tubulars 312
18.26 TUBING RUNNING AND HANDLING - CHROME TUBING 314
18.26.1 Chrome Tubulars 314
18.26.2 General Handling 314
18.26.3 Preparation 315
18.26.4 Running Chrome Tubing 317
18.26.5 Make Up 317
18.26.6 Acceptance of Make Up 317
18.26.7 Pulling Chrome Tubulars 319

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Table of Contents Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Page 14 of 447

19 SEMI-SUBMERSIBLE DRILLING OPERATIONS 321

19.1 WELL ESTABLISHMENT 321
19.1.1 Drilling 12¼" Pilot Hole (Shallow Gas Procedure) 321
19.1.2 Running Temporary Guide Base (TGB) 323
19.1.3 Equipment Check List 325
19.2 36” HOLE / 30" CONDUCTOR 327
19.2.1 Drilling 36" Hole With TGB Established 327
19.2.2 Drilling 36" Hole Without TGB Established 329
19.2.3 30” Conductor: Running and Cementing with TGB Established 329
19.2.4 30” Conductor: Running and Cementing without TGB Established 333
19.2.5 Equipment Check List 333
19.3 26” HOLE / 20" SURFACE CASING 337
19.3.1 Drilling 26" Hole With Marine Riser 337
19.3.2 Drilling 26" Hole without Marine Riser 342
19.3.3 20” Surface Casing: Running and Cementing 344
19.3.4 Equipment Check List 349
19.4 17½" HOLE/13 3/8" INTERMEDIATE CASING 354
19.4.1 Drilling 17½" Hole 354
19.4.2 13 3/8” Intermediate Casing: Running and Cementing. 359
19.4.3 Equipment Check List 364
19.5 12 ¼"HOLE / 9 5/8" PRODUCTION CASING 370
19.5.1 Drilling 12¼" Hole 370
19.5.2 9 5/8” Production Casing: Running and Cementing. 375
19.5.3 Equipment Check List 379
19.6 8 ½" HOLE / 7" PRODUCTION/DRILLING LINER 385
19.6.1 Drilling 8½" Hole 385
19.6.2 7” Liner: Running and Cementing 389
19.6.3 7” Liner Clean Out 394
19.6.4 Equipment Check List 397
19.6.5 7” Liner: Running and Cementing 400
19.6.6 7” Liner Clean Out 401
19.7 6” HOLE / 5" PRODUCTION LINER 404
19.7.1 Drilling 6" Hole 404
19.7.2 5” Liner: Running and Cementing 412
19.7.3 5” Liner Clean Out 418
19.7.4 Equipment Check List 422
19.8 TIE-BACK PACKER 428
19.8.1 Tie-Back Packer: Running and Setting Procedures 428
19.8.2 Equipment Check List 430
20 JACK-UP RIG OPERATIONS 433
20.1 PRE OPERATIONAL ACTIVITIES: JACK-UP 433
20.2 SURVEYING AND MARKING THE LOCATION 433
20.2.1 Mobilizing and Jacking Up 433
20.3 PRIMARY DATA FROM THE SITE SURVEY. 433
20.3.1 Surveying Quality Checklist 433
20.3.2 Heading Selection Checklist 434
20.3.3 Mobilizing and Jacking Operations Checklist 434
20.4 PRE SPUD OPERATIONS 434
20.5 DRILLING OPERATIONS 434
20.5.1 Drilling 36” hole 434
20.5.2 36” Hole Equipment Llist 435
20.5.3 Preparation and Running 30” Conductor and Stab-In Cement Stinger Assembly 436
20.5.4 30” Cementation using Stab-In Technique 438
20.5.5 Drilling 26” hole 440
20.5.6 Drilling 17 ½” hole and subsequent sections 442
21 LAND OPERATIONS 443
21.1 PRE-OPERATIONAL ACTIVITIES 443

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Table of Contents Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Page 15 of 447

21.2 MOBILIZING AND RIGGING UP 443

21.3 RIG PREPARATION 444
21.4 SETTING CONDUCTOR 444
21.5 SURFACE CASING 445
21.5.1 Drilling Out of Conductor pipe 445
21.5.2 Drilling 445
21.5.3 Running Casing 446
21.5.4 Cementing 446
21.5.5 Post Cementing 446
21.5.6 Material and Service Requirements 446
21.6 INTERMEDIATE/PRODUCTION CASING 447

Index of Manuals

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Purpose and Responsibilities Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 1 Page 16 of 447

1 PURPOSE AND RESPONSIBILITIES

1.1 PURPOSE OF DRILLING OPERATIONS MANUAL
The Drilling Operations Manual (DOM) has been prepared for the use of personnel engaged in drilling
operations.

The Manual is essentially directed at Exploration and Appraisal well activities and its objective is to
provide information and guidance to drilling personnel on how the Company wishes to carry out its
drilling operations and on the Company's policies where appropriate.

The Drilling Operations Manual has been prepared to meet the objectives of the Drilling Programme
in a safe and cost effective manner.

In this Manual the term "Company" means OPERATOR, its client or affiliates which may be involved
in drilling operations.

The Drilling Operations Manual is one element of a suite of manuals and the contents should be used
in conjunction with all other documents during all phases of well planning and execution.

All personnel involved in the company's drilling operations will be required to adhere to legislation
applicable to the operation. Where rules and regulations issued by any governing body are less
stringent than the Company's own policies and procedures, the Company's will be applied.

Legislation is defined as all applicable statutes and regulations of any local, national or other
governing body or public authority which has any form of authority over the licence area.

Because of the diversity of design and operation of the many items of equipment used in drilling
operations, reference is not made to the use or operation of any specific items.

1.2 RESPONSIBILITIES
The levels of responsibility will be as follows:

1.2.1 Drilling Manager

Is ultimately responsible for the direction planning and implementation of all drilling operations
undertaken by the Company.
1.2.2 Drilling Superintendent
Is responsible for the safe, efficient and environmentally sensitive implementation of drilling planning
and operations. He reports to the Drilling Manager.
1.2.3 Offshore Installation Manager
Is the person appointed by the installation owner who is legally responsible for the
management of an offshore installation. The OIM may be the Senior / Day Toolpusher or Rig
Superintendent.
1.2.4 Company Drilling Supervisor
Is the Company representative at the drilling location and is responsible for ensuring the
drilling operation is carried out safely and in accordance with Company requirements. He is
also responsible for the operational control of all Company and third party personnel onboard
the drilling unit. He reports to the Drilling Superintendent.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Purpose and Responsibilities Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 1 Page 17 of 447

1.2.5 Offshore Drilling Engineer / Night Drilling Supervisor

If applicable, acts as Night Supervisor and assistant to the Drilling Supervisor. His
responsibilities are similar to the Drilling Supervisor. He reports to the Drilling Supervisor and
carries out his instructions.
1.2.6 Senior / Day Toolpusher
Is responsible for supervising the drilling crew to meet the objectives of the Drilling Programme
in a safe and cost effective manner. He will liaise with the Drilling Supervisor and consult with
the OIM, where applicable.
1.2.7 Night Toolpusher
Is responsible for supervising the drilling operations during the night in conjunction with the
Company Night Supervisor, and reports to the Senior / Day Toolpusher and / or OIM on any
problems that occur whilst he is on duty.
1.2.8 Drillers
Are responsible for the control of actual drilling activities. They report to the Senior / Day and
Night Toolpushers. It is the Driller's responsibility while on tour to ensure that the Company
well programme is carried out in the safest manner and according to instructions. The Driller's
primary responsibility in a well control situation is to secure the well as per the prescribed
procedure and notify the Toolpusher and Company Drilling Supervisor of the situation.
1.2.9 Wellsite Geologist
Is responsible for supervising the Mud Logging Contractor and provide the Company Drilling
Supervisor with information relating to formations, pore pressures and gas shows. The
Wellsite Geologist will supervise the electrical logging operations if no Reservoir Engineer is
on site.
The Wellsite Geologist can request conventional or side-wall coring if well conditions permit
cessation in drilling and circulation of bottoms up for formation evaluation when a drilling break
occurs or when penetrating a transition zone or reservoir.

1.2.10 Log Analyst

Is responsible for safe and efficient operations for all reservoir wireline logging. He will report
to the Drilling Supervisor on the progress of the logging and to the Wellsite Geologist on
quality issues pertaining to data acquisition..
1.2.11 Well Test Engineer
Is responsible for supervising production testing, the recording of the test data, collection of
reservoir samples and wireline production logging. He will report to the Drilling Supervisor on
the progress of the test.
1.2.12 Onshore Drilling Engineer
Is responsible for well design, planning, cost monitoring, AFE generation, performance
optimisation and operational support. He reports to the Drilling Superintendent.
1.2.13 Logistics Co-ordinator
Is responsible for logistics co-ordination, import/export affairs, maintenance of inventory lists,
contract documentation control and logistics cost control. He reports to the Onshore Drilling
Engineer.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Purpose and Responsibilities Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 1 Page 18 of 447

1.3 TUBING NOMENCLATURE

The tubing nomenclature referred to in this Manual will be:
Conductor: Used to cover unconsolidated surface formation, support subsequent strings and the
BOP stack.

Surface Casing: Used to provide blowout protection sealing off shallow gas and weak formations.

Intermediate Casing: Used to permit deeper drilling operations.

Production Casing: The final casing string that is used to test and produce through.

Drilling Liner: Used to permit deeper drilling operations.

Production Liner: The liner which is set through the production zone.

1.3.1 Hole and Tubular Sizes

The hole and tubular sizes referred to in this Manual are those which are most common and
normally used in the Company's drilling operations, i.e;
36" hole/30" conductor

26" hole/20" casing (23" hole/18 5/8" casing)

17½" hole/13 3/8" casing (16" hole/13 3/8" casing)

12¼" hole/9 5/8" casing

8½" hole/7" casing

6" hole/5" casing (5 5/8" hole / 4" casing)

or any other combination which may be deemed appropriate at the time.

1.3.2 Economic Alternatives

It should be recognised that alternatives may be encountered in certain areas and might be
more economic to use, e.g.

36" hole/26" conductor

20" hole/16" casing

14¾" hole/10¾" casing

9 5/8" hole/7 5/8" casing

6¾" hole/5½" casing

6" hole/4½" casing

One string of casing might be omitted when anticipated pressure from offset wells and casing design
confirm it is safe to do so. It will normally be the surface casing string.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Purpose and Responsibilities Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 1 Page 19 of 447

If an alternative casing programme is used, the rig must be equipped with the appropriately sized
drill pipe, drill collars and pipe handling equipment.
The size of conductor for onshore wells will depend on the total depth of the well. It is normally 20"
or 13 3/8" OD.

1.4 UNITS
The following units are used for drilling operations. In some instances, it is commonplace to use
metric units of measurement, eg. in bulk materials (cement, barytes, diesel etc.) but in other respects
Nimir Petroleum Limited uses the units which are historically the most commonly used and therefore
will cause the least confusion in an emergency, to those working on the rig.

Dimension Unit
__________________________________________________________________________

Length / Depth Feet (ft)

Diameter Inches (ins)
Weight Pound (lb) or metric tonne (MT)
Pressure Pounds per square inch (psi)
Volume Cubic Feet (ft³)
Barrels (bbls)
US Gallon (US galls)
Mud density Pounds per US Gallon (ppg)
Torque Foot - pounds (ft-lbs)

To assist with conversion of units where necessary the following factors must be used:

Length

feet = metres x 3.281

centimetres
inches
2.54

kilometres
miles
1.61

kilometres
nautical miles =
1.853

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Purpose and Responsibilities Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 1 Page 20 of 447

Weight

pound = kilogram x 2.205

short ton = tonne x 1.102
long ton = tonne x 0.984
Pressure

psi = kilogram x 14.505

psi = bars x 14.505
psi = kg x 14.223
m2

psi = kilopascal x 0.145

Volume

US gallon = litres x 0.2642

barrels = litres x 0.00629
ft³ = cm³ x 35.314

Density

Pounds per US gallon (ppg) = Specific Gravity x 8.33

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Purpose and Responsibilities Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 1 Page 21 of 447

1.5 ABBREVIATIONS
The following abbreviated forms of units will be found in this manual and should be used in
preparation of programmes, reports, etc.

Abbreviation Full Form

__________________________________________________________________________

ABS American Bureau of Shipping

bbls Barrels
BHA Bottom Hole Assembly
BOP Blowout Preventer
bpm Barrels Per Minute
conns Connections
DC Drill Collar
ECD Equivalent Circulating Density
fig Figure
ft Feet
gpm Gallons (US) Per Minute
H2S Hydrogen Sulphide
HCR High Close Ratio
hr Hour
HPHT High Pressure, High Temperature
HUD Hold Up Depth
HWDP Hevi-weight Drill Pipe
IADC International Association of Drilling Contractors
ID Internal Diameter
IF Internal Flush
lbs Pounds
LCM Lost Circulation Material
LWD Logging While Drilling
MSL Mean Sea Level
MWD Measurement While Drilling
NPL Nimir Petroleum Limited
NRV Non Return Valve
OIM Offshore Installation Manager
OD Outside Diameter
PBR Polished Bore Receptacle
pcs Pieces
PDC Polycrystalline Diamond Compact
 Allomax Ltd 2000
 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Purpose and Responsibilities Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 1 Page 22 of 447

PGB Permanent Guide Base

POH Pull Out of Hole
ppg Pounds Per Gallon (US)
psi Pound Per Square Inch
Reg Regular
RIH Run in Hole
ROP Rate of Penetration
ROV Remotely Operated Vehicle
rpm Revolutions Per Minute
RT Rotary Table
spm Strokes Per Minute
SSR Sub-Sea Release
TD Total Depth
TGB Temporary Guide Base
TOC Top of Cement
TVD True Vertical Depth
WOB Weight on Bit
WOC Waiting on Cement
X/O Crossover

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Pre-Drilling Programme Data Package (PDDP) Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 2 Page 23 of 447

2 PRE-DRILLING PROGRAMME DATA PACKAGE (PDDP)

Prior to detailed well planning a Pre-Drilling Programme Data Package (PDDP) will be prepared by
Subsurface Personnel for the drilling department. An example of the data provided is shown below.

The PDDP will address the following issues:

A General Data
1. Location/Licence
2. Expected Well Designation:
3. Confidentiality Status
3. Prospect(s):
Name:
Type:
Primary:
Secondary:
5. Project/AFE No.:
6. Well Objectives:
Primary:
Secondary:
7. Partners:
8. Location Data:
Surface - Seismic Line: Shotpoint:
Coordinates: UTM:
Accuracy of Surface Location:
Bottomhole - Target:
Seismic Line: Shotpoint:
Coordinates: UTM
Bottomhole Survey Accuracy:
9. Water Depth:
Site Surveyed Y/N: date:
B Subsurface Data
10. Geological Sequence:
Target(s)/Reservoir Data:
Target -
Depth: Thickness:
Expected Hydrocarbon Type: API; GOR scf/bbl
H2S ppm CO2 %
Lithology:
Reservoir quality:
 Allomax Ltd 2000
 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Pre-Drilling Programme Data Package (PDDP) Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 2 Page 24 of 447

Net/gross:
Expected Pressure: psi Temperature: Depth:
Primary Target Tolerance:
Target Tolerance Constraints:
Hole Angle Constraints:
Environment of Deposition:
12 Total Depth (TVD):
Formation:
Lithology:
Temperature:
TD Criteria:
13. Directional Data:
Dip of Beds:
14. Sampling Requirements:
Cuttings:
Mud:
Geochemical:
15. Coring Requirements:
Core preservation:
Transportation of core:
16. Logging Requirements:
Tophole logging suite:
Reservoir logging suite:
Log Data Transmission:
17. Testing Requirements:
18 Special Engineering Requirements:
19. Special Exploration Requirements:
Pilot Hole:
Velocity Survey Type:
Bit/Drilling Fluid Restrictions:
20. Potential Drilling Hazards:
Problematic Drilling Zones:
Shallow Gas:
Presence of H2S or CO2 Gas:
Abnormal Pressure/Temperature Zones:
Faults Penetrating Wellbore:
Other:

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Pre-Drilling Programme Data Package (PDDP) Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 2 Page 25 of 447

21. Offset Well Data:

C Constraints
22. Licence Constraints/Commitments:
Licence Constraints:
Shipping Clearway:
Licence Commitments:
Other Commitments:
23. Timing constraints:
Anticipated Spud Date:
Critical Timing:
Application/Submission to Local Government Bodies:
24. Drilling Constraints:
25. Other Constraints:

D Miscellaneous
26. Abandonment/Suspension/Completion Procedures:
27. Contingency:
Geological Sidetrack potential:
28. Additional Comments:
29. References:

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Pre-Drilling Programme Data Package (PDDP) Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 2 Page 26 of 447

2.1 DRILLING PROGRAMME

A drilling programme must be prepared for every drilling operation.
The programme will formalise the drilling procedures into a working document to ensure that the Nimir
Petroleum Limited drilling policies and standards are observed and adhered for drilling operations.
The programme will describe in a logical and consistent manner how the proposed wellwork will be
performed to carry out the drilling operations.
It is advisable the Drilling Operations Manual (DOM) be used to form the basis of the Drilling
Programme, with any exceptions to the DOM being noted within the Drilling Programme. This will
avoid repetition or conflict between the two documents. Similarly, it is advisable to incorporate the
PDDP into the Drilling Programme to avoid repetition or conflict.
The drilling programme will address:
• General Management Well Information
General Well Data
Well Information
Drilling Time and Cost Estimates
Rig Positioning and anchoring (if applicable)
• Drilling Hazards and Well Design
Shallow Gas, Site Survey, Overpressures, Lost circulation, H2S etc.
Pore Pressure details/Offset Well data
Casing Design Summary
Overview of Directional plan, Survey Programme and Target details
Well Control Procedures
• Geological and Geophysical data (within the PDDP)
Well objectives, geological synopsis and total depth
Stratigraphic prognosis
Formation evaluation and Well testing
Location map and Geological Cross-sections
• Drilling Procedures
Detailed drilling procedures for each hole section including the following:
Directional Drilling programme
Surveying programme
Bit, hydraulics and BHA programme
Drilling Fluid programme
Casing programme
Cementing programme
Casing, Wellhead and BOP pressure testing pressures to be achieved
Evaluation programme (sampling, coring, logging)

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Pre-Drilling Programme Data Package (PDDP) Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 2 Page 27 of 447

• Appendices
Suspension/Abandonment programme (issued as a separate document)
Well Testing (issued as a separate document)
Well Survey diagram (if necessary)
Directional plans with profiles (if necessary)
Anti-collision schematic and listing (if necessary)
Slot diagram (if necessary)
Wellhead schematic
HSE or local statutory approval
Wellbore stability plots
Contact list with telephone numbers.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Site Survey Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 3 Page 28 of 447

3 SITE SURVEY
3.1.1 Offshore
All offshore locations must be surveyed to investigate the subsurface and seabed conditions
prior to rig placement. The information required will vary from location and with the type of rig
employed.

The Site Survey objectives will be:

• Sealed core sampling for leg penetration estimation (Jackups)

• Detection of shallow gas and geological hazards
• Identification of any pertinent seabed features
• Identification of local bathymetry, tidal data, current data
• Identification of seabed superficial deposits
• General information of local geology
• Magnetometer survey
• Identification of potential hazards (tsuname, ice, and cyclone).

The standard components of an offshore location survey are:

Analogue Survey: a combination of equipment to map the surface and immediate sub-
surface to a depth of 400’-650’ to identify any potential anchoring or spudding problems (i.e.
soft mud, boulders etc) and any irregularities in the seabed representing wrecks or other
hazards to the rig.

Magnetometer Survey: to detect the presence of submarine cables on or just below the
seabed may be required.

Analogue and Magnetometer: grid survey programme centred on the proposed location will
be:

i) For semi-submersibles,

3 x 3 km

ii) For jack-ups,

2 x 2 km

Digital Seismic High Resolution Survey: to obtain a shallow geological prognosis to a depth
of 5000’-7000’ which will assist in determining the presence of shallow gas. The survey must
also record accurate water depths.

The Digital Seismic High Resolution grid survey programme centred on the proposed location
should be:

for semi-submersibles and jack-ups

2 x 2 km

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Site Survey Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 3 Page 29 of 447

The grid survey lines for the Analogue and Digital Seismic High Resolution Surveys should be
specified in the Site Survey Scope of Work.

Seabed Sampling: To check anchor holding ability for semi-submersible or likely leg
penetration of jack-ups.

The sample survey area must be at the discretion of the Company Site Survey
Representative.

A minimum of five cores should be obtained.

Meteorological Survey: to determine weather conditions for the duration of the drilling
operation may be required.

An ROV fitted with scanning sonar will:

• Perform the survey at least 150’ from the proposed wellhead location

• Ensure no debris is in the vicinity of the wellhead and in the case of jack-ups in the
vicinity of the spud cans

• Record the survey and to video tape and make a copy available for the company.

3.1.2 Onshore
Onshore locations must also be surveyed prior to siting the drilling rig. Similar requirements to
offshore are necessary with the exception of the sea water element. (Soil samples may or may
not be required to assess rig penetration or subsidence risk).
The following surveys will be taken:
• Digital Seismic High resolution
• Topographical (latitude, longitude and elevation).
Prior to conducting the site survey the suitability of the location must have been investigated
where the following should be considered:
Environment (rivers, noise, traffic, pollutants)
Camp location (onsite, offsite)
Access roads (length, cost, and type)
Logistics (proximity to rail, air, sea, road links)
Water supply
Waste disposal
Local communities (planning permission, public enquiry, public notices, etc.).
For more details see 3.2.2.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Site Survey Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 3 Page 30 of 447

3.2 LOCATION ACCEPTANCE

3.2.1 Offshore
The Drilling Supervisor must ensure that the analysis and appraisal of the digital seismic data
at the drilling location has not revealed the presence of any anomalous features that could be
associated with the presence of shallow gas deposits. If any anomalous features are present
the surface well location must be moved.

• All relevant offset well data will be referred to

• The site survey report will be passed to the Drilling Contractor
• The Drilling Contractor will pass the site survey report to their warranty surveyors or
underwriters for approval before the location is finalised.
3.2.2 Onshore
The wide variety of climatic and environmental conditions in which an onshore well could be
drilled requires a flexible approach and careful consideration of all the contributing factors
when selecting a location and preparing the rig site.

The drilling operations should have the minimum possible impact upon the environment and
local population.

Location
The location selected by subsurface personnel is often impractical or difficult to
access and a compromise must be reached, either by a different surface and bottom
hole location or a directional well from an accessible surface location to the original
bottom hole location. A directional hole should also be considered in mountainous
country as a means of reducing the height above sea level of the location and hence
the risk of lost circulation with normally weighted drilling fluids.

Environment

Construction work of the rig site, roads etc, must be carried out carefully,
unnecessary damage avoided and reinstatement work conscientiously followed
through. Rig sites should be planned to utilise natural clearings, open spaces,
plateaux etc. In urban areas they must be located where they cause minimum
disruption to the local community, sound proofed and, for safety reasons, down
winds relative to the prevailing wind direction.

Protection of the sub-surface water supply or aquifer may be critical and affect the
location of the rig site.

Where arable farmland is involved it may be better to wait until after harvest time to
start construction of the rig site and access.

Roads

There must be a good access road to the rig site, as many tons of equipment have
to be transported across it during the drilling operation. A short spur off a main
highway may be all that is required but in other places, many kilometres of track
may be involved. In either case the road must be properly constructed at the
beginning of the operation. Poor construction or bad planning will cost money later

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Site Survey Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 3 Page 31 of 447

for expensive repairs to both the road and damaged vehicles and for rig down time
when supplies cannot get through.

The road must take account of the terrain, seasonal weather conditions, vis-flash
floods after heavy rain, storms, sandstorms, snow and ice, landslides or rock-falls,
etc. Bridges and culverts must be properly constructed to support the heaviest
expected loads. Similarly, bridges on public highways must be checked, and
strengthened if necessary.

Water Supply

There must be a good water supply for any land drilling operation. This can be
acquired by a variety of means dependent upon where the rig is located.

• By connection into the main water supply. This will require pre-arrangement
with the water authority to ensure that the rig demands do not jeopardise
supplies to other users. The rig will also have to be located fairly close to a
main pipeline to spur.

• By pumping from a nearby river, lake or canal, through a specially laid

pipeline. The distance from the source to the rig and their relative elevations
will be limiting factors here. Care must also be exercised not to damage or
disrupt the supply of water to farmers or local communities, which rely on the
same source.

• By road tanker from local water plant or by suction from river, lake or canal.
The capacity and reliability of the tankers are important here, as well as the
condition of the access road to the rig site. The size and number of tankers
hired must be compatible with the requirements of the rig and the drilling
programme.

• From water wells drilled from the rig site and producing from the local aquifer
into rig-storage. It is usually advisable to have a minimum of two wells for
security of supply and more if capacity is low. At remote locations there are
usually no restrictions but in developed or urban areas discussion with local
authorities and permits will be necessary.

Other forms of supply are possible i.e. catchment of rain water, in areas where
rainfall is high. However, the demand for water for drilling under normal
circumstances, should be minimised by careful solids control / treatment and
recycling.

Waste Disposal

There must be adequate facilities for the disposal of cuttings and drilling waste,
mud, cement etc. In remote locations disposal may be done at the location by back
filling providing that local statutory regulations are satisfied.

Camp

A feature of land drilling in remote locations is the need to provide a camp for the
accommodation of rig site personnel and visitors. Provision of the camp is normally
the responsibility of the drilling contractor as part of the rig contract. However, the
Company is responsible for seeing that it has sufficient accommodation and facilities
for the number of rig site personnel expected and that it is properly and safely run.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Site Survey Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 3 Page 32 of 447

If several wells are to be drilled within a relatively short distance of each other,
positioning the camp at a central location for the duration should be considered. The
transport requirements of the camp buildings are important as they are easily
damaged if mishandled.

When specifying camp requirements consideration must be given to the cultural,

ethnic and religious backgrounds of those who will be using it.

Logistics

The rig must be supplied with consumables and spares. It will depend on where the
rig is operating, the distance from base and / or sea-port, the quality and extent of
the road system, the types of vehicles available and the climatic and environmental
conditions.

3.3 RIG SELECTION

Prior to the award of a contract a comprehensive Rig Audit by an independent authority must be
conducted to review the rigs capability to operate within its specification. See Policy Statement
Manual.

For land operations, the major technical consideration is projected well depth, although environmental
considerations such as noise limitations or mast height may affect the rig choice.

3.4 RIG ACCEPTANCE

3.4.1 Offshore
The Drilling Supervisor will be present on board the drilling unit before it is taken over
contractually by the Company. On long tows this will be 3 days before arrival at the intended
new location. He will have a confirmed list of materials and equipment the Company has
agreed to accept from the previous operator.

The Company will usually contractually accept the rig when it moves off the previous location
and is under tight tow to the new drilling location, but this may vary between contracts.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Site Survey Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 3 Page 33 of 447

The Drilling Supervisor must ensure the following are in place or checked prior to
commencement of the drilling contract:

The Drilling Contractor is in receipt of or has access to:

• The site survey

• The Company Drilling Programme

• The following documents:

Emergency Response Manual

Drilling Procedures
Drilling Operations Manual
Well Control Manual
Oil Spill Contingency Manual
Incident Reporting Manual.

The Drilling Supervisor will also ensure that:

• The Drilling Contractor has approval from their warranty surveyors for the intended
drilling location

• Alternative temporary locations have been identified and surveyed for contingency
stops (particularly appropriate for long tows involving jack-ups)

• The move procedures, prepared by the Drilling Contractor, have been approved by
the Drilling Superintendent

• A pre-move meeting with all parties is held. The plan and topics discussed will
include:

Towing requirements
Proposed route to the intended drilling location
Rig stability during tow
Contingency planning
Approach and anchoring / jacking procedures
Rig positioning procedure
Rig securing procedure
Emergency procedures
Identification of responsibilities.
• The drilling unit has been secured and prepared for water tight integrity

• Stability calculations provided to verify the drilling unit will have adequate stability
throughout the rig move

• The criteria contained in the Drilling Contractors Operations Manual issued by the
builders and approved by ABS is strictly adhered to
 Allomax Ltd 2000
 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Site Survey Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 3 Page 34 of 447

• Weather forecasts for the duration of the move are supplied at 6 hourly intervals by
two independent companies

• The rig move does not commence with a decaying weather forecast

• The rig move, as applicable, should be completed within the time frame of a weather
forecast period of high confidence

• The drilling unit is down manned to the minimum personnel required

• A full abandon rig drill is held prior to anchor recovery / jacking operations

• Communication and data links are established with the Company's onshore drilling
office

• The on-hire Marine Surveyor, appointed by the Company, checks and records the
quantities of stocks and materials to be taken over by the Company on board the
drilling unit and towing, supply and stand-by vessels.

A full inventory of towing and mooring equipment, out-with the drilling contract specification,
and usage will also be monitored.

The completed on-hire survey document must be signed by the Company Drilling Supervisor,
Drilling Contractor and previous Company Representative. Each will retain a copy of the
signed document.

The Drilling Supervisor must ensure the following are checked or completed as soon after the
Commencement of Contract as possible.

Any discrepancies must be noted in particular any items which may delay the operation.

The Company Drilling Supervisor and Drilling Contractor Toolpusher must sign the
discrepancy list, if appropriate, and each retain a copy of:

• The rig inventory (ensuring it is in accordance with the appropriate schedule of the
contract)

• The independent Rig and Company Medical and Safety Audit Surveys (these should
be conducted prior to contract award having been complied with or satisfactorily in
progress).

All Drilling Contractor tubulars and pipe handling equipment must have been inspected or is
within current certification. The equipment will be inspected by a third party inspection
company. The equipment inspected will be:

Drillpipe (as required by the Company)

Drill collars
Hevi-weight drillpipe
Rotary substitutes
Manual safety and stand-by stab in valves
Handling equipment - bail arms, elevators and tongs
Marine riser - as applicable
 Allomax Ltd 2000
 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Site Survey Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 3 Page 35 of 447

Saver subs.

All third party equipment must be within current certification. Some items of equipment i.e.,
mud and wireline logging units, ROV diving spread and well test equipment, must have a valid
Certificate of Fitness from the drilling units (or relevant supplier’s) Certifying Authority.

The following must have been inspected, (internally in the case of BOP stacks), flushed
through and pressure tested with water to their rated working pressure:

NOTE: All pressure tests will be at 500 psi / 5 minutes and at the rated working
pressure for 10 minutes.

NOTE: The test pressures must be specified in the Drilling Programme.

• BOP stack. The BOP ram and annular rubbers will be renewed or proved to be "as
new". "As new" will mean "seen to be free of damage and hold rated pressure for 10
minutes".

• Standpipe manifold and valves

• Choke manifold and valves

• Kill and choke lines

• Chiksan hoses

• Rotary hose, top drive / Kelly and safety valves

• Mud pump discharge manifolds

• High pressure flexible lines

• Cementing lines (permanent).

The following must be function tested from all operating points to ensure they are in good
working order:

BOP control system (to include an accumulator test)

Diverter control system

Degasser equipment

Mud monitoring and pit level alarm systems

Gas detection and alarm systems.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Site Survey Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 3 Page 36 of 447

The following equipment must be checked as clean and functional:

Mud pumps (dressed with correct liners)

Diverter outboard lines
All mud tanks and ditches
Sand traps
Shale shakers
Desanding, desilting and centrifuge systems trip tank
Bulk and hopper tanks.

Service company equipment must be checked for compliance with the contract and be fully
operational.

This includes:

Mud logging
Electric logging (as appropriate)
ROV or diving and TV systems (offshore only)
Cementing (Chemical data sheets and COSSH Compliance (UK))
Communications
Fluids treatment / solids control (Chemical data sheets and COSSH
compliance (UK)).

3.4.2 Onshore
The Company must contractually accept the rig when it is fully rigged up on location with pre-
spud checks and tests completed and the bit picked up and ready to drill.

The items to be inspected and checked are the same as for offshore units. The only
exceptions will be of those service companies not required on land operations.

In addition the Drilling Supervisor must ensure that:

• The site drainage system functions correctly

• The sludge / waste water disposal contract is in place and working (if applicable)
• Telephones / communications are installed and working
• An adequate water supply is available
• The derrick and location lights are working
• Fire fighting equipment is on site and checked
• Breathing apparatus (if applicable) and first aid equipment are available.

If required the local licensing authority must inspect the location and the rig and give their
permission before the well can be spudded. This must be arranged by the Drilling
Superintendent.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Site Survey Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 3 Page 37 of 447

3.5 RIG MOVE

3.5.1 Offshore
The OIM will be responsible for the safety of the drilling unit and personnel at all times.

The move must be under the control of the Towmaster appointed by the Drilling Contractor. He
will be responsible for ensuring the move is carried out in accordance with the Contractor’s Rig
Move Procedures.

3.5.2 Onshore
Transport of the rig to the location usually involves the heaviest lifts, i.e. drawworks, mud
pumps, engine and generators. If these can be handled successfully, the other components
are not normally a problem in terms of weight. However, substructure and derrick components
and mud tanks can cause problems because of their height / width. In some areas some of the
loads will require a permit to move and possibly a police escort.

A rig move plan will be prepared in collaboration with the Drilling Contractor prior to the rig
move.

Other transport media should also be considered if the availability of trucks is limited or the
road system poor.

3.6 RIG POSITIONING

3.6.1 Offshore
The positioning equipment will be supplied by a Surveying Contractor, appointed by the
Company. The navigation equipment must be capable of providing a constant read out / plot of
the drilling units position for the full duration of the tow.

The equipment supplied will depend on the accuracy required and the area where it will be
used.

The final position must be confirmed by an independent Marine Surveyor, appointed by the
Company.

Once the position is confirmed:

• A jack-up with legs pinned to seabed, will be preloaded to the drilling units variable
load plus a preload ballast. Leg penetration will be observed and recorded
throughout the pre-load operation and subsequent stabilisation period.

This period will depend on seabed soil conditions. When leg stabilisation is
confirmed the preload will be dumped and the hull elevated to the operating air gap.

• A semi-submersible with all anchors laid and at operating draft will "insurance
tension" all anchors. This tension will be maintained for 15 minutes to ensure no
slippage. If slippage occurs, consideration will be given to:

Additional piggy-back anchors

Exchanging anchors for higher holding capacity
Extending anchor chain

When “insurance tension" is accepted the tension will be reduced to working

tension.
 Allomax Ltd 2000
 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Site Survey Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 3 Page 38 of 447

3.6.2 Onshore
Onshore drilling operations take place in every conceivable combination of geographical and
climatic environment. Because of this each operation is unique and must develop its own
programme and procedures.

For onshore operations, the rotary table will be positioned over the centre of the cellar.

The following guidelines will be adopted:

3.6.2.1 Urban Areas

Drilling operations in this situation will be subject to many controls and restrictions
and will be very expensive. Specially adapted, sound proofed equipment will be
required, access to the location will be restricted, non-toxic drilling fluids and
especially safe drilling practices will be mandatory. Drilling in these conditions will
require detailed planning and careful supervision.

3.6.2.2 Rural Areas

Drilling operations in these conditions will be subject to permits and licences and
strict adherence to statutory requirements for rig site construction and restoration,
sound proofing, cuttings and waste disposal, vehicle movements etc. These vary but
any drilling activity must be planned to take them into account. Normally, having
planned the operation correctly and satisfied all the statutory and local requirements,
drilling the well is straight forward. The authorities and individuals which have to be
consulted and from whom permits, agreements or licences have to be obtained
include:

The land owner on whose land the rig site will be located

Any other land owners over whose land the access road passes

The local planning authority for permission to construct the rig site and roads

The local water authority

The local roads authority

The local electricity power company

The local telephone company

The local aviation authority (civil and military)

The local fire, ambulance and emergency services

The local waterways, canal or rivers authority

The local waste disposal service

The local community

The national petroleum licensing authority

The health, safety and employment authority

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Site Survey Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 3 Page 39 of 447

The historical / archaeological groups plus any environmental or rural

preservation pressure groups.

Any wildlife preservation groups or fisheries / rivers groups

Plus any environmental or rural preservation pressure groups.

It is important to carefully research these requirements, as expensive delays can

occur through failure to contact or consult every organisation or individual
concerned.

3.7 SITE RESTORATION

3.7.1 Offshore
After drilling operations have been completed, a seabed survey will be carried out to ensure
that the seabed condition is clear of obstructions and debris prior to the rig leaving location.
The Drilling Supervisor is responsible for ensuring that the seabed survey has been conducted
and a seabed clearance certificate has been issued by the ROV contractor. See Policy
Statement Section 15
3.7.2 Onshore
The Drilling Engineer will have responsibility for developing a site restoration programme.
Pit Closure
Pit closure plans will be the responsibility of the Drilling Engineer. Various factors
must be considered:
• Reserve pit design
• Pit liners
• Containment of controllable wastes:
Oil and grease
Drilling fluids
Sewage and gray water.
• Pre-drilling soil tests
• Closure method
• Post-drill.
When demobilisation is complete, and when pit closure and site restoration measures have
been implemented, the Drilling Supervisor is responsible for issuing a final location report to
the Drilling Superintendent.
The following information will be captured:
• Confirm that the mousehole and rathole were filled in
• Confirm that the cellar has been pumped dry
• Confirm that all trash has been burned or otherwise removed from the site
• Confirm that the reserve pit and all VSP pits have been abandoned as per the drilling
programme. As a minimum, all VSP pits should be pumped dry and back filled.
• Sketch the reserve pit layout:
Show estimated barrels of fluid in each pit
 Allomax Ltd 2000
 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Site Survey Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 3 Page 40 of 447

Measure and report salinity in each pit.

• Confirm that no oil or other hydrocarbons remain in any of the pits.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Pre-Spud Check Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 4 Page 41 of 447

4 PRE-SPUD CHECK
The Drilling Supervisor will check that the rig is ready in all respects to commence the drilling
operation. This will have been accomplished in principle by carrying out the checks described in
Section 3.4.1 & 3.4.2 plus ensuring that:

• All materials, equipment and consumable items required for the conductor and surface casing
operations are off-loaded
• Predetermined quantities of bulk material (barytes, bentonite and cement) are stored in the
bulk tanks
• Spud mud has been prepared and a pit of kill mud is available, as specified in the Drilling
Programme.
When the Drilling Supervisor is satisfied that the rig is fully operational he will advise the Toolpusher
that drilling operations can commence.

He will enter the time in the IADC Daily Drilling Report and sign to this effect.

4.1 PRE-SPUD RIG MEETING

Prior to the commencement of the well, a pre-spud meeting will be held on the rig. The meeting will be
chaired by the Drilling Supervisor. The attendees will be:

• All Company personnel

• Contractor personnel: OIM, Toolpusher, Barge Engineer, Drillers,
Assistant Drillers, Derrickmen, Sub-sea Engineer, Crane Driver and any other Contractor
personnel as required.
• For Onshore drilling operations: Drilling Superintendent, Toolpusher,
Drillers, Assistant Drillers and Derrickmen
• Third Party personnel: All Service Company Drilling supervisors.
The purpose of the pre-spud meeting will be:

• To acquaint all the involved parties with Drilling Programme and the well objectives
• To highlight any areas of concern and critical operations
• To identify and make personnel aware of any HS&E issues to mitigate lost time
• To identify responsibilities and lines of communication
• To discuss any problems foreseen by service companies and their requirements
• Any other matters.
Prior to specific operations e.g. running, casing, cementing, Toolbox Talks will be held on the rig floor
with the rig crew (roughnecks, roustabouts) where key points & safety issues are pointed out and
discussed.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
General Drilling Procedures Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 5 Page 42 of 447

5 GENERAL DRILLING OPERATIONS-PROCEDURES

The Drilling Supervisor will give the Drilling Contractor written instructions prior to each stage of the
drilling operation. Each will sign the instructions and retain a copy. A copy of these instructions will be
given to all relevant third party service personnel.

The instructions will include procedures / details for:

• The forward drilling programme with drilling parameters / depths

• Contingencies for known problems e.g. losses, overpull etc
• Trip out of / in hole procedures
• Tight hole conditions handling
• Casing running / cementing operations
• Well kill drills
• Company well control shut-in method.

The Drilling Supervisor will chair a daily meeting with the OIM, Rig Geologist, Toolpusher and relevant
third party service personnel. The topics discussed will be:

• The forward programme

• Shortfalls, malfunctioning or equipment out of commission that may affect the drilling
operations

• Logistics for equipment and materials.

• Personnel requirements

• Any other matters that may affect the ongoing drilling operation.

The Drilling Supervisor will be on the rig floor at all critical times and at any other times necessary to
ensure the objective of the Drilling Programme is met in a safe and cost effective manner. They will
include, but not be limited to, the following:

• During any well control situation

• During any tight hole situation. He will establish the maximum overpull to be applied. The initial
maximum overpull will be half the buoyant weight of the BHA, over and above normal drag.

The Drilling Contractor will be conversant with the Company's tight hole and stuck pipe procedures.

• For the first 10 stands when pulling out of the hole. He will remain on the rig floor until the hole
fill volume is correct.

The Drilling Supervisor or his assistant will be in attendance whenever a leak-off test or any wellbore
integrity test is made and pressure testing of well control equipment.

The Drilling Contractor will inform the Drilling Supervisor of any deviation from normal routine that
threatens the continuity of the operation.

A trip sheet to monitor tubular displacement will be filled out by the Driller for every trip in and out of
the hole.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
General Drilling Procedures Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 5 Page 43 of 447

Any deviation from expected hole fill-up volumes must be investigated and resolved. The Drilling
Supervisor and Toolpusher will be informed in these circumstances.

The mud logging unit will be manned at all times throughout the drilling, testing, completion and
workover operations.

The mud logger will advise the Drilling Supervisor immediately, but not limited to, the following:

• Pit gains / losses

• Significant gas peaks
• Significant change in 'd' exponent
• Defective gas detection or monitoring equipment

The Mud Logger will annotate chart recorders for times and events at all times.

Adequate stocks of weighting material, mud chemicals and LCM will be available at all times for the
section of hole being drilled.

Slow circulation rates will be taken at least:

• Once per tour

• At bit change
• At any BHA change
• When the mud weight is changed.

A minimum of two pumps will be used whenever possible. Pressures will be recorded using the gauge
to be used in well kill operations, which will be used in calibration.

On floating drilling units, choke line pressure losses will be recorded:

• Prior to drilling out each casing shoe

• With any significant increase in mud weight

Flow checks will be performed:

• Before any pipe is pulled out of the hole

• At the casing shoe
• Prior to pulling the bottom hole assembly
• At any other time as required.

The mud for each section of the hole will be prepared in advance.

The mud condition will always be appropriate to the operation i.e. drilling, tripping, coring, logging,
running casing, cementing and well testing.

All depths from spud to TD will use the MSL (Mean Sea Level) reference with all depths reported from
the rotary table.

At each drilled section TD, the drillstring will be tallied on the trip out of the hole to check drilled depth.
Any major discrepancies will be addressed immediately.
 Allomax Ltd 2000
 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
General Drilling Procedures Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 5 Page 44 of 447

Check trips will be considered at predetermined intervals when drilling below surface casing if hole
conditions dictate.

Time spent with pipe out of the hole will be kept to a minimum. Routine operations and repairs where
possible, will be undertaken in casing before entering open hole.

Tight spots or intervals will be wiped clean immediately at all times, back-reaming as required.

On a trip into the hole, the last stand (top drive or kelly) will be washed to bottom.

Samples of cement, additives and mix water will be returned to the cementing company onshore
office for pilot testing of cement slurries and compatibility of spacers, as close as is practical, to the
proposed cement operation as possible.

The cementing company will be advised of any bottom hole temperatures derived from open hole
logging.

When circulating in open hole, the drillstring will be reciprocated and rotated at all times.

The drillstring will be tripped as soon as an unexplained pressure loss is observed at surface and the
integrity of surface equipment confirmed. A heavy pill will not be pumped and the string pulled wet.

Loads will not be lifted across well test equipment or cable during wireline logging / surveying
operations, by rig cranes or other means.

The hole will be covered at all times when tubulars are not in the rotary except for wireline logging /
surveying operations, which have their own special covers.

On a floating vessel, the draft will be maintained constant. The Drilling Supervisor will be advised of
all changes.

Before starting any operation in open water or running of casing or liners, the weather forecast will be
checked to ensure a period of favourable weather is expected sufficient to complete the operation.

5.1 DRILLING OPERATIONS-EQUIPMENT

The trip tank will be used on all trips in and out of the hole and when out of the hole with the blind /
shear rams open. The trip tank level indicator will be clearly seen form the Drillers position. The level
will be monitored in the mud loggers unit and alarmed.

Wear bushing and bore protectors will be installed in the wellhead during all drilling operations.

The Drilling Supervisor will inspect the wear bushing and bore protector for wear patterns each time it
is retrieved. Any wear will be recorded on the Daily Drilling Report and IADC report.

Prior to drilling with diamond or PDC bits and coreheads, the condition of the previous bit will be
carefully assessed. If required, a trip with a milled tooth bit and junk sub will be made to ensure the
hole is in gauge and no junk remains in the hole.

Bottom hole assemblies will:

• Only contain non-magnetic drill collars where it is predicted or known that the assembly going
in the hole will reach section TD when a magnetic survey will be run.

• Not be strapped or welded

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
General Drilling Procedures Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 5 Page 45 of 447

• Only contain the required components. Long assemblies will be avoided.

The drilling jar used will typically be a double action hydraulic jar. It will normally be run in tension.

It will be:

• Used when drilling below the surface casing

• Replaced after drilling surface and intermediate sections of hole, irrespective of rotating hours

• Run in the hole uncocked and extended

• Replaced after the maximum recommended manufacturers rotating hours.

Jar placement will be verified by the manufacturer's recommendations. There will always be a spare
available on the rig.

When drilling a horizontal well, jars will be placed in the tangent section of the well. A second set may
be run in the horizontal section, if recommended by the directional contractor.

A multi function circulating sub shall be run in the string under the following circumstances whenever:
•
• Tools or restricted flow paths are in the drill string, e.g., MWD, core barrels, downhole motors,
turbines, fishing tools, etc.
• Drilling takes place in areas (hole sizes below 12.1/4in) of expected lost circulation so that
LCM can be pumped without plugging the bit (In this case it is preferred to run large or open
jets, however, if this is not desirable a circulating sub shall be run)
• Spotting cement or barite
• Stripping in the hole when there are restrictions in the pipe.
•
Note: Ensure that ID of the circulating sub does not restrict running wireline tools (FPI).

The dimensions of any components that pass through the rotary table will be recorded.

Fishing equipment will be on the rig to catch all sizes of tools run in the hole. Special attention will be
taken when working inside liners.

The internal diameter of all open bore down-hole equipment will allow free point indicator, back-off
and survey fishing equipment to pass through.

All tubulars will be drifted prior to passing through the rotary table.

The Driller will maintain a record of all tubulars that pass through the rotary table (dimensions,
weights, grades, fishing necks etc.). The record will be checked by the Drilling Supervisor for all
critical space outs. The space out details will be faxed to the Drilling Superintendent, as required.
Separate records will be kept for differing drillpipe grades.

The drilled and reamed connection depths will be written on the geolograph recorder at the time of
connection.

The Drilling Contractor will maintain records of blockline ton miles, drillpipe, drill collar and drilling jar
rotating hours and pump operating hours. He will also maintain records of all scheduled maintenance.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
General Drilling Procedures Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 5 Page 46 of 447

The following equipment will be functional at all times:

• Koomey unit, control panel, BOP’s, chokes, choke and kill manifold

• Mud volume monitoring sensors

• Gas detection sensors and alarms

• Rig floor gauges, recorders and alarms

• Solids control system. Each piece of equipment will be serviced / cleaned when shutdown.

Continuous monitoring and recording of the following will be a minimum requirement for drilling any
well. The parameters will be cross referenced between the mud logging unit and the rig floor for
compatibility.

• Active pit volume

• Mud weight in and out
• Total gas (in percentage) at the shale shaker header box
• H2 S (in ppm) alarm
• Weight on bit
• Hookload
• Rotary torque
• Rotary speed
• Standpipe pressure
• Rate of penetration
• Pump SPM
• Flowline rate.

Under normal drilling operations when the top drive is in use, the drillpipe required to reach next
section TD will be made up and stood back in the derrick before the drilling of any shoetrack. Drillpipe
stands will not be made up during drilling operations.

The Crown-o-Matic or equivalent safety break will be installed on the drawworks and be operational at
all times.

Only drillpipe with flush ground hard banding will be used inside casing.
Only Drill Collars with relief stress grooves shall be used.
Only fit for purpose drill pipe as defined in the latest edition of API RP7G, shall be used with premium
class as a minimum.

Drillpipe and drill collar connections will be broken on a rotational basis on trips out of the hole. Rotary
tongs of a higher rating than normal break-out torque will be available for any tight connections.

Shale shaker screens will be optimised for maximum cuttings removal at all times. Adequate stocks of
spare shale shaker screens will be maintained at all times.

The mud logger will collect, wash and weigh any metal cuttings collected on the ditch magnet. The
magnet will be situated in the shale shaker header box. The Drilling Supervisor will be advised of the

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
General Drilling Procedures Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 5 Page 47 of 447

recovery, if any, each 24 hours, or sooner, if applicable. The recovery will be recorded on the Daily
Drilling Report and IADC report.

All stabilisers in bottom hole assemblies will be of the integral blade type.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Drilling Equipment Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 6 Page 48 of 447

6 WELLHEAD SYSTEMS
Wellheads are supplied by a number of manufacturers. The systems differ in design but not in
principle.

The Company does not state any preference for any particular manufacturer or design. The main
criteria is the pressure rating of the wellhead.

The applicable suppliers service manual will be on the rig.

The pressure rating of the wellhead will be determined by the maximum anticipated surface pressure
that can be expected from the formations drilled. The wellhead pressure rating will be either 10,000 or
15,000 psi for offshore wells, 3,000 or 5,000 psi (under normal circumstances) for onshore wells. In
some onshore locations the wellhead pressure rating will be 10,000 or 15,000 psi. Both offshore and
onshore may have requirement for H2S service .

The sizes referred to are those, which are most common and usually used in the Company's drilling
operations.

If a drilling unit is selected with a dual stack system, wellhead cross-over components will be supplied.

6.1.1 Subsea Wellhead

The standard size of wellhead body used in the Company drilling operations is 18¾" nominal
ID. This size will be applicable to both single and dual BOP stack system.

6.1.1.1 Major Components

The major components of a subsea wellhead are:

• Temporary Guide Base (TGB).

• Permanent Guide Base (PGB).
• 30" Wellhead Housing.
• Wellhead.
• 18¾" x 13 3/8" Casing Hanger and pack-off.
• 18¾" x 9 5/8" Casing Hanger and pack-off.
• Bore protectors for each hole size.
• Running, setting and testing tools.
6.1.1.2 Temporary Guide Base (TGB)
A TGB will not normally be used.

It will only be used an operational area if the area;

• Is in deep water
• Has an excessive seabed slope
• Is subject to adverse weather, current and visibility conditions that would
cause difficulties and / or extensive time loss in stabbing the conductor into the
previously drilled hole.
The site survey will indicate the possible condition and general nature of the seabed.
If the seabed is known to be;

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Drilling Equipment Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 6 Page 49 of 447

• Firm and flat, a standard TGB design will be used.

• Soft or there is previous evidence of washing out under the TGB when
spudding, a skirt and ballast box extensions will be incorporated into the
design of the TGB.

A penetration test will determine the length of skirt thus:

• Make up spud-in assembly and run in strapping pipe

• Stab into seabed with 10,000 lbs. weight with ROV surveillance
• Estimate seabed penetration. Cut TGB skirt to that length.

The TGB will have the following features, as required:

• Four guide wire attachment points on a radius to suit the BOP guide frame
configuration

• Two base plates at 90o for mounting slope indicators

• Base plate for sonar beacon

• Guide funnel for remedial annular cementation

• Pre-drilled holes in four places for the attachment of ballast box extensions

• A J - slot running tool preparation.

6.1.1.3 Permanent Guide Base (PGB)

A PGB will be run on all wells.

The PGB will have the following features, as required:

• A latch mechanism to engage the 30" housing

• Two base plates at 90o for mounting slope indicators

• Base plate for sonar beacon

• Four guide wire attachment points on a radius to suit the BOP guide frame
configuration

• Standard guide posts with post tops to facilitate the reconnection of guidelines
in the event of breakage

• Pad-eyes to aid recovery during abandonment should wellhead / PGB tilt while
cutting casing

• Guide funnels in each corner for remedial annular cementation.

6.1.1.4 Wellhead Housing

A 30" wellhead housing and conductor string will be run on all wells.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Drilling Equipment Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 6 Page 50 of 447

The wellhead housing is run with a cam actuated running tool on drillpipe. The
running tool engages in a profile at the top of the wellhead housing.

The wellhead housing will be supplied with a welded extension. The extension will
be of a heavy wall construction, normally 1½" wall thickness and approximately 30ft
long. Lugs, if required, will be welded to the extension ID to prevent wellhead
rotation during abandonment. The nominal ID will allow all subsequent drillstring
components to pass.

A conductor of standard length will be run directly below the extension to aid load
transfer and allow for any cement shortfalls. The wall thickness will be the same as
the extension.

The length, weight and grade of the conductor, connectors and extension will be
specified in the Drilling Programme.

The wellhead housing will be profiled to accept a hydraulic pin connector. The profile
of the hydraulic connector will be specific to individual manufacturers.

6.1.1.5 Wellhead
An 18¾" wellhead and surface casing string will be run on all wells, whether a dual
or single stack system is used.

The wellhead body will have a rigid lockdown mechanism. This mechanism will
engage in the wellhead housing and transfer operational loads from the wellhead to
the conductor.

The wellhead is run with either a cam actuated or a left hand thread running tool on
drillpipe. The running tool engages in a profile at the top of the wellhead.

The wellhead is supplied with a welded extension. The extension will be of a heavy
wall construction, normally 0.812" wall thickness and approximately 10ft long.
Stabiliser fins, if required, will be welded to the extension for centralisation in the
wellhead housing extension and to prevent rotation during abandonment.

If the surface casing string is to be omitted, the wellhead extension will be profiled to
accept the intermediate casing string. An intermediate casing / conductor centraliser
will be run on the top joint of intermediate casing to provide stability when
mechanically cutting the extension during abandonment. The centraliser will pass
through the wellhead housing.

The length, weight and grade of the surface casing, connectors and extension will
be specified in the Drilling Programme.

6.1.1.6 Casing Hanger

All casing hangers are suspended in the wellhead and are complete with standard
casing extensions. The extensions will be thread locked to the casing hanger.

The casing hanger will be run together with the pack-off when standard and full bore
running tools are used.

6.1.1.7 Pack-Offs (Seal Assemblies)

Pack-offs will always be run to seal the respective hanger and wellhead annulus.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Drilling Equipment Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 6 Page 51 of 447

Pack-offs are recoverable and do not restrict retrieval of the casing hanger system.

Pack-offs will have metal to metal seals on the production casing string (except
emergency seals).

Pack-offs are, preferably, weight set and require straight pull to retrieve.

6.1.2 Jack-Up Wellhead

A Mudline Suspension System (MLS) will be used in Company drilling operations as means of
supporting casing strings just below seabed level.

When a casing hanger is landed at the mudline, surface hangers cannot be precisely spaced
out for surface wellhead installation. Surface wellheads are therefore installed using a slip seal
type hanger or a design which permits predetermined space out between MLS and surface
casing hanger.

Both methods are adopted by the Company

6.1.2.1 Major Components

The major components for a jack-up MLS wellhead system are:

• Mudline (Typical)

30" conductor landing ring (if required)

30" x 20" mudline casing hanger
20" x 13 3/8" mudline casing hanger
13 3/8" x 9 5/8" mudline casing hanger
mudline casing hanger running tool

• Surface (Typical)

30in Conductor

20in casing head

20" x 13 3/8" casing hanger and pack-off
13 3/8" x 9 5/8" casing hanger and pack-off
wearbushing for each hole size
running, setting and testing tools

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Drilling Equipment Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 6 Page 52 of 447

6.1.2.2 Conductor Landing Ring

A 30" conductor landing ring and conductor string will be run when required.

The landing ring is the initial component of some MLS systems. It will be spaced ±
25 ft below the mudline.

The landing ring, if run, will be incorporated in a conductor of standard length. A

Remote Release connection may be incorporated in this joint and will be spaced ± 4
ft above the mudline. Exact space out details will be specified in the Drilling
Programme.

6.1.2.3 Mudline Casing Hanger

All mudline casing hangers are suspended at the mudline and are complete with
standard casing extensions. The extensions will be thread locked to the casing
hanger.

If the surface casing string is to be omitted, the mudline casing hanger extension will
be profiled to accept the intermediate casing string. An intermediate casing /
conductor centraliser will be run on the top joint of intermediate casing to provide
stability when mechanically cutting the extension during abandonment. The
centraliser will pass through the landing ring.

6.1.2.4 Mudline Casing Hanger Running Tool

All mudline casing hanger running tools are complete with:

• Standard casing extensions. The extension will be thread locked to the

running tool.

• Wash-sleeve. The wash-sleeve, when rotated, opens and closes annulus

wash ports. Any cement above the running tool annulus can be circulated
clean.

6.1.2.5 Casing Head and Wellhead Housing

Casing head and wellhead housings are specific to the wellhead system adopted by
the Company. Wellhead details will be specified in the Drilling Programme.

6.1.2.6 Surface Casing Hanger

Surface casing hanger procedures are specific to the wellhead system adopted.

Where appropriate, surface casing hangers are complete with standard casing
extensions. The extensions will be thread locked to the casing hanger.

Alternatively, a slip and seal type hanger will be adopted.

6.1.2.7 Pack-Offs
Pack-off procedures are specific to the wellhead system adopted.

Pack-offs will always be run to seal the respective hanger and wellhead annulus.

Pack-offs are recoverable and do not restrict retrieval of the surface casing and / or
mudline hangers.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Drilling Equipment Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 6 Page 53 of 447

Pack-offs are either with elastomer or metal to metal seals.

Pack-offs are either weight or mechanically set.

Note: Surface Casing Hanger and Pack-off details will be specified in the Drilling
Programme.

6.1.3 Land Rig Wellhead

The size of conductor will depend on the total depth of the well. It can be 30", 20", 16", 13 3/8"
or 9 5/8” OD. The major components of the wellhead will apply to a well which starts with a 20"
nominal conductor.

6.1.3.1 Major Components

The major components of the land rig wellhead are:

Surface (typical) (spool type)

• 20” casing head

• 20" x 13 3/8" casing hanger and pack-off
• 13 3/8" x 9 5/8" casing hanger and pack-off
• wearbushing for each hole size
• running, setting and testing tools

Note: More modern “compact” wellheads are now also available.

6.1.4 Summary
The major components of a land wellhead are in principle the same for a surface jack-up
wellhead system.

6.1.5 Wearbushing And Bore Protectors

Wearbushings and Bore Protectors will always be used during drilling operations to protect the
casing hangers, wellhead bore and riser flex joint, where applicable.

They will be capable of:

• Running, Setting And Testing Tools

• Providing multi-use functions

• Have right hand rotation for release which is preferred to J-slot activated tools.

• Povide a positive method to indicate activation on setting tools.

Full bore casing hanger running tools will be available to maintain flexibility in cementing and
casing design.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Drilling Equipment Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 6 Page 54 of 447

6.1.6 Subsea Surveillance

The Remote Operating Vehicle (ROV) has superseded manual diving as the prime mode of
subsea surveillance for most drilling rig activities.

The ROV unit will be utilised wherever possible.

It will be fit for purpose and be able to:

• Hold station and direction in prevailing currents

• Change connector ring gaskets (semi-submersibles)

• Implement a “hot tap” (semi-submersibles)

• Remove and re-establish guidelines using quick stab connections

• (semi submersibles)

• Take video recordings

• Observe directions with gyro / compass.

6.2 CONDUCTOR, CASING AND LINER CEMENTING EQUIPMENT

The conductor, casing and liner shoetrack components will be prepared onshore prior to shipment to
the rig.

For all situations:

• Top and bottom cement displacement plugs will be used

• Conventional fill up float equipment will only be used

• Stage equipment will not normally be used, unless specifically required.

6.2.1 Conductor
For floating vessels:

• a double valve float shoe will be welded to the pin end of a joint of conductor (Stabin
facilities being optional).

For fixed installations:

• a double valve float shoe with stab-in and latch-in facilities will be welded to the pin
end of a joint of conductor.

6.2.2 Surface Casing

For floating vessels:

• a double valve float shoe will be welded to the pin end of a joint of casing.

For fixed installations:

• a double valve float shoe will be welded to the pin end of joint of casing

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Drilling Equipment Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 6 Page 55 of 447

• for inner string cementation a double valve float shoe with stab-in and latch-in
facilities will be welded to the pin end of a joint of casing.

General:

• A 40 ft minimum shoetrack will be used. The shoetrack will comprise a float shoe joint
- float collar joint - intermediate joint.

• The float shoe and float collar will each be thread locked to the pin end of a joint of
casing.

• The float shoe, float collar and intermediate joint couplings will be removed and
thread locked.

• The make up of all components will be to the manufacturers recommended torque.

• The intermediate joint will be identified as such, with paint, prior to shipment to the
rig.

• The float shoe and float collar and top and bottom cement displacement plugs will be
PDC compatible, as required.

• The float collar and top and bottom displacement plugs will be non rotational.

• The float collar will have stab-in facilities.

6.3 INTERMEDIATE AND PRODUCTION CASING

An 80 ft minimum shoetrack will be used. The shoetrack will comprise a float shoe joint - intermediate
joint - float collar joint.

The float shoe and float collar will each be thread locked to the pin end of a joint of casing.

The float shoe, float collar and intermediate joint casing couplings will be removed and thread locked.

The make up of all components will be to the manufacturers recommended torque.

The intermediate joints will be identified as such, with paint, prior to shipment to the rig.

The float shoe, float collar; Sub Sea Release (SSR) ball, plug and top and bottom cement
displacement plugs will be PDC compatible, as required.

The float collar and top and bottom displacement plugs will be non-rotational.

6.3.1 Drilling Liner

A 120ft minimum shoetrack will be used. The shoetrack will comprise a float shoe joint -
intermediate joint - float collar joint - landing collar joint (casing from then on).

The float shoe, float collar and landing collar will each be thread locked to the pin end of a joint
of casing.

The float shoe, float collar, landing collar and intermediate joint casing coupling will be thread
locked.

The make-up of all components will be to the manufacturers recommended torque.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Drilling Equipment Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 6 Page 56 of 447

The intermediate joints will be identified as such, with paint, prior to shipment to the rig.

The float shoe, float collar, landing collar, liner setting ball, SSR plug and cement displacement
plug(s), will be PDC compatible.

The float shoe will be 'V' type, double valve and side ported.

The landing collar and displacement plug(s) will be non rotational.

6.3.2 Production Liner

A 120ft minimum shoetrack will be used for a 7" production liner. The shoetrack will comprise
a float shoe joint - intermediate joint - float collar joint - landing collar joint - intermediate joint.

A 120ft shoetrack will be used for a 5" production liner. The shoetrack will comprise a float joint
- intermediate joint - float collar joint - intermediate joint - landing collar joint.

The shoetrack length will be increased with intermediate joints between the float and land
collar joints when extra logging / well testing sump is available to ensure a well cemented
shoetrack.

The float shoe, float collar and landing collar will each be thread locked to the pin end of a joint
of casing.

The float shoe, float collar, landing collar and intermediate joint casing coupling will be thread
locked.

The make-up of all components will be to the manufacturers recommended torque.

The intermediate joints will be identified as such, with paint, prior to shipment to the rig.

The float shoe will be 'V' type, double valve and side ported.

The shoetrack components do not need to be PDC compatible and non rotational.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Drilling Fluids and Programmes Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 7 Page 57 of 447

7 DRILLING FLUIDS
The Drilling Fluids Programme is a critical part of the drilling operation. Drilling fluids are designed to
perform a number of functions:
• Removal of cuttings from the wellbore
• Suspend cuttings and weight material when circulation has stopped
• Control subsurface pressures
• Form a protective filter cake
• Cool and lubricate the bit
• Maximise penetration rate
• Minimise drillstring corrosion
• Minimise formation damage.
Many of these factors are taken into consideration, and balanced against direct costs, before the
drilling fluids Programme is selected. The Drilling Engineer is responsible for reviewing the mud
company's proposal and developing the final Programme. It is the responsibility of the mud engineer
to implement this Programme onsite, with the co-operation of the drilling contractor's personnel.
The Drilling Supervisor's responsibilities include the following:
• Ensure Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) are on file at the rig site
• Post a detailed schematic of the mud system in the drilling office
• Review stocks of critical materials daily with the mud engineer
• Ensure all water additions to the drilling fluid system are measured by a meter
• Ensure all losses from the system are monitored and recorded on a daily and cumulative basis
• Ensure that mud weight and viscosity are measured, both in and out, at 15 minute intervals.
On critical HPHT wells ensure this information is announced over a public address system.
• Ensure an appropriate trip margin is maintained while drilling on all wells. (See Well Control
Manual for guidelines pertaining to trip margins).
• Inform the driller as to any changes in the volume of mud or cuttings, mud properties, or other
observations
• Ensure a lost circulation procedure is posted in the doghouse.
The annulus should be filled with water from the trip tank, or other measurable
source.
Unless operating in a known area, the kelly should be raised but stands should not
be pulled without the approval of the Drilling Supervisor.
• Ensure chemicals not specified in the drilling Programme are not on site, or sent to location,
without Drilling Superintendent approval.
• Ensure a procedure for spotting fluids, in the event of differentially stuck pipe, is posted in the
doghouse. The recipe should agree with the materials on location.
• Ensure the mixing hopper is maintained in good operating condition to safeguard full utilisation
of drilling chemicals.
• The Drilling Supervisor should prepare an evaluation on new Mud Engineers and whenever a
change in performance is noted in established personnel.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Drilling Fluids and Programmes Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 7 Page 58 of 447

7.1 SOLIDS CONTROL EQUIPMENT

Drill solids are the most common and costliest contaminant to the mud system. If left unchecked, mud
properties will deteriorate and hole problems will develop. In the absence of effective solids control
equipment, excessive volumes of dilution mud are required leading to unnecessarily high mud costs
and cleanup costs.
The selection of solids control equipment is the Drilling Engineer's responsibility.
The Drilling Supervisor's responsibility is to ensure that the full potential of the equipment is being
realised. Under normal circumstances this is delegated to the Mud Engineer.
Historically, this equipment is not well maintained by the drilling contractor, therefore, special attention
must be devoted to this area to achieve optimum results.
The Mud Engineer will:
• Ensure that manufacturer's technical data for all solids control equipment is available onsite
• Ensure the manifold pressure on hydrocyclone units meets the manufacturer's recommended
minimum requirements
• Size shale shaker screens so mud returns cover about 75% of the screen area
• Take samples of underflows daily. Measure density and flowrates to track the efficiency of the
equipment
• Ensure an adequate inventory of expendables such as cones, fittings, belts, and screens are
available. Also identify any critical spares such as vibrators, feed pump parts, etc. that should
be sourced in the event of failure in a remote site.
• Check the design of the sand trap to ensure that whole mud losses are minimised
• Build a recycling system to wash solids control slides on land wells
• Optimise the centrifuge bowl speed for the job at hand. Use 80-100% of the rated bowl speed
to maximise solids removal from unweighted systems.
7.2 CORROSION CONTROL
Corrosion control is a vital aspect of the drilling fluid system that must be monitored. At best,
excessive corrosion rates reduce the life of the drillstring, and at worst, place the integrity of the entire
drillstring at risk. The direct costs are frequent inspection and replacement, while the indirect costs are
tripping for washouts and twist offs.
The corrosion control Programme is the responsibility of the Drilling Engineer. Implementation is the
responsibility of the Mud Engineer and the Drilling Contractor. The Drilling Supervisor's responsibility
is to ensure the process is being implemented per the Programme.
7.2.1 Corrosion Control Checklist
Corrosion rings will be run in the saver sub and top joint of HWDP, at all times, to monitor
corrosion rates.
The rings will be replaced after 70-150 hours.
Ensure the rings are handled, washed, and prepared per the mud company's
recommendation.
Visually examine the rings for signs of corrosion.
Maintain pH at the upper end of the recommended range.
Instruct crews to shut off hopper when not in use.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Drilling Fluids and Programmes Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 7 Page 59 of 447

Treat excessive gel strengths, which will trap oxygen.

Review contractor's procedure for laying down and storing pipe. Pipe should be rinsed with
fresh water and coated with inhibitor prior to placing in tubs.
A Garret Gas Train, or other detection device, will be supplied by the mud company when acid
gases are suspected.
H2S scavengers will be onsite when drilling in high risk areas except in those areas known not
to have H2S
7.3 SUPERVISION OF THE MUD ENGINEER
The Drilling Supervisor shall be responsible for supervising the daily activities of the Mud Engineer.
The Drilling Supervisor shall ensure that the Mud Engineer:
• Maintains and monitors, and prepares all drilling fluids in accordance with the drilling
Programme and/or as hole conditions dictate
• Prepares the daily mud report to reflect quantities of materials on location and quantities of
materials lost
• Is aware of his duties and responsibilities during a well control situation (See Well Control
manual)
• Maintains cost records of chemicals used on a daily basis
• Attends morning rig meetings and town calls.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Casing and Liner Running Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 8 Page 60 of 447

8 GENERAL CASING RUNNING PROCEDURE

Specific running procedures can be found in DOM Section 19,20 & 21.
Casing will be unloaded with a crane equipped with a spreader bar and slings. Do not use metal
hooks (offshore).
The Drilling Supervisor or his assistant will supervise the measurement of casing, or tubing, and make
a tally sheet.
Wooden beams will be placed between rows of casing.
Clean threads with an evaporating solvent, if available. Otherwise, dry the threads with compressed
air, or manually, to ensure that the dope will form an effective seal in the thread roots.
Drift casing with API drift.
Make a visual thread inspection:
• A third party inspector from the connection manufacturer will be used as directed in the Drilling
Programme
• Minor damage to API threads can be repaired with a file.
If the program calls for making a full body inspection, the casing will be off loaded on sills, inspected
on a separate pipe rack and transferred to the rig racks.
If the casing program stipulates, make provision to insert a short marker joint on production casing.
Prepare the final tally. Renumber the casing and flag all joints which will not be run.
Prior to making the last conditioning trip review the casing job with the toolpusher. Discuss the need
for slipping drilling line, stringing additional lines, levelling the rig, dressing casing tools, or major
maintenance issues that should be conducted before running casing.
Ensure that the elevator bail length will accommodate the plug container.
Inspect casing handling tools:
• Ensure dies are sharp, clean, and of the proper type for the equipment
• Look for worn guides that may damage casing couplings.
On all wells, ensure that a swage from the casing thread to a 2" WECO union with a Lo Torq valve is
onsite.
Hold a meeting with the Toolpusher, casing crew supervisor, cementer, and other key personnel.
Pass out copies of the final tally, review the overall job and assign responsibilities.
Pull wear bushing.
Install casing rams. Install test plug and test casing rams.
Rig up the floor for casing:
• Set a time goal
• Ensure a properly rigged fill-up line is available.
On long casing strings, rig up the heavy spider and elevators at the beginning of the job rather than
switching tools before running into open hole.
The Drilling Supervisor or his assistant will supervise the installation of float equipment and ensure
stop rings and centralisers are properly placed per the well plan.
Run a two joint shoe track, unless otherwise instructed.
Thread lock from the float shoe to the bottom of the float collar, unless otherwise instructed.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Casing and Liner Running Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 8 Page 61 of 447

Fill the shoe joint before installing the float collar and check that float shoe is operating.
Fill every joint initially until casing stops floating unless it is required to float part of the string into the
hole. Then fill casing as required while running inside cased hole. Fill casing completely prior to
entering open hole and every 3-5 joints thereafter.
Establish a smooth rhythm. Pick up off slips slowly and avoid quick drops which result in excessive
surge pressures. Use 1.5 ft per second average as a starting point in the absence of specific orders.
Monitor the PVT and observe returns at the shakers. On all wells, a trip schedule should be prepared
for running casing and closely monitored. Do not allow the fluid level to fall from sight in areas where
shallow gas sands are exposed.
If the hole is consistently taking fluid while running casing, continue into the hole filling with water.
Use quick release thread protectors.
Ensure the power tong snub line is level and rigged up at a 90 degree angle. Ensure that the
recommended make-up torque is applied. Be especially vigilant when various grades of pipe are in
the string.
Check that the thread dope meets API 5A2 specifications. Ensure crews apply dope uniformly inside
box.
Prior to entering open hole, the cementing line will be rigged to the standpipe and the casing
circulating swage brought to the rig floor.
Count the number of joints left out of the string before making up the landing joint or other special
equipment, such as DV collars.
Mark the landing joint with a 5ft stick to the depth where bottom should be tagged. On slip type
wellheads, the casing will be set as near to bottom as possible without leaving the last casing
coupling inside the wellhead.
Complete the casing running report and provide complete details including casing size, weight, grade,
connection, lengths and depth landed on the morning report.
8.1 RUNNING LINER
Liners are utilised when an abbreviated section of casing is better than running a continuous string of
casing back to the surface. Liners are run in the following situations:
• When the weight of a long string will exceed the design capacity of the casing connection or
the rig.
• When economics favour running less casing
• When planning to drill below 7 - 5/8", or smaller, in order to utilise a tapered drillstring.
Liners also have disadvantages which must be taken into consideration when planning a hole section:
• The hanger and auxiliary equipment restrict the annulus due to their geometry
• The liner lap may not be completely sealed, resulting in leaks which may be difficult to repair
• Depending on the situation, sometimes the pipe cannot be reciprocated or rotated which
contributes to poor cement bonding
• The liner may not set or the setting tool may not release due to bad hole conditions or
mechanical malfunction.
Major aspects that must be considered when designing a liner job are:
• If drilling is planned below the liner, utilise a two wiper plug system

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Casing and Liner Running Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 8 Page 62 of 447

• If hole problems are anticipated, use a left hand release mechanism and consider increasing
the setting pressure if running an hydraulic hanger
• Plan for a minimum of 250ft of liner lap
• Run a tie-back sleeve (where subsequent tie-back is possible)
• Calculate ECD effects created by the annulus restriction
• Set a running speed limit
• Set a circulation rate limit
• Do not reverse out after cementing.
• Run cement thickening time tests at the liner top temperature on long liners as well as at TD
temperatures.
The selection of liner equipment and the running procedure are the responsibility of the Drilling
Engineer. The Drilling Supervisor is responsible for the following:
(1) Job Execution
Review job with liner company service technician including:
• All equipment which has been received is in good condition
• Strap and caliper all components and double check
• All crossovers for the running tool and plug dropping head are onsite
• Loading the setting ball and drillpipe dart in the plug dropping head.
Review the drillpipe design and determine the margin of overpull with the liner at total depth.
Prior to running casing, make up the plug dropping head onto a single.
After all of the liner casing has been picked up:
• Fill the casing
• Make up the liner hanger, setting sleeve, tie back sleeve, etc.
• Change out casing running tools and pick drill pipe running tools
• Stab the setting tool and make up
• Install head pin and circulate the entire liner volume while rigging down casing running tools.
Run the liner on stands of drillpipe:
• Strap each stand as run
• Drift each stand as run.
Use the trip tank and follow a running schedule:
• Monitor filling trends to identify losses
• Monitor drag trends.
Space out running string to land head at safe working height.
Pick up the landing joint and rig up to circulate.
Break circulation slowly and gradually increase pump strokes to achieve an annular velocity
equivalent to that used when drilling.
Mark the drillpipe and wash to bottom.
Tag bottom and mark the drillpipe.
 Allomax Ltd 2000
 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Casing and Liner Running Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 8 Page 63 of 447

Pick up to the setting point and mark the drillpipe:

• 2ft is typical
• The distance to pick up will depend on the length of liner run and the setting stroke of the slips.
Circulate the open hole annular volume.
Set the hanger and release the setting tool. The Drilling Supervisor will observe both of these
operations.
Slack off the running tool and condition the hole thoroughly.
Cement and drop the wiper plug:
• Observe the" tattle tale" to ensure plug dropped
• Displace to liner top and slow displacement rate
• Observe wiper plug shearing off and recalculate final displacement
• Displace casing but do not over displace.
Unsting from liner and prepare to POH:
• Lay out the landing joint
• Pull 10 stands. Close pipe rams and WOC
• Rig up and circulate to condition mud
• POH. Use a trip schedule on all wells.
(2) Post Job Quality Control
Pick up and clean out BHA.
RIH and pre-treat mud for cement contamination.
Drill cement when WOC time has expired. Activate drilling recorder to provide record of how cement
drilled.
Pressure test liner top per program. Run a negative pressure test when required with a RTTS.
Report the following:
• Comments on service hand performance
• Top of liner, bottom of liner and previous casing shoe depth
• Send a schematic of the liner hanger assembly, including measurements, for the well file.
(Send to local drilling office).
Prepare Nimir Petroleum Limited, cementing report with full and complete details.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Cementing Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 9 Page 64 of 447

9 CEMENTING

9.1 GENERAL CEMENTING REQUIREMENTS

9.1.1 Cement Coverage
The following guidelines apply to casing strings:
Offshore:
• The 30”/20” casing shall be cemented to the seabed
• 13.3/8in, 9.5/8in and 7in casing strings shall be cemented to at least 650 ft above
the top of the shallowest hydrocarbon bearing zone in the open hole.
Onshore:
• The stove pipe (eg. 22in) shall be cemented to surface and cut off to
accommodate proper space out for Casing Head Housing (CHH)
• The surface conductor casing (usually 18 5/8in or 13 5/8in) shall be cemented to
surface
• 13 3/8in, 9 5/8in and 7in casing strings shall be cemented to at least 650 ft above
the top of the shallowest hydrocarbon bearing zone in the open hole
• Exceptions to the above guidelines require management approval. Such
instances which may require exception are:
• To prevent buckling of the un-cemented section of casing
• To seal off water aquifers
• In exploration wells when design requires.
Liner Strings
All open hole liners shall be cemented from shoe to the top of the liner lap.

9.1.2 Testing of Cement Slurries

Testing of the programmed slurry shall be conducted at the Cement Contractors Laboratory at
least 72 hours prior to the anticipated start of the cement job. Results of the tests shall be
forwarded by email or fax to the Drilling Superintendent and the Drilling Supervisor.
Once confirmed, the final recipe shall be forwarded to the Drilling Supervisor at least 24 hours
before commencement of the job.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Cementing Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 9 Page 65 of 447

9.2 RESPONSIBILITIES
9.2.1 General
The general responsibilities for planning, supervision and verification of cementing operations
are given in the following table:

Activity Execution Quality Control

Prepare the detailed Cement Contractor Drilling Supervisor /
Cement Programme Drilling Engineer
Test samples and Cement Contractor Drilling Supervisor
prepare recipe
Prepare well for Drilling Contractor Drilling Supervisor
cementing
Mix, pump and displace Cement Contractor Drilling Supervisor
cement
Conduct rig floor Drilling Contractor Drilling Supervisor
operation
Prepare Job Report Cement Contractor Drilling Supervisor /
Drilling Engineer

9.2.2 Drilling Engineer

The Drilling Engineer shall:
• Check the cementation proposal to ensure it meets the requirements of the planned
cementing operation
• Check the Cement Test Form (see Appendix A) to ensure the cement meets the
requirements of the planned cementing operation
• Ensure the Cement Test Form is forwarded to the installation in good time for the
operation.
9.2.3 Drilling Contractor
The Drilling Contractor shall:
• Provide personnel for loading and backloading of supplies and equipment
• Assist with sampling prior to, and during, the cement job.
• Assist with measuring the gradient of the slurries pumped
• Complete their internal checks and procedures prior to commencement of the
cement job.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Cementing Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 9 Page 66 of 447

9.2.4 Drilling Supervisor

The Drilling Supervisor shall:
• Call out the cementing contractor in good time
• Ensure cement, mix water and additive samples are dispatched in good time to the
cementing company
• Assume overall responsibility for the conduct of the cementation
• Check that the temperature used for the cement recipe is in line with the temperature
measurement result from logging (reservoir cementation)
• Compare job calculations with those of Cementer
• Supervise the Cementers and Drilling Contractor in the performance of their duties
• Inform the Mud Loggers, Mud Engineer and Toolpusher:
• Of the volume of each type of mix water to be used for both lead and tail cement
jobs
• From which mud pit each type of mix water will be drawn
• Of the expected gain, per barrel of mix water blended with cement, for both lead
and tail slurries
• Of the expected total volume of returns during the cement job and the expected
overall increase in pit volume.
• Co-ordinate the execution of the cement job
• Ensure that all relevant personnel are issued with a detailed programme of the
cement job, highlighting individual responsibilities (the detailed programme must
include volumes, pressures and pump rates for the cementing and displacing
operations)
• Prepare all cementation reports
• Witness:
• That no changes are made to the agreed programme without the prior approval of
the Drilling Superintendent
• The landing and hanging off of the casing, including the pressure testing of
hanger seals if applicable
• Pressure testing of the surface lines before the job
• The circulation test
• The placing of the cement plugs in the cementing head
• The preparation of the cement slurry and spacers
• The pumping of spacers and cement slurry.
• Count the number of tanks and fractions of tanks for the calculation of the volume of
slurry pumped
• Use chart recorders during cementation to record as many relevant parameters as
possible, such as:

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Cementing Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 9 Page 67 of 447

• Pumping pressures
• Times of the various actions
• Cement slurry gradients
• Losses
• Equipment performances.
• Collate downhole temperature data as a check on cement slurry design and
compare this with test temperatures.

In addition to the above the Drilling Supervisor shall:

• Ensure that cement calculations have been double checked and verified with the
Cement Engineer’s calculations
• Ensure that all chicksans are secured with a safety line
• Ensure that all HP lines are of the threaded connection type
• Ensure 100 % excess of all materials (including additives) is on site prior to the
cement job
• Ensure all cementing equipment (plugs, cement head, crossover for cement head)
are inspected prior to cement job
• Ensure the Cementing Contractor’s cement unit is inspected and complete with the
necessary associated equipment eg., calibrated pressure gauges and recording
equipment
• Ensure a pre-job cement meeting is held. All aspects of the job will be discussed in
detail with the Mud Engineer, Drilling Contractor and Cementing Engineer, prior to the
job.
• Ensure a safety meeting is held immediately prior to cement job
• Ensure that during the cement job if the plug does not ‘bump’, extra displacement
above theoretical bump displacement is considered (after all calculated and
measured volumes is confirmed correct, the pump pressure is still rising and the plug
is confirmed as having left the plug holder).
Note: If in doubt, do not over-displace with more than half shoetrack volume.
• Ensure all side outlet valves (onshore only) are checked immediately after the cement
job and pressure gauges have been installed and monitored for annulus pressure
build up.
9.2.5 Cementer
The Cementer shall:
• Maintain and operate bulk cement supply, including the cement unit and all
associated equipment on the rig, to the highest standards of reliability
• Ensure that the unit has valid certification
• Supervise the preparation of spacers, mix water, cement slurries and additives
• Ensure dry cement is fluffed as per recommended procedure
• Record and maintain quality control of stock levels of cement and additives and
physically check all stocks prior to any cementing operation.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Cementing Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 9 Page 68 of 447

• Ensure that:
• Liquid additives are checked with a hydrometer to ascertain specific gravity
• Adequate spare parts and consumables to support the operation are
maintained
• All materials used and delivered are recorded in a log book.
• Carry out individual cement calculations and compare these with the calculations of
the Drilling Supervisor
• Operate and maintain the bulk supply and mixing systems
• Perform the cement job as per the programme specified by the company, including
the use of data recording devices
• Complete the minimum checks and procedures prior to commencement of the
cement job.
9.2.6 Cement Engineer
The Cement Engineer shall:
• Prepare the cementation proposal and pass the proposal recipe / procedure to the
Drilling Supervisor and Drilling Engineer
• Prepare and issue final proposal to the Drilling Engineer after requesting feedback
from the Drilling Supervisor and the Drilling Engineer on the cementation proposal
• Issue post job request to Drilling Engineer.
9.2.7 Mud Engineer
The Mud Engineer shall:
• Check the mix water for contamination (especially chloride concentration)
• Ensure that there is sufficient volume of mud available on surface prior to
commencement of the cementation
• Remain in the mud pit area and monitor pit volumes throughout the cementation
• Ensure the mud has been pre-treated to minimise cement contamination problems
• Check fluid returns for presence of cement, spacer or drilling fluid.
9.2.8 Mud Loggers
The Mud Loggers shall:
• Monitor pit volumes throughout the cementation, independently of the Mud Engineer.
9.3 SAFETY CRITICAL ISSUES
• The Drilling Supervisor shall ensure that cement calculations have been double
checked and verified with the Cement Engineer’s calculations
• The Drilling Supervisor shall ensure that all chicksans are secured with a safety line
• The Drilling Supervisor shall ensure that all HP lines are of the threaded connection
type
• 100 % excess of all materials (including additives) shall be verified as on site prior
to the cement job.
• All cementing equipment (plugs, cement head, crossover for cement head) must
be inspected prior to cement job

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Cementing Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 9 Page 69 of 447

• The Cementing Contractor’s cement unit must be inspected and come complete
with the necessary associated equipment eg., calibrated pressure gauges and
recording equipment
• A pre-job cement meeting must be held. All aspects of the job shall have been
discussed in detail with the Mud Engineer, Drilling Contractor and Cementing
Engineer, prior to the job
• A “Tool Box Talk” shall be held immediately prior to cement job
• During the cement job if the plug does not ‘bump’, extra displacement above
theoretical bump displacement shall be considered after all calculated and
measured volumes are confirmed correct, the pump pressure is still rising and the
plug has been confirmed as having left the plug holder
Note: If in doubt, do not over-displace with more than half shoetrack volume.
9.3.1 Cements in Use in Nimir Petroleum Ltd. (NPL)
The only cement used in the NPL drilling operations is API Class G oilwell cement (high
sulphate resistant type). This can be used with accelerators and/or retarders to cover a wide
range of well depths and temperatures.

9.4 CEMENT ADDITIVES

9.4.1 Introduction
The additives to be used and their concentration shall be decided by the Cement Engineer,
after testing the slurry using representative samples of cement, additives and mix water
despatched from the rig.
This procedure is designed to ensure that any variations in quality of products and mix water
are accounted for in the slurry recipe.
Note: Where concentrations are quoted in % BWOC it means “percentage by weight of dry
cement”.
9.4.2 Accelerators
Applications
Accelerators may be added to the mix water to reduce the thickening and setting times of the
slurry, with the purpose of avoiding unnecessary time spent waiting on cement.
Types of Accelerator
Calcium Chloride is the most common type of accelerator used. Other, less frequently used
accelerators are Sodium Chloride and Potassium Chloride.

Additive Formula Concentration Comments

Calcium Chloride CaCl2 1 -2% BWOC High gels may form at higher
concentrations. Flash setting
may occur above 3%
Sodium Chloride NaCl Up to 20 lb/bbl Acts as a retarder and adversely
of mix water affects other additives at higher
concentrations than 20 lb/bbl

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Cementing Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 9 Page 70 of 447

Notes: (i) In general accelerators increase the viscosity of the cement slurry and
decrease the effectiveness of most other additives.
(ii) Calcium Chloride can cause skin burns and sever irritation to eyes, nose and
lungs. Gloves, goggles and respirators shall be used during mixing.
9.4.3 Retarders
Application
As the temperature increases, the chemical reaction between cement and water is accelerated
which, in turn, reduces the pumpable time. Increased depths and formation temperatures may
require the use of retarders in order to extend the pumpable time of the cement.
Thixotropic slurries may require retarders at shallow depths and low temperatures.
Effects on Viscosity
Most retarders affect the viscosity of the cement as follows:

Type of Retarder Effect on Viscosity

Lignin Derivatives Reduce
Organic Acids Reduce
Cellulose Derivatives Increase

Note: The combined use of retarders and accelerators in the same mix should be avoided.
9.4.4 High Density Additives
Introduction
There are two main methods of increasing the gradient of the cement slurry:

• Reducing the water/cement ratio

• Addition of a weighting material.

Reducing the water/cement ratio
This is the preferred method of increasing cement gradient, particularly when cementing
across gas zones. A maximum gradient of approximately 17.5 ppg can be attained by this
method.
Addition of a weighting material
The preferred material is Hematite (iron oxide) but Barite may also be used. It is preferable to
batch mix the cement and the weighting material rather than to use pre-blended cement since
weighting material additives in pre-blended cement may have settled out during storage.
Furthermore, handling different blends of cement on one rig may result in operational
mistakes.
Note: All cement densities above 14.8 ppg shall be batch mixed.
9.4.5 Low Density Additives (Extenders)
Application
Low gradient slurries are used for cementing weak formations or when there is a possibility
that the casing could collapse or float if a heavier slurry was used.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Cementing Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 9 Page 71 of 447

Preparation
A low gradient slurry is prepared by adding extra mix water. Bentonite is usually pre-mixed at a
concentration of ½% w/w of dry cement in the mix water to reduce free water separation of the
resultant slurry.
Bentonite must be fully hydrated before any other additives are added to the mix water. To
achieve this, premix may be cut back using industrial water or dry Bentonite may be hydrated
in industrial water. In the latter case, the minimum hydration period is six hours, but may be
longer, depending on the type of bentonite used
The bentonite content must be checked using the methylene blue test.

Compressive Strength
As a result of the decreased cement concentration of extended slurries, the compressive
strength of the hardened cement will be lower than that of neat slurries.
Friction Reducers (Dispersants or Thinners)
Friction reducers are dispersing agents which can be added to the slurry to reduce its viscosity
and thus the frictional pressure losses in the system while displacing the cement. As a result,
higher pumping rates are possible and higher displacement efficiencies may be achieved.

9.4.6 Fluid Loss Control Additives

Fluid loss control additives are added to cement slurries for the following reasons:

• To reduce the possibility of dehydration opposite porous zones and consequently flash setting of the
cement

• Loss of fluid from the slurry will result in increasing slurry viscosity, gradient and higher circulating
pressures

• Excessive fluid loss will reduce slurry volume and give less cement fill

• When squeeze cementing it is desired to get an effective squeeze against the entire formation and not
just squeeze cement filtrate into it.
Most fluid loss additives tend to viscosify the slurry and consequently, dispersants are often
added at the same time to control this effect.
9.4.7 Additives for Thixotropic Slurries
The main application of thixotropic slurries is cementing in lost circulation environments.
During pumping the slurry behaves as normal, however, a gel structure develops rapidly when
static. Such slurries also find application in cementing across gas zones.
The major disadvantage of thixotropic slurries is their relatively high viscosity which may
adversely affect displacement efficiency.
9.4.8 Defoamers and Antifoams
While mixing cement, and/or when preparing mix water containing retarders, salts, fluid loss
additives and/or bentonite, foaming is often experienced. To control such problems antifoams
and defoamers are available.

• Antifoams should be used before adding any other chemicals

• Defoamers remain effective when added after foam-causing chemicals.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Cementing Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 9 Page 72 of 447

In practice, such distinction may be difficult to ensure and therefore both antifoams as well as
defoamers should be added in advance.

9.5 SPACERS - INTRODUCTION

9.5.1 Definition
Spacers are any fluids other than cement slurry or mud, pumped ahead (preflush) or behind
(postflush) the cement slurry.
9.5.2 Objectives
Preflushes
Preflushes are used to:
• Prevent contamination of cement slurry with mud
• Improve mud displacement and mud cake removal.
Postflushes
Postflushes are used to prevent:
• The plug from spinning when it will be drilled out (cement on top)
• Contamination with the fluid used for displacement.
9.5.3 Guidelines for Application
The following guidelines shall be adhered to during the use of spacers:
• Scavenger slurries shall not be used if the Top of Cement (TOC) is critical eg., to
allow for a possible side-track.
• Reduction in hydrostatic head due to spacers pumped must be carefully
calculated. If the overbalance is calculated to be less than the minimum required
overbalance, at any stage of the cementation, a weighted barite preflush shall be
used instead of the water spacer.
• When water is used as a spacer over productive intervals, it shall be treated with
2% KCl w/w for formation inhibition.
• Lines shall be flushed thoroughly to ensure the contamination of mud, spacers
and cement slurry is minimised.
• If oil has been added to a water base mud for any reason, then +/- 2% v/v
surfactant should be included in the water spacer.
• In general, plug flow and plug flow spacers are only used for stinger cementations
where turbulent or laminar glow regimes cannot be achieved.
9.6 SPACERS - PREFLUSH FORMULATIONS
9.6.1 Scavenger Slurry
• Scavenger slurries are dilute mixes of cement and water which are used to
remove gelled mud and filter cakes.
• The gradient should be between mud gradient and the main cement slurry
gradient
• To prevent fast setting of the scavenger slurry, a cement retarder shall be added
to the mix water at a concentration of 0.2% by weight of cement, pending on lab
test and mixing logistics.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Cementing Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 9 Page 73 of 447

9.7 SPACERS - RECOMMENDED PREFLUSHES FOR WATER BASED MUDS

9.7.1 High Annular Velocity Displacements
The recommended preflushes volumes for water based muds for high annular velocity
displacements are 500 ft annular length.
9.7.2 Cement Plugs and Squeezes
The recommended preflushes volumes for water based muds for cement plugs and squeezes
are 300 ft -500 ft annular length.

9.8 SPACERS - RECOMMENDED PREFLUSHES FOR OIL BASED MUDS

9.8.1 Introduction
Oil Based Mud (OBM) must be carefully separated from the cement slurry because:
• Cement only bonds to water wet surfaces
• OBM contains a high Calcium Chloride content which is a known cement
accelerator.
9.8.2 High and Low Annular Velocity Displacements
The recommended preflushes for oil based muds for high annular velocity displacements are
500 ft annular length.
Cement Plugs and Squeezes The recommended preflushes volumes for oil based muds for
cement plugs and squeezes are 300 ft - 500 ft annular length.

9.9 SPACERS – POSTFLUSHES

9.9.1 Standard Cementations
In standard cementations, after the top plug has been dropped cement slurry should be
pumped behind to prevent the plug from spinning when it is being drilled out.
For water based and oil based muds postflush volumes can vary between 30 ft –500 ft annular
length ft depending on the application.
9.9.2 Cementations Using Stinger
For water based and oil based muds postflush volumes are circa 300 ft annular length
depending on the application.

9.10 CEMENT TESTING - INTRODUCTION

9.10.1 General Guidelines
All slurry compositions are designed and tested at the Cementing Contractors Laboratory.
Samples of cement, additives and mix water must be sent from the well site to the laboratory
for this purpose. In general, testing is carried out according to API Spec 10.
The following guidelines should be applied:
• Bulk cement shall be sampled for testing purposes

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Cementing Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 9 Page 74 of 447

• Bulk cement shall be despatched to the Contractor Laboratory, Mud and Cement
Laboratory
• The Laboratory test results shall be reported to the Drilling Engineer/Drilling
Supervisor in the form of a Cement Test Form, (see Appendix A)
• Samples of all products used during the cementing operation shall be retained in
case further testing is required.
9.11 CEMENT TESTING - DESPATCH OF CEMENT, ADDITIVES AND WATER SAMPLES
9.11.1 Sampling Guidelines
Proper sampling of cement, additives and mix water is essential to obtain accurate and
representative test results. All sampling shall be carried out by the Drilling Supervisor or the
Cementer on site.
The following guidelines should be applied:
• When powdered additives samples are requested, they must be taken from a
sack of the same batch number to be used in the forthcoming cementing
operation.
• When liquid additives samples are requested, they must be taken from the batch
to be used in the forthcoming cementing operation. The liquid additive must be
well agitated before sampling.
• Cement, additives and water must be sampled properly and stored/despatched in
the appropriate containers. Containers must be clean.
• Excess air must be removed from the containers since exposure to humid air may
affect the results of the test, making the exercise useless potentially leading to
problems during cementation.
• Samples of all products, including a 1 gallon sample of the actual mix water, must
also be taken during the course of the cementing operations and kept on the rig
until a few days after the cement job in case they are required for post mortem
analysis of the cementation.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Cementing Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 9 Page 75 of 447

9.11.2 Sample Labelling

Cement Samples
All cement samples should be labelled with:
• Rig name
• Silo number
• Well number
• The type of cementation forthcoming
• Date received
• Date despatched
• Expected date of first cementation.
Additive and Mix Water Samples
All additive and mix water samples should be labelled with:
• Rig name
• Well number
• Date despatched
• Contents
• Expected date of first cementation.

9.12 CEMENT TESTING - CEMENT TEST FORM

9.12.1 Introduction
The Cementing Contractor should perform cement testing using a cement form similar to the
one in appendix A.
9.12.2 Consistometer Test Conditions
The Pan Am(erican) Consistometer test should be used. It is performed under dynamic
conditions with the cement being sheared continuously. The test conditions used are defined
the following table:

Parameter Unit Definition

Depth ft True vertical depth of the cementation
Test pressure psi Expected maximum pressure during the
cementation (according to API
recommendation)
o
Test F Expected circulating bottom hole temperature
temperature according to API recommendations and related
to the specific temperature gradient of the field.

9.13 PRE-JOB PREPARATION - CEMENT PROGRAMME

9.13.1 General Guidelines
The following guidelines should be applied to the preparation of the Cement Programme:
 Allomax Ltd 2000
 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Cementing Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 9 Page 76 of 447

• The Drilling Supervisor shall call out the cementing contractor in good time before
the job
• The cement programme, including the agreed job quality measures stated in the
programme and accepted by the Cement Contractor, shall be sent to the Drilling
Supervisor, Drilling Engineer, Drilling Superintendent for verification
• The final version of the Cement Programme, including the final details, shall be
sent to the Drilling Supervisor, Drilling Engineer and Drilling Superintendent
• No last minute changes to the Programme shall be made without the prior
approval of the Drilling Superintendent.
9.13.2 Objective
The Cement Programme gives a brief explanation of the objectives in setting casing, i.e.
isolate hydrocarbons, isolate different pressure regimes, provide a pressure conduit of full
integrity for drilling and completion, allow installation of BOP, completion etc.
9.13.3 Non Standard Operations
The Cement Programme gives a detailed description of any non standard operations which
are proposed. It shall also outline risks involved and precautions to be taken. Reference shall
be made to the Drilling Programme as appropriate.
The Cement Programme shall address the following issues:
Previous Casing
• Diameter
• Wt/ft
• Grade
• Coupling
• Shoe depth
• Leak off test value - if applicable.
Hole Size
• Hole diameter (as drilled / opened etc.)
• Hole depth
• Calliper available - if so, state tool type
• Hole diameter, or volume if appropriate, from calliper compared with theoretical
diameter / volume
• Annular and Casing Volumes used for calculation
• Bottomhole static and circulating temperature.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Cementing Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 9 Page 77 of 447

Casing To Be Run
The Cement Programme shall include:
• Diameter
• Wt/ft
• Grade
• Coupling
• Shoe depth
• Float collar depth
• Hang off point.
Mud Characteristics
The Cement Programme shall include:
• Mud Type
• Mud Gradient
• Rheology and Gel Strengths.
TOC
• Depth of required top of good cement. State upper and lower limit if applicable
• In accordance with programme: YES/NO
• Reason for any planned change.
Hydrostatic Head/Overbalance
• Identify calculated positions / depths of all components of cementation, i.e.
spacers, scavenger, slurry lead and tail
• State minimum overbalance during cement job, at what stage it occurs, and which
sand / interval will experience this minimum overbalance
• Detail floating and collapse during cementation (surface casing).
Rheology calculations
• ECD at previous casing shoe at expected circulation rates.
Surface Lines
Regarding surface lines, the Cement Programme shall include a detailed rig up of surface
lines, especially wellhead to BOP Chicksan lines.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Cementing Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 9 Page 78 of 447

9.13.4 Cement Programme Design Considerations

Activity Design Consideration

Check shoe track and accessory -
configuration.
Run and land casing as per Proposed circulation test rates with corresponding
programmed casing tally. annular velocities (assuming gauge hole).
Pressure test surface lines. -
Mud engineer checks all tank levels. When possible, mud returns shall be diverted to a
different pit to that used for suction during
displacement.
Pump spacers ahead. Calculate volume, fluid type, gradient, fluid loss
Pump spacer. Calculate volume, gradient, cement sx., mix water
volume
Drop bottom plug. -
Pump lead slurry. Calculate volume, gradient, fluid loss, cement type,
cement sx., mix water volume, recipe. Excess
(referred to basis of calculation).
Pump tail slurry. Calculate volume gradient, cement type, cement sx.,
mix water volume, recipe. Excess (referred to basis of
calculation).
Drop top plug. -
Pump spacer behind Calculate volume, fluid type, gradient.
Mud engineer checks all tank levels. -
Displace cement. Calculate volume, fluid type, gradient, rate before and
after catch up.
Total volume pumped when rate must be reduced for
bump.
Total volume pumped at bump.
Bump pressure (casing pressure test) & duration.
Pump efficiency assumed (based on results of recent
jobs with same size liners.
Maximum permissible "over displacement" past
theoretical value to avoid physical over displacement
of the slurry.
Annular velocity.
Flow regime of spacers and slurry.
Contact time for any critical point in the well bore - e.g.
across a particular gas sand.

Mud Engineer checks all tank levels. -

Bleed off, check backflow. Proposed course of action if backflow is observed.
Back out landing joint. -

9.13.5 Time Estimate / Thickening Time

The Cement Programme shall include the time estimate for:

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Cementing Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 9 Page 79 of 447

• Pumping main slurry

• Pumping tail slurry
• Plug dropping
• Displacement
• Contingency
• Total time estimate.

The Cement Programme shall also include the recipe, pumpable time and thickening time, and
compressive strength as a function of time.

9.14 PRE-JOB PREPARATION - TREATMENT OF MUD PRIOR TO CEMENTING

9.14.1 General Guidelines
Before pulling out of hole to run casing, the hole shall be circulated clean until there are no
further cuttings returns at the shakers. This shall be witnessed by the Mud Engineer.
To improve displacement efficiency, the mud shall be conditioned to reduce the rheology
during circulation
Solids control equipment shall be run to remove drill solids from the mud thus reducing PV to
the lowest practical level
Dispersants / thinners shall be added to reduce the YP and 10 minute gel strength
Background gas levels shall be less than 3% after full annular volume “bottoms up”.

9.15 PRE-JOB PREPARATION - HOLE VOLUMES AND SLURRY VOLUME CALCULATIONS

9.15.1 General Guidelines
Cementations shall be based on volumes calculated from a calliper log if available. This is
particularly important for cementations across hydrocarbon zones
If off-scale washouts occur, make a best guess of hole volumes. Most calliper logs will give an
integrated hole volume and an integrated cement volume. The amount of excess to be added
has to be considered for each individual case. Three or four arm tools are preferred as they
are more accurate. The calliper should be run inside the previous casing shoe as a check. In
the case where an integrated hole volume is given, the tool should be run for at least 100 ft
inside casing.

9.16 PRE-JOB PREPARATION - CIRCULATION TEST

9.16.1 General Guidelines
Prior to a plug type cementation, at least 120% of the casing content must be circulated.
During this circulation the circulating pressures at different pumping rates for each pump shall
be recorded.
Commence circulation at a very low rate
Increase flow rate in increments of 2 bbl/min

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Cementing Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 9 Page 80 of 447

After each increase, wait at least five minutes to observe for losses and to allow pressures to
stabilise. Ensure the tank level indicators are properly working and physically check the level
in the active tank.
Reduce the pump rate as soon as losses are observed or as soon as the maximum equivalent
circulating gradient (ECD), according to calculations, is reached
In addition, a check shall be made on the circulation pressure at the rate that will be used to
bump the plug, in order to observe the pressure differential and thus estimate the top of
cement (TOC)
Before carrying out the circulation test, calculations shall be performed to predict ECD for
different rates using the properties of the actual mud in use. The surface pressure losses
through the wellhead and return surface lines must be included. No general rules can be given
for these pressure losses but their value should be expected to be in the range of 100 psi at
high circulation rates.
Any losses shall be dealt with on an individual basis.

9.17 CASING CEMENTATION - INNER STRING (STINGER/STAB IN) CEMENTATION PROCEDURE

9.17.1 Introduction
The following cementation techniques are presented in generic format and should be modified
to suit the individual circumstances for onshore or offshore cementing operations.
Details of cementing procedures can be found in DOM chapter 19, 20 and 21.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Cementing Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 9 Page 81 of 447

The following generic procedures can be used for Stab in cementation:

Step Action
1 CHECK stab-in stinger and cement shoe are of the correct size
/ fit before making up onto casing.
2 MAKE UP stab-in sub and centraliser and RIH on 5in drill pipe.
3 STAB stinger into the float shoe and ENGAGE the cementing
tool to the casing head housing/wellhead.
4 Pressure test casing. If the test fails, take appropriate action as
detailed below:
Case 1 Case 2
Stinger seals are leaking, Stinger seals have full
identified by: integrity, identified by:
1. With Cement Stinger – Checking for returns
returns by circulating through the stinger. Check
through annulus. for returns through the
casing/stinger annulus
2. With Test Port - returns
when circulating
by circulating through
conventionally through the
stinger.
stinger.
PULL one joint and ASSESS severity of the
PERFORM poor-boy leak, INFORM Drilling
cement job using a pack-off Superintendent/DE who will
at the wellhead. ENSURE advise either a) CONTINUE
that the test port on the or b) PULL casing and
cementing tool is closed. CHECK for leaks.
5 ESTABLISH circulation carefully and MAKE at least one full
circulation. MONITOR closely for losses and ADJUST flow rate
as necessary.
6 PRE-MIX and RE-CIRCULATE slurry until gradient is within
safe tolerance.
7 MIX and PUMP slurry as per programme.
8 PUMP the calculated volume if the well is not to be cemented to
surface.
If the well is to be cemented back to surface, CONTINUE
PUMPING until returns are observed at the wellhead / mudline,
or until cement has been observed at surface or all cement
slurry has been pumped. In the latter case, if returns have not
been observed, CHECK for losses and CONTACT base.
9 CHECK for backflow. If there is no backflow, PULL stinger back
60 ft, CIRCULATE clean and POH with stinger. If backflow is
observed, DISPLACE cement from the drill pipe and MAINTAIN
pressure.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Cementing Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 9 Page 82 of 447

RIH with stab-in assy.

Stab stinger into shoe.

Pressure test casing.

Verify source and

Pressure test OK? No Leak? No severity of leak,
Advise DE/DS

Yes
Make at least one
full circulation.Monitor Apply Poor Boy
Leak Acceptable
for losses. Adjust Cementation Yes
To DE/DS
flowrate as required Procedure

Pump spacer.
No

Pre-mix/recirculate. Re-circ/Dump.

Make up spare seal

assemblyor POOH
No casing & check for
leaks as advised.

Within safe
Correct ppg ? No tolerance?

Yes

Pump cement.

Pumped >200%
Cement returns? No cement?
Yes

Yes

Leave 20 ft cement
inside casing.

Reverse circulate out

Backflow? Yes via testport. Stop pumping. Annular fill
up required. Check for
losses. Contact base.
No

Pull back 60 ft & circ

clean. POH.
WOC

Figure 9.2 - Inner String Cementation Procedure

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Cementing Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 9 Page 83 of 447

9.18 CASING CEMENTATION - SINGLE STAGE (PLUG TYPE) CEMENTATION PROCEDURE

9.18.1 Introduction
The following cementation techniques are presented in generic format and should be modified
to suit the individual circumstances for onshore or offshore cementing operations.
Details of cementing procedures can be found in DOM chapter 19, 20 and 21.
The following generic procedures can be used for Single stage cementation:

Step Action
1 CIRCULATE casing and CONDITION mud. A minimum of
120% of the casing contents must be circulated. CARRY OUT
circulation test to assess displacement rates, carefully
MONITOR for losses.
2 DROP bottom plug. PRE-MIX and RE-CIRCULATE slurry until
gradient is within safe tolerance.
3 MIX and PUMP cement. If a problem occurs before the
programmed volume of cement has been pumped,
DETERMINE the course of action to be taken using the
following table:

CASE 1 CASE 2 CASE 3

Length of cement Length of cement column is insufficient to
column is enough to satisfy all objectives of the cementation
satisfy all objectives of
the cementation
There is enough time The length of time
available to circulate available is insufficient
the slurry out to circulate the slurry
out
Continue with next Circulate the slurry Continue with next
step in process. out, solve problem step in process.
and start again

4 DROP the top plug.

5 PUMP the postflush.
6 DISPLACE at pre-determined rate using the rig pumps. During
displacement, MONITOR the pressure. If pressure is low,
CONTINUE displacing with the rig pumps but MONITOR the
returns closely to ensure there are no losses. If the pressure is
increasing then this is an indication of premature setting of the
cement, and the displacement must be completed using the
cement unit.

Step Action

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Cementing Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 9 Page 84 of 447

7 RECORD the pressure differential immediately prior to bump in

order to facilitate estimation of TTOC. Shortly before bumping
the plug, REDUCE rate to 5 bbl/min or less.
8 BUMP plug. If the plug does not bump, CHECK the following:
1. Are all calculated and measured volumes correct?
2. Are displacement pressures continuing to increase?
3. Are there positive indications of top plug release?
4. Are there any indications of circulating system malfunctions
which may lead to a decreased pump efficiency from that
ascertained during the drilling phase ?
if all the above are correct, CONTINUE PUMPING. If in doubt,
DO NOT overdisplace with more than the shoetrack volume.
9 PRESSURE TEST casing for 15 minutes. REFER to Drilling
Programme for details of casing test pressures.
10 RELEASE pressure and CHECK for backflow. If backflow is
observed, CLOSE the surface line to the cementing head and
WAIT until the surface cement samples have set. DO NOT
PUMP any volume of mud back, on backflow, as there is the
possibility of pumping mud contaminated cement around the
shoe.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Cementing Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 9 Page 85 of 447

Circulate 120% casing

contents

Asses displacement
Condition mud
rates

Pump spacer Yes

Fixed in < 20
Problem? Yes No Circulate out scavenger
mins?

No Circulate Out
Cement

Drop 2nd Bottom plug

Yes

Pre-mix/Re-circ.

gradient within
No Re-circ./Dump
safe tolerance?

Yes

Pump cement Solve Problem

Yes

Problem? Yes Solvable in time?

No
No

Enough cement Time to circ out

Drop Top plug Yes No
column? cement?

Continue
with Part 2 No

Figure 9.3 - Part 1 Single Stage (Plug Type) Cementation Procedure

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Cementing Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 9 Page 86 of 447

Continued
From Part 1

Pump spacer

Chase cement

Pump pressure
High Low
OK?

Cement is Setting. Check returns adjust

Displace with cement Yes displacement rate
unit accordingly
Continue displacing with
the rig pumps

Reduce Pump Rate

Do not
No Bump?
overdisplace!

Yes

Pressure test casing

Backflow? Yes Apply pressure

No

Continue with
WOC
programme

Figure 9.3 - Part 2 Single Stage (Plug Type) Cementation Procedure

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Cementing Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 9 Page 87 of 447

9.19 CASING CEMENTATION - SPECIAL CASES

9.19.1 Cementing in Weak Formations
The most likely section for this to occur would be in top hole sections. A lighter slurry may be
used to overcome the problem.
9.19.2 Cementing Over Permeable, Depleted Reservoirs
Depleted zones are often encountered during the later development of a field. These zones
can cause excessive water loss from the cement slurry and this can have the following
undesirable consequences:
• Cement bridges over these zones may form so that the required volume of cement can
not be placed and, in the case of a plug-back cementation, difficulties in retrieving the
stinger may be encountered as a result of the increased cement/ water ratio accelerating
the setting time
• If these bridges are strong enough to support the column of cement slurry above, an
influx of hydrocarbons may occur. This will result in a poor cement bond below the bridge
and may even cause an annular blow-out.
Low fluid loss cement slurries must be used to reduce the possibility of such problems
occurring.
9.19.3 Cementing in Deviated Wells
A properly engineered centralisation programme is essential to ensure that channelling of
cement along the high side of the hole does not occur and cement will tend to displace mud
better.
Conditioning of the mud to reduce viscosity and gel strength, together with the use of
scavenger slurries and cement slurry displacement at the highest possible rates must all be
employed to ensure effective displacement.
9.19.4 Cementing Production Strings in a Sub Hydrostatic Zone
Consideration should be given to using water to displace the cement when cementing a
production string across sub-hydrostatic pressured zones. This will save time when cleaning
the wellbore.
9.20 LINER CEMENTATION
9.20.1 Procedure
All cementing programmes shall be carried out on an individual basis. However, the following
generic procedure should be adhered to during liner cementation:
Details of cementing procedures can be found in DOM, Chapters 19, 20 and 21.

Step Action
1 RIH with liner.
2 CIRCULATE bottoms up and CONDITION mud. MONITOR
carefully for losses and ADJUST flow rate as required.
3 SET liner hanger.
4 BREAK circulation. CIRCULATE at least 120% of the drill
pipe/liner contents and PERFORM circulation test.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Cementing Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 9 Page 88 of 447

5 BATCH MIX slurry to ensure correct density and homogeneity

of mix.
Note: The cement slurry volume should be calculated using
the following:
• • calliper hole volume plus the usual excess for the specific
calliper used
• • overlap volume
• • excess sufficient to fill a minimum of 500
ft of casing above the top of the liner
with drill pipe removed.
6 PUMP 10 - 30 bbls bbl preflush.
7 PUMP cement. If a problem occurs before the programmed
volume of cement has been pumped, DETERMINE the course
of action to be taken using the following table.

CASE 1 CASE 2
There is enough time to solve the There is insufficient time to solve
problem the problem
Solve problem and continue Circulate out the slurry and
pumping slurry preflush.

8 DROP the dart and PUMP 10 - 30 bbl postflush.

9 DISPLACE at pre-determined maximum rate using the cement
unit, until the mud has caught up with the slurry. Thereafter,
PUMP at 95 % of the maximum rate established in the
circulation test.
10 SLOW DOWN to approx. 2 bbl/min, 5 bbl before the dart is
expected to reach the liner wiper plug and OBSERVE the
shear. Again, INCREASE rate to 95 % of the maximum rate
established in the circulation test.
11 REDUCE the displacement rate to approx. 2 bbl/min, 5 bbl
before the plugs theoretically bump, as calculated using the
calibrated volumetric pump efficiency. STOP displacing as soon
as the required volume has been pumped or as soon as a
bump is obtained, whichever occurs first. DO NOT PUMP any
more and DO NOT ATTEMPT a pressure test.
12 MONITOR pressure at all times during displacement. If the
pressure departs from the expected value then use the table
below to determine the course of action to be taken

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Cementing Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 9 Page 89 of 447

CASE 1 CASE 2 CASE 3

Pump pressure is high Pump pressure is low.
Indication of No returns Normal returns
premature setting of
cement.
PULL OUT stinger & CONTINUE pumping PULL OUT stinger &
circulate hole clean until the plug bumps CIRCULATE hole
using mud pumps. or to a maximum clean using mud
Contact base. volume of the pumps. CONTACT
theoretical bump base.
volume. DO NOT
pump any excess.

13 CHECK for backflow. If backflow is observed, PULL OUT the

stinger and CIRCULATE the hole clean using the mud pumps.
CONTACT base.
14 CHECK for losses. If losses are observed, PULL stinger back to
300 ft above the liner hanger. If no losses are observed PULL
stinger just out of the hanger.
15 CIRCULATE the hole clean using the mud pumps whilst
moving the string.
Note:The excess cement will be circulated out by reverse or
direct circulation. Although reverse circulation is faster
and eliminates cement having to be circulated across
the BOP's, it will result in higher back-pressure and
possibly in squeezing cement away

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Cementing Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 9 Page 90 of 447

RIH liner

Circulate Bottom up Consider not launching dart

Condition mud

Set liner hanger

Establish circulation
rates

Pump spacer(s)

Pre-mix/Re-circulate Re-circ/Dump

No

Correct Within safe

No
gradient ? tolerance?

Yes
Yes
Pump cement
Yes

Circulate out
Solvable in
Problems? Yes No cement &
time?
spacer(s)
No

Drop dart. Pump

spacer(s)

Continue
with Part 2

Figure 9.5 - Part 1 Liner Cementation

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Cementing Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 9 Page 91 of 447

Continued From
Part 1

Contact base
Displace cement with
mud

Cement premature Y
setting. Pull out stinger Pump Pressure
& circulate hole clean
High OK? Low Cement returns? e
using mudpumps s

Yes No

Displace DP+50% of
Liner content
No Plug sheared? Continue pumping

No Yes

Bump?

Yes

Pull out stinger & and

Backflow? Yes circulate hole clean
using mudpumps

No

Pull stinger 300 ft

above liner hanger
Yes Losses?

Contact base

No

Pull stinger just out of

hanger

Circulate clean while

moving string using
mudpumps

Continue With
Programme

Figure 9.5 - Part 2 Liner Cementation, continued

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Cementing Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 9 Page 92 of 447

9.21 REMEDIAL CEMENTATION - INTRODUCTION

9.21.1 Application of Remedial Cementation
The main reasons for using remedial cementation procedures are to:
• Abandon specific reservoirs in a multiple reservoir completed well
• Seal off all perforations when abandoning a well to make sure crossflow between
reservoirs is impossible
• Repair defective casing or liner cement jobs
• Repair casing leaks
• Isolate specific zones within reservoirs (to achieve lower gas / oil ratios, water / oil
ratios, etc).
9.21.2 Types of Remedial Cementation
Two types of remedial cementation are described in this section:
• Squeeze Cementing
• Circulation / Squeeze Cementation Repair

9.22 REMEDIAL CEMENTATION - PREPARATION OF CEMENT PROGRAMME

9.22.1 General Guidelines
Any non standard operation shall be fully discussed in the Programme
The Cement Engineer shall prepare a Cement Programme for the job at the well site in
consultation with the Drilling Supervisor. The programme shall be sent to Drilling
Superintendent at least two working days before the cement job when possible.
The standard Cement Programme format (including the agreed quality measures stated in the
Cement programme and accepted by the Cement Contractor) included in Pre-Job Preparation
- Cement Programme, 9.13, shall be used
The Drilling Engineer/Drilling Superintendent shall check the Cement Programme and respond
to confirm its acceptance.

9.23 REMEDIAL CEMENTATION - CEMENT SLURRY REQUIREMENTS FOR SQUEEZE CEMENTING

9.23.1 Requirements
A consistent slurry gradient is particularly important in the case of (small) cement plugs. The
cement must be batch mixed or dumped until the correct gradient is achieved.
Thin slurries with low fluid loss of less than 50 ml/30 min are used for regular squeeze
cementing jobs, to reduce premature slurry dehydration during placement.
Thixotropic cement slurries may be used in zones where losses are encountered.
Slurries designed for use in remedial cementation operations, will be formulated such that:

Pumpability Time = Mixing Time + Displacement Time + Circulating Out Time + 60 min

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Cementing Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 9 Page 93 of 447

9.24 REMEDIAL CEMENTATION - SQUEEZE CEMENTING

9.24.1 General Guidelines
If an attempt is to be made to squeeze cement into perforations or into a casing leak etc., and
the cement opposite the place of squeeze is to be drilled out later, injection rates should be
established before cement is squeezed. This should be done using a solids free fluid e.g.
water or brine. Acid may be spotted ahead of a squeeze job to break up plugging mud
particles.
Establishment of the injection rate is less important if the well is to be abandoned and cement
will not be drilled out afterwards.
High squeeze pressures which may induce formation breakdown must be avoided, particularly
in the vicinity of faults and stacked reservoirs, in order to prevent zonal communication via
vertical fissures. The formation closure pressure should never be exceeded, unless specific
written orders to do so are issued by Drilling Superintendent
When a packer has been set just above the perforations or zone to be squeezed off, the
bottom hole pressure must be kept below 85% of the collapse pressure of the weakest casing
in use. Changing the setting point of the packer or applying back pressure may help to
increase the allowable squeeze pressure.
Annular back pressure should be applied in all cases having a differential pressure across the
packer greater than 1,500 psi.
Two methods may be used for squeeze cementing as follows:
The Spot and Squeeze or Block Squeeze method is the term used when cement is
spotted over the required interval and the squeeze pressure is applied afterwards
The Straight Squeeze method describes the technique where the cement is pumped
and squeezed directly into the formation. This method must be used if injection rates
are low.
The Hesitation Squeeze technique should be used in lost circulation zones to aid bridging of
the cement solids.
The simplest way to carry out a squeeze is to spot the cement and squeeze it by applying
pressure while the annulus is kept closed. However, a packer must be used if the pressure
during the squeeze will exceed the maximum allowable pressure at any point above the
planned depth of the cementation.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Cementing Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 9 Page 94 of 447

The following guidelines should be used for determining the type of packer to be used.
• The Spot and Squeeze technique is only possible using a retrievable packer
• If the well is to be abandoned a cement retainer should be used, since it will form
an additional mechanical seal and for reasons of cost
• If a Straight Squeeze is to be performed, it is preferred to use a drillable cement
retainer since if a retrievable packer gets stuck, it will be extremely difficult to get
it out of the hole
• If a packer is to be used, a bit and scraper run may be required over the packer
setting intervals
• In deviated wells with less than 30° hole angle, a viscous pill of approximately 200
ft length can be used as a bottom for the cement
• If there are any perforations below that need to be protected from the squeeze
pressure and/or cement that might work its way down the hole, a drillable bridge
plug must be set approximately 10 ft below the interval to be squeezed off.
9.24.2 Block Squeeze Without Packer
The following generic procedure should be adhered to when preparing a Block Squeeze
without a packer:

Step Action
1 RIH approximately 500 ft of tubing stinger on drill pipe to the
bridge plug if it has been set and pull pack 2 ft. If no bridge plug
has been set, RUN the stinger to approximately 50 ft below the
bottom perforations.
2 SET a balanced cement plug to at least 250 ft above the top
perforations.
3 PULL BACK one stand above the theoretical TOC and
REVERSE CIRCULATE clean. DO NOT EXCEED Formation
Closure Gradient (FCG).
4 PULL BACK one single, CLOSE the Hydril and APPLY
maximum allowable surface pressure. The hardening time will
be advised by the Cementing Contractor
5 SPOT more cement, if required. A minimum of 50 ft of cement
must be left above the perforations.
6 POH with the stinger.
9.24.3 Block Squeeze Using a Retrievable Packer
The following generic procedure should be adhered to when preparing to spot and squeeze
using a retrievable packer:

Step Action
1 RUN the retrievable packer with a tailpipe at least 100 ft longer
than the length of the cement plug to be spotted with the stinger
in place.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Cementing Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 9 Page 95 of 447

2 SET a balanced cement plug to at least 250 ft above the top

perforations.
3 PULL BACK one stand above the theoretical TOC and
REVERSE CIRCULATE clean. ENSURE that the circulating
sub is closed. DO NOT EXCEED Formation Closure Gradient
and CHECK accurately for losses.
4 PULL BACK one single, SET the packer and APPLY maximum
allowable surface pressure. The hardening time will be advised
by the Cementing Contractor
5 SPOT more cement, if required. A minimum of 50 ft of cement
must be left above the perforations.
6 UNSEAT packer and POH.

9.24.4 Straight Squeeze Using a Cement Retainer

The following generic procedure should be adhered to when preparing a Straight Squeeze
using a cement retainer:

Step Action
1 SET a drillable cement retainer on drill pipe approx. 25 ft above
the perforations to be squeezed off.
2 PULL OUT of cement retainer approximately 5 ft.
3 PUMP preflush (if necessary)
4 DISPLACE the batch-mixed cement until the first spacer
reaches the end of the stinger. APPLY back pressure to the
annulus to balance the cement column.
5 STAB BACK into cement retainer immediately.
6 SQUEEZE away the cement at a constant Bottom Hole
Pressure (BHP). The BHP used must not exceed 50-60% of the
formation closure pressure whilst maintaining the flow rate at
easily managed levels.
7 NOTE the flow rate and ESTABLISH the trend
8 If the flow rate remains constant, SQUEEZE 50% of the
available slurry and COMMENCE a Hesitation Squeeze.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Cementing Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 9 Page 96 of 447

9 HESITATE and PUMP in 1 to ± 10 minute steps, depending on

the results:
Notes:
i) If the flow rate cannot be decreased whilst maintaining the
BHP constant, pump a further 25% of the available slurry.
ii) If a flow rate decrease is noted, allow the trend to continue
until flow is negligible, increasing BHP by 1,000 psi
increments at each step and allowing the pressure to bleed
off to the previously established constant BHP value.
iii) The final BHP must not be greater than the Formation
Closure Gradient but great enough to allow the remaining
cement to be reversed out without losses.
iv) Pump no more than 75% of the total available slurry
10 PULL OUT of cement retainer approximately 5 ft and
REVERSE CLEAN. The returns must be measured and
reported.
11 POH.

9.24.5 Straight Squeeze Using a Retrievable Packer

Application
Under normal circumstances, this operation must not be carried out.
A drillable cement retainer must be used due to difficulties in retrieving the packer should it
become stuck. Under exceptional circumstances, the technique may be used, but it must be
fully discussed with Drilling Superintendent /Drilling Engineer/ Drilling Supervisor beforehand.
9.24.6 Testing of Squeezed-Off Perforations
The testing programme to be carried out after squeezing off perforations shall be determined
by the Drilling Engineer. Any, or all, of the following may be required:
• An inflow test may be required to evaluate the quality of the job. This is dependent on
the reservoir pressure, amongst other considerations. Draw-down and time shall be
clearly stipulated
• A circulation test may be required
• A cement evaluation log may be run before and after the job to obtain additional
information.
Note: Pressure testing of the casing should not be carried out to avoid
cracking of the cement bond.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Cementing Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 9 Page 97 of 447

9.24.7 Squeezing Off a Leaking Liner Lap

The procedure for squeezing off a leaking liner lap is identical to that described earlier in this
section for perforations using a block squeeze with a retrievable packer.
• If a drillable bridge plug is to be used as a bottom for the cement, it should be set
approximately 10 ft below the top of the liner
• Straddling the liner hanger should be considered as a preferred alternative to
squeezing cement.
9.25 REMEDIAL CEMENTATION - CIRCULATION / SQUEEZE CEMENTATION REPAIR
9.25.1 Application
Circulation repair cementation is used when cement behind casing is found insufficiently
bonding in places where it is required for zonal isolation
The casing is perforated in two places, a retrievable packer is set between the perforations
and a circulation test is carried out
If circulation is possible at a sufficient rate, a cement retainer is set in a position between the
perforations and cement circulated behind the casing
The cement retainer is drilled out later, together with the cement inside the casing
If no adequate circulation can be established, even after spotting acid, the casing may be re-
perforated in an attempt to establish circulation over a shorter interval. If this fails, a block
squeeze will be carried out.
Note: This technique usually requires the milling of several bridge plugs and cement
retainers. The availability of the correct number and type of mills must be assured
before commencing operations
9.25.2 Procedure
The following procedure should be adhered to when carrying out Circulation/Squeeze
cementation repair.

Step Action

1 USE a recent cement bond evaluation log to determine the interval to be

repaired.
2 RUN bit and scraper.

3 If there are any perforations to be protected below the repair zone, SET a
drillable bridge plug approximately 10 ft below the planned depth of the
bottom repair-perforations.
4 PERFORATE the casing at the top and bottom of the repair interval if required

5 SET a retrievable packer between the perforations.

6 ESTABLISH circulation carefully, preferably using a solids-free fluid.

CIRCULATE at increasing rates until the pressure at the perforations equals
the fracture closure gradient, unless specified differently in the programme. If
problems occur use the table below to decide the next course of action.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Cementing Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 9 Page 98 of 447

CASE 1 CASE 2 CASE 3

It is possible to circulate at a It is possible to It is not possible to circulate
rate greater than 1 bbl/min circulate at a rate less
than 1 bbl/min
SPOT 10 bbl of 15% HCl and soak for 10
minutes.
CONTINUE with procedure ATTEMPT to circulate 15% HCl around
It is possible to It is not possible to circulate, or it is possible to
circulate at a rate circulate at a rate less than 1 bbl/min
greater than 1 bbl/min
CONTINUE with RE-PERFORATE at some point between current
procedure perforations.
PERFORM Circulation test
It is possible to It is not possible to
circulate at a rate circulate, or it is
greater than 1 bbl possible to circulate at a
rate less than 1 bbl/min
CONTINUE with POH with retrievable
procedure packer and CARRY
OUT Block Squeeze.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Cementing Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 9 Page 99 of 447

7 POH with the retrievable packer.

8 SET the cement retainer 5 ft above top of bottom perforations on electric
wireline.
Note:
Drill pipe may also be used, but it has the disadvantage that it cannot be set
with the same depth accuracy. Consequently, the retainer has to be set
further away from the bottom perforations to ensure that it is set between the
upper and lower perforations
9 RIH with the cement retainer stinger on drill pipe to 30 ft above cement
retainer. CIRCULATE at least 120% of the drill pipe contents and STAB
stinger into the cement retainer.
10 RE-ESTABLISH circulation rates versus pressures.
11 PULL OUT of cement retainer approx. 5 ft.
12 PUMP 10 bbl of preflush (if necessary) followed by the cement slurry to a
level 1,000 ft above the cement retainer. APPLY back pressure on the
annulus to balance the cement column.
13 STAB BACK into the cement retainer immediately and DISPLACE cement
until balance point. The cement slurry volume should be enough to give a
theoretical TOC inside the casing of 250 ft above the top perforations.
14 PULL BACK immediately but carefully to approximately 60 ft above theoretical
TOC and CIRCULATE clean.
15 PULL BACK one more single, CLOSE Hydril and APPLY maximum allowable
surface pressure. The hardening time will be advised by the Cementing
Contractor. ENSURE a minimum of 50 ft of cement is left above the top
perforations.
16 POH.
17 RIH and DRILL OUT the cement and cement retainer/bridge plug.
18 RUN cement bond log to evaluate repair.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Cementing Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 9 Page 100 of 447

9.26 CEMENT PLUGS - INTRODUCTION

9.26.1 General Guidelines
Cement plugs are usually set by "spotting" cement through drill pipe or tubing. An alternative
method which is rarely used is to place cement at the desired level using a dump bailer. It is
only suitable for small jobs.
For abandonment information regarding cement plugs refer to DOM, Chapter 17, Suspension
and Abandonment.

9.27 CEMENT PLUGS - GENERAL GUIDELINES WHEN SETTING CEMENT PLUGS

9.27.1 Job Design
In deviated wells, where the hole angle is greater than 30 deg, a solid ‘bottom’ for the cement
plug shall be provided by a bridge plug. Alternatively, a highly viscous pill, which must be just
pumpable, may be used.
When setting abandonment plugs in potential loss zones, it is better to set a cement plug in
two stages. The first stage should be a small plug to act as a carrier for the second plug.
The bottom cement plug should be designed with a relatively short thickening time as this plug
is the base for the other abandonment plugs
If the hole is badly washed out, it is better to set two short plugs over the washed out section
than to try to cover this interval in one attempt with a large amount of cement
When setting cement plugs across a casing window (e.g. for side-tracking) a technique has
been successfully applied using a ca. 20 ft blanked off slotted stinger which is reciprocated
across the window while setting the plug to create a jetting action at the window
A kick-off cement plug should only have approximately 25 ft of cement on top of the window.
Enough excess has to be pumped and circulated out immediately after placing the plug.
Wiper darts shall be used to ensure DP is cleaned after a cement plug job.
9.27.2 Volume and Excess Requirements
The Drilling Supervisor and the Cementer shall calculate the relevant volumes (slurry volume,
displacement volume, etc.) independently
As a minimum, plug size must meet or exceed the following requirements:

Casing Size Hole Size Minimum Approx.

(in) (in) Slurry Volume Equivalent
(bbl) Plug Length
(ft)
7 6 15 400
9 5/8 8 1/2 20 300
13 3/8 12 1/4 30 200

For open hole plug backs, any calliper information available should be used to calculate the
slurry volume. If long circulation times have elapsed since the calliper has been run, use 10%
extra excess. If no calliper is available, make a best guess of hole volume (suggest 2in - 3in
enlargement), depending on local experience.
If a cement plug has to be set over perforations, 15% extra excess should be used

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Cementing Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 9 Page 101 of 447

To ensure that uncontaminated cement is placed across the zone of interest, an excess of
cement slurry shall be pumped, equivalent to a length of at least 50 ft inside the open hole or
casing where the plug is set
Plug lengths should preferably be limited to 500 ft although longer plugs can be accepted in
special cases (e.g. the last plug of a series of plugs may be 600 ft).
It is recommended to use DP/tubing wiper balls after completion of the plug type cement jobs,
to prevent formation of a cement sheath in the DP.
9.27.3 Slurry Requirements for Cements Plugs
To ensure cement hardening within reasonable time after being placed, the cementing recipes
shall be formulated such that:

pumpable time = mixing time + displacing time + 60 minutes.

A fluid loss control additive shall be used to prevent dehydration of the cement slurry, and
subsequent flash setting, when plugging back over very permeable sands, previous
completion intervals, etc. Losses must be cured before plugging back.
The use of thixotropic cement may be considered for use in loss zones
Inside casing or across massive shale sections the cement slurry shall contain no other
additives other than retarders and thinners, unless excess cement is to be circulated out
across depleted formations, in which case, fluid loss control additives shall also be added.

9.28 CEMENT PLUGS - PROCEDURE FOR SETTING BALANCED PLUGS

The following generic procedure shall be used to set a Balanced Plug:

Step Action
1 RUN drill pipe with a stinger of tubing to the planned depth of
the bottom of the plug.
Note: The stinger should have side jets and should be at
least 100 ft longer than the planned cement plug. Use
3.1/2in or smaller tubing in holes with a diameter of
12.1/4in or less. The smaller the diameter of the
stinger the less will be the disturbance to the cement
when pulling out of the plug.
2 CIRCULATE a minimum of 150% of the drill pipe/stinger
contents prior to setting the cement plug. The mud must have a
constant gradient prior to commencement of the job.
3 PUMP preflush.
4 MIX and PUMP cement.
Note: The slurry for cement plugs should be batch mixed.
When this is not possible, the slurry must be dumped
until a consistent gradient is achieved. Density shall be
checked using a pressurised mud balance

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Cementing Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 9 Page 102 of 447

5 PUMP postflush to balance the preflush pumped ahead of the

slurry.
6 CHASE with mud and UNDER-DISPLACE cement by 5 bbls.
ROTATE pipe, especially when cement leaves side jets (+/- 20-
30 rpm).
7 PULL BACK to the required top of cement. If the excess
cement is to be circulated out conventionally, PULL BACK to a
position 10 ft –15 ft higher than the required top of cement to
minimise disturbance caused by the jetting action of the stinger.
8 CIRCULATE out excess cement immediately after placing the
plug. The top of good cement should be known with fair
accuracy after the job. USE reverse circulation except in the
circumstances detailed below.
Conventional circulation shall be used when:
• • formation strength is known to be
insufficient to support the increased
back pressure.
• • there is no chance that the back
pressure will cause differential sticking.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Cementing Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 9 Page 103 of 447

Step Action
9 If the plug has to be tagged after the cement has hardened,
PULL BACK one more stand and KEEP MOVING the stinger
while waiting on cement (WOC). NEVER stab the cement
stinger back into the plug when the displacement is finished as
this may cause plugging of the stinger.
10 SET the next plug or POH.

9.29 CEMENT PLUGS 4 - PROCEDURE FOR SETTING SHORT PLUGS

Where small amounts of cement are used, e.g. when setting a plug across a window cut in casing, of
maximum length 50 ft, the plug can be set by the 'running plug' method as detailed below:

Step Action
1 RUN IN with stinger to required depth. ENSURE that the
circulating head is only 3 ft above the drill floor when the drill
pipe is spaced out for pumping.
Note: The stinger should have side jets and should be at
least 100 ft longer than the planned cement plug. Use
3.1/2in or smaller tubing in holes with a diameter of
12.1/4in or less. The smaller the diameter of the
stinger the less will be the disturbance to the cement
when pulling out of the plug.
2 CIRCULATE a minimum of 150% of the drill pipe/stinger
contents prior to setting the cement plug. The mud must have a
constant gradient prior to commencement of the job.
3 PUMP preflush
4 MIX and PUMP cement.
Note: The slurry for cement plugs should be batch mixed.
When this is not possible, the slurry must be dumped
until a consistent gradient is achieved. Density shall
be checked using a pressurised mud balance
5 PUMP postflush to balance the preflush pumped ahead of the
slurry.
6 CHASE with mud. As soon as the cement is +/- 50 ft in the
annulus, RAISE drill pipe slowly to the maximum distance
possible above the rotary table, while continuing to displace to
the balance point.
7 PULL BACK to the required top of cement. If the excess
cement is to be circulated out conventionally, PULL BACK to a
position 10 ft- 15 ft higher than the required top of cement to
minimise disturbance caused by the jetting action of the stinger.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Cementing Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 9 Page 104 of 447

8 CIRCULATE out excess cement immediately after placing the

plug. The top of good cement should be known with fair
accuracy after the job. USE reverse circulation except in the
circumstances detailed below.
Conventional circulation shall be used when:
• • formation strength is known to be
sufficient to support the increased back
pressure.
• • there is no chance that the back
pressure will cause differential sticking.
9 If the plug has to be tagged after the cement has hardened,
PULL BACK one more stand and KEEP MOVING the stinger
while waiting on cement (WOC). NEVER stab the cement
stinger back into the plug when the displacement is finished as
this may cause plugging of the stinger.
10 SET the next plug or POH.

9.30 REPORTING REQUIREMENTS

9.30.1 Cement Programme
The Drilling Supervisor shall send required cement information, incorporating basic well data,
design specification and hole parameters to the Cementing Contractor.
Within three days the Cementing Contractor will supply the Drilling Supervisor, Drilling
Engineer, and Drilling Superintendent with a draft Cement Programme for comments.
At least 24 hours prior to cementation, the final Cement Programme, accepted by all parties,
will be issued by Cementing Contractor.

Note: This programme is final and changes are only allowed with authorisation of Drilling
Superintendent.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Cementing Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 9 Page 105 of 447

APPENDIX A

Cement Test Form

Laboratory Report No: Date:
Job Type: Depth: BHST
Rig Field BHCT
Well No Temp. Gradient Cmt Sample No.

Type of Slurry LEAD TAIL

Type of Cement
Additives Concentration Concentration

Slurry Density (lbs/gal)

Type of Water
Water Req’d (gals/sk)
Mixing Fluid (gals/sk)
Slurry Yield (cu.ft/sk)

Thickening Time @ BHCT

40 Bc (Hrs:Mins)
70 Bc (Hrs:Mins)
100 Bc (Hrs:Mins)
Atmos. Cons. at BHCT 0 mins 5 mins 10 20 mins 0 5 10 mins 20 mins
mins min min
(Bc)
RPM Readings PV YP RPM Readings P YP
V
Rheology 600 300 200 100 6 3 cp pphfs 600 300 200 100 6 3 cp pphfs

80oF
BHCT
Pump Rate (BPM) / Flow

Fluid Loss @ BHCT (mls)

API Free Water (%)
12-hr Comp. Strength (psi)
24-hr Comp. Strength (psi)

Remarks:

Requested by:
Distributed to:
Analysed by: Signed:

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Bits and Hydraulics Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 10 Page 106 of 447

10 BITS
In preparation of the drilling programme an approved Bit Programme is developed by the Drilling
Engineer.
The Drilling Supervisor in collaboration with the Drilling Superintendent will select the bits to be run.
The Bit Programme is only a guide and is based on the best offset experience. Actual bit performance
will be affected by local geology.
The Drilling Supervisor is responsible for the following:
10.1.1 Bit Selection
Before a new bit is selected, consult the mud logger and/or the geologist to ascertain the
formation lithology expected for the next run. Bit records on offset wells are useless
without proper lithology correlation.
Determine the bit grading and bottoms-up lithology from the previous bit run.
If a different bit than previously programmed is to be selected agreement will be obtained
with the Drilling Engineer.
Use a softer formation bit if the formation is not weight responsive to a drill off test or if
weight on bit (WOB) will be limited for some reason.
Select a gauge protected bit when abrasive formations are anticipated.
Seek advice from the directional drilling contractor for optimal bit / motor / MWD / BHA
performance.
10.1.2 Optimising Bit Performance
Install nozzles as per the manufacturer's recommended procedure and sized per the
hydraulics Programme.
Utilise the manufacturer's recommended maximum WOB and RPM data.
Run a junk sub if lost inserts are suspected on bottom or when diamond coring is
anticipated.
Ensure the driller takes special care where known ledges exist (subsea wellhead, liner
top, or formation).
Lay out singles for reaming to bottom, especially when undergauge hole is known to exist,
to avoid pinching the new bit.
Instruct the driller to establish a new bottomhole pattern by drilling one foot of new hole
with low WOB and RPM before proceeding to optimise the drilling parameters.
Run a drill off test to determine the optimum bit weight and rotary rpm for the formation
being drilled.
A drill off test determines the penetration response to bit weight when drilling a specific
formation.
Drill Off Test Procedure:
Set the pump speed and the rotary speed.
Slowly increase the bit weight to the maximum permitted by either the bit manufacture
specifications, the BHA or rotary torque.
Keep the rotary speed constant.
Record the time to drill-off in 2,000 lb. increments.
A plot of the drill-off time for each increment versus the WOB should reveal:

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Bits and Hydraulics Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 10 Page 107 of 447

• The maximum effective weight, above which floundering becomes apparent.

• The weight range that is penetration rate responsive.
• The threshold weight below which no appreciable drilling rate response will result.
Select the lowest RPM which optimises the penetration rate when drilling hard and
abrasive formations. Calculations should be performed to ensure the optimal economic
performance is attained, taking due account of depth, bit cost and operating rig rate.
10.1.3 Bit Grading
The Drilling Supervisor will personally grade used bits using the IADC Used Bit Grading
System.
Clean and evaluate each bit immediately after it has been pulled.
10.2 HYDRAULICS
Hydraulics includes the selection of jets, annular velocity for hole cleaning, annular pressure drops for
calculating equivalent circulating density (ECD), and pipe movement effects to determine swab and
surge pressures.
Swab and Surge pressures are important for the following reasons:
More than 25% of blowouts occur while tripping out of the hole with drillpipe. These
blowouts are a direct result of pressure reductions in the borehole by swabbing
and/or failure to fill the hole properly.
Excessive surge pressures created while tripping in hole with drillpipe, or casing, are
one of the primary causes for lost circulation problems.
Pressure changes caused by alternating surge/swab pressures cannot be
completely avoided when tripping pipe in or out of the borehole. These alternating
pressure changes cause hole sloughing and generally promote unstable hole
conditions such as bridging across permeable formations and fill on bottom.
Swab pressure reductions often result in contamination of the mud by allowing the
entry of formation fluids into the borehole.
The Drilling Engineer is responsible for specifying what jets and flowrates will be run. The
mud logger typically is the source of swab and surge pressure predictions.
10.2.1 Swab and Surge Pressure
The Drilling Supervisor is responsible for the following:
On all wells, consult the Drilling Engineer, mud loggers, and all other resources
available for a computer generated recommendation for maximum pipe pulling speed.
Integrate the PVT and swab/surge data from the mud logger display monitor to
optimise pipe pulling and running speeds.

10.2.2 Hydraulics Programme

The Drilling engineer will supply a hydraulics programme recommendation along with or
subsequent to the drilling programme. The Drilling Supervisor, using the mud loggers on site
will check this. Any substantial changes will be discussed with the Drilling Engineer prior to
implementation.
Prior to drilling operations the Drilling Supervisor will:
Double check standpipe gauge readings against other pressure data sources such as
the mud logger and hydraulic choke panel.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Bits and Hydraulics Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 10 Page 108 of 447

Efficiency test mud pumps prior to starting a new hole section or before conducting a
critical operation such as displacing cement. Pump into the trip tank, against back-
pressure, and compare the actual volume recovered to the number of strokes.
Compare to theoretical displacement volume to calculate efficiency.
Check contractor's pump parts inventory to ensure programmed hydraulics can be
achieved.
Instruct mud loggers to pay close attention to pump pressure and pump stroke trends
to catch washouts in the early stages.
Review the mud loggers carbide lag data to detect hole washout which will result in
poor hole cleaning efficiency.
Consider increasing the flowrate or pumping high viscosity pills if there is a poor hole
cleaning situation.
Use optimised sized nozzle for jet velocity and hole cleaning requirements.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Formation Evaluation Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 11 Page 109 of 447

11 FORMATION EVALUATION
Logging objectives are set by the Geology or Petroleum Engineering Departments. They are responsible to
Nimir Petroleum Limited for quality control of the logging company.

11.1 HOLE CONDITIONING

The Drilling Supervisor is responsible for the following:
Ensure that enough rathole has been drilled to accommodate the logging toolstring, sufficient
sump for guns to be dropped off, production logs to be run, or downhole pumps to be placed.
Circulate bottoms up and wiper trip. Circulate sweeps and spot pills as hole conditions dictate.
Strap out of the hole.
Utilise the pipe spinner when POH across known problem intervals.
11.2 PREJOB PLANNING
The Drilling Supervisor is responsible for the following:
Discuss the subject of pressure control with the Logging Engineer. Normally, no pressure
control will be required.
Ensure the availability of backup tools in the event of failure.
Ensure that a tension sensor is utilised.
Confirm that cut and strip over equipment and matching crossover sub are onsite. A pump in
sub should also be sourced. Discuss the condition of the conductor line (age and length) and
condition of the rope socket (rating and last time re-headed).
Discuss the type of hole finders onsite and determine whether one will be run as a
precautionary measure.
Discuss the logging programme with the Geologist and Logging Engineer. Estimate the timing
for each run and the need for prior and inter programme wiper trips.
11.3 WIRELINE LOGGING
11.3.1 Process/Safety
The Drilling Supervisor is responsible for the following:
The hole should be conditioned to minimise logging problems as they relate to hole condition
Wiper trips will be made as hole conditions dictate and before all Repeat Fluid Tester runs
(RFT/MDT).
Co-ordinate rig-up plans with the toolpusher and set a time goal.
If conditions are such that logging operations will unduly jeopardise the hole or personnel then
he should immediately contact the Drilling Superintendent.
Ensure that all equipment is available to safely offload RFT sample chambers.
If sidewall cores are taken, obtain a count of how many shots were fired, how many cores
were recovered, and how many bullets were lost and report on the morning report.
Keep the hole full, by filling though the trip tank and report the volume lost on the morning
report. On critical wells, instruct the driller and mud loggers to monitor the trip tank level at all
times.
Report the operations time of all logging runs separately and note all lost time, which occurs
during this period due to tool failures and hole problems.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Formation Evaluation Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 11 Page 110 of 447

Note the depths that each logging tool was run and give details on how many samples were
taken, levels recorded, pressure data obtained, etc.
Send a copy of the caliper log to the office for evaluating hole conditions and for cement job
planning. Note the maximum bottom hole temperature recorded.
Remember that logging misruns are very costly in both rig time and service costs. (Often
logging Contractor's charges a minimum depth charge for each tool run in the string even if no
data is obtained).
The Logging Engineer should be informed of any potential hole problems. He shall ensure that
the Logging Engineer receives the correct information for log headers, mud properties and/or
whole mud samples and number of copies required.
11.3.2 Notification / Responsibilities Requirements
The Drilling Supervisor will be notified if a bridge or excessive overpull are encountered and he
will be present when corrective action is taken.
The Drilling Supervisor will be notified when the tool reaches bottom and observe the total
depth indicated by wireline. Have the Logging Engineer note the casing shoe depth. If the
difference between the drillers and the wireline measurement consistently exceeds 15 ft then
the Drilling Superintendent will be notified.
The Drilling Supervisor will be kept informed when RFT/MDT samples are taken. If the
projected chamber filling time is estimated to exceed one hour, the Drilling Superintendent will
be notified.
The Geologist shall ensure that the relevant personnel receive timely copies of logs or raw
data by whatever transmission techniques are available.
11.4 CORING
The Drilling Engineer is responsible for generating the coring programme in conjunction with the
coring service company. The major considerations for designing a successful coring programme are:
• Use a 60 ft barrel unless poor recovery requires a 30 ft barrel (longer cores can be taken
where a track record of prior successes are established at 60ft).
• Use a full gauge core-head to avoid reaming unless otherwise approved by the Drilling
Superintendent.
• Run a stabilised barrel.
The Drilling Supervisor's responsibilities include the following:
11.4.1 Hole Conditioning
Verify with the coring service representative that all equipment is on site.
Double check that all handling equipment such as boxes, saws and caps / wax, freezing
equipment and Gamma ray equipment are on site.
When the geologist has selected core-point, circulate bottoms up and make a wiper trip.
Circulate sweeps and spot pills as hole conditions dictate.
Check the condition of the dull bit to determine if a cleanout trip is necessary.
11.4.2 Coring Process
Pick up a set of jars in the coring BHA. Check I.D.’s of jars.
Verify that the string has been spaced out with pup joints to eliminate unnecessary
connections.
Circulate bottoms up prior to dropping the ball.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Formation Evaluation Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 11 Page 111 of 447

Maintain a record of pump pressure (PP), rate of penetration and torque:

If PP and Torque increase simultaneously, the core-head is probably ringed out.
If PP increases and/or torque increases, the formation has probably changed.
If PP, torque, ROP, decreases simultaneously, the barrel has jammed.
Obtain a job report from the coring service representative. Make written comments regarding
his performance and forward the report to the Nimir Petroleum Limited office.
When coring operations are complete, instruct the driller to lay down singles and prepare to
ream the cored interval.
Ensure that cores are prepared for shipment per geological instructions to the designated lab.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Well Control Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 12 Page 112 of 447

12 WELL CONTROL

This section has been placed in this manual for completeness. Details of Well Control procedures and Well
Control equipment requirements can be found in the dedicated Nimir Petroleum Limited Well Control
Manual. This is to avoid potential confusion or conflict between documentation.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Drill String Design Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 13 Page 113 of 447

13 DRILL STRING DESIGN

13.1 INTRODUCTION
The drillstring is an important part of the rotary drilling process. It is the connection between the rig
and the drill bit. Although the drillstring is often a source of problems such as washouts, twist-offs, and
collapse failures, it is seldom designed to prevent these problems from occurring. In many cases,
effective drillstring design could prevent most of the problems.
13.2 PURPOSE
The drillstring is used to:
• Provide a fluid conduit from the rig to the bit
• Impart rotary motion to the drill bit
• Allow weight to be set on the bit
• Lower and raise the bit in the well.
In addition, the drillstring may also:
• Provide some stability to the bottom hole assembly to minimise vibration and bit bouncing
• Allow formation fluid and pressure testing through the drillstring
• Permit through-pipe formation evaluation when logging tools cannot be run in the open hole
e.g., highly deviated or horizontal wells
13.3 COMPONENTS
The components of the drillstring are varied and serve many purposes.
The drillstring consists primarily of the drillpipe and the bottom hole assembly (BHA). The drillpipe
section can contain conventional drillpipe, heavyweight drill pipe, and occasionally a reamer. The
BHA may contain the following items:
• Drill collars (several types and sizes)
• Stabilisers
• Jars
• Reamers
• Shock subs
• Bit, bit sub
Special tools in the BHA or drillpipe may include:
• Motors
• Turbines
• Bent subs
• Measurement while-drilling (MWD) tools
• Drillstem testing tools
• Junk baskets.

13.4 OBJECTIVES OF DRILLING DESIGN

The objectives of drillstring design are to:
 Allomax Ltd 2000
 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Drill String Design Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 13 Page 114 of 447

• Keep the maximum stress at any point in the drillstring less than yield strength derated by a
design factor.
• Select components and configure assemblies to retard fatigue as much as economically
practical.
• Provide equipment that is resistant to H2S if it is expected.
13.5 DESIGN ASSUMPTIONS
• For simplicity, the assumptions outlined below are built into the calculations in this section:
• Tension is approximated using the “Buoyed Weight” method
• Buckling is assumed to occur only below the point where buoyed string weight equals weight
on bit. This point is sometimes called the “Neutral Point in Tension”, or the “Neutral Point”.
• Increasing hole angle at the BHA reduces the fraction of BHA weight available for bit weight
• Tension calculations assume the string is hanging vertically. For high angle and extended
reach drilling, this assumption shall be modified as it would otherwise result in too conservative
a design
• Material yield strength is the specified minimum for the component being considered
• Drill pipe tube wall thickness is the minimum for the stated drill pipe class
• Makeup torque for tool joints shall be 60% of tool joint torsional strength
• Drillstring design shall be such that a minimum overpull capability of 100,000 lb over string
weight in air exists at all times. Overpull capability shall be based on a maximum overpull of
80% of premium pipe tensile strength rating being applied.

Fatigue is the most common cause of drillstring failures and every practical step must be taken to
reduce it.

13.6 TENSION AND BENDING

A common cause of pipe fatigue is the stress caused whilst rotating in a dogleg.
This stress in the pipe comes primarily from two components:
Tension from buoyed drillstring weight below the point of interest
Stress caused by the forced bending of the pipe to conform to hole shape, (see Figure 13. 1).
These two individual components add to each other.
As the pipe rotates, “ST”(from tension) will be the average tensile stress over the cross section of the
pipe, and “ST” + “SB” (SB from bending) will be the range of stress experienced by a point on the outer
surface of the pipe (see Figure 13.1). Decreasing either one or both of these stress levels will
decrease the rate of fatigue attack, other variables constant. Therefore, dogleg severity (DLS) should
be kept as small as possible and planned doglegs should be kept as low in the hole as other
considerations permit. All stress concentrators should be eliminated where possible.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Drill String Design Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 13 Page 115 of 447

SB = (E) X (OD/2) X (sin ) ST = (LOAD / AREA)

ESS
PIPE CENTRE

STR
LINE

ESS
RE

STR
MO

LESS
OD/2

ELONGATION ANGLE OF
DUE TO BEND BEND

TENSION

Figure 13.1 Drillpipe under Influence of Tension and Bending

+SB

ST

-SB
Total Stress at any Point

1 Revolution

Time

Figure 13.2 Rate of Fatigue Diagram

13.6.1 Methods of Reducing Fatigue

Limit bit weight (or add BHA weight) to eliminate buckling in the normal weight drill pipe if the
drillstring is to be rotated.
 Allomax Ltd 2000
 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Drill String Design Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 13 Page 116 of 447

Always select products and components and design assemblies with smooth geometric
transitions. Sharp section changes magnify stress and accelerate fatigue. This rule applies to
the total drillstring, including internal upsets, thread roots, slip cuts, transitions between
sections etc.
Specify minimum fracture toughness in the drillstring material whenever possible.
Specify an internal upset geometry on new drill pipe that will not magnify stress.
Reduce the number and severity of stress concentrators that are placed on the pipe through
poor handling practices.
Reduce the degree of drill pipe bending (dogleg) and the degree of BHA bending and buckling
to the lowest levels consistent with other objectives. Other considerations being equal, always
select the trajectory and operating parameters with the lowest drill pipe bending and BHA
bending/buckling.
Use MWD shock logs to monitor and control drillstring vibration.
Monitor and decrease corrosiveness of the mud system to the lowest practical level.
Use mud lubricant.
13.7 DRILLSTRING DESIGN FACTORS
The following information is presented below to give operational personnel an overview of the factors
in drillstring design.
Design factors are numbers that are used to derate the load capacities of components and
assemblies. Design factors provide an extra margin of capacity to take care of inexactness in our
assumptions about material properties, loads and hole conditions. This section details the design
factors to be used for drillstrings.
13.7.1 Tension(DFT)
This factor is divided into a component’s maximum tensile load capacity to determine the
maximum allowable load that can comfortably be applied to that component. Design Factor for
tension (DFT) should be 1.15 (i.e. 85% of minimum yield strength).
13.7.2 Margin of Overpull (MOP)
This is excess tensile capacity above the normal hanging or working load (PW ) to account for
factors such as hole drag. MOP’s may vary from 50 000 to 150 000 lb depending on hole
conditions.
13.7.3 Excess BHA Weight (DFBHA)
This factor is multiplied by the desired weight on bit (WOB) to determine minimum buoyed (in
mud) BHA weight. This excess weight in the BHA provides an extra margin to keep the neutral
point below the top of the BHA. The recommended value for DFBHA is 1.15 (85% buoyed
weight).
13.7.4 Torsion
Applied torsion is limited to tool joint make-up torque. Standard make-up torque is 60% of tool
joint torsional yield strength, and tool joints are almost always weaker in torsion than the tubes
to which they are attached. Therefore a design factor in torsion is not necessary for drillstring
design.
13.7.5 Collapse Pressure (DFc)
Collapse pressure capacities are first derated to account for the effect of any simultaneous
tension, and then the derated capacity is further reduced by dividing by the collapse design
factor. DFc should be 1.125.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Drill String Design Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 13 Page 117 of 447

13.7.6 Burst Pressure (DFB)

Burst pressure loading is rarely a concern in drillstring design because surface pressures
rarely approach the burst capacities of most drill pipe. The design factor for burst is divided
into a component’s burst pressure capacity to give the maximum permissible burst pressure
that may be applied to that component. DFB should be 1.176. Burst capacity is increased by
simultaneous tension, but this benefit is normally ignored in drillstring design.
13.7.7 DS-1 Drill Stem Design and Inspection Standard
Nimir Petroleum Limited has adopted the drillstring design and inspection criteria
recommended in the DEA Project 74 DS-1 Drill Stem Design and Inspection Standard (TH Hill
and Associates).
13.8 DRILLSTRING DESIGN PROCEDURES - SELECT DRILL COLLAR DIAMETER
13.8.1 Introduction
The following sections outline the steps for drillstring design in accordance with DS-1.
Design is a multi-step process which usually begins at the bottom of the hole and works
upward. Following is a discussion of a simple tension and torsion design. These steps and
considerations will figure in most design situations.
13.8.2 General Guidelines
Potential drillstring vibration hazards and cures shall be taken into account when designing
BHA’s and recommending drilling parameters, (see Drillstring Vibrations).
Unless mechanical hole sticking is a problem, the largest diameter drill collars consistent with
other needs are generally best. Their increased stiffness means more directional stability.
Also, they will have fewer connections for a desired weight on bit. They allow shorter BHA’s
which can lessen the likelihood of differential sticking. Larger OD collars in a given hole also
mean less lateral freedom of movement in the BHA. This decreases buckling stress and the
rate of connection fatigue. In practice however, drill collar size is often determined by existing
rig inventory. Other factors that come into play are:
• Fishability considerations
• Capabilities of the rig handling equipment
• Directional control requirements
• Hydraulics
• Desired exterior features (spiral grooves, elevator groove, or other feature)
• The use of spiral, grooved drill collars, if available, shall be implemented for all
wells which exhibit a risk of differential sticking.
13.9 DRILLSTRING DESIGN PROCEDURES – BHA CONNECTIONS AND FEATURES
13.9.1 Application
The following points apply not only to drill collars and HWDP from the rig inventory, but also to
the many Specialised tools that find their way into the hole. Stabilisers, motors, MWD and
LWD tools, hole openers, underreamers, jars and many other tools are all subject to fatigue.
13.9.2 Bending Strength Ratio
The predominant consideration, especially in selecting larger BHA connections is Bending
Strength Ratio (BSR). BSR is a ratio of the relative stiffness of the box to the pin for a given
connection. If a connection is selected with either a pin or box that is out of balance with the
other member, the stress level tends to increase and accelerate fatigue in the weaker
members is accelerated.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Drill String Design Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 13 Page 118 of 447

The traditional target BSR is 2.5, and acceptable BSR ranges centre on this point. However,
BSR ranges are rough guidelines established by “experience” and should not be used as strict
operating limits, e.g., drill pipe tube tensile capacity. Staying within recommended BSR
guidelines does not eliminate connection fatigue failures, nor does exceeding the
recommended ranges always lead to fatigue failures.
In theory, high BSR’s should cause accelerated pin failure, and low BSR’s should cause
accelerated box failures. A balanced BSR should provide maximum connection life. However,
field experience shows that larger OD collars (8in and up) suffer predominantly from box
fatigue cracks even when they operate at or near the ideal BSR of 2.5.
This indicates that higher BSR’s may be more appropriate for these sizes. On the other hand,
4.3/4in collars with BSR’s as low as 1.8 are widely used but rarely experience box fatigue
cracks. Therefore, the suggested BSR ranges in the following table are probably better. In
every case however, experience under given conditions should be a major determinant in BSR
selection:
Drill Collar OD Traditional BSR Range Suggested BSR Range
less than 6in 2.25-2.75 1.8-2.5
6-8in 2.25-2.75 2.25-2.75
8in and up 2.25-2.75 2.5-3.2

One frequently overlooked connection is the one between the top drill collar and the bottom
joint of HWDP. If a straight (non-bottleneck) crossover sub is used, and the collar OD is larger
than the HWDP tool joint OD, the resulting BSR of that one connection will be exceedingly
high. Pin failures in the bottom joint of HWDP are not uncommon, and this is the probable
reason. The problem is helped by using a bottleneck sub to smooth the change in cross
section.
13.9.3 BHA Connection Thread Form
Thread forms with full root radii should be used in all BHA connections to maximise fatigue
resistance. API Regular, NC, and 5-1/2 Full Hole connections meet this requirement, though
the API NC thread form (V-038R) is superior to the others. The H-90 thread form is also
considered acceptable even though it does not have a full root radius. Remember, all
connections that employ a “standard” V-065 thread form, except the PAC are obsolete.
Therefore, you should break from tradition and specify “NC” instead of the obsolete “IF” or
“XH” names. This eliminates the (very low) probability of receiving the fatigue prone V-065
thread form in your collars.
13.9.4 Stress Relief Features
Stress relief features as described in API Spec 7 Section 6 should be specified on all BHA
connections NC-38 and larger. These features include the “stress relief pin” and “boreback
box”. They extend connection fatigue life by eliminating un-engaged thread roots which act as
stress concentrators. Stress relief features are beneficial on HWDP connections. Pin stress
relief grooves are not recommended for connections smaller than NC-38 because they may
weaken the connection’s tensile and torsional strength and because fatigue is often less of a
problem than static loads on small connections. Boreback boxes could be used on smaller
connections without weakening them, and should be considered if box fatigue is occurring.
13.9.5 BHA Connection Torsional Strength
Since torsion is transmitted from the top down, BHA connections are usually subjected to
lower torsional loads than the connections above. However, if “stick/slip” is occurring, or if you
are running a tapered or “slim” assembly, especially one using PAC connections, torsional

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Drill String Design Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 13 Page 119 of 447

strength should be checked to confirm that it is greater than the expected operating torsion at
the BHA.
13.9.6 BHA Connection Torsional Strength
Since torsion is transmitted from the top down, BHA connections are usually subjected to
lower torsional loads than the connections above. However, if “stick/slip” is occurring, or if you
are running a tapered or “slim” assembly, especially one using PAC connections, torsional
strength should be checked to confirm that it is greater than the expected operating torsion at
the BHA.
Drill collar connection torsional strength can be calculated by the following formula:

TS = MUT Equation (13.1)

f
where: TS = DC connection torsional strength (ft-lb)
MUT = DC makeup torque (ft-lb)
f = The factor “f” is simply the decimal fraction of torsional yield
strength that forms the basis for makeup torque values (see
following table).
Drill Collar Type Drill Collar OD ≤ 6.7/8 in Drill Collar OD > 6.7/8 in
PAC f = 0.795 N/A
H-90 f = 0.511 f = 0.562
Other f = 0.568 f = 0.625

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Drill String Design Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 13 Page 120 of 447

13.10 DRILLSTRING DESIGN PROCEDURES – DETERMINE LENGTH OF DRILL COLLAR SECTION

13.10.1 Introduction
The number of drill collars in the BHA shall be determined by the WOB utilised on offset wells,
maximum WOB rating for bit type and anticipated mud weight. The minimum number of collars
shall be run at all times.
13.10.2 Types of BHA Configurations
The length of the drill collar section will be determined in part by whether or not HWDP is to be
used for bit weight and by the BHA configuration. Three types of BHA configurations are
covered in these design recommendations and are illustrated in Figure 13.3.

Drillpipe

HDWP For
Transition Only HWDP For
Transition
and WOB

Neutral Point

Neutral Point
Neutral Point

HWDP For
Transition
and WOB
Tapered Drill
Collar String

Drill Collars

TYPE A TYPE B TYPE C

Figure 13.3 BHA Configurations

Type A: This configuration uses heavy weight drill pipe above the drill collars as a transition to
smooth the abrupt section change. Full weight on bit is still applied with drill collars.
Type B: This configuration has only enough drill collars to achieve desired directional control
or other objective and applies bit weight with both collars and HWDP. It provides easier and
faster rig floor handling of the BHA, reduces differential sticking tendency and has apparently
reduced drill collar connection failures.
Type C: The type three configuration has more than one drill collar size but still applies bit
weight with both collars and HWDP.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Drill String Design Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 13 Page 121 of 447

13.11 DRILLSTRING DESIGN PROCEDURES - DETERMINE LENGTH OF DRILL COLLAR SECTION

13.11.1 Type A BHA’s
If the type A BHA configuration is used, the minimum length of the drill collar section is
calculated as follows:

LDC = (WOB) x ( DFBHA) Equation (13.2)

∅)
(WDC) x (KB) x (cos∅

Where:
LDC = Minimum length of DC section (ft)
WOB = Maximum weight on bit (lb)
DFBHA = Design factor for excess BHA weight
KB = Buoyancy factor
cosØ = Maximum hole angle at BHA (degrees)
WDC = Air weight of drill collars (lb/ft)
The design factor for excess BHA weight (DFBHA) is chosen to ensure that the neutral point
stays below the top of the BHA. This factor is assigned a value of 1.15. Hard drilling conditions
may require higher values. After the minimum drill collar section length is calculated, it is
usually rounded to the next full stand of collars for convenience.
13.11.2 Type B and C BHA’s
If a type B or type C BHA configuration is used, the number of drill collars is determined by
directional control, equipment availability or other considerations. The amount of HWDP
required to apply the necessary WOB and keep the neutral point in the BHA can be
determined by Equation 13.3.
13.11.3 Type A BHA’s
For a type A BHA configuration, the amount of HWDP for transition is determined by past
experience. Anywhere from 12 to 30 joints is common.
13.11.4 Type B and C BHA’s
When HWDP will be used for bit weight, the minimum length of HWDP to provide the desired
weight on bit is calculated as follows:
Equation (13.3)

LHWDP = [(WOB) x (DFBHA) - {(WDC1) x ( LDC1) + (WDC2) x (LDC2)}] 1

[(KB) x (cos ∅)] WHWDP

Where:
LHWDP = Minimum length of HWDP section (ft)
WOB = Maximum weight on bit (lb)
DFBHA = Design factor for excess BHA length
WHWDP= HWDP air weight (lb/ft)
WDC1 = Air weight of drill collars in first section (lb/ft)
LDC1 = Length of first drill collar section (ft)
 Allomax Ltd 2000
 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Drill String Design Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 13 Page 122 of 447

WDC2 = Air weight of drill collars in second section (lb/ft)

LDC2 = Length of second drill collar section (ft)
KB = Buoyancy factor
cos∅ = Maximum hole angle at BHA (degrees)

13.12 DRILLSTRING DESIGN PROCEDURES – CALCULATE STIFFNESS RATIO

The Stiffness Ratio (SR) of the sections above and below each transition must be compared to
help quantify the abruptness of the section change and determine the need for transition pipe.
This is accomplished by dividing the section modulus (Z) of the lower section tube by the
section modulus of the upper.

SR = (Z LOWER) Equation (13.4)

(Z UPPER)

Section moduli for drill pipe, heavy weight drill pipe and drill collar tubes are given in API RP
7G.
Like BSR, stiffness ratio is not a strictly quantitative performance limit, and experience should
be a major determinant in setting the desired maximum SR. If drill pipe failures are occurring
near the top of the BHA despite adequate drill collar weight for applied WOB, transition pipe
may be needed to smooth the section change. Criteria for permissible stiffness ratio varies
between different operators and areas. The following maximums are typical:
For routine drilling or very low failure rate experience, keep SR below 5.5.
For severe drilling or for significant failure rate experience, keep SR below 3.5
13.13 DRILLPIPE TENSION DESIGN NOMENCLATURE
The basis for selecting various pipe grades to make up a drillstring is to always maintain at least the
desired Margin of Overpull (MOP) at all points in the string. This is accomplished by adding the lowest
pipe grade a joint at a time starting from the top of the BHA and working upward. Each joint must
support the BHA weight plus the drill pipe below that joint. When the working load (PW ) is reached for
that grade of drill pipe, the drill pipe is switched to a higher grade. This process continues until the
string is complete. Tensile design nomenclature is reviewed below and illustrated in Figure 13.4.
Tensile Design Nomenclature – Diagram
5in 19.50 lbs/ft grade E Premium class DP
(assume DFT = 1.15 MOP = 100,000 lbs)

TENSILE LOAD CAPACTIY (PT)

ALLOWABLE LOAD (PA)

DFT

MOP
WORKING LOAD (PW )

170.1 270.1 311.5

TENSILE LOAD (1000's LBS)

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Drill String Design Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 13 Page 123 of 447

Figure 13.4 Tensile Design Nomenclature

Tensile Load Capacity (PT): This is the calculated tensile pull to yield the pipe body. Tensile
capacities are given in API RP 7G.
Design Factor in Tension (DFT): The factor used to derate the tensile load capacity to obtain
allowable load (PA) Use a DFT of 1.15.
Allowable Load (PA): This is the maximum load we are comfortable placing on the pipe, including an
allowance for possible trouble. It is the tensile capacity derated by a design factor.
Margin Of Overpull (MOP): The design excess pull capacity above working load (PW ) to compensate
for expected drag, possible sticking, slip crushing and the effect of circulating pressure on tension.
Working Load (PW): Working load is the expected maximum tension that will occur during normal
operations.
Note : Drillpipe weights used should be adjusted for tooljoints i.e. 19.5lb/ft = 20.89 - 22.60 lb/ft
depending on tool joint standard.

13.13.1 Calculate Allowable Load (PA)

The allowable drill pipe load is determined by:

PA = PT Equation (13.5)
DFT

Where:

PA = Maximum allowable tensile load (lb)

PT = Pipe tensile capacity (lb)
DFT = Design factor in tension

13.13.2 Set Margin of Overpull (MOP)

MOP is the desired amount of excess tension above working load (PW ) to account for hole
drag, to provide excess pull capacity in the event the pipe becomes stuck and to compensate
for the “piston” effect of circulating pressure on tension. The first two elements are determined
by local conditions or Company requirements. The effect of circulating pressure can be
estimated by the following:

∆Ρ = (∆
∆ Pr BIT) x (Ai) Equation (13.6)

Where:

∆Ρ = The estimated increase in drillpipe tension due to circulating

pressure (lb)
∆ Pr BIT = Pressure drop across the bit (psi)
Ai = Drillpipe internal area (in2)
MOP values from 50 - 150 000 lb are common. MOP is usually higher for larger drill
pipe sizes, when the probability of sticking is higher, and where high hole drag is

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Drill String Design Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 13 Page 124 of 447

expected. For initial calculations, 100,000 lb overpull above string weight (in air) will
be applied.

13.13.3 Calculate Working Load (PW)

Maximum working load (PW ) is the allowable load minus the margin of overpull:

PW = PA - MOP Equation (13.7)

Where:

PW = Working load (lb)

PA = Allowable load (lb)
MOP = Margin of overpull (lb)
13.13.4 Calculate the Maximum Length of the Drillpipe Sections
13.13.4.1 First Drill Pipe Section
The maximum length of the first drill pipe section above the BHA can be calculated
as follows:

(Equation 13.8)

LDP1 = [(PW1)-{(WDC1 x LDC1) + (WDC2 x LDC2) + (WHWDP x LHWDP)}] 1

[(KB)] W1

Where:
LDP1 = Maximum length of drillpipe in Section 1 (ft)
PW1 = Working load of drillpipe in Section 1 (ft)
WDC1 = Air weight of drill collars in first section (lb/ft)
LDC1 = Length of first drill collar section (ft)
WDC2 = Air weight of drill collars in second section (lb/ft)
LDC2 = Length of second drill collar section (ft)
KB = Buoyancy factor
WHWDP = Air weight of HWDP (lb/ft)
LHWDP = Length of HWDP section (ft)
W1 = Air weight of drillpipe in Section 1 (lb/ft)
13.13.4.2
13.13.4.3 Second Drill Pipe Section
The maximum length of the second drillpipe section above the BHA can be
calculated as follows:

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Drill String Design Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 13 Page 125 of 447

LDP2 = [ ( PW2 - PW1 )] Equation (13.9)

[ (W2) x (KB)]
Where:
LDP2 = Maximum length of drillpipe in section 2 (ft)
PW2 = Working load of drillpipe in section 2 (lb)
PW1 = Working load of drillpipe in section 1 (lb)
W2 = Air weight of drillpipe in section 2 (lb/ft)
KB = Buoyancy factor
13.13.4.4 Third Drill Pipe Section
The maximum length of the third drillpipe section above the BHA can be calculated
as follows:
LDP3 = [ ( PW3 - PW2) ] Equation (13.10)
[ (W3) x (KB)]
Where:
LDP3 = Maximum length of drillpipe in section 3 (ft)
PW3 = Working load of drillpipe in Section 3 (lb)
PW2 = Working load of drillpipe in Section 2 (lb)
W3 = Air weight of drillpipe in Section 3 (lb/ft)
KB = Buoyancy factor

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Drill String Design Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 13 Page 126 of 447

13.13.5 Burst and Collaspe Pressure

13.13.5.1 Burst Pressure
Although not normally a problem, in general, drill pipe should not be used in
applications requiring high burst pressure loading if gas is the source of the high
pressure. Premium tubing (i.e. Hydril, VAM) connections are usually better suited to
this service than used rotary shouldered connections.
In no event shall drill pipe of any grade be used to carry gas containing H2S
having a partial pressure greater than 0.05 psi.
For other applications, burst pressure ratings for drill pipe tubes are given in API RP
7G. These ratings have been calculated assuming minimum material properties and
no axial load. A design factor of 1.176 should be divided into the burst rating of the
drill pipe tube to set its maximum burst pressure differential. While simultaneous
tension increases a tube’s burst pressure capacity, this benefit is to be ignored in
most cases.
13.13.5.2 Collapse Pressure
The net collapse pressure at any point on the drillstring under static conditions is
calculated as follows:

Prc = PrA - PrDP + D (GA - GDP) Equation (13.11)

Where:
Prc = Net collapse pressure on drill pipe (psi)
PrA = Surface annulus pressure (psi)
PrDP = Surface drill pipe pressure (psi)
D = Depth of interest (ft)
GA = Fluid gradient in annulus (psi/ft)
GDP = Fluid gradient in drill pipe (psi/ft)

Simultaneous tension reduces drill pipe collapse capacity. Therefore, collapse

capacity should always be derated for anticipated tension.

13.13.6 Derating Collapse Pressure Capacity for Simultaneous Tension

The nominal collapse pressure rating of drill pipe is given in API RP 7G. If the drill pipe is
under combined tension and collapse pressure loads, the collapse rating must be derated. The
derating factor can be obtained from Figure 13.5. Figure 13.5 requires assuming an “average”
yield strength for the drill pipe. For this purpose we will use the minimum yield strength for the
drill pipe grade as shown in the following table.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Drill String Design Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 13 Page 127 of 447

Grade Minimum Yield Strength (psi)

E 75,000
X 95,000
G 105,000
A 135,000

Ellipse of Bi-axial Yield Stress

Applicable to plastic collapse only.

Percent of Nominal Collapse Pressure

Axial Stress 0

Compression Tension &

& Burst Burst 20

40
Compression & Tension &
Burst Collapse

60
Hoop Stress

80

100

0 20 40 60 80 100

Axial Tension-Percent of 'Average' Yield Strength

Figure 13.5 Ellipse of Bi-axial Yield Strength

Example Calculation of Collapse Pressure Capacity with Applied Tension

Problem
Determine the collapse pressure capacity of 5in, 19.50 lb/ft grade E drill pipe under a tensile
load of 50,000 lb

Solution
First express the axial load as a percent of minimum yield strength.

% Min YS = (Axial Load) x 100 Equation (13.12)

(PT)

Where:
Axial Load = Axial load of the drillpipe at the point of interest (lb)
Minimum YS = Minimum yield strength of drillpipe (psi)
PT = DP tube tensile capacity (lb)

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Drill String Design Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 13 Page 128 of 447

% Min YS = (50,000 lb) x 100 = 16%

(311,535 lb)

Entering Figure 13.5 on the horizontal axis at 16%, reading vertically to the curve, then
horizontally to the vertical axis yields a derating factor of 0.90.

Next, multiply the nominal collapse capacity by the derating factor to obtain the derated
collapse capacity.

(7,041 psi) x (0.90) = 6,337 psi.

Given the design factor of 1.125 in collapse, the allowable collapse pressure on this pipe
under these condition would be:

6 337 psi / 1.125 = 5 632 psi

13.14 DRILLSTRING VIBRATION
13.14.1 Introduction
The main sources of vibration are provided by the interaction of the bit with the formation and
the drillstring with the wellbore. The drillstring response to these vibration sources is very
complex. The complexity of down hole vibration is to a large extent due to the coupling which
inherently exists between the motion of the bit and that of the drillstring. The bit is rigidly fixed
to the bottom hole assembly (BHA) hence any movement of the bit directly influences the
response of the drillstring and vice versa.
Application of desired bit weight or rotary speed is sometimes prevented by drillstring
vibrations induced at the bit. In hard rock drilling, such vibration can become severe enough to
endanger the derrick, mast and other surface equipment. The vibration problem is generally
most severe in large hole sizes. Even though little or no evidence of vibration is observed at
the surface, shock loading of the drill collar string is often a major cause of drill collar
connection failure. When such difficulties arise or are expected, the use of a shock (absorber)
sub above the bit should be considered.
Vibration can induce three components of motion in the drillstring and the bit, namely:
• Axial (motion along drillstring axis)
• Torsional (motion causing twist/torque)
• Lateral (side to side motion).
•
All three dynamic motions can be detrimental to the bit and the string.
There are a number of mechanisms which can cause severe downhole vibration. Six
mechanisms have been identified and are described in the following section.
Furthermore, the following mechanisms can be coupled. Often, severe downhole vibration is a
combination of several mechanisms since some mechanisms can trigger others. For example,
bit whirl can be triggered by high bit speeds generated during slip/stick motion: slip/stick can
cause lateral vibration of the BHA (parametric resonance) as the bit accelerates during the slip

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Drill String Design Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 13 Page 129 of 447

phase: and large lateral vibration of the BHA can in turn cause BHA/wellbore interaction and/or
bit bounce.
13.14.2 Slip-Stick
Slip-stick is the non-uniform bit rotation in which the bit stops rotating momentarily at regular
intervals causing the string to periodically torque up and then spin free, accelerating the bit to
high speeds. This mechanism sets up the primary torsional vibrations in the string with a
frequency below 1Hz (i.e. one vibration cycle per second) and can cause severe impact
damage to PDC bits.
13.14.3 Bit Whirl
Bit whirl is the eccentric rotation of the bit about a point other than its geometric centre caused
by bit/wellbore gearing resulting from excessive side cutting forces. This mechanism induces
high frequency lateral/torsional vibration of the bit in the range of 10-50 Hz. This results in a
large increase in impact loading on PDC cutters causing their rapid failure.
13.14.4 Bit Bounce
Bit bounce is the large weight-on-bit fluctuations causing the bit to repeatedly lift off and impact
the formation. This mechanism, which often occurs when drilling with tricone bits in hard
formations, can cause axial bit vibration with a frequency range of 1-10 HZ. The resulting
increase in impact loading can be damaging to the bit and the BHA.
13.14.5 Parametric Resonance
Parametric resonance is the lateral vibration of the BHA due to dynamic instability caused by
the interaction of weight-on-bit and torque-on-bit fluctuations with lateral motion. This
mechanism causes damaging lateral vibrations of the BHA with a frequency range of 1-10 Hz
13.14.6 BHA Whirl
BHA Whirl is the walk of the BHA around the borehole caused by friction driven gearing of
stabiliser/tool joints with the wellbore. The mechanism can cause torsional and lateral
vibrations of 5-20 Hz in the string, resulting from repeated impact of BHA with the wellbore,
and is responsible for stabiliser/tool joint impact damage.
13.14.7 BHA Forced Vibration
BHA forced vibration is the resonance excitation of the BHA due to vibration sources
associated with bit/formation and drillstring/wellbore interactions. This mechanism is always
present in different magnitudes as ‘background’ vibration even when all the other five
destructive mechanisms are absent. The failure caused by this non-severe vibration
mechanism is due to fatigue crack growth rather than rapid failure.
13.14.8 Critical Rotating Speeds
Critical rotating speeds in the drillpipe string which cause vibrations are often the cause of
crooked drillpipe, excessive wear, rapid deterioration and fatigue failure. Critical speeds vary
with length and size of the drill stem, drill collars and hole size.
The two types of vibrations which may occur in the drill stem are shown in the following table.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Drill String Design Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 13 Page 130 of 447

Type 13.14.9 Description

1 Vibration that occurs in the drill pipe between each tool joint.
The critical speed of the drill pipe shall be controlled as follows:

Drill Pipe Size 2 3/8in 3 ½in 4 ½in 5in

Critical RPM 130 160 210 235

2 Vibration of the spring pendulum type which depends upon the

total length of the drillstring. Secondary and higher harmonic
vibration may occur at 4x, 9x, 16x and 25x the speed of the
drillstring.

Vibration of the second type is probably less significant than the first type. The combination of
both types may result in failure of the string. Particular care shall be taken to avoid operating
under these two conditions.
Rule of Thumb
For 5” drillpipe do not exceed 200RPM at any depth.

13.15 DRILLSTRING MONITORING

13.15.1 Introduction
It is essential to establish what vibration mechanism is occurring downhole in order to
prescribe the correct remedial actions to control the vibration. Corrective measures for one
mechanism can exacerbate another e.g. lowering WOB or increasing RPM which are means
of moving out of a slip-stick situation can be conditions which promote the possibility of bit
whirl.
The following section describes the various means to monitor drillstring vibrations.
13.15.2 Tool Inspection
The nature of damage on downhole drilling components can often be a direct indication of
vibration source and mechanism. (For example, localised wear on the tool joints is an
indication of tool joints whirling around the wellbore. Damage on stabiliser blades indicates
BHA whirl due to stabiliser/wellbore interaction).
13.15.3 Mud Logging Data
Mud logging provides information on torque, RPM fluctuations and also torque cyclicity. This
data gives a good indication of whether slip-stick vibrations are present. Note that in order to
capture torque fluctuations, the chart recorder speed should be increased to 0.1-0.3 ft/min.
Alternatively, separation between minimum and maximum surface torque is indicative of slip-
stick type torsional vibration in the string.
13.15.4 MWD Data
Actual downhole measurements are the only true means of determining the type and
magnitude of drillstring dynamics.
MWD data can serve as a valuable real time monitoring system. Specifically an increase in the
number of lateral shocks above a threshold value (usually set to 25gs) provides a direct

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Drill String Design Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 13 Page 131 of 447

indication of severe BHA lateral vibration. Several companies provide MWD tools with shock
measurements. Other MWD measurements such as mean and RMS values of torsional, axial,
and lateral accelerations provide a good indication of the relative magnitudes of the dynamic
motions. Lithology measurements such as gamma ray help identify vibration events
associated with formation change.

13.15.5 Deviated Wells

In deviated wells, it is not usually possible to detect high frequency events such as bit whirl
from surface measurements due to dampening and attenuation of lateral vibration. In these
circumstances, downhole recording of the vibration data for subsequent analysis can be very
useful.
Depending on the well type and vibration mechanisms encountered, optimum vibration
monitoring can require a combination of the above systems.
13.15.6 Wireline Log
Calliper data can tell us about possible influence of BHA vibration on hole size (hole
enlargement) and vice versa.
13.15.7 High Frequency Surface Measurements
High frequency measurements of axial and torsional vibration at the surface can be helpful in
detecting high frequency events such as bit whirl especially in shallow and non-deviated wells.
13.15.8 General Guidelines
Each vibration mechanism has its own symptoms that assist in its detection.
Due to the coupling between these mechanisms, severe downhole vibration is often
accompanied by symptoms that belong to more than one mechanism. This fact makes the
detection process rather iterative.
Furthermore, to identify the problem source correctly, we often need to detect more than one
symptom. For example, increase in MWD shock counts, which is indicative of BHA lateral
vibration, can be due to a number of causes:
• Bit whirl can induce BHA whirl and hence cause an increase in lateral vibration at the
MWD level
• Bit bounce can cause lateral vibration of the BHA through parametric resonance
excitation
• Slip-stick motion is often accompanied during its slip phase by lateral vibration of the
BHA
• Stabiliser/wellbore interaction (e.g. when a stabiliser is entering a new hole section or
passing a ledge in the hole wall, or while it is reaming an under gauged hole) can
cause BHA vibration.
• Drilling through an enlarged hole section (e.g. a washed out zone) causes loss of
BHA confinement which can lead to lateral vibration of BHA.
Therefore MWD shock measurements alone are not sufficient to correctly diagnose what is
occurring downhole. Other clues such as surface torque fluctuations (for slip-stick), downhole
high frequency lateral/torsional vibration (for bit whirl), surface axial vibration (for bit bounce),
together with the assessment of the worn bit and other damaged components, can provide
further information to assist the identification of the prevailing vibration mechanism.

When interpreting MWD data, it is helpful to superimpose a scaled sketch of the BHA on the
MWD logs. This can indicate whether the increase in MWD shocks correlates with

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Drill String Design Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 13 Page 132 of 447

circumstances such as the bit drilling a hard formation, a stabiliser entering a new hole section
or new formation, the BHA being in a washed out zone, etc.
MWD shock counts should be treated as a relative measure of vibration severity. Therefore
any increase in shock counts (relative to that observed during normal “smooth” drilling) which
persist for more than five minutes of drilling is indicative of severe vibration downhole.
Corrective measures should then be taken to minimise the shocks e.g. by adjusting drilling
parameters.
If surface torque fluctuation is greater than 15 % of mean surface torque, then there is a high
probability that slip-stick mechanism is present and corrective measures are necessary.
Moreover, the period of slip-stick fluctuations depends on the length and mechanical
properties of the string: for a 5in drillpipe, the period of oscillation is about 2 seconds per 3 300
ft.
In highly deviated wells, slip-stick type vibration can be generated due to frictional forces
resulting from the BHA/drillstring rubbing against the wellbore rather that the bit interacting
with the formation. In such cases slip-stick symptoms would not disappear when coming off
bottom.

Vibration Mechanism Symptoms - Detection

Slip-Stick • • Surface torque fluctuation, top
drive stalling
• • Increased torque cyclicity
• • Increase in MWD shock counts
• • Cutter impact damage
• • Drillstring twist-off/washout
• • Connection over torque or
connection back-off
Bit Whirl • • Cutter impact damage
• • Over-gauge hole
• • High frequency downhole
later/torsional vibration
• • Increase in downhole torque
• • Reduction in ROP
• • Increase in hole over-gauge
Bit Bounce • • Large surface vibration (shaking
of hoisting equipment)
• • Large WOB fluctuation
• • Bit damage (broken
teeth/damaged bearing)
• • BHA washout
• • Reduction in ROP
Parametric • • Increase in MWD shock counts
Resonance • • Large torque fluctuations
• • Drillstring twist-off/washout

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Drill String Design Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 13 Page 133 of 447

BHA Whirl • • Damage on stabiliser blades

• • Localised wear on tool joints
• • High frequency lateral vibrations
• • Increase in MWD shock counts
• • Increase in mean torque

13.16 VIBRATIONS CAUSES AND CURES

13.16.1 Introduction
This section details the measures that are often required to control or eliminate undesirable
vibration.
13.16.2 Slip-Stick
A soft-torque system provides the most effective solution to this problem. The system consists
of a top-drive (or rotary table) feed/back mechanism that regulates surface torque fluctuation
by altering rotary speed thus enabling a more uniform bit rotation. It is essential that the
system is regularly tuned to take account of changing parameters such as depth and BHA
configuration.
Other possible remedial actions include:
• Raising RPM
• Lowering WOB (when slip-stick is due to bit/rock interaction)
• Increasing mud lubricity
• Use of roller reamers (when slip-stick is due to BHA rubbing against the wellbore).
•
13.16.3 Bit Whirl
Anti-whirl bits have, in some cases, enabled PDC bits to drill into harder formations but they
have been less successful in highly interbedded formations. In situations where the geology is
known, care must be taken when crossing formation interfaces where bit vibration and hence
damage to the bit is likely. Also, bit whirl is likely when rotating off bottom or reaming as the bit
is least constrained against gearing with the wellbore. Therefore with aggressive PDC bits, it is
good practice to increase to full speed after tagging bottom.
13.16.4 Bit Bounce
Running a shock sub close to the bit can provide an effective solution. However, it is important
to operate shock subs within their effective RPM/WOB window. At present there are no
guidelines available on shock-sub selection. In the absence of a shock sub, changing of
drilling parameters (e.g. WOB, RPM) should be tried.
Shock subs shall be used when drilling top hole sections to reduce drillstring bounce.
13.16.5 Parametric Resonance
Changing rotary speed and/or reducing WOB are possible cures. Alternatively dampening of
WOB fluctuation by running a shock sub can provide an effective measure.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Drill String Design Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 13 Page 134 of 447

13.16.6 BHA Whirl

Mud properties play an important role in BHA whirl. Roller reamers and non-rotating stabiliser
provide a good solution when whirl is due to stabiliser/wellbore gearing. For the case of whirl
due to tool joint/wellbore gearing, non-rotating drillpipe protectors can be effective.
Furthermore, when altering operating parameters (e.g. RPM and WOB) to combat a vibration
problem, sufficient time must be allowed for the transient effects to disappear. There is
therefore a need to wait long enough (sometimes up to five minutes) before the final outcome
of the altered operating parameters can be seen.
For the cases of slip-stick and bit/BHA whirl motions, to totally remove the vibration, it is often
necessary to stop the rotary and re-start drilling under new parameters.

13.17 JARS GENERAL GUIDELINES

13.17.1 Introduction
Drilling jars are downhole drillstring tools which are used to apply impact and impulse forces
when attempting to free a drillstring bottom hole assembly which has become mechanically or
differentially stuck.
Jars should only be run if:
Correlation wells indicate stuck pipe / hole problems
An NMDC is run
A PDC bit is being run
The hole size is 8.1/2in or less (Jars in other hole sizes are dependent on the
situation).
It is considered cost effective to accept the occasional stuck pipe incident requiring a possible
back-off and fishing operation to retrieve the fish rather than running the jar on every occasion.
Shock subs are tools that absorb detrimental axial shock loads to the drillstring and surface
equipment that can be generated through bit bounce and/or axial/lateral coupling parametric
resonance. Shock tools are most commonly run in surface hole section where large surface
vibrations to surface equipment can be experienced.
Two phenomena have to be considered when jarring:
• Impact and Impulse.
The impact force must be high enough to break the binding forces causing the pipe to stick
and that force must act long enough to move the stuck pipe. This is termed the impulse force.
Both forces are influenced by the amount of drill collars placed above the jar.
The smaller the quantity of drill collars placed above the jar, the higher the impact force.
Conversely, the larger the quantity of drill collars above the jar, the greater the impulse. Clearly
a compromise has to be reached where impact and impulse are operating together to reach
the common objective, i.e. to free the stuck pipe.
13.17.2 Operational Efficiency
It is recommended that the manufacturer’s manual should be read and consulted in order to
understand the operation and principles of jars and shock loads.
13.17.3 Tensile Strength
The tensile strength of a jar must be sufficiently high to withstand the high impact forces
generated during jarring operations. Tensile strength is a particular consideration when the jar
is used in combination with an accelerator.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Drill String Design Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 13 Page 135 of 447

13.17.4 Jar ID
A large ID tool is considered beneficial in terms of reduced flow restriction and resultant
frictional losses. Larger ID tools also facilitate the passage of tools, survey instruments, setting
balls etc. There is a trade off however. As a direct consequence of reducing the cross
sectional area, the tensile strength of the jar reduces as the ID of the jar increases.

13.17.5 Torque Considerations

The ability to withstand high downhole torque, particularly in deviated or horizontal situations,
is a vital consideration.
13.17.6 Temperature Rating
Maximum temperatures within a normal operating range tend to fall between 300-5000F.
13.17.7 Abnormal Operating Conditions Suitability
Abnormal drilling conditions are considered to be:

• H2S concentrations in the sulphide stress cracking region as per NACE Standard
MR-01-75 (If H2S is measured, a mud sample shall be taken every 75’ and kept for
filtrate analysis to determine the concentration)

• CO2 with a partial pressure of more than 0.27 psi for a period of at least 24 hours

• Inspection of BHA components (of which the jar was part) revealing 4 or more cracks

• Exposure of hydrocarbon influx over a period of at least 10 days.

13.18 OPTIMUM DRILLING JAR POSITION

13.18.1 Introduction
The optimum position for the drilling jar is at the end of the upper drilling assembly and above
the Neutral Point. Do not drill with the jars at their neutral point.
Drill collars below the jar should have a larger OD, or have reamers and stabilisers larger than
the drilling jar so that if the lower assembly become stuck, the jar can be used.
13.18.2 Jar Position
In general, the requirement is to place the jar above the part of the string most likely to stick.
The optimum position most favoured is in the drill collars with one drill collar above the jars
before crossing over to heavyweight drill pipe. It must be stressed that this does not imply that
all the weight on bit must be provided by the drill collars below the jars. Increasing the
heavyweight drill pipe to place the neutral point within the heavyweight is possible, thus
placing the jar in compression.
The drill collars above the jar are placed for mass. A more effective jar blow is created by
accelerating a larger drill collar mass directly above the jar.
In case a drilling jar has to be used in the 17.1/2in hole section, the size of the jar should be
8in.
13.18.3 Jar Tension - Compression Set-up
Jars can be run in tension or compression. The Drilling Supervisor shall inform the jar
suppliers how the jar(s) will be run and the parameters within which they shall be used.
In directional wells, the length of drill collars will be reduced to minimise differential sticking
problems. As such, it may be necessary to run the jars in compression effectively using a
percentage of the heavyweight drill pipe to provide weight on bit.
 Allomax Ltd 2000
 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Drill String Design Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 13 Page 136 of 447

For example, the 8”, DJ modified jar (c/w vented sub, modified latch mechanism and wash
pipe extension) should typically be set at approximately 100 000 lb mechanical up latch,
resulting in approximately 50 000 lb mechanical down latch. Make sure setting is compatible
with drilling requirement, taking into account Weight Below jar, Pump Open Force (equals true
pressure drop over the bit multiplied by the effective piston area) and expected Drag Forces.
The maximum pressure drop over the bit to be used for calculating the latch setting is 2 000
psi.
13.19 EFFECTS OF CIRCULATING WHEN JARRING
13.19.1 Introduction
When circulating, pump open forces greatly influence jarring performance and have to be
carefully considered.
13.19.2 Jarring Up While Circulating
Circulating increases both impact and impulse forces and is therefore recommended when
jarring up
13.20 JARRING PRACTICES AND CALCULATIONS
13.20.1 Reference
For details of jarring practices see DOM, Chapter 14.15, Stuck Pipe Drilling Jar Practices.
13.20.2 Inspection
On extended jarring operations periodically check the derrick to ensure nothing is working
loose. The dead line anchor should be checked prior to and during the operation. The same
checks should be made after jarring operations are complete.
13.21 JAR INSPECTION/CERTIFICATION REQUIREMENTS
13.21.1 Equipment Design
Equipment will be designed in accordance with the relevant sections of API Spec 5D and API
Spec.7
13.21.2 Quality Assurance
Companies involved in the design and manufacture of jarring equipment and the provision of
jarring services should be able to demonstrate the application of internal management controls
which ensure the mitigation of all risks and assure the provision of consistent and dependable
service or product. Such controls should be in compliance with an internationally recognised
quality standard.
13.21.3 Inspection
The jar is considered part of the BHA and shall be inspected every 175 - 225 hours, or before
stripping down the assembly.
13.21.4 Traceability
All equipment and load-bearing components shall be identifiable by a unique serial number.
Full traceability of each piece of equipment shall be maintained and shall record full
manufacturing, operational and maintenance histories.
13.22 JARS SPECIFIC APPLICATIONS
13.22.1 Temperature
Maximum normal operating temperatures tend to fall into the range of 300-500oF but these
would be considered extreme conditions which would limit tool life and operational efficiency
Hydraulic jars can generate heat build up which if unchecked can effect performance and

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Drill String Design Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 13 Page 137 of 447

therefore those which have some form of heat compensation are better suited to prolonged
jarring
Special hot well packings are available which can extend the maximum operating temperature
to 600oF. This can be expensive and the jar life would be limited.
Consideration should also be given to operation in low temperature situations.
13.22.2 Pressure
Most drilling jars are designed to withstand a maximum circulating pressure of
5 000psi.
In areas where high differential pressures exist consideration should be given to tools
manufactured with a stand off section incorporated to reduce wall contact.
13.22.3 Angle
Mechanical jars are suitable for straight hole conditions where the hole angle will not be in
excess of 300. In directional situations hydraulic jars, with their ability to withstand high
downhole torque, are favoured. Any jars which have a firing mechanism which is affected by
torque are precluded from directional operations.
In horizontal operations, combinations of jars may be utilised where one jar is placed in the
cased hole section and the other in the open hole horizontal section
Bore size is becoming increasingly important in extended reach situations where a large ID
delivers obvious hydraulic benefits.

13.22.4 Abnormal Service Conditions

In situations where the equipment will operate under abnormal circumstances, shorter periods
between inspection should be agreed with the supplier.
All high pressure moving seals and seal surfaces must be protected from abrasive and
corrosive well fluids.
13.23 SHOCK SUBS
13.23.1 Function
Shock subs absorb drillstring axial vibrations through bevelled disc springs. The settings can
be changed as per operational requirements.
The Drilling Supervisor or Drilling Superintendent shall inform the supplier of the requirements
that must be satisfied by the shock sub.
13.23.2 Application
Application of desired bit weight or rotary speed is sometimes prevented by drillstring
vibrations induced at the bit. In hard rock drilling, such vibration can become severe enough to
endanger the derrick, mast, and other surface equipment. The vibration problem is generally
more severe in large hole sizes. Even though little or no evidence of vibration is observed at
the surface, shock loading of the drill collar string is often a major cause of drill collar
connection failure. When such difficulties arise or are expected, the used of a shock absorber
sub above the bit should be considered.

Shock subs are only used in combination with roller bits.

Shock subs should also be run if one or more of the following vibration indicators are observed
while drilling with a roller bit:
• Erratic downhole WOB/torque.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Drill String Design Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 13 Page 138 of 447

• Large surface vibration (shaking of hoisting equipment).

• Damaged roller cone bit.
13.23.3 Placement
For maximum effectiveness, the shock sub should be placed immediately above the bit to
minimise the amount of unsprung mass below the tool.
Reduced service life and possible severe damage to the shock sub can occur if the tool is not
properly located in the bottom hole assembly. It is important that the shock sub is located in a
position where it is exposed to a minimum of side loading or bending stress.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Drill String Design Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 13 Page 139 of 447

APPENDIX A

Drillstring Design Worksheet

An example of a drillstring design worksheet is presented. Information and

tables referenced in the document can be found in DS-1 – T. H. Hill

DRILL STRING DESIGN WORKSHEET

 Allomax Ltd 2000
 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Drill String Design Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 13 Page 140 of 447

1. WELL INFORMATION

Well Name: Date: Design Total depth (MD): (ft)

Maximum Angle (∅): (degrees) Required WOB: (lb)
Mud density: (ppg) Buoyancy Factor: (KB) (Table 13): Max anticipated torsion: (ft-lb)

2. DESIGN FACTORS

Excess BHA weight (DFBHA): Tension (DFT): Margin of Overpull (MOP): (lb)

3. EQUIPMENT INVENTORY

DRILL COLLARS
Length/Count OD (in) ID (in) Connection Bore Black Stress Relief BSR (Table 12) Air Weight (WDC)
Box Pin? (lb/ft) (Table 3)
#1________ ______ _____ _________ __________ ____________ ____________ ______________
#2________ ______ _____ _________ __________ ____________ ____________ ______________

HWDP

Length/Count OD (in) ID (in) Connection Boreback Box Stress Relief Pin? WHWDP (lb/ft) (Table 3)
#1________ ______ _____ __________ _______________ _______________ _____________________
#2________ ______ _____ __________ _______________ _______________ _____________________

DRILL PIPE
Available OD NOM Connection Grade Class AIR WT (W) TEN CAP AL.LOAD (PA) WK LOAD (PW)
Footage (ft) (in) WT (Table 2) (lb) (PT) (Table (PA=PT/DFT) (lb) (PW=PA-MOP) (lb)
(lb/ft) 5) (lb)
#1
#2
#3

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Drill String Design Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 13 Page 141 of 447

4. BHA DESIGN

TYPE A ASSEMBLIES LENGTH OF HWDP SECTION (LHWDP) = (ft)( stands)

LENGTH OF
 WOB X DFBHA   ( x ) 
DRILL COLLARS (LDC)=  =
 WDC X KB cos φ   ( x x )
= (ft) { stands ( ft) rounded up to nearest stand}

TYPE B ASSEMBLIES LENGTH OF DRILL COLLAR SECTION (LDC) = (ft)

LENGTH OF HWDP

(LHWDP ) =  [WOB x DFBHA ] − (LDC x WDC ) ( )−(

  1
= 
x
x ) 1
 K B cos φ  WHWDP ( x )  ( )

TYPE C ASSEMBLIES LENGTH OF DRILL COLLAR SECTIONS (LDC1) = (ft) (LDC2) = (ft)

LENGTH OF HWDP

(LHWDP ) =  [WOB x DFBHA ] − (LDC1 x WDC1) + (LDC2 x WDC2 ) ( ) −[ (

  1 x  1
=  x )+ ( x )] 
 KB cos φ  WHWDP ( x )  ( )

NOTE: ENTER DRILL COLLAR AND HWDP INFORMATION ON THE SUMMARY TABLE IN SECTION 9

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Drill String Design Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 13 Page 142 of 447

5. CROSSOVER BSR CHECK

UPPER X-OVER CONN:______ MATING PIN ID:______ (in) X-OVER BOX OD: _______ (in) BSR (Table 12) __________
Note: If upper X-Over connection BSR is above desired range, use a bottle neck crossover

6. STIFFNESS RATIO CHECK

A. Z DRILL COLARS:______ (cu,in) B. Z HWDP:______ (cu.in) C. Z DRILL PIPE: _______ (cu.in) A/B _______ B/C ________
Note: If ratio exceeds the desired limit, a transition string may be necessary. (if no HWDP present: A/C _______ )

7. MAXIMUM LENGTH OF DRILL PIPE SECTIONS

FIRST SECTION: LDP1 (ft) = PW1 - (LDC1 x WDC1) + (LDC2 x W DC2) + (LHWDP x WHWDP) 1
KB W1 (lb/ft)

LDP1 = (_______) - (____ x _____) + (____ x _____) + (____ x _____) 1 = _____ (ft)
(_______) (_____)

SECOND SECTION: LDP2 (ft) = PW2 (lb) - PW1 (lb) = (_____) - (_____) = _____ (ft)
W2 (lb/ft) x Ka (_____) x (_____)

THIRD SECTION: LDP2 (ft) = PW3 (lb) - PW2 (lb) = (_____) - (_____) = _____ (ft)
W3 (lb/ft) x KB (_____) x (_____)

8. TORSIONAL CHECK

DRILL PIPE CONNECTION OD (in) ID (in) MAKEUP TORQUE TORSIONAL STRENGTH MAXIMUM OPERATING
SECTION TORQUE(ft-lb)
(ft-lb) (Table 10) (ft-lb) (Table 9)

#1

#2

#3

NOTE: Makeup torque should always exceed maximum expected operating torque

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Drill String Design Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 13 Page 143 of 447

9. DRILL STEM SUMMARY

DESCRIPTION LENGTH (ft) CUM. AIR WEIGHT BUOYED CUM. BUOYED OVERPULL (PA -
LENGTH (ft) (lb) WEIGHT (lb) WEIGHT (lb) CUM. BW (lb)

DRILL COLLARS #1

DRILL COLLARS #2

HWDP

DRILL PIPE # 1

DRILL PIPE # 2

DRILL PIPE # 3

DEFINITIONS

Ai: Cross sectional area inside the drill pipe (Sq.in) MOP: Margin of overpull desired for drag and hole problems (lb)
Ao: Cross sectional area outside the drill pipe (Sq.in) PA: Maximum allowable load for drill pipe (lb) (PA=PT / D FT)
DFBHA: Design factor for excess BHA weight (>1.0) Pi: Pressure inside drill pipe at top of BHA (psi)
DFT: Design factor for tension (DFT = PT/PA) (>1.0) Po: Pressure outside drill pipe at top of BHA (psi)
KB: Buoyancy factor (Table 13) (KB < 1.0) PT: Theoretical load to yield drill pipe (lb) (Table 5)
FS: Stability force tending to buckle drill pipe (lb) PW: Design working load on drill pipe (lb) (PW=PA-MOP)
LDC: Length of drill collar section (ft) W: Air weight of drill pipe (lb/ft)
LDP: Length of drill pipe section (ft) WDC: Air weight of drill collars (lb/ft)
LHWDP: Length of HWDP section (ft) WHWDP: Air weight of HWDP (lb/ft)
Z: Section modulus (cu.in) (Tables 1,3,4) WOB: Weight on Bit (lb)

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Drill String Design Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 13 Page 144 of 447

APPENDIX B

Summary of Drillstring Design Measures

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Section 13

Failure Mechanism

 Allomax Ltd 2000

Very Somewhat Not
Important important Important

SSC
Burst

Torsion

Tension
Welding

Split box
Collapse

Conn. leak
Mechanical
ten. / torsion

Tube fatigue
Combination

Conn. fatigue
Design Measures
Smooth section changes

Adequate BHA weight for WOB

Proper BSR range

Stabilised BHA

Connection stress relief features

Drill String Design

Small stiffness ratio

Drilling Operations Manual

Cold-rolled thread roots

Long BHA thread root radius

Proper tension safety factor

Adequate margin of overpull (MOP)

Proper size, WT, grade & class of drillpipe

Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Ref: (NW, PMc)

Page 145 of 447

 Section 13

Failure Mechanism

 Allomax Ltd 2000

Very Somewhat Not
Important important Important

SSC
Burst

Torsion

Tension
Welding

Split box
Collapse

Conn. leak
Mechanical
ten. / torsion

Tube fatigue
Combination

Conn. fatigue
Design Measures
Select proper tool joint type

Select proper tool joint ID and OD

Modify Make up torque if dope friction factor is not 1

Modify torsional strength if dope Friction Factor

is not 1

Specify MUT > expected max. operating torque

Select lowest grade DP practical to avoid 'S'

Drill String Design

If using 'E' grade DP, use only

Drilling Operations Manual

Quenched & Tempered 'E' grade

Use collapse design factor
(DFc = 1.125)

Derate collapse capacity for simultaneous tension

Do not use welded equipment unless necessary

Review WPS and PQR before accepting a weld

Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Ref: (NW, PMc)

Page 146 of 447

 Section 13

 Allomax Ltd 2000

Failure Mechanism
Very Somewhat Not
Important important Important

SSC
Burst

Torsion

Tension
Welding

Split box
Collapse

Conn. leak
Mechanical
ten. / torsion

Tube fatigue
Combination

Conn. fatigue
Design Measures
Ensure welder is certified to the weld procedures

Ensure specialised tool load ratings are adequate

Check assumptions behind specialised tool ratings

Check mid body connection thread forms

Locate tool at proper point in string

Drill String Design

Derate tensile capacity for simultaneous torsion

Drilling Operations Manual

Use design factor in tension

(DFT = 1.15)
Use design factor in burst
(DFB = 1.176)
Use design factor for BHA WT.
(DFBHA = 1.15)
Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Ref: (NW, PMc)

Page 147 of 447

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Drill String Design Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 13 Page 148 of 447

APPENDIX C

Vibration Causes and Cures Flowchart

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 CAUSES AND CURES
Section 13

 Allomax Ltd 2000

BIT BIT SLIP
BOUNCE WHIRL STICK

Possible Causes Cures Possible Causes Cures Possible Causes Cures

Shock Sub. Anti-whirl (controlled bit Bit-rock interaction. Top torque feedback
Severe lateral Cutter force
Change drilling sideforce). High WOB/low RPM system.
vibration of the BHA distribution which
parameters (allow time Reduce RPM/Raise with PDC bit. Reduce WOB/ raise
eg., in a wash out initiates gearing
for development of new WOB. Stabiliser/hole wall RPM.
zone. motion. High RPM/
tri-lobe pattern). Ream at lower RPM. interaction (e.g. high roller reamers.
Unsteady tri-lobe low WOB. Change of
See slip-stick & Flatter profile bits. wellbore tortuosity) Non rotating stabilisers
geometry formation. Bit slip-
parametric resonance. Increase to full speed Torsional shock sub ?
stick. Rotation off-
after tagging bottom. Smooth well profile.
bottom/reaming
Pick off bottom/stop Modify mud properties
rotating. (lubricity, weight).
See BHA whirl & slip- Change to higher gear.
stick. Use roller reamers Use softer drive
instead of stabilisers. system
Drill String Design
Drilling Operations Manual

BHA PARAMETRIC RESONANCE PARAMETRIC RESONANCE

WHIRL (Axial/lateral Coupling) (Torsional/lateral Coupling)
Possible Causes Cures Possible Causes Cures Possible Causes Cures
Stabiliser/ wellbore Roller reamers / non- High weight on bit Shock sub. High on bit torque See slip-stick
interaction leading to rotating stabilisers. fluctuations (eg. tri-cone change drilling fluctuation.
gearing. Non-rotating drillpipe bit on hard formation). parameters. Reduce Bit slip-stick
Tool joint/ wellbore protectors. Reduce Low angle, large size WOB. Change RPM.
interaction. RPM / Raise WOB. hole. Run PDC bit.
Lateral vibration of the Modify mud
BHA. properties.
Bit whirl. Pick off bottom / stop
rotating.
Revision: 0
18/05/2000

See slip-stick & Bit

Ref: (NW, PMc)

Page 149 of 447

whirl
 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Drill String Design Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 13 Page 150 of 447

APPENDIX D

Vibration Control Guidelines Flowchart

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 VIBRATION INDICATORS CHECKS REMEDIAL ACTION COMMENTS
Section 13

1 Increase in torque cyclicity

 Allomax Ltd 2000

Symmetric deviation of min & max torque from
2
mean torque by > 15% of mean torque

Surface torque fluctuation on mud logging

chart recorder with a period :
3
MD (in ft) x2 seconds Install soft torque system
1000 . Check correlation Bit has entered a
Change to higher gear
with gamma ray hard formation
Raise RPM, reduce WOB

4 Connection over torque / back off

If top drive / rotary
table is stalling (or
when torque fluctuation
is clipped by operating
5 Top drive / rotary table stalling close to the power
limit) then stop the
rotary, restart drilling
and repeat the
Short PDC bit life: impact damage on remedial actions
6
cutters

Install soft torque system

Drill String Design

Increase mud lubricity

BHA wash out / twist off (visible cracks on Non-rotating stabiliser
7 Vibration does not
BHA), MWD tool failure
Drilling Operations Manual

Non-rotating DP protector
disappear when off
bottom Raise RPM
Smoother well profile
Change to higher gear
8 Overgauge hole / wellbore damage

Increase in MWD shock counts relative to

9 smooth conditions and sustained for > 5
minutes of drilling

Indicator is present Indicator is present

in 2 flowcharts in all 3 flowcharts
10 Drop in ROP
Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Ref: (NW, PMc)

Page 151 of 447

 VIBRATION INDICATORS CHECKS REMEDIAL ACTION COMMENTS
Section 13

Anti-whirl bit
Short PDC bit life: impact damage on If geology is known,

 Allomax Ltd 2000

6 Non agressive bit
cutters Bit entering a new enter new formation at
formation or is in a Reduce RPM reduced RPM.
BHA correlation with hard formation Increase WOB
lothology from If vibration persists
BHA wash out / twist off (visible cracks on stop the rotary and
7 gamma ray Reduce RPM until stabiliser
BHA), MWD tool failure Stabiliser entering a
fully enters the new section restart drilling under
new hole section or
new operating
new formation Non rotating stabiliser parameters

8 Overgauge hole / wellbore damage

BHA is in a washed Improve wellbore stability
out zone Reduce RPM
BHA correlation with
Increase in MWD shock counts relative to hole size from
9 smooth conditions and sustained for > 5 caliper data Stabiliser is entering Use roller reamer instead of
minutes of drilling a new hole section stabiliser
or passing a ledge
in the hole wall Reduce RPM

10 Drop in ROP
Reaming Ream at lower RPM

High frequency (10 - 50 Hz) lateral /

11 torsional vibration from downhole recording
Drill String Design
Drilling Operations Manual

12 Increase in surface / downhole torque

Change the bit If possible increase to
Undergauge hole Roller reamer full speed after tagging
Increase the mud lubricity bottom

13 Stabiliser wear / impact damage

Indicator is present Indicator is present

in 2 flowcharts in all 3 flowcharts
Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Ref: (NW, PMc)

Page 152 of 447

 VIBRATION INDICATORS CHECKS REMEDIAL ACTION COMMENTS
Section 13

BHA wash out / twist off (visible cracks on

7

 Allomax Ltd 2000

BHA), MWD tool failure

Modify mud properties

Allow time for
8 Overgauge hole / wellbore damage e.g. increase mud lubricity
development of new tri-
Reduce RPM lobe pattern (about 5
Non rotating stabiliser minutes)
Increase in MWD shock counts relative to Non rotating DP protector
9 smooth conditions and sustained for > 5
minutes of drilling

10 Drop in ROP

High frequency (10 - 50 Hz) lateral /

11
torsional vibration from downhole recording

12 Increase in surface / downhole torque

Drill String Design

13 Stabiliser wear / impact damage

Drilling Operations Manual

14 Localised wear on tool joints

Run shock sub If vibration persists stop
Adjust drilling parameters the rotary and restart
Run PDC bit drilling under new
15 Large surface vibration
operating parameters

16 Damaged roller cone bit

Indicator is present Indicator is present
in 2 flowcharts in all 3 flowcharts

17 Erratic downhole torque / WOB

Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Ref: (NW, PMc)

Page 153 of 447

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Stuck Pipe Revision: 0
18/05/2000

Section 14 Page 154 of 447

14 STUCK PIPE
14.1 CURRENT SITUATION
Nimir Petroleum Limited are potentially drilling more deviated, short radius and horizontal wells to
access remoter parts of reservoirs (eg., attic oil). This increases the need to consider hole cleaning,
borehole stability and potential stuck pipe.
14.2 REQUIREMENTS OF DRILLING PERSONNEL
With good drilling practices and an alert drilling crew almost all incidents of stuck pipe can be avoided.
To this end, the Drilling Contractors shall be encouraged to ensure that all their drilling personnel:
• Become familiar with the causes of stuck pipe
• Learn the warning signs for stuck pipe
• Are pro-active in avoiding stuck pipe
• Are adequately trained in quick initial response (a rapid response will have a major difference
in the outcome of a potential stuck pipe incident).
14.3 CAUSES OF STUCK PIPE
14.3.1 Introduction
Although there are many causes of pipe sticking, a review of the indications leading to the
incident later usually shows that the situation could have been foreseen and prevented if the
warning signs had been recognised. Human error in terms of failure to heed the warning signs,
or responding incorrectly to the tight hole situation is a major cause of most stuck pipe
incidents.
Pipe sticking generally falls into one of two categories:
• Differential sticking
• Mechanical sticking.
14.3.2 Pressure Differential
In normal overbalanced drilling conditions, the pressure exerted by the mud column is greater
than the pressure exerted by the formation fluids. If the formation is permeable, mud filtrates
will flow into the formation from the wellbore resulting in a filter cake build up. The pressure
differential across the filter cake will be equal to the pressure difference between the mud
column and the formation pressure.
When the drillstring lies against the wellbore wall, any part of the pipe which becomes
embedded in the filter cake will encounter a lower pressure than the part of the pipe which
remains entirely within the wellbore. If that pressure difference is large enough and acts over a
significantly large area of the pipe the pipe may become differentially stuck.
The force required (F) = ∆ p x A x Cof. Equation (14.1)
Where:
• ∆ p = the pressure differential between the wellbore and the formation fluid
pressure. The larger the overbalance, the more force is exerted to hold the drillpipe
against the side of the wellbore. This force acts in addition to the normal
gravitational force acting against the pipe in a deviated hole.
• A = the area of the pipe surface embedded in the filter cake. This area is likely to be
greater in holes with thicker filter cake. Obviously, larger diameter pipe will have a
greater surface area embedded in the filter cake.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Stuck Pipe Revision: 0
18/05/2000

Section 14 Page 155 of 447

• Cof = the sticking force directly proportional to the coefficient of friction between the
pipe and the wall cake. This is a very significant factor. Different filter cakes will have
different friction coefficients, but filter cakes resulting from most mud types will
exhibit an increased coefficient of friction with respect to time.
Note: Average Cof = 0.3
14.3.3 Indications of Differential Sticking
The string is considered differentially stuck when the pipe cannot be moved but when
circulation is still possible at the same pressure as that prior to sticking.
14.4 CAUSES OF MECHANICAL STICKING
Mechanical sticking occurs as a result of one or more of the following conditions:
• Inadequate hole cleaning
• Formation instability (sloughing and swelling formations)
• Key seating (not often a problem but has happened occasionally)
• Running into undergauge hole
• Accumulation of cuttings
• Drilling plastic formations
• Large boulders falling into the hole
• Running tools with too large a gauge for the hole diameter.
14.4.1 Inadequate Hole Cleaning
Cuttings which are not adequately removed will settle on the lower side of the hole and may
cause the hole to pack off, resulting in stuck pipe.
Due to the tendency of the cuttings to fall to the lower side of the hole, high angle wells are
more difficult to clean than vertical wells. In addition, for effective hole cleaning, the circulation
rate must be higher than the slip velocity of the cuttings. This is more difficult to achieve in a
deviated hole than vertical hole.
Inadequate hole cleaning is indicated by:
• An incorrect mass balance whilst drilling
• An increase in pump pressure and connection drag
• A smooth increase in drag whilst POH.
14.4.2 Formation Instability
Weak and Unconsolidated Formations
Some formations are particularly weak and unconsolidated and are prone to swelling (eg.,
shale) and/or sloughing (eg., coal or shale).
Shales - Variable Hole Stability
Shales are weaker along the formation bedding plane than across it. For this reason, hole
stability may vary greatly in holes through the same formation but at different inclinations and
directions.
Brittle/Sloughing Shale
These shales slough into the hole after breaking into pieces. Sloughing shale indications are:
• Large amounts of shale at the shaker screens after circulating bottoms up

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Stuck Pipe Revision: 0
18/05/2000

Section 14 Page 156 of 447

• Excess drag during trips

• High levels of fill.
Swelling Shales
Some shales chemically react with water; a process called hydration which results in formation
swelling. All swelling shales are potential causes of stuck pipe whether they are highly reactive
gumbos, or shales which hydrate very quickly.
Even though the hole may be cleaned by sufficient flow rates during drilling, it may need to be
reamed after each stand as the swelling continues.
Swelling is indicated by:
• An increase in torque during drilling
• A difficulty in sliding the BHA when orienting
• A drag on connections
• Excessive drag when POH
• The necessity to repeatedly ream sections
• An increase in MBT of water based muds.
14.4.3 Key Seating
Key seating is most likely to occur when doglegs and spiralling are extremely severe. The
drillpipe, which is of smaller diameter than the drill collars, rubs against the side of the hole
and wears a groove in the formation, (see Figure 14.1 Key Seating).
An indication of key seating is when stuck pipe occurs while POH but circulation is not
impeded. When this occurs it is still possible to go down as the pipe will only become stuck
when POH.
The greater the dogleg severity, the greater the side load and the faster the key seat will
develop.
Key seats can also develop at ledges and casing shoes where the groove is worn into the
metal instead of the formation. The development of key seats is directly affected by the
number of rotating hours.

Diameter of
drill pipe

Diameter of
drilled hole

Figure 14.1 Key Seating

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Stuck Pipe Revision: 0
18/05/2000

Section 14 Page 157 of 447

14.4.4 Undergauge Hole and Assembly Changes

The gauge of bits and stabilisers will be reduced by abrasive hole sections. Therefore,
maximising a bit run in abrasive formations could prove to be a false economy due to the
inevitable result of increased reaming operations which may cause the bit to wear out very
quickly and create an undergauge hole.
If a full gauge BHA is tripped into an undergauge hole, a stuck pipe situation can occur.
Undergauge hole is indicated when the bit becomes stuck but when full circulation is still
possible. Preventative measures taken to keep the hole full gauge will reduce this problem.
A dog leg which presents an obstruction to a stiff BHA may present no difficulty to a flexible
assembly which can “snake” around doglegs. Formations which have been drilled with a
flexible BHA may present no problem when pulling out of the hole, but when a new stiffer BHA
or string of casing is introduced, the newly drilled hole will act as if it is undergauge. This will
result in the risk of stuck pipe. Check trip assemblies prior to running casing should be
selected carefully with this point in mind.
Undergauge hole is indicated by:
• An increase in down drag on RIH
• Increasing or erratic torque
• Bit stalling
• A reduction in ROP
14.4.5 Accumulation of Cuttings
Cuttings usually accumulate during conditions of low annular velocity.
Cuttings accumulation is indicated by:
• Reduced cuttings on the shale shaker
• Increased overpull
• Loss of circulation.
14.4.6 Drilling Plastic Formations
Stuck pipe can result from the plastic nature of some formations, including, but not limited to
salts. Stresses can be relieved in the formation allowing the formation to extrude into the
borehole. Although this extrusion may be measured in mere fractions of an inch, it can be
sufficient to cause a bit or stabiliser to become stuck in the hole.
Flowing formations and abnormal pressures may be encountered almost anywhere where
there are unequally relieved stresses, but will be experienced most often at the top of a
formation or on the flanks of a salt dome or clay diapir. Increasing the mud weight may reduce
flowing of plastic formations.
Plastic formations are indicated by:
• Increasing and erratic torque.
• A higher overpull with increased hours between trips.
14.4.7 Large Boulders Falling into the Hole
This condition usually only occurs while drilling top hole in unconsolidated formations.
Boulders can be dislodged and fall into the hole or against the drill string.
Indications of boulders are:
• Erratic torque

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Stuck Pipe Revision: 0
18/05/2000

Section 14 Page 158 of 447

• Erratic drag on connections

• Tendency to stick when pulling out of hole.
14.4.8 Running Large Gauge Tools
This situation is similar to the condition Undergauge Hole and Assembly Changes. Running
large gauge tools will most likely result in stuck pipe and is normally associated with a mistake
in the selection of a downhole component. The Drilling Supervisor is responsible for all
downhole equipment run into the hole and as such all downhole equipment must be callipered
prior to running in the hole.
Indications of large gauge tools are:
• String standing up when running into open hole
• String stuck immediately after running into open hole.
14.5 STUCK PIPE PREVENTION - PLANNING REQUIREMENTS
14.5.1 Drilling Programmes
All Drilling Programmes for deviated wells, wells with high overbalance (in excess of
1,000 psi) and/or wells with the reservoir section drilled with water based mud, shall
include a paragraph indicating the potential risk for stuck pipe and the measures to be
taken to reduce stuck pipe potential to the minimum. The Programme shall also include
the requirement that the driller keeps a written record of all drilling and tripping related
parameters.
The parameters should enable the driller to detect changes in the hole condition at an early
stage, such that early remedial action can be taken prior to the drillstring getting stuck. The
Drilling Supervisor shall update torque/drag calculations, using appropriate software on a daily
basis and ensure that the software output charts are continuously compared with observed
values.
The casing design can be planned to take into consideration casing off troublesome
formations so that the well can be drilled safely.
14.5.2 Awareness Training
If the rig crew has not drilled a similar well (with the same high risk for stuck pipe) in the last
six months then a stuck pipe prevention presentation should be given to all relevant staff prior
to drilling the hole section with increased risk for stuck pipe. The presentation should be
focused on the preventative actions to be taken by the drill crew and is preferably given by the
Drilling Supervisor or Drilling Superintendent.
14.5.3 Stuck Pipe Pre-Section Meeting
Prior to entering potential stuck pipe sections, a meeting shall be held to discuss preventative
actions and agree the necessary course of action in the event of getting stuck.
14.5.4 Stuck Pipe Investigation
After a stuck pipe incident (defined as an incident with the drillstring stuck for at least 30
minutes), the Drilling Supervisor will write a full report. The report shall be checked and agreed
by the Drilling Engineer and shall include the:
• Precautions against stuck pipe taken in the design phase
• Precautions against stuck pipe taken in the implementation phase (while drilling the
well)
• Causes leading to the stuck pipe incidents
• Remedial action taken prior to getting stuck

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Stuck Pipe Revision: 0
18/05/2000

Section 14 Page 159 of 447

• Action taken after getting stuck

• Persons involved at each stage leading up to the stuck pipe incident
• Details about BHA, mud, hole size, operations deviation, overbalance etc.
14.5.5 Rig Site Precautions
A written record of drilling and tripping related parameters shall be kept on the drill floor while
tripping and drilling to enable the Driller to detect trends and take early remedial action based
on the variation between the actual observed parameters and the written records.
When the potential for differential sticking has been identified and the section is drilled with a
higher mudweight than that required to maintain formation stability RFT pressure may be
taken. The RFT pressure may allow a reduction in mud weight thus reducing the chance for
differential sticking.
If the drillstring becomes stuck the Stuck Pipe Freeing Worksheet shall be used to attempt to
free the pipe, (see Appendix B).
14.6 GENERAL PREVENTION
14.6.1 Introduction
Good drilling practices, particularly with regard to circulating and tripping activities, can greatly
reduce the occurrence of stuck pipe (see Appendix A).
Patience is of utmost importance in tight hole situations. Adequate time to condition the mud is
crucial and should always be allowed for. If hole conditions worsen during a trip, the sooner
circulation is undertaken the better. While there may be reluctance on the part of the Driller to
break circulation and disturb the slug, it is far easier to re-slug than to free the pipe after it
becomes stuck.

When drilling in areas where differential sticking is likely, the drillstring shall be kept moving at
all times. While making connections, the pipe shall be kept rotating slowly except when making
the actual connection provided the risk of injury to personnel can be managed.
The following paragraphs list the basic drilling practices that should always be adopted when
tripping and circulating. The list is not exhaustive and should be used to complement, rather
than replace, individual knowledge and experience.
The amount of open hole time for each hole section shall be kept to a minimum.
14.6.2 Personnel Knowledge
Stuck Pipe Procedures
All efforts shall be made to ensure that Drilling Contractor personnel are made aware of the
required tight hole and stuck pipe procedures.
It must be ensured that the Drillers have been informed of the correct action to take in the
event of tight hole or other problems, by keeping written records of all drilling and tripping
related parameters.
Drilling Jars
The Drilling Supervisor and Drilling Contractor personnel shall be knowledgeable in the
operation of the drilling jars.
The Driller, Night Toolpusher, Toolpusher and Drilling Supervisor shall know how each set of
jars work, in order to make rational decisions when required.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Stuck Pipe Revision: 0
18/05/2000

Section 14 Page 160 of 447

14.6.3 BHA Selection

Careful consideration must be given to proper design and selection of BHA’s and their
components. A BHA containing only the essential components will result in less stuck pipe risk
than a BHA containing needlessly long assemblies. The number of drill collars and large OD
elements must be justified.
Safety joints shall not be run in the BHA’s during drilling operations.
14.6.4 Mud System
A mud system which is carefully planned within the framework of Nimir Petroleum Limited
requirements for the mud type used and is correctly implemented will result in reduced tight
hole and stuck pipe problems.
14.6.5 Circulation and Downhole Monitoring
Mud Monitoring and Conditioning
Mud must be properly conditioned prior to use.
In addition, as the quantity, shape, and condition of the cuttings provide valuable clues as to
what is happening downhole, the shale shakers shall be monitored regularly by the Drilling
Supervisor, the Mud Engineer and the Toolpusher.
The yield point shall be adjusted to clean the hole as per the Drilling Programme.
Prior to Tripping
If there is any concern about stuck pipe the hole shall be circulated clean prior to the start of a
trip. For wells deviated above 40o backreaming and circulation should be maintained
whenever cuttings beds are anticipated, or indicated by trends in overpull. Rotating and
circulating out of hole shall always be performed when encountering significant tight hole (see
Appendix A).

Although a minimum circulating time shall be specified by the Drilling Supervisor, a trip shall
not be started if there are still significant quantities of cuttings coming over the shakers.
During Tripping/Drilling
If hole conditions worsen during a trip, circulation should be initiated as soon as possible.
Rotation and reciprocation, if practical, while circulating in inclined wells will assist hole
cleaning by disturbing the cutting beds. If stuck pipe is a concern in horizontal / deviated wells,
a ‘balanced’ pill shall be pumped. A balanced pill is defined as a 50 bbl pill of POBM/water
followed by a 50 bbl viscous weighted pill with a weight at least 2 ppg above the mud in use.
The depths and magnitude of torque and overpull shall be continuously monitored in order to
help assess the condition of the hole.
14.6.6 Tripping
Check Trip
Regular check trips can be made, either at pre-determined intervals, when drilling through
potential stuck pipe zones, or as hole conditions dictate up to the discretion of the Drilling
Supervisor or Drilling Engineer.
Tripping Practice
During all tripping operations it is important to:
• Keep the drillstring moving whenever possible in the open hole

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Stuck Pipe Revision: 0
18/05/2000

Section 14 Page 161 of 447

• Exercise extreme caution when tripping in open hole (the Toolpusher or Drilling
Supervisor shall always be on the rig floor for at least the first 10 stands out and the
last 10 stands in and through any problem sections)
• Never force the string through a tight spot as it can become stuck while being firmly
pulled into a tight hole
• Ream each stand in tight hole (if hole conditions are severe, more frequent reaming
may be required)
• Wash and ream the last joint to bottom if tight hole is indicated
• Wash to bottom any section drilled by an undergauge bit
• Call the Toolpusher and Drilling Supervisor to the rig floor at the first sign of tight
hole.
Driller’s should be on the brake when tripping through problem formations as they will have
gained a feel for the hole. Assistant Driller’s and Toolpushers’s should be discouraged from
relieving the Driller in open hole.
14.6.7 Overpull
By not immediately applying an overpull of more than half the weight of the collars below the
jars, the Driller should always be able to work the pipe back down.
If necessary, the Drilling Supervisor has the option to gradually increase overpull, each time
checking to ensure that the pipe is free to go back down.
For heavy jarring or high overpulls the kelly shall be used.
However, overpull in excess of the drill collars’ weight must not be applied as this will almost
certainly result in the string becoming stuck.
14.6.8 Surveying
Consideration of the stuck pipe risks shall be made prior to dropping a single shot survey in
tight hole situations.
14.7 STUCK PIPE PREVENTION - DIFFERENTIAL STICKING (PLANNING PHASE)
14.7.1 Use and Acquisition of Data
Drilling Programme
The Drilling Programme shall indicate any permeable formations which may lead to differential
sticking, particularly if the risk of differential sticking is considered to be high. The casing
design shall consider the elimination of stuck pipe (ie., seal off troublesome formations) as well
as considering the normal casing design aspects.
Use of Available Data
An estimate of the problem formation pressure shall be made using the best offset data
available. If accurate and recent RFT or producing well information is available, it should be
used to estimate the expected formation pressure.
Data Acquisition
On an appraisal well, where differential sticking has been identified as a potential problem,
taking an RFT measurement should be considered. The risk of sticking the logging tool must
be taken into consideration, but this could be outweighed by the value of the information
obtained.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Stuck Pipe Revision: 0
18/05/2000

Section 14 Page 162 of 447

Careful consideration shall be given to the number of pad type logging tools employed in holes
where differential pressures are known to be high. The use of any tools with high borehole
contact areas should be considered very carefully prior to programming in these hole sections.
14.7.2 Drilling Fluid
Lubricants
Since lubricants can reduce the high coefficient of friction for differentially stuck pipe, they
should be considered for use in areas where differential sticking is a possibility. There are a
wide range of lubricants available for both water based and oil based muds.
Filter Cake
The filter cake thickness can be reduced by the addition of “bridging” material to the mud, thus
reducing the potential for differential sticking. The Drilling Fluid Contractor can advise on this.
Shale Shaker
Shaker screens shall be selected to prevent or minimise a drilled solids build-up, as low gravity
solids result in thick and sticky filter cakes.
HTHP Fluid Loss
HTHP fluid loss shall be run on the mud when drilling in an area where the potential for
differential sticking is high, regardless of the bottom hole temperature.
In such areas, the Drilling Programme shall state the maximum value for the HTHP fluid loss
and low pressure fluid loss.
14.8 STUCK PIPE PREVENTION - DIFFERENTIAL STICKING (OPERATIONS PHASE)
14.8.1 BHA
Consideration should be given to the use of antistick design BHA. The number of drill collars
and stabilisers should also be reduced to minimum.
In areas where differential sticking potential is high, minimum BHA’s shall be used. In 12.1/4in
deviated hole and in all 8.1/2in holes, WOB should be achieved with HWDP only. Drill collars
should only be used for deviation control.
When drilling a deviated hole and when using drill collars to provide WOB, an undergauge
stabiliser shall be used in the top of the BHA to lessen the chance of key seat sticking.
Stabilisation and spiral drill collars shall be used to centralise and minimise wall contact.
14.8.2 Differential Pressure
The differential pressure across permeable formations shall be continuously tracked as
accurately as possible. The trends of overpull on connections, trip gas levels, and connection
gas levels shall be followed to anticipate changing pressures.
Differential pressures across permeable formations shall be minimised by keeping the
mud weight at the lowest safe level. A guide figure of 200 psi static overbalance shall be
used although conditions will often dictate a different figure.
14.8.3 Drilling Fluid
All mud parameters shall be maintained within the specifications of the Drilling Programme. In
particular it is important that:
• Mudweight shall be as low as possible (200psi O/B), having given consideration to
borehole stability and controlling the well pressure (this decreases the pressure
differential across the mud filter cake and lessens differential sticking)

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Stuck Pipe Revision: 0
18/05/2000

Section 14 Page 163 of 447

• HTHP (where relevant) and low pressure fluid loss are maintained within
specification
• While maintaining consistency with suspension and hole cleaning requirements, the
gel strengths should be maintained at the minimum value possible
Note: Pipe release agents are adversely affected by high gel strengths. The 30 minute gel
strength shall be measured as well as the 10 second and 10 minute value and shall not
be significantly higher than the 10 minute value.)
• Drilled solids content shall be minimised and shall be as low as possible.
14.8.4 Reciprocation / Rotation
The pipe shall be kept moving at all times and shall never be left static in high risk
areas. Wherever possible the pipe should be reciprocated. If reciprocation is not possible,
e.g., on connections, rotation should be applied.
Unnecessary surveys shall not be programmed as they are a high risk operations.
14.8.5 Measurement While Drilling
An MWD survey tool is less likely to stick than a single shot because of the reduced amount of
stationary drillpipe time. For this reason, in high risk areas the extra cost of MWD may be
justified.
14.8.6 Well Control Activities
Although differential sticking regularly occurs during well control operations due to the
increased mud weight, under no circumstances should this risk dictate the kill weight of the
mud to be used. Excessive safety margins in kill weight and circulating pressures are used
which can increase the chance of stuck pipe.
14.9 STUCK PIPE PREVENTION - MECHANICAL STICKING (HOLE CLEANING)
14.9.1 Introduction
Where annular flowrates are reduced and cuttings build-up is most likely to occur, the amount
of overgauge hole must be minimised. If a large casing sump is drilled, serious overgauge
problems in the next hole section can occur. Large safety margins are unnecessary. Other
causes of overgauge hole which can be avoided are:
• Excessively high flow rates and jet nozzle velocity (washouts)
• Incorrect mud formulations (soluble formations).
ROP must be controlled to a level at which cuttings can be removed. This applies to
instantaneous ROP, not average ROP.
A look at the shale shaker screens will give a feel for the effectiveness of hole cleaning. Large
slugs of cuttings coming across the shakers followed by periods of very few cuttings indicates
a hole cleaning problem.
14.9.2 Hole Cleaning Problems
In certain situations the flow rate could drop below the minimum required to effectively clean
the hole. If equipment problems interfere with the required flow rate pull to shoe while repairs
are being made and circulate the hole clean after the required flow rate has been re-
established.
Possible indicators of hole cleaning problems are:
• Excessive overpull on connections and trips
• Reduced overpull when pumping

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Stuck Pipe Revision: 0
18/05/2000

Section 14 Page 164 of 447

• Excessive fill after trips

• Erratic and increasing torque while drilling
• Lack of cuttings over shakers (or large slugs of cuttings followed by periods of very
few cuttings).
14.9.3 Solutions to Hole Cleaning Problems
Circulation rates are important and often need to be kept as high as possible in large diameter
hole sections. Where pump pressure is a limiting factor, consideration should be given to the
use of large ID pipe, short BHA’s and minimum quantities of HWDP to reduce friction loss.
Circulation, no matter how long it is carried out, does not guarantee effective hole cleaning.
Special tripping procedures may be necessary in wells with cuttings beds and in wells with
severe overgauge sections.
The hole shall be circulated clean prior to tripping. A trip out of the hole should not be started if
there are significant quantities of cuttings coming over the shakers.
Solutions such as pumping and backreaming out, or using undergauge stabilisers in the string
to disturb cutting beds have been effective.
The instantaneous ROP shall be such that the cuttings can be removed efficiently.
14.9.4 Deviated Wells
Downhole Motors
Drilling with a downhole motor in an inclined well without rotating the Drillstring may result in
undisturbed cutting beds. Where possible, the string should be rotated prior to POH in addition
to implementing some or all of the earlier mentioned hole cleaning measures.

Hi-Vis Pills
In deviated wells, increasing the mud viscosity and pumping Hi-Vis pills may not improve hole
cleaning. A series of Lo-Vis pills giving a more turbulent flow, followed by a Hi-Vis heavy pill
with a weight at least 2 ppg above the mudweight in use to sweep the disturbed cuttings, may
improve hole cleaning in these sections.
The following table lists the recommended total volumes (Lo-Vis + Hi-Vis pills) for pumping
sweep pills in deviated wells:

Hole Section Total Volume of Pills

20in(onshore) 100-300 bbls

17 ½in/16in 50-150 bbls
12.1/4in 50-100 bbls Lo Vis & Hi Vis
8.1/2in 30-50 bbls Lo Vis & Hi Vis
6in 30-50 bbls

Circulation Rates
As a general rule of thumb, the annular velocity necessary to remove cuttings in a wall inclined
at 30o is 20% higher than that of a vertical wall. Between 50o and 60o, the annular velocity
needs to be about 70% higher than that of a vertical wall. Hole angles between 40o and 60o

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Stuck Pipe Revision: 0
18/05/2000

Section 14 Page 165 of 447

are the most difficult to clean. Cutting beds at these angles will tend to slide down to the low
side of the wall and may accumulate causing the wall to pack off.

14.10 STUCK PIPE PREVENTION - MECHANICAL STICKING (FORMATION INSTABILITY)

14.10.1 Formation Instability
When drilling through areas of formation instability it is necessary to:
• Trip cautiously through swelling formations
• Pick up and ream midway through each joint (if hole conditions are severe, more
frequent reaming may be required)
• Trip through tight sections using slow rotation and circulation (after pulling into a
tight spot, run back into gauge hole and circulate before back reaming out)
• Ensure that sections of the hole found to be tight on the way out are always reamed
on the trip back in.
• Increase MW to maximum allowable for sloughing shales
• Increase YP to avoid settling cuttings around the drill collars and bit.
Note: If drag is indicated after a connection the joint shall be reamed twice.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Stuck Pipe Revision: 0
18/05/2000

Section 14 Page 166 of 447

14.11 STUCK PIPE PREVENTION - MECHANICAL STICKING (BOTTOM HOLE ASSEMBLY CHANGES)
14.11.1 Bottom Hole Assembly Changes
To avoid problems with undergauge hole and BHA changes it is important to ensure that:
• Bits and stabilisers are always gauged after each trip
• If the bit pulled is undergauge, the whole of the section drilled by that bit is reamed
unless torque records clearly show the point at which the bit gauge became worn
• A stiff assembly is not planned to be run after a flexible assembly
Note: If it is necessary to run a BHA of increased stiffness then the BHA should be
tripped into the hole slowly with extreme care. Reaming is recommended.
• If the hole is suspected to be undergauge, extreme caution is applied when tripping
into the hole (if in doubt, reaming shall be carried out).

14.12 STUCK PIPE PREVENTION - MECHANICAL STICKING (KEY SEAT)

14.12.1 Key seat
Key seating problems are indicated by:
• Doglegs from surveys
• High string tension
• Progressive difficulties during trips out of hole
• Sudden increase in drag.
14.12.2 Preventing Key Seating
Before any key seats have time to develop, severe doglegs shall be reamed.
Key seating problems can be minimised by:
• Using undergauge stabilisers in between drill collars
• Reaming key seat (use key seat wiper)
• Avoiding shallow doglegs
• Making smooth direction changes
• Pulling slowly in key seat interval.
14.12.3 Eliminating a Key Seat
If a key seat is expected or suspected, a three point string reamer with a diameter larger that
the drillpipe tooljoint and smaller than the DC’s should be installed in the string to wipe the
build section or dogleg.
14.12.4 Freeing
When freeing pipe from a key section situation:
• Limit initial overpull
• Work string downwards (jars may not function).

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Stuck Pipe Revision: 0
18/05/2000

Section 14 Page 167 of 447

14.13 FREEING STUCK PIPE - DIFFERENTIALLY STUCK PIPE

14.13.1 Initial Action
The first actions taken when the drillstring becomes stuck have a great influence on the
chance of success.
If the string is identified as being differentially stuck, e.g., no change in circulating pressure,
the pipe shall immediately be torqued to the maximum allowable torque and jarred down with
maximum trip load, (see Appendix B).
If pulling and jarring are not immediately successful, the mud properties shall be adjusted, eg.,
decrease mud weight.
14.13.2 Reducing Hydrostatic Pressure
Reducing hydrostatic pressure through the BOP is the normal way of freeing differentially
stuck pipe. However, it is essential that all aspects of well control are considered prior to
lowering the hydrostatic pressure.

There are several ways of reducing the pressure on the formation (POBM / water can be used
to reduce the hydrostatic head in a short time).
14.13.3 Mud Weight Reduction
The hydrostatic pressure can be reduced by mud dilution.
The minimum mud weight shall be pre-determined and close attention shall be paid to all kick
indicators. When diluting mud, it may be difficult to identify a slow influx of formation fluids as
the active volume is being increased continuously. On no account shall the hydrostatic
pressure be reduced below the maximum calculated pore pressure in the open hole section
without the prior approval of the Drilling Superintendent.
If dilution is not possible, spotting a light weight pill may be an option.
14.13.4 Spotting Pipe Release Agents
Differentially stuck pipe can be freed by spotting pipe-free pills at the earliest possible
opportunity. These agents attack and break down the filter cake, thereby reducing the bond
between the filter cake and the pipe.
The volume of spotting fluid depends upon the size of the hole at the stuck point. If sticking
has occurred around the collars, sufficient spotting fluid shall be pumped to cover the BHA
plus 100 % excess to allow for some hole enlargement.
Once the pill is in place, it shall be left to soak whilst continuously working the pipe. Soaking
times of at least 12 hours shall be considered.
14.13.5 Spotting Pipe Release Agents,
During soaking, the pipe shall be worked, preferably by putting it in compression. Slack off
about 10,000 lbs below the weight of the pipe and apply some right hand torque.
Note: If using 5in drillpipe, the amount of torque shall be approximately half a turn for every
1000 ft of pipe above the suspected stuck point.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Stuck Pipe Revision: 0
18/05/2000

Section 14 Page 168 of 447

14.14 FREEING STUCK PIPE - MECHANICALLY STUCK PIPE

14.14.1 Jarring
The pipe shall be immediately worked and jarred in the opposite direction to that when it
became stuck. That is, if stuck when POH then jar down, if stuck when drilling or RIH then jar
up.
Note : Pipe shall be pulled to the maximum safe limit previously determined. Prior to using
any lubricating pill, the effect on the hydrostatic pressure in relation to the pore and
fracture pressures shall be taken into account. If circulation is not possible and the
drillpipe is pressured in an attempt to initiate circulation, the pressure applied shall not
exceed the Maximum Allowable Annular Surface Pressure (MAASP).

14.15 FREEING STUCK PIPE - DRILLING JAR PRACTICES

14.15.1 Introduction
Jar settings depend upon the weight below BHA, pump open force, and expected drag in the
hole.
14.15.2 Jarring Theory
The impact force must be high enough to break the binding forces causing the pipe to stick
and the impulse force must act long enough to move the stuck pipe. Both forces are influenced
by the amount of drill collars placed above the jar.
The smaller the quantity of drill collars placed above the jar, the higher the impact force.
Conversely, the larger the quantity of drill collars above the jar, the greater the impulse. A
compromise has to be reached where impact and impulse are operating together to reach the
common objective.
14.15.3 Jar Placement
Vertical Holes
The standard used by Nimir Petroleum Limited, with respect to drilling jar placement, is to
locate the jar below the top drill collar.
If a jar is run after a back-off, it should be placed as close as possible to the fish.
Deviated Holes
The final selection and placement of jars and accelerators shall be determined after
consultation with the jar suppliers.
Do not drill with the jars at their neutral point in the string (jars can be run in tension or
compression).
14.15.4 Jarring Practices
In general, the following practices shall apply to the use of jars:
• Ensure that all surface pulling equipment is in good working condition. Do not
exceed the maximum allowable safe working rating of the weakest link in the pulling
equipment.
• Ensure that both the weight indicator and deadline anchor are correct and clear of
debris.
• Visually check the derrick for loose fittings. All personnel shall be kept clear of the
derrick and drill floor while jarring.
• As a rule of thumb, jar up going in the hole and jar down when pulling out.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Stuck Pipe Revision: 0
18/05/2000

Section 14 Page 169 of 447

• When the drillstring is initially stuck, start jarring with 40-50 000 lbs overpull above
that to trip the jar. Increase overpull to maximum over a one hour period.
• When drilling with the jars in compression, uncock the jar before making a
connection. This will prevent any sudden, unplanned upward jarring.
In horizontal wells:
• Jars should be run in the HWDP as required.
• Always free a stuck drillstring by jarring down when pulling into a tight spot and up
when running into a tight spot. Continue with this philosophy until it is obvious that
no further progress is being made. Only then shall attempts to jar through the
obstruction be considered.
• Heavy pulling and jarring shall always, where possible, be done with the kelly
installed. On those occasions where this is not possible, the elevator latch must be
secured with a chain. Jarring can weaken elevators when using tool joints with 18
deg tapers. Elevators shall be changed out after jarring and MPI inspected.
• Where heavy sustained jarring is performed, the blockline must be slipped at regular
intervals to avoid permanent damage to the line. The time interval between slipping
depends on the intensity of the jarring.
• Pull shall be limited on stuck pipe to 85 % of the minimum yield strength of the
weakest member. When jarring, overpull to the maximum figure to trip the jar, wait
for the jar to trip, THEN increase the overpull to that recommended for the pipe. If
the string is pulled to the maximum recommended for the pipe before the jar has
tripped, severe overloading of the jar may occur causing catastrophic failure of the
jar.
Note: In some cases the assembly may be isolated whilst jarring. However, this will
reduce the maximum pull that can be applied. The jar supplier should be
consulted prior to performing this practice.
• The derrick shall be inspected after jarring operations.
14.15.5 Circulating While Jarring
General
When circulating, pump open forces greatly influence jarring performance and have to be
carefully considered. In general, the impact force is assisted whilst circulating and jarring up
but the impact is reduced when circulating and jarring down.
WARNING: A ‘COCKED’ JAR (HYDRAULIC) PULLED TO SURFACE MAY TRIP ONCE IT IS
SET BACK IN THE DERRICK. THIS PRESENTS A HAZARD TO DRILLING STAFF AND
COULD DAMAGE DRILLING EQUIPMENT. ALWAYS CONSULT THE MANUFACTURER’S
RECOMMENDATIONS.
14.15.6 Accelerators
The use of accelerators is restricted to fishing assemblies after the string has become stuck.
Accelerators are normally run some distance above the jar and are devices to maximise the
impact force on the stuck position of the string.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Stuck Pipe Revision: 0
18/05/2000

Section 14 Page 170 of 447

14.16 FREEING STUCK PIPE - ECONOMIC LIMITATIONS

14.16.1 When to Give Up Attempts to Free the Pipe
After effort has been put into freeing the pipe, the decision has to be made whether to back-off
or continue. There are two options to consider:
• Back-off above the free point and run in with a fishing assembly.
The decision to back-off and run in with a fishing string will be made if it is considered to offer
an increased chance of success. There are too many variables involved for general guidelines
to be given and the choice shall be based on the experience of the personnel involved.
• Back-off above the free point, plugback and side-track.

The option of plugging back and sidetracking shall be taken on economic grounds
unless there are exceptional circumstances. Safety or legislative reasons would
override a financially based decision.
14.16.2 Economics
An economic assessment shall be made prior to suspending fishing operations, during which
consideration should be given to:
• Value of the string components which would be left in the hole and the cost of
backing-off including the cost of running a free point indicator and back-off shot as
well as the rig time used.
• Cost of setting a plug to kick-off from.
• Cost of sidetracking and re-drilling to the original depth.
•
The total of these elements gives an estimate of the cost of sidetracking. This can be used in
the following equation to determine the length of time for which it is cost effective to fish:

Abandon fishing time (days) = (Alternative operating cost $) Equation (14.2)

(2 x daily fishing rig costs in $/day)

Where alternative operating cost = 1 + 2 + 3

The probability of a successful fishing job shall be based on local experience as far as
possible, (see DOM, Chapter 16, Special Operations, Fishing).

14.17 FREE POINT DETERMINATION AND BACK - OFF PROCEDURES

14.17.1 Determining the Free Point
Stretch Method
Detection of the stuck point to locate the lowest possible back-off point can be established by
stretching the string and using stretch charts for drillpipe. This method gives only an
approximate value for the free point and shall only be used to locate the approximate stuck
point for spotting pipe free pills and to provide a starting point for using the free point
indicator tool (FPIT).

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Stuck Pipe Revision: 0
18/05/2000

Section 14 Page 171 of 447

Free point indicator measurements are expensive and take considerable rig time to yield
information. Particularly in deviated holes, information may be inconclusive and therefore of
no real value.
If it is not critical where the string is disconnected, attempts may be made to back-off the pipe
(after the stretch method) with a string shot at the deepest possible point. The method may
be repeated until a connection is found which is free and the string can be disconnected.
This method may be more cost effective than first running the FPIT.
Free Point Indicator Tool
In order to back-off the string at the deepest possible point, an FPIT can be run on electrical
wireline. By applying stretch and torque on the pipe, the FPIT can determine elongation or
rotation at any depth by use of an independent sensor placed between two mechanically
activated anchors. for back-off depth determination.
A plot of depth versus the percentage of surface torque and pull transmitted downhole will
show the deepest point at which the string is free, (see Figure 14.2 Hole Condition and Typical
FPI Readings).

When the decision is made to back-off the string, the connection to be backed-off shall be the
deepest connection which exhibits 80 % of the torque and tension readings of known free pipe
as derived from the FPIT. It is preferable to back-off a connection made-up on the last trip.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Stuck Pipe Revision: 0
18/05/2000

Section 14 Page 172 of 447

FREE POINT DETERMINATION AND BACK-OFF PROCEDURES

Differentially or stuck by heaving, sloughing formation.

PIPE SKETCH PULL AND TORQUE

% OF FREE PIPE READING
DEPTH 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100

A
BACK -OFF HERE

X
D

X
E

VERY POOR POOR GOOD

BACK OFF CHANCES

To stretch or torque the pipe becomes more difficult as depth below the pipe free point increases.
The FPIT decreases rapidly below collar B, the pipe should be backed-off either at collar A or collar B.

Figure 14.2 Hole Condition and Typical FPI Readings

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Stuck Pipe Revision: 0
18/05/2000

Section 14 Page 173 of 447

14.18 GUIDELINES FOR RUNNING FPIT

Detailed procedures for each run shall be formulated by the Electric Logging Contractor Supervisor at
the well site prior to conducting the job.
The following table provides generic guidelines for running an FPIT:

Stage Guidelines

Before running the • • CHECK anchor tips for wear

FPIT and correct size for the
particular size drillpipe in the
hole
Note: All ID’s of the string
shall already have been
checked to ensure that the
tool can pass through.
• • MEASURE the stretch of
the pipe to determine the
approximate position of the
free point.
• • PULL to the neutral weight of the pipe above
the stuck point. MARK the pipe at this point and
LABEL this point “Mark 1”.
• • PULL to the neutral weight of the pipe plus
the stretch required from the wireline contractor’s
tables. LABEL this “Mark 2”.
Note:From this point on, the weight indicator gauge
shall be observed but not used. All tensions
are referred to by the marks on the drillpipe.
It is essential that the pipe is pulled up to the
marks to avoid problems concerning the
pipe friction in the hole.
Running the FPIT • • RUN the FPIT to approximately 2 ft above the
estimated free point.
• • TAKE the stretch
measurement first and then
the torque measurement.
• • CHECK the readings to
ensure that the FPIT is not
slipping and that the torque
has been worked down
properly.
• • TAKE additional readings
above and below the stuck
point in order to build
confidence in the final
determination of the free
point and where to back-off
the pipe.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Stuck Pipe Revision: 0
18/05/2000

Section 14 Page 174 of 447

Deviated Holes
When taking free point surveys with the wireline FPIT, the Drilling Supervisor shall be in the
logging cabin with the Electric Logging Engineer to study the behaviour of the tension and
torque indications and to get a feel for the string reaction to the pull and torque required to
overcome friction at various depths.
When surveying for free point in deviated holes:
• Always take tension readings first before taking torque readings (this is especially
important in deviated holes where residual torque can give false indications that the
pipe is free when tension is applied)
• After each torque reading, the pipe shall be rotated a few turns to the left to get rid of
any residual torque
• All FPIT readings taken shall be checked against the wireline operator’s nomograph
to confirm the meter point readings.

14.19 FREE POINT DETERMINATION AND BACK - OFF PROCEDURES –

GENERAL BACK-OFF PROCEDURES
14.19.1 String Shot Size
The string shot size shall be determined by the Electric Logging Engineer so that it will be
large enough to back-off the joint to be released without splitting the pipe.
If the pipe does not back-off after the first shot, the charge can be increased on subsequent
runs.
The physical size of the primer cord bundle shall be confirmed small enough to pass through
the minimum pipe ID.

14.19.2 Weight, Torque and Turns on the String

Ideally the neutral point of the string weight distribution should be at the back-off point. The
determination of this condition requires careful calculation.
When backing off with left hand torque, 75 % of maximum make-up torque shall be used.
The Drilling Supervisor shall ensure that the correct calculations are made from the FPIT
reading.

14.19.3 Working Torque Down the Hole in Straight Holes

Backing off blind with left hand torque shall only be attempted when other methods cannot be
applied.
The following guidelines shall be adopted when working torque downhole:
• All non-essential personnel shall leave the drill floor.
• Left hand torque applied at the surface shall be carried out in combination with a
string shot (Primacord).
• If the string shot fails a chemical cutter shall be used, (see DOM, Chapter 16,
Special Operations, Chemical Cutters).
• Mechanical attempts (tension in conjunction with left hand torque) shall be
undertaken after prior approval from the Drilling office.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Stuck Pipe Revision: 0
18/05/2000

Section 14 Page 175 of 447

• Apply right hand torque first and work down prior to applying left hand torque and
working down.
• In order to prevent the left hand torque remaining in the upper hole section resulting
in a back-off higher than planned, it is necessary to work the torque down the hole to
the location where the back-off is required (this is especially critical in deviated or
crooked hole).
Note: This operation shall be subject to a Permit to Work and shall be supervised by
the Drilling Supervisor and Toolpusher.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Stuck Pipe Revision: 0
18/05/2000

Section 14 Page 176 of 447

In order to work the left hand torque down the hole the following procedure shall be
used:

Step Action
1 PULL the string to the determined weight for the back off. This
is normally an amount of pull equal to the weight of pipe in air
with the neutral point at the required back-off depth plus and
additional five tonnes. In 80 % of cases this is with the drillpipe
across the rotary table. Working torque downhole is simpler
with the kelly in the rotary table.
2 MARK pipe at rotary table level and mark a vertical line to be
able to count the reverse rotations.
3 APPLY ½ to ¾ of the required left hand torque. Extreme care is
required to do this job.
4 INSTALL the slips and SUSPEND the pre-determined amount
of overpull.
5 REVERSE rotate until ½ to ¾ of the torque has been applied,
HOLD this torque with the break out tong.
6 LIFT string out of slips and WORK torque down moving the
string 1 m up and down several times.
7
SET string again in the slips and APPLY further left hand torque
until the back off is accomplished.
14.20 FREE POINT DETERMINATION AND BACK - OFF PROCEDURES -
DETAILED BACK-OFF PROCEDURES

The following steps should be taken when attempting to back-off stuck pipe:

Step Action
1 RUN FPIT to find free point.
2 ATTEMPT to back-off one or two joints above free point.
3 APPLY sufficient weight of string to free point.
4 APPLY half of required left hand torque to the string.

Note: Total should be not more than half of drillpipe make up torque,
use rotary table in reverse.
5 LOCK rotary table.
6 PICK UP string, PULL slips.
7 TRANSFER torque in stages to string.
8 LAND string at marked position for correct tension.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Stuck Pipe Revision: 0
18/05/2000

Section 14 Page 177 of 447

9 APPLY torque and APPLY overpull above neutral string weight.

Note:Left hand torque shall not exceed the initial applied right hand
torque.
10
IF... THEN...
kelly is not used for rotating rotary tongs are used to
string hold torque in string

11 USE back-up tong lines.

12 ENSURE hook is unlocked.
13
IF... THEN...
kelly is used drive bushing must be
locked to rotary table

14RUN string shot inside string after required torque and tension has
been applied to string.
14.20.1 Completing the Back-off
After the string shot has been detonated, a check for back-off should be made by picking up
the string. The connection will usually (but not always) spin free, completely unscrewing the
pin and box.
However, in some cases the pipe may have only partially backed-off. To complete the back-
off the following procedure shall be followed:
Note : Before applying any left hand torque, the string shall be torqued to the right first and
the ammeter reading shall be noted. When left hand torque is applied later, the
ammeter reading should not exceed the reading for right hand torque.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Stuck Pipe Revision: 0
18/05/2000

Section 14 Page 178 of 447

Step Action

1 APPLY approximately half the amount of left hand torque originally

used to back-off the string.
Note:While the torque is being applied, the pipe should back-off,
resulting in a corresponding loss of torque load.
2 If the pipe does not come free, RELEASE the torque in a controlled
manner and NOTE any loss of torque in the process.
3
IF... THEN...
...torque was lost during the …REPEAT the process
application of Step 1... until back-off is completed.
...torque was not lost during ...the weight used was
the application of Step 1... probably incorrect. This can
be corrected by applying
half the torque originally
calculated.

4 If the pipe is still not free APPLY more left hand torque but DO NOT
exceed the initial applied RH torque.
5 After accomplishing the completed back-off POH.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Stuck Pipe Revision: 0
18/05/2000

Section 14 Page 179 of 447

APPENDIX A
STUCK PIPE ANALYSIS / DECISION CHARTS

14.20.2 Indications of Differential Rather than Mechanical Sticking

It is important to identify the causes of stuck pipe as early as possible. The diagnostic
process should not be taken lightly - the reason may be obvious from the conditions which
led up to the incident - but a wrong identification of the problem lowers the chances of
successfully freeing the pipe.
The following are examples of questions which should be asked in order to determine a
course of action:
• Is there a potential well control problem ?
• What was the operation when the pipe became stuck ?
• What do the rig’s data records show ?
• What recent changes have been made to the mud properties ?
• What have the hole characteristics been ?
• Where has the pipe become stuck ?
• Was the pipe stationary before sticking ?
• Is full circulation possible ?
• Are permeable formations known to be open ?
• Is there is a significantly overbalanced condition ?

Diagnostic Process
The variety of causes of mechanical sticking make diagnosis of the exact cause more
difficult than differential sticking. The following pages are provided to assist in the
diagnostic process.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Section 14

 Allomax Ltd 2000

B 1 Stuck Pipe Identification

MODE OF OPERATION

Connection Running Casing

Rotary Drilling Tripping In Tripping Out Reaming In Reaming Out Circulating
(& Survey)
Stuck Pipe

B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9
Drilling Operations Manual
Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Ref: (NW, PMc)

Page 180 of 447

 Section 14

Rotary Drilling

 Allomax Ltd 2000

B2 Rotary Drilling
Increased torque

If Tri-cone bit are Are bit hours Is there a formation Increased in torque due

No

Yes
Yes
used, bearings worn. excessive? change? to formation change.

No
Undergauge hole Have abbresive Is it possible
Is hole drag Can drag be Is circulation fractured/faulted
causing stabiliser to formation been that a fault has been

No
No
No

Yes
Yes
Yes

excessive? related to dog-leg? restricted? formations

hang-up drilled? drilled?

No
Yes
No
Stuck Pipe

Yes
Wellbore geometry
Have formation Cement blocks junk
Stabiliser hang-up on
of varyinghardness been

Yes
formation ledges
drilled?
Drilling Operations Manual

Inadequate hole Is drag reduced

Yes
cleaning when pumping?

No
Bit failure
String component failure
No

Newly drilled formation

Have problem
Geopressured formation
formations been
No

Fractured/faulted formation
exposed?
Swelling formation
Yes

Reactive formation
Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Ref: (NW, PMc)

Page 181 of 447

 Section 14

Moving pipe from static

after making/breaking
B3 Moving Pipe From Static connections during drilling,

 Allomax Ltd 2000

tripping, reaming or after
surveying.

Drag trend increasing when

moving string from static.

Reactive formations
Are known Junk cement blocks
Fractured.faulted formations Is circulation Are permeable
problem formations string component failure

No
No

Yes
Yes
Swelling formations restricted? formations exposed?
exposed? Stabiliser hang-up on ledges
Geopressured formations

No
Stuck Pipe

Yes

Inadequate hole Is drag reduced Can drill string

Drilling Operations Manual

Differential sticking
No

Yes
cleaning when pumping? be moved?

No
Yes

Reactive formations Junk cement blocks

Fractured/faulted formations Stabiliser hang-up on ledges.
Swelling formations
Geopressured formations
Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Ref: (NW, PMc)

Page 182 of 447

 Tripping in
Section 14

B4 Tripping In

 Allomax Ltd 2000

Increased in downward
movement

Is increase
Smooth Erratic
smooth or erratic?

Inadequate hole Is there excessive Is there excessive Was pervious bit

No
Undergauge hole

Yes
cleaning (cuttings bed) upward drag? upward drag? undergauge? Yes

Yes
No
Reactive formation Is drag reduced Is circulation

No
Yes
Swelling formation when pumping? restricted?
No

Wellbore
Hole bridged geometry
Formation ledges
Can this be related

Yes
Wellbore geometry
Stuck Pipe

No
to problem

No
Yes

Inadequate hole Cement blocks junk

formations?
cleaning

Has there been

Are dog-leg

Yes
Drilling Operations Manual

Was previous bit a BHA change

Yes

Undergauge hole excessive?

Yes
undergauge? on this trip?
Reactive formations
Swelling formations
Fractured/faulted formations

No
No
No

Wellbore geometry
Formation ledges
Can resistance
Cement blocks junk Formation ledges
& drag be related
No

String component failure

to formations?
Yes

Fractured/faulted formations
Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Ref: (NW, PMc)

Page 183 of 447

 Section 14

 Allomax Ltd 2000

Tripping Out

B5 Tripping Out
Increased drag or overpull

Is overpull
Wellbore geometry Unconsolidate formations
Smooth smooth or erratic? Erratic
Formation ledges Fractured/faulted formations
Yes

No
Are known
Are known Is overpull problem formation
problem formation Is overpull Wellbore geometry

Yes
Is circulation restricted? in new hole section? exposed in new hole

Yes
Yes
exposed in new hole in new hole section? Formation ledges section?
section? Cement blocks
junk

No
No

No

Yes
No

Reactive formations (bit & Are known

Are known
Yes

stabiliser balling)

No
problem formations exposed Unconsolidate formations problem formations exposed
Swelling formations

Yes
Is circulation restricted?

No
in hole section drilled by Fractured/faulted formations in hole section drilled by
Stuck Pipe

previous bit? previous bit?

Fractured/faulted formations Is downward

motion possible?
No

Yes

Yes
Is circulation restricted?

No
Yes
Drilling Operations Manual

Reactive formations (bit & Wellbore geometry

Is downward
No

Is circulation restricted? Formation ledges

No

stabiliser balling) motion possible?

Swelling formations

Yes
Does rotating
No

Inadequate hole cleaning Is circulation restricted? string allow obstruction

No

Yes
to be passed?
Cement blocks
Yes

junk

No
Wellbore geometry
Yes

Formation ledges
Wellbore geometry
Can BHA rotate free? Key seating
No
Yes

Formation ledges
Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Ref: (NW, PMc)

Page 184 of 447

 Reaming In
Section 14

B6 Ream ing In

 Allomax Ltd 2000

Increased torque
Undergauge hole Increased reaming weight requi Undergauge hole

Yes
Yes
Is increase
W as previous Is circulation Is circulation W as previou

No
Yes
smooth or erratic?
bit undergauge? restricted? bit undergauge?

Erratic
restricted?

Smooth

No
No

W ellbore geometry

No

Yes
(sidetracked hole?)
W ellbore geometr
Formation ledge
Stuck Pipe

Junk cement block

Bit failure
Is holedrag Is holedrag
Drilling Operations Manual

No
excessive? excessive?
No

Inadequate hole
Inadequate hole cleaning (cuttings
Yes

cleaning bed)

Yes
Yes

Does drag
No

Swelling formations increase when no Fractured/faulted formation

Does drag
pumping?

No
Yes
Reactive formations increase when not

Unconsolidated formations pumping?

Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Ref: (NW, PMc)

Page 185 of 447

 Section 14

 Allomax Ltd 2000

Reaming Out

B7 Reaming Out

Key seating Increased torque and drag

Yes
Is downward Is circulation Is increase Is circulation
Fractured/faulted formations

No
motion restricted? restricted? smooth or erratic? restricted? Yes

Erratic

Smooth

No
Wellbore geometry
No

Yes
Formation ledges
String component failure
Stuck Pipe

Junk cement blocks

Is drag String component
Swelling formations
reduced when

No
Reactive formations failure
pumping?
Drilling Operations Manual

Yes
Inadequate hole
cleaning
Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Ref: (NW, PMc)

Page 186 of 447

 Section 14

 Allomax Ltd 2000

Circulating

B8 Circulating
Increased torque and drag

Swelling formations Is circulation Is increase Is circulation

Fractured/faulted formations

No
Yes

restricted? smooth or erratic? restricted?

Erratic

Smooth
No

Yes
Stuck Pipe
Drilling Operations Manual

Does drag Swelling formations Junk cement blocks

increase when Reactive formations

No
pumping? Geopressured formations

Yes
Inadequate hole
cleaning
Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Ref: (NW, PMc)

Page 187 of 447

 Section 14

 Allomax Ltd 2000

Running Casing

B9 Running Casing
Increased in downward resistance while
running casing or after connection

Hole packing off

Reactive formations Is circulation Can pipe be Is circulation Hole packing off

No

Yes
Yes
Yes
Swelling formations restricted? worked upwards? restricted? Reactive formations
Inadequate hole cleaning

No

No
Stuck Pipe

Are dog-leg Are permeable

Differential sticking
Yes

Wellbore geometry formations exposed?

Yes
excessive?
Drilling Operations Manual

No

No
Formation ledges Surface load limitation with respect to larger drag
Fractured/faulted formations Inadequate hole cleaning (cuttings bed)
Inadequate hole cleaning Centraliser broken/bunching
Centraliser broken
Casing not filled
Junk in hole
Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Ref: (NW, PMc)

Page 188 of 447

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Stuck Pipe Revision: 0
18/05/2000

Section 14 Page 189 of 447

APPENDIX B

Stuck Pipe Freeing Worksheet

STUCK PIPE FREEING WORKSHEET
STUCK PIPE MECHANISM FREEING WELLBORE GEOMETRY
STRING MOTION PRIOR PACKOFF / DIFFERENTIAL WELLBORE INITIAL ACTION:
BRIDGE GEOMETRY
TO STICKING ?

MOVING UP 2 0 2 1. If sticking occurred while moving up, apply torque and

ROTATING UP 0 0 2 jar DOWN with maximum trip load.

MOVING DOWN 1 0 2

ROTATING DOWN 0 0 2 If sticking occurred while moving down, do not apply

STATIC 2 2 0 torque and jar up with maximum trip load.

STRING MOTION

AFTER STICKING ? 2. Stop or reduce circulation when cocking the jar and.

DOWN FREE 0 0 0 when jarring down

DOWN RESTRICTED 1 0 2

DOWN IMPOSSIBLE 0 0 0 3. Continue jarring until the string is free or an alternate

STRING ROTATION decision is made. Jarring for 10+ hrs may be necessary
AFTER

STICKING ?

ROTATE FREE 0 0 2

ROTATE RESTRICTED 2 0 2 SECONDARY ACTION:

ROTATE IMPOSSIBLE 0 0 0

CIRCULATING Spot acid if stuck in limestone. Spot fresh water with mobile
PRESSURE AFTER salt. Consider spotting acid if stuck in sandstone.
STICKING ?

CIRCULATION FREE 0 2 2

CIRCULATION 2 0 0
RESTRICTED

CIRCUALTION 2 0 0 WHEN STRING COMES FREE:

IMPOSSIBLE

TOTALS

1. Increase circulation to maximum rate, rotate and work the

string

INSTRUCTIONS:

1. Answer the shaded quesrtions by circling all the numbers in the row with 2. Ream / backream the hole section thoroughly
the correct answer.

2. Add the columns, the column with the highest number indicates the 3. Circulate the hole clean.
sticking mechanism

FREEING PACKOFF / BRIDGE FREE DIFFERENTIAL STICKING

STUCK WHILE MOVING UP or STUCK WHILE

WITH STATIC STRING MOVING DOWN INITIAL ACTION:

ACTION TO ESTABLISH ACTION TO ESTABLISH CIRCULATION:

CIRCULATION:

1. Circulate at maximum rate.

1. Apply low pump pressure (200-400 1. Apply low pump pressure (200-400 psi).
psi).

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Stuck Pipe Revision: 0
18/05/2000

Section 14 Page 190 of 447

Maintain pressure if restricted Maintain pressure if restricted circulation is 2. Work MAX limit torque down to the stuck depth and
circulation is possible possible. maintain torque.

DO NO JAR UP TO APPLY TORQUE. DO NOT JAR DOWN 3. Stop or reduce pump speed to min.

2. For hole angles 45o and < break up 2. For hole angles 45o and <; do NOT apply 4. Slack off to MAX set-down wt.
pack-off with torque, reciprocating and torque, jar UP with MAX trip load.
jarring down.

For hole angles 45o and >: do NOT apply For hole angle 45o and >; do NOT apply torque, 5. Allow sufficient time for a hydraulic jar to trip (4-6min
torque, jar DOWN with MAX trip load. jar UP with MAX trip load. for long cycle, see jar manual).

3. If the string does not come free, do not 3. If the string does not come free, do not jar 6. If the string does not come free, maintain torque and
jar up! Continue Step 2 until the string down! Continue with Step 2 until the string slack-off weight. Close the BOP and apply 200-400 psi
comes free or an alternative decision is comes free or an alternative decision is for 10-15 min.
made. Jarring down for 10 + hours made. Jarring up for 10+ hours may be
may be necessary. necessary.

7. Bleed off pressure through choke and open BOP Jar

down with MAX tip load.

WHEN CIRC. IS ESTABLISHED: WHEN CIRC. IS ESTABLISHED: SECONDARY ACTION:

1. Slowly increase pump speed to max, 1. Slowly increase the pump speed to max. If the string does not come free after 5 - 10 jar blows,
work the string and circulate the hole rate. When possible, work the string and continue Steps 5 and 6 while preparing a pipe releasing
clean. circulate the hole clean from bit depth. pill.

2. If POH to log and/or run casing 2. RIH until set-down limit is observed. Pull 1- WHEN THE STRING IS FREE:
return to bottom and circulate hole 2 stands and circulate the hole clean.
clean

1. Rotate and work the drillstring.

2. Circulate the hole clean and condition the mud system.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Surveying Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 15 Page 191 of 447

15 SURVEYING

15.1 INTRODUCTION
This chapter relies heavily on the Surveying Contractor’s operational procedures and guidelines and
the information presented in this chapter is a collection of the important aspects of surveying. The
information will allow cost effective, fit for purpose surveys of acceptable accuracy and quality to be
obtained in relation to the survey borehole position.
The Nimir Petroleum Limited (NPL) preferred method of survey calculation is the Minimum Radius of
Curvature method. This method is considered by the Company as the most accurate representation
of wellbore position, provided surveys are taken with the frequency outlined in the minimum survey
programme and that they are subject to documented QA / QC procedures.

15.1.1 Surveying Objectives

The primary surveying objective is to have a Lateral Position Uncertainty (LPU) of 50 ft or less
immediately prior to entering any formation where there is a risk of significant well control
problems.
In order to obtain this objective it is a requirement that:
• All wells shall be surveyed from the surface conductor shoe to well total depth using
the guidelines specified in this manual
• Survey accuracy objectives shall be specified for each well in the Drilling
Programme
• All final survey data reported to Nimir Petroleum Limited is required to have
azimuths pre-corrected to the local grid.
• The values for convergence and declination used shall be reported on all definitive
surveys
• Survey accuracy shall be defined by the Nimir Petroleum Limited borehole
surveying focal point, on all definitive surveys presented to the Company
• Survey tool selection for definitive surveys shall be based on the anti-collision
requirements, survey tool accuracy, target size and depth
• Survey tool requirements and surveying frequency while drilling with hole sections
containing hydrocarbons or a potential well control situation, shall meet the
requirement for a maximum lateral position uncertainty (LPU) of 50 ft.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Surveying Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 15 Page 192 of 447

15.2 DIRECTIONAL DRILLING AND SURVEYING RESPONSIBILITIES

The following table lists the specific personnel responsibilities relating to the conduct of directional
drilling and surveying operations:

Activity Execution Quality Control

Specification of target Geologist -
Preparation of well Directional Contractor Drilling
plan Drilling Engineer Superintendent
Equipment selection Drilling Engineer Drilling
Superintendent
Monitor well trajectory Drilling Supervisor Drilling
Directional Contractor Superintendent
Drilling Engineer
Wellbore surveying Directional Contractor Drilling Supervisor
Analysis and Directional Contractor Drilling
improvement Drilling Engineer Superintendent

15.2.1 Drilling Superintendent

The Drilling Superintendent is responsible for approval of the Well Programme and checking
conformance to programme requirements as drilling progresses.
The Drilling Superintendent must ensure that the correct processes have been followed in the
development of the surveying Programme. He must ensure that survey error models have
been used to ensure the most cost effective survey Programme that meets company policies,
especially with respect to anti-collision and relief well drilling.
15.2.2 Drilling Engineer
The Drilling Engineer is responsible for:
• Managing the directional well design process in liaison with the Contractor to ensure
optimum directional drilling and surveying programmes
• Ensuring that all data required for the effective conduct of directional drilling and
surveying operations is available and accurately recorded
• Providing technical advice and input to the rig site on a daily basis as required.
• Evaluating contractor performance and developing incentives for application to
directional drilling and surveying of wells.
• Maintain deviation database in company owned software
• Ensure Directional Drilling Contractor applies company QA/QC procedure
• Decide final acceptance of surveys.

15.2.3 Drilling Supervisor

The Drilling Supervisor is responsible for:

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Surveying Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 15 Page 193 of 447

• Ensuring all relevant personnel are fully conversant with the Well Programme and
Well Directional Plan and ensuring the optimised execution of same, with particular
regards to directional targets
• Ensuring all necessary equipment, materials and personnel needed to carry out
directional operations are available when needed and ensuring prompt return of
same after operations are completed
• Reviewing the progress of the operation and regular liaison with Directional
Contractor well site personnel, Drilling Superintendent and Drilling Engineer to
ensure optimum preparation and execution of operations
• Supervising and managing Directional Contractor personnel in the execution of
directional drilling and surveying operations
• Ensuring routine QA/QC of all survey data in accordance with standard company
procedures
• Checking and assessing competence of service personnel, service performance and
equipment suitability. Report same to Drilling Engineer.
• Ensuring all actions required by the company when drilling in close proximity to
existing wells are taken and implemented prior to and during conduct of the drilling
operation.
15.2.4 Directional Contractor Survey Personnel
Directional Contractor survey personnel are responsible for:
• Adherence to the established safe working practices of NPL
• Becoming thoroughly familiar with the Survey Programme and requirements
• Ensuring all data required by NPL is supplied in good time to facilitate accurate
survey calculations
• Fully implementing Contractor and NPL QA/QC procedures with respect to the
preparation, execution and reporting of survey operations
• Ensuring the rig-site survey inventory meets the programmed requirements and
advising Drilling Supervisor of future requirements to ensure efficient call-out of
materials and equipment
• Notifying Drilling Supervisor immediately when response of survey tools indicates
possible inaccuracies in survey results
• Maintaining complete records of equipment in the hole and equipment used during
drilling or surveying operations
• Providing raw deviation survey data and corrected data in both electronic form and
on paper. Any correction applied shall be clearly stated and based on the data
provided by the Drilling Engineer / Drilling Supervisor as stated on the Deviation
Survey Quality Control Sheet (see appendix C).

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Surveying Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 15 Page 194 of 447

15.2.5 Directional Drilling Engineer

The Directional Drilling Engineer is responsible for:
• Adherence to NPL policies with respect to the conduct of directional drilling and
surveying operations
• Becoming thoroughly familiar with the Well Programme and the requirements
relating to the directional operations contained therein
• Checking the accuracy and completeness of the final well plots prior to the
commencement of drilling operations
• Ensuring the rig site inventory meets the programme requirements and liaison with
the Drilling Supervisor to ensure future requirements are available in good time
(including the maintenance of up-to-date records on all directional equipment on-
board to ensure timely return for re-inspections, redress or over-haul).
• Providing standard daily reports to the Drilling Supervisor comprising a summary of
drilling activity, the drilling assembly in use, drilling parameters, survey data,
equipment requirements, proposed BHA’s and recommendations for operations
optimisation.
• Directly supervising the Driller in the application of drilling parameters and practice
to ensure smooth directional control over the well
• Maintaining up-to-date survey calculations and projections and working to maintain
the well path within the tolerances as specified in the Drilling Programme
• Providing BHA design, supervision and maintenance expertise and ensuring that all
recommended BHA designs are suitable with respect to Survey Programme
requirements
• Maintaining records of drilling parameters and BHA performance during drilling
operations to facilitate analysis at the well review stage
• Supervising hole opening, reaming and tripping operations to monitor hole
conditions and prevent unintended sidetracking of the well.
15.2.6 Directional Drilling Contractor
The Directional Drilling Contractor shall:
• Ensure the survey database is continually updated
• Satisfy input and output deviation survey quality
• Provide definitive well path data to Drilling Engineers when required.
15.2.7 Deviation Survey Database
All deviation data stored in the database shall be stored after applying the required corrections
for declination and grid convergence. Declination and grid convergence applied to the surveys
shall be stored in the Company and/or Directional Drilling Contractor database. Contractor
shall retain survey database in a fire safe location with backup data storage.
Only survey data obtained from the survey database shall be used for well planning or
sidetracking purposes. No other source is acceptable.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Surveying Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 15 Page 195 of 447

15.3 DIRECTIONAL OPERATION PREPARATION AND CONTROL RESPONSIBILITIES

The following responsibilities for the preparation and control of directional operations as shown in
Figure 15.1 should be addressed prior to commencement of all directional drilling or surveying
operations.
∙ Prepares draft plots as per 15.4 - Well Plots
Draft plots prepared by Directional Drilling ∙ Draft proposed based on data obtained from geologist
Contractor ∙ Proposed to be stamped "DRAFT" if not based on final well
Dir. Drilling Contractor programme
∙ Draft directional drilling contractors software report to be attached

Draft plots commented y Feedback to Dir Drilling Contractor

on by DE and Rig Supt
DE and Drilling Supt

Final plots prepared by ∙ Final plots to be treated as integral part of well programme
∙ Targets, Deviation Programme, and depth reference shown
the Dir. Drill. Contractor.
∙ Reference number included. Stamped "DRAFT" unless used on
Clearance summary signed programme
report provided. ∙ Check box for Focal Point , DE & Rig Supt signature
Dir. Drilling Contractor

Plots checked & ∙ Sufficient plots (Close-ups) provided

signed. Summary
∙ All collision risks identified
Clearance report
(front page) to be appended to the well ∙ Check that plots comply with well proposed objectives
programme ∙ Well Programme highlights wells with anti- collision risk
DE

Plots checked &

signed. ∙ Approves drillability and safety
DS

Plots sent to rig and ∙ Issued attention Drilling Supervisor

receipt acknowledged ∙ Preferably along with the signed drilling programme
DE
∙ Directional Drilling Contractor laptop computer mandatory on site
Ensure Survey software is used & Survey ∙ Check that wells on clearance report in the programme are the
software clearance report is same same as in laptop clearance summary report (ensuring correctly
loaded computer)
as in Well programme
∙ Know status of adjacent wells (flaring gas/oil, annulus pressure,
Drilling Supervisor shut in at packer or SCSSSV)

Enter survey points immediately into ∙ Adequate manning to be available

Directional Drill. Contr. software. Project ∙ Deviations from the Plan to be agreed with base before execution
ahead. Check for collisions.
Dir. Drilling Contr.

Final wellbore definitive survey

DE y Check surveys for acceptability of survey in/out runs
y Ensure accuracy within 50 ft at key zones

Figure 15.1 Deviation Planning and Control Check and Responsibilities

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Surveying Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 15 Page 196 of 447

15.3.1 Information Required from the Drilling Programme

The Drilling Programme shall be checked by the Drilling Supervisor to ensure that all the
information necessary for the preparation and commencement of directional operations has
been included.
Where any necessary data has not been included, it shall be requested by the Drilling
Supervisor prior to commencement of operations.
The required information, that must be included in the Drilling Programme, includes:
• Surface co-ordinates, both grid and geographical
• Target co-ordinates, target size and tolerance(s)
• Kick-off point depth and build (and, as applicable, turn) rates
• The Survey Programme, including contingencies in the event of Collision Risk
Separation Factors is less than 1.5 (if it can be reasonably expected that collision
risk is a problem)
• RTE TVD above SS datum
• Calculated magnetic field strength (T)
• Calculated gravity field strength (g) (Use 1.000g as default)
• Calculated dip angle (deg)
• The amount of NMDC’s required and the optimum spacing of the Totco ring and
sensor (if drilling a deviated well) - this should be obtained from the Deviation
Contractor or by running NMDC software
• Reference azimuth (deg)
• BHST at each casing point
• Recommended BHA’s to be used including contractor agreed dog-leg potential
values for each assembly if applicable.
Note: The BHA’s quoted are to be used as a guide and modified as drilling
conditions and directional requirements dictate.

15.4 WELL PLOTS

15.4.1 Introduction
The following standard directional well plots shall be produced by the Directional Drilling
Contractor as part of the detailed directional well design:
• Vertical Section View
• Plan View.
The plots shall be forwarded to the Drilling Engineer for inclusion in the Well Programme
approval process.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Surveying Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 15 Page 197 of 447

15.4.2 Well Plot Format

All well plots shall be produced in A0 size and shall have annotation boxes for the following
data:
• ‘Check/Signature’ box for the Drilling Engineer
• ‘Check/Signature’ box for the Drilling Superintendent.
• ‘Based On’ box for stipulation of whether the plot is based on the Well Proposal,
Well Programme or Programme Amendment (to be supplemented by the document
identification)
• A revision identifier indicated by a large character (A, B, C etc.) supplemented by
the date of the revision.
15.4.3 Standard Directional Plot Contents
15.4.4 Vertical Section View
The vertical section view shall contain:
• Scale: 150ft/cm minimum
• Well name, field name, plan version, scales
• Elevation reference used, (generally below original drill floor) (indication of
relationship between RTE and MSL)
• North reference, vertical section reference azimuth, declination and corrections to be
applied
• Target location - with shape and tolerance clearly identified
• Co-ordinates of well centre and target(s) shall be listed
• Summary of required deviation programme
• The vertical section view curve shall be labelled with critical directional points such
as casing shoes, KOP, build rates/turn rates, EOB etc.
• Co-ordinates of the critical points as detailed above.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Surveying Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 15 Page 198 of 447

Plan View
The plan view comprises a scale horizontal plan view of the new well to be drilled plus all
wellbores that are considered collision risks, and should include as a minimum:
• Scale: 150ft/cm minimum
• Well name, field name, plan version, scales
• Elevation reference used (generally below original DFE)
• North reference, declination and corrections to be applied
• The EOB will be indicated for each wellbore shown at the same TVD where
applicable (a complete complimentary listing of all proximity data shall be supplied)
• Target location - with shape and tolerance clearly identified
• Co-ordinates of well centre
• Summary of required deviation programme
• The planned well path shall be labelled with critical directional points such as casing
shoes, KOP, build rates/turn rates, EOB etc.
• Co-ordinates of the critical points as detailed above.
15.4.5 Checks of Final Well Plots
Drilling Engineer Checks
The Drilling Engineer shall check and sign all well plots, signifying that the plots:
• Conform to the proposal objectives
• Conform to company policies
• Have dealt with all collision risks in a satisfactory manner.
The Drilling Engineer shall satisfy himself that all necessary standard and non-standard plot
requirements are fully addressed.
Directional Drilling Contractor Checks
The Directional Drilling Contractor shall independently carry out the same process.
Drilling Superintendent Checks
The Drilling Superintendent shall check and sign the plots, approving the feasibility,
effectiveness and safety of the trajectory design.
Final Well Plot Use
Final Well Plots are to be treated as an integral part of the Well Programme or Programme
Amendment (as applicable) and shall contain clearly identified revision numbers and approval
signatures.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Surveying Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 15 Page 199 of 447

15.5 ADDITIONAL DATA REQUIREMENTS

15.5.1 Introduction
From time to time, as operations progress, further additional information will be required by the
Surveying Contractor to facilitate accurate monitoring and reporting of the borehole position.
The Drilling Engineer shall ensure that the tie-in data is sent (fax/email) to the rig, marked for
the attention of the Drilling Supervisor, as and when required.
15.5.2 Tie-in Data
Tie-in data shall be provided by the Drilling Engineer after completion of quality assurance
check on each Multi Shot, Gyro Multi Shot (GMS), Electronic Multi Shot (EMS) and MWD run.
The tie-in data shall be sent via fax/email to the rig and shall include:
• Tie-in depth MD (ft)
• Inclination (degrees)
• Azimuth (degrees) - referenced to UTM
• True Vertical Depth Below Rotary Table (TVDBRT) (ft)
• Northing (m) - latitude WRT well centre (0.0)
• Easting (m) - departure WRT well centre (0.0).
15.5.3 Foresight Reference
Prior to conducting any surface referenced gyro foresight based survey, the Drilling Engineer
shall provide faxed/email confirmation of the foresight reference to be used.

15.6 EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS

15.6.1 Equipment List
As part of the directional planning process the Directional Contractor shall provide a complete
listing of all drilling and surveying tools required for the conduct of the directional drilling and
surveying operations.
15.6.2 Equipment Availability
The Directional Drilling Engineer shall check that all required equipment is available prior to
commencement of each hole section.
The Directional Drilling Engineer shall liase closely with the Drilling Supervisor and Drilling
Engineer to ensure all equipment is ordered in ample time.
15.6.3 Equipment Checks
All downhole tools shall be visually inspected by the Directional Drilling Engineer prior to
running in the hole. All dimensions are to be recorded and reported to the Drilling Supervisor
to ensure fishing tools are available for each item run.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Surveying Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 15 Page 200 of 447

15.7 NPL SPECIFIC SURVEY DEFINITIONS

15.7.1 Declination and Grid Convergence Definition
The following definition of declination and grid convergence should be adhered to in NPL:

Grid North Magnetic North

True North

ATN

AGN

AMN

Borehole Direction

Figure 15.2 Declination and Grid Convergence

In this example:
• Declination D = “+”
• Grid Convergence G = “+”.

15.7.2 Well Co-ordinates and Topographical Definition

Within NPL, well co-ordinates and the topographical system are based on the local
geographical zone using the UTM projection system where drilling operations are being
conducted.
Reference Ellipsoid Clarke l880 IGN
Geodetic Projection WGS 84
Zone Local (ensure a central
meridian is used )

The use of this system ensures that all co-ordinates used within the NPL concession area are
positive (North and East). The Grid Convergence of the rectangular system used in NPL
should be calculated for each surface location using proprietary surveying software
All well surface co-ordinates are referenced to the local UTM projection system, expressed in
m North/South and m East/West.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Surveying Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 15 Page 201 of 447

15.7.3 Depth Reference

The vertical system datum is Mean Sea Level (MSL).
Ground Level Elevation (GLE) or for offshore Drill Floor Elevation (DFE) is referenced to Mean
Sea Level. Drill floor elevation (DFE) is defined as the distance between the ground level and
the rotary table, and for offshore as the distance between MSL and the DFE.
Distance between the drill floor and Mean sea level is the sum of GLE and DFE.
For offshore, the distance between the drill floor and MSL is the air gap.
For Drilling Engineering purposes DFE is synonymous with Below Rotary Table (BRT) for
depth referencing.

Rotary Table Drill Floor Elevation DFE

Ground Level Elevation GLE

Mean Sea Level MSL

Figure 15.3 Depth Reference

15.7.4 North Reference

All definitive well paths shall be referenced to Grid North, applying the appropriate
convergence and declination.
15.7.5 Anti-Collision Preferences
Survey Tool Error System
The system used in NPL will be the Surveying Contractor’s Error model propriety software
Borehole Position Scan Method
Closest 3D Approach
Borehole Position Error Surface
Elliptical Conic
15.7.6 Separation Factor Ratio
Ratio Warning Levels
Separation Factor Ratio = 1.0 Stop Drilling
Separation Factor Ratio = 1.25 Close in nearby well
Separation Factor Ratio = 1.5 Continue to drill but advise
base and monitor continually

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Surveying Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 15 Page 202 of 447

15.7.7 Geomagnetic Model

NPL will use the most up to date model appropriate for the geographical area e.g. IGBGCF99
15.7.8 Minimum Curvature Calculations
Minimum curvature calculations shall be performed and co-ordinates of stations shall be
reported to well centre (surface co-ordinates of the well are 0N, 0E).

15.8 GENERAL DRILLING PROGRAMME REQUIREMENTS

15.8.1 Introduction
The Drilling Programme shall clearly state the required minimum survey interval and type of
survey tool for each hole section, which shall depend on the required positional uncertainty for
operational safety purposes.
In this way, all NPL wells shall be surveyed to meet the operational safety and reservoir
exploitation requirements, which include:
• Relief well drilling
• Collision avoidance
• Geological targets and constraints
• Local legislation.
15.8.2 Relief Well Drilling
Of the safety and exploitation requirements, relief well drilling is considered the most
important. To this end, the following criteria must be satisfied regarding surveying for relief well
drilling:
• Tools of known performance must be used thereby generating surveys of known
accuracy
• Regular surveys of azimuth and inclination must be taken while drilling.
15.8.3 Target Tolerances
The target tolerances specified in the Drilling Programmes are generally sufficient that, in
combination with selecting the surface location and taking into account the deviation
tendencies from correlation wells and the survey uncertainty, the target can be achieved
without a correction run.
15.8.4 Additional Considerations
When drilling through formations where stuck pipe problems are known to exist, no surveys
will be taken until the BHA is below the formation.
15.8.5 Electronic Magnetic Multi Shot ( EMMS) Surveys
Electronic Magnetic Multi Shot (EMMS) surveys shall be taken at each hole section TD and
prior to performing a kick off.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Surveying Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 15 Page 203 of 447

15.8.6 Totco Surveys

A Totco survey is only allowed to check inclination tendency while drilling in hole sections that
do not penetrate a known reservoir or potential movable hydrocarbon bearing zone.
15.8.7 Gyro Surveys and Magnetic Interference
Gyro Single/Multi Shots (GSS) shall be used instead of magnetic based instruments where
magnetic interference is suspected.
A Gyro Multi Shot (GMS) survey shall be taken whenever EMMS surveys have shown
unacceptable magnetic interference over a significant part of the survey interval.
A GMS shall be taken inside the casing if hole problems, well control or other reasons
preventing the well from being surveyed with a solid state magnetic survey tool (MWD or
EMMS).
Note: Film based GSS are allowed for initial kick-off inside casing only (or where magnetic
interference does not allow the use of magnetic tools).
Electronic GMS are to be used in other cases where electronic magnetic tools cannot be used.
15.8.8 Survey QC and Reporting
Deviation calculations shall be performed on the rig independently by the Directional Driller
and the Drilling Supervisor, using the minimum radius of curvature method and checked by the
office based Drilling Engineer.
15.8.9 Availability of Well Plots
Well plots be produced, approved and distributed to the well site, relevant Drilling Engineer
and Directional Contractor Office before directional operations commence in see Section 15.4.

15.9 BOREHOLE SURVEYING PROGRAMME REQUIREMENTS

15.9.1 Survey Frequency
Every well has different survey requirements. The following table is a suggested minimum
survey requirement for world wide drilling operations. This must not be taken as a standard as
local requirements will prevail. The following tables are a suggested starting point for the
basis of design for the Survey Programme to meet the surveying objectives.
Deviation Surveys are to be taken at regular intervals as suggested by the surveying
requirements summarised in Figures 15.2 and 15.3.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Surveying Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 15 Page 204 of 447

Casing String Survey Requirements

Conductor INC

Surface casing INC

Intermediate casing MWD or EMMS
Production casing MWD or EMMS
Production liner
Course length 0-250’ INC
250’-500’ PMSS
500’-1000’ EMSS or EMMS
>1000’ EMMS

INC Inclinometer e.g. Totco

EMMS Electromagnetic Multishot
PMSS Photo-mechanical Magnetic Multishot
EMSS Electronic Magnetic Single Shot

Figure 15.4 NPL Standard Deviation Survey Requirements for Vertical OR Deviated
Wells with no anti-collision risks.

Casing String Survey Requirements

Single Shots Multishots
Conductor NSGO -
Surface casing NSGO NSGM (1)
Intermediate MWD or NSGO (2) NSGM (3)
casing
Production MWD EMMS
casing
Production MWD (4) EMMS
Liner

NSGO North Seeking Gyro Orientation shot

NSGM North Seeking Gyro Multishot
EMMS Electromagnetic Multishot
Figure 15.5 NPL Standard Deviation Survey Requirements for wells within a cluster
with anti-collision risks

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Surveying Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 15 Page 205 of 447

NOTES:
1. A high accuracy NSGM should be run in the surface casing if anti-collision
requirements demand the additional assurance.
2. NSGO (North Seeking Gyro) surveys may be required near the surface if magnetic
interference is likely from adjacent wells.
3. The Gyro Multi Shot is only required over the interval affected by magnetic
interference. EMMS would be sufficient for the remainder of the section.
4. From a surveying point of view, MWD tools may be omitted from short reservoir
sections. The requirement for the use is likely to be petrophysical. The use of MWD
in all sections of the well may be hard to justify in strictly surveying terms,
particularly when the loss in hole risk is considered. The criteria on which the use of
the MWD is based are both economic (Tool Rental vs. Likely Rig Time Saved) and
technical (the value of Real-Time Petrophysical data and the likely increased
frequency of surveys).

15.9.2 Verification of EMMS, MWD and GMS Data

For new wells, there is no requirement to verify EMMS, MWD or GMS survey quality by
running two different types of survey tools in the same hole interval if:
• The deviation survey quality control procedure is followed
• The measured survey is accepted
• The different quality control parameters fall within the defined limits.
The decision to take an EMMS inside the casing of an existing well shall be taken based on
the quality and type of existing survey data and the type of work to be performed. The decision
to re-survey shall be taken by the Drilling Superintendent.

15.10 POSITIONAL UNCERTAINTY IN BOREHOLE SURVEYING

15.10.1 Introduction
During the drilling operations phase the positional uncertainty must be monitored, especially
when drilling in hole sections which exhibit collision risk.
All borehole position calculations for well design, the survey database and well monitoring
shall be performed with propriety surveying software
The deviation survey calculation method is the Minimum Radius of Curvature.
Separation factor warning levels can be found under NPL Specific Survey Definitions.
15.10.2 Reference
Definitions, detailed descriptions of sources of survey instrument errors and cones of
uncertainty determination can be found in the Surveying Contractors Borehole Surveying
Manual.

15.11 SURVEYING TECHNIQUES QA/QC - WELL SITE QUALITY CONTROL

15.11.1 Survey Data and Reported Values
The data obtained for each survey run shall be reported by the Survey Engineer.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Surveying Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 15 Page 206 of 447

The Drilling Supervisor shall check reported values for conformance to the acceptance
criteria viz:
• The QA/QC system shall produce definitive surveys for all wells drilled by NPL
• The final submitted survey report shall be subjected to a full quality control
examination by the Drilling Engineer. After QA/QC control the Drilling Engineer shall
be responsible for retention of the surveys.
15.11.2 Repeat Surveys
In the event the survey acceptance criteria are met, no further well site QA/QC shall be
performed see Surveying Techniques QA/QC Acceptance Criteria (section 15.12.1).
In the event that all the acceptance criteria are not met, the Drilling Supervisor shall inform
the Drilling Superintendent/Drilling Engineer who will advise further action.
Repeat surveys shall only be undertaken with the full approval of the Drilling Superintendent.
15.11.3 Survey Misruns
In the event of a survey misrun, Drilling Superintendent approval shall not be required. In this
instance the Drilling Supervisor shall ensure all suspect equipment is changed prior to the re-
run of the survey.

15.12 SURVEYING TECHNIQUES QA/QC - ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA

15.12.1 Introduction
This guideline briefly describes the criteria used by the Drilling Supervisor in the preliminary
analysis of survey quality and for the well-site acceptance of survey validity.
These criteria, and the methods used in their application and analysis augment, but do not
supersede, more detailed analysis which should be performed by the Surveying Contractor.
15.12.2 Survey Acceptance Criteria & Values
Electronic Magnetic Multi-shot Vs. Gyro Multi-shot
Wherever possible, electronic magnetic multi shot surveys (EMMS) shall be used in
preference to gyro multi shot surveys (GMS).
In deciding upon the validity of an EMMS the Drilling Supervisor shall apply the criteria and
values listed in the following table:

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Surveying Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 15 Page 207 of 447

Maximum allowed deviation in measured

values from calculated values

Allowed variations • •Magnetic Dip Angle: 0.5

of measured value deg
from calculated • •Total Magnetic Field
value after applying Strength: 0.5 micro Tesla
Surveying
Contractors • •Relative Gravity Field
correction Strength: 0.005g
•
* Where 1.000 represents a value of 9.81 m/s2 as
being the standard value for gravity.
Variation between • •Inclination (in vertical and
the rotational shots deviated wells): 0.5 deg
• •Azimuth (in deviated wells
of more than 10 deg
inclination): 2 deg

15.13 SURVEYING TECHNIQUES QA/QC - DEVIATION SURVEY QUALITY CONTROL

15.13.1 Introduction
The QC of deviation surveys during the drilling operations is of paramount importance
especially in deviated wells from well clusters in producing fields. The bottom line is that NPL
needs to be able to determine the trajectory of all wells between the surface and TD at all
times.
The surveying contractor will work closely with NPL drilling personnel to ensure that quality of
the deviation surveys are up to the required standards.
To achieve this NPL has developed a Deviation Survey Quality Control Sheet for both
magnetic survey tools and gyro survey tools. The control sheets include the required
pertinent information to perform a quality survey in an auditable manner, the results of the
calibrations and quality control measurements, calculations and acceptance/rejection criteria,
(see Appendices C and D).
15.13.2 General Quality Control Process
The procedure for quality control is as follows:
• The Drilling Engineer includes the pertinent data in the Well Programme.
• The Drilling Supervisor initiates the Deviation Survey Quality Control Sheet.
• The form is sequentially passed from one person to the next as per the directions on
the sheet
• Information from sheet is finally returned to the Drilling Engineer who assigns the
appropriate uncertainty
• Drilling Engineer enters the survey into the NPL survey database, including the new
tie-in co-ordinates

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Surveying Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 15 Page 208 of 447

• Drilling Engineer informs the Directional Drilling Contractor and gives him a copy of
the final acceptance survey,

15.13.3 Quality Control Guidelines

• Each survey must have an accompanying fully completed Deviation Survey Quality
Control Sheet where the Deviation Services Contractor must have completed the
QC measurements and calculations
• The results of each deviation survey shall be checked as soon as possible after the
job
• The final survey report shall be delivered to NPL for final checking by the Drilling
Engineer no more than three working days after the survey is taken
• The Drilling Supervisor shall not sign the Job Tickets from the Deviation Services
Contractor, unless the assigned sections of Deviation Survey Quality Control Sheet,
(see Appendices C and D) are fully filled in and that the calibrations have been
performed
• While the well is being drilled with an MWD as part of the bottom hole assembly, the
Drilling Supervisor is required to monitor the borehole position, using Directional
software, on a continuous basis. He should ask the Deviation Contractor Survey
Engineer for regular quality control calculations, to ensure that ongoing MWD
surveys are within acceptable quality control limits.
• At any time when the Drilling Supervisor has doubts about the survey data quality he
should contact the Drilling Superintendent and Drilling Engineer.
15.13.4 Deviations Survey Database
A database of planned and actual well trajectories, including all slot locations, target
locations and projection data, shall be maintained by the surveying or the Directional Drilling
Contractor in a manner approved by NPL.

15.14 SURVEYING TECHNIQUES QA/QC - SURVEY TOOLS

Surveying techniques QA/QC for the following tools are out with the scope of this manual and can
be found in the Directional/Surveying Contractor manuals.
• Magnetic Survey Tools
• MWD Surveys Tools
• Gyro Survey Tools
• North Seeking Gyros Tools.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Surveying Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 15 Page 209 of 447

15.15 MAGNETIC SURVEYS - NON-MAGNETIC DRILL COLLARS

15.15.1 Introduction
This section describes the requirements relating to NMDC use when surveying with magnetic
instruments. More detail can be found in the Surveying Contractor’s procedures.
15.15.2 NMDC Length
Every magnetic compass placed in a steel BHA will exhibit an azimuth error. This is caused
by the interference between the magnetic field of the Earth and any BHA components which
cannot be demagnetised (e.g. mud motors).
To reduce this error to an acceptable level, the correct length of non-magnetic drill collars
(NMDC) must be run in every BHA in which magnetic surveys are to be taken.
The selection of the correct length of NMDC and optimum compass spacing will keep the
magnetic compass (azimuth) error typically below 0.25deg. The NMDC length requirement
varies with both the azimuth and inclination of the well.
The calculations for NMDC length shall be carried out using the Surveying Contractor’s
software.
Note: Such NMDC’s shall be a minimum of 30 ft long.
The NMDC requirement may have to be compromised due to the need to survey as close to
the bit as possible in order to allow fast / early correction to the wellpath. This will be
achieved at the expense of the survey accuracy and therefore well position uncertainty.
15.15.3 Compass Spacing
The optimum compass spacing is dependent on the components in the BHA below the
NMDC (see Appendix B). The guidelines for spacing of the compass from the bottom of the
NMDC section as a percentage of the total continuous length of NMDC’s are:

• bit + stabiliser - 30% up from base of NMDC section

• bit + mud motor - at least 40% up from base of NMDC section.

15.15.4 Note: The compass should not be placed within 3 ft of a connection. If tandem
instruments are run, the bottom compass should be spaced according to the
requirements detailed above.
15.15.5 Magnetic Interference
The calculation for axial magnetic interference from the drillstring for magnetic survey tools
shall be carried out using the Surveying Contractor’s software.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Surveying Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 15 Page 210 of 447

15.15.6 Typical Configurations

Vertical Wells
Configurations vary. Typically, vertical wells require:
• One NMDC for magnetic single shots or multi shots or,
• One NMDC above MWD when it is run.
The spacings above are shown graphically in Appendix B. Check local conditions for
magnetic influence with Directional Drilling Contractor.
Deviated Wells
Typically, deviated wells require:
Low angle (< 15deg inclination):
• 8 ft NM pony DC below MWD plus 1 NMDC above MWD
Moderate and high angle (16deg – 60deg inclination) with mud motor
• one NMDC below MWD plus 2 NMDC above MWD
Moderate and high angle (16deg – 60deg inclination) without mud motor
• 15 ft Pony NMDC below MWD plus 2 NMDC above MWD.

The spacings above are shown graphically in Appendix B.

15.15.7 Magnetic Hotspots

NMDC’s should be checked for magnetic hot spots at least every half year and more
frequently if frequent EMMS surveys do not pass QA control criteria.

15.16 MAGNETIC SURVEYS - CORRECTION OF MAGNETIC AZIMUTHS

15.16.1 Magnetic North Vs Grid North
The difference between the current Magnetic North for the location and Grid North is
monitored for every survey by the Deviation Contractor and the Drilling Engineer. (See NPL
Specific Survey Definitions in this section).
All drilling plots and directional programmes shall contain the current approved value for
correction. All surveys shall have azimuths pre-corrected to Grid North.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Surveying Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 15 Page 211 of 447

15.17 MAGNETIC SURVEYS - MAGNETIC SINGLE SHOTS (MSS)

15.17.1 Recording and Maintaining Accurate MSS Results
In order to record and maintain accurate MSS results:
• every precaution must be taken to achieve the best possible accuracy by following
the manufacturers guidelines
• each MSS kit should be re-calibrated every six months (and the dates recorded).

15.18 MAGNETIC SURVEYS - ELECTRONIC MAGNETIC MULTI-SHOTS (EMMS)

15.18.1 Applications
Electronic Magnetic Multi-Shots (EMMS) are the preferred definitive multi-shot surveying
instruments used in NPL. However, MWD data may be accepted as the definitive survey
provided QA/QC results are within the acceptable criteria.
They have the advantage of being relatively insensitive to compass spacing, less mechanical
parts, more options for time setting and quality control outputs.
15.18.2 Running Guidelines
General
During EMMS surveys:
• The instrument assembly should be run in the bottom NMDC or in the collar
immediately above the MWD tool (if run)
• The tool should be run centralised
• A 0.5-1.0 ft extension tube should be welded to the Totco ring to prevent flip over and
should be positioned to ensure the survey barrel is as short as possible within the
compass spacing constraints
• The top instrument should be spaced out 5 ft below the drill collar box end, if tandem
probes are run
• The Survey Engineer shall determine the data logging rate of the tool based upon the
likely duration of the survey
• Rotation shots shall be taken as per the Surveying Contractor’s procedure.
The Survey Engineer will correct the readings for instrument bias based on information
obtained from rotation shots. This involves setting the slips to keep the instrument at a fixed
depth and recording surveys at a certain number of different tool face settings.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Surveying Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 15 Page 212 of 447

15.19 STEERING TOOLS

15.19.1 Introduction
The steering tool is run on wireline and landed on a mule shoe seat (UBHO) in a mud motor
and bent sub directional assembly. It can give a surface read-out of azimuth and inclination
as well as the toolface settings needed for orientation of the assembly.
15.19.2 Accuracy and Application
The surface read-out gives a near-instantaneously updated tool face reading which allows
any reactive torque from a mud motor/bent sub combination or steerable mud motor to be
compensated at surface.
The steering tool is more robust than conventional surveying tools and is run in slick
assemblies. It is less accurate than MWD or EMMS.
Therefore the inclination and azimuth readings from the steering tool should only be used to
plot the provisional borehole path. An MSS should be taken to verify the well path.

15.20 MEASUREMENT WHILE DRILLING (MWD)

15.20.1 Introduction
Description
The (MWD) tool is a combined magnetic steering and surveying instrument run near the
bottom of the BHA. It is robust and accurately measures azimuth and inclination as well as
toolface. MWD Surveys are defined in Borehole Surveying Programme Requirements
section 15.9.
MWD Vs Steering Tools
MWD has an advantage over the steering tool that no wireline is required inside the drill pipe
since an electric power supply is provided. It is more versatile than other survey instruments,
certain MWD tools can provide readings from additional sensors like Gamma Ray (for
maintaining correlation and for picking coring or casing point markers) or formation
evaluation logging sensors.
QA / QC
Detailed procedures for QA and QC of MWD surveys are provided by the Surveying
Contractor.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Surveying Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 15 Page 213 of 447

15.21 RUNNING GUIDELINES

Fishing
MWD tools can be a slightly different diameter to the rest of the drill collar string, It is therefore
essential to check the fishing neck of the tool at surface prior to RIH.
MWD Tool Handling
Considerable care should be taken when handling MWD tools. They are built to withstand high axial
loads but are easily damaged by transverse loading. MWD collars should always be snubbed when
being handled out of transport cradles.
The MWD Engineer is required to supervise all handling of the tools.
Tool String Components
Under no circumstances should any steel component be included within the NMDC string. If
stabilisation is required NM stabilisers shall be used.
A Totco ring shall be run above the MWD collar to facilitate check shot surveys (integral in some
MWD tools). A 0.5-1.0 ft extension tube should be welded to the Totco ring to prevent flip over.
Mud line suction filter screens should always be run and preferably be part of the rig’s surface
equipment. Otherwise it may be necessary to use drillpipe filters.
15.21.1 Surveys
Benchmark surveys should always be taken in accordance with the Surveying Contractors
QA/QC procedures .
Surveys should always be taken after making the connection in order to reduce the chances
of stuck pipe. In all cases do not allow the pipe to be left stationary for more than one survey
cycle.
Note: Although the pipe should remain stationary when the survey is being taken, the pipe
should be moved during transmission of the data to surface, provided it does not
interfere with the quality of the data transmitted.

15.21.2 Steering with MWD

Tool Face Readings
Tool face readings are transmitted in the mud flow whenever steering mode is selected. The
time interval between tool face updates is generally longer than those from the steering tool.
Magnetic Tool Face
Magnetic tool face is used in vertical holes (inclination < 6 degrees) which are more than 50
ft from a potential external source of magnetic interference.
High Side Tool Face
High side (gravity) tool face is used in non-vertical holes (inclination > 6 degrees), even
within 50 ft of such magnetic interference.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Surveying Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 15 Page 214 of 447

15.21.3 MWD Accuracy

MWD can replace the MSS instrument and the steering tool.
When the MWD tool provides raw sensor outputs at surface, accuracy shall be improved by
making a set of “rotation shots” at a fixed depth or depths according to the MWD Service
Company’s techniques.
15.21.4 Tool Failures
When the MWD tools fails, POOH and change the MWD probe. This is applicable especially
for high angle/horizontal wells.
If drilling vertical wells, it is acceptable to drill a further 600 ft from the last survey station,
drop a MSS and then pull out.
15.21.5 Well Deepening
If a well needs deepening by less than 600 ft (vertical wells), or 300 ft (deviated wells), or the
hole size is 6” or less, usually there is no requirement to re-run the MWD tool. However each
case should be considered on its own merit.

15.22 GYRO SURVEYS - INTRODUCTION

15.22.1 Application
Gyro surveys will be taken when the casing has been run if it was not possible to perform an
MMS in the open hole.
15.22.2 Depth Reference
The depth reference of the survey should be to the drill floor on a new well or the elevation of
the original drill floor if the well is being re-entered.

15.23 GYRO SURVEYS - GYRO SINGLE SHOT SURVEYS

15.23.1 Application
Gyro single shot surveys shall be taken during drilling, instead of magnetic surveys (MSS or
MWD or steering tool), whenever magnetic interference may be present.
Interference is likely within 50 ft of a steel fish or casing strings in adjacent wells and within
50 ft of the casing shoe or casing window in the same well.

15.24 GYRO SURVEYS - GYRO MULTI-SHOT SURVEYS

15.24.1 Application
Gyro Multi-shot (GMS) surveys may be taken inside casing or occasionally in-string, but are
only preferred to EMMS surveys where magnetic interference cannot be corrected.
GMS may be run to provide a check on the single/multi shots (whether MSS, EMMS or
MWD) used to drill each hole section.
15.24.2 Frequency
The depth increment between stations shall generally be no more than 100 ft.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Surveying Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 15 Page 215 of 447

15.25 GYRO SURVEYS - GYRO INSTRUMENTS

15.25.1 Introduction
There are two distinct groups of slim, surface reading, gyro surveying tool; those that require
orientation to a foresight reference bearing on the surface (“surface referenced”) and those
that seek True North.
15.25.2 Surface Referenced Gyros
Azimuth Referencing Requirement
Surface co-ordinates (foresight reference) and the elevation of the rig floor are used for the
surface reference Gyros.
Reporting Requirements
The survey report listing gyro stations and calculated co-ordinates should include the
instrument serial number, downhole gyro drift rates (if any), drift closure rate, in-run/out-run
differences, foresight information including method of calculation, type of wireline used and
any relevant Survey Engineer’s comments.
15.25.3 North Seeking Gyros
Applications
Due to its inherently very low drift rates, this type of gyro may be used at all depths and is
only limited by its temperature range.
A foresight reference bearing for this type of surface read-out gyro is not required. The gyro
tool references either the individual survey stations or the entire survey to True North by
sensing the Earth’s rotation. Therefore, the Grid Convergence between Grid North and True
North must be applied to the measured azimuth readings by the Survey Engineer.
Survey Reporting Requirements
Along with the survey results of inclination and azimuth and the calculated co-ordinates, the
Survey Engineer shall also present a report detailing the instrument serial number,
centralisation scheme, in-run/out-run differences of inclinations and azimuth, shop calibration
dates, calibration check data, quality control information (also temperature range and
whether continuously increasing), type of wireline used, depth counter slippage and any
relevant survey engineer’s remarks.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Surveying Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 15 Page 216 of 447

APPENDICES

Appendix A – Bottom Hole Assemblies

Appendix B – Typical Spacing for Magnetic Survey Instruments

Appendix C - Deviation Survey Quality Control Sheet (GMS)

Appendix D - Deviation Survey Quality Control Sheet (MWD and EMT).

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Surveying Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 15 Page 217 of 447

APPENDIX A - BOTTOM HOLE ASSEMBLIES

Generalised Rotary Bottom

Hole Assemblies

10-20ft 30ft
1 ST
AB
ST
AB
ST
AB

FG FG FG
LOCKED assembly ("STIFF" or "PACKED ")
For holding angle in vertical or low angle holes. Drops at moderate and high
inclinations.

2 ST
AB
10-20ft
ST
AB
30ft
ST
AB
30ft
ST
AB

FG FG FG FG
HOLDING assembly
Holds angle at moderate inclinations (15Deg - 40 Deg).
May also build or drop depending on dia of #2 stabs and distance between #1 and #3 stabs.

30-60ft 30ft
3 ST
AB
ST
AB
ST
AB

FG FG FG
BUILD assembly ("BELLY")
Builds angle or holds at high inclinations. Increase distance between #1 and #2
stabs for more build.

10-60ft 30ft
4 ST
AB
ST
AB

FG FG
DROP-OFF assembly ("PENDULUM")
Drops angle or holds in vertical hole. Increase # 1 stab for more drop. Erratic
behaviour unless low WOB used.

5 Rest of BHA

TANDEM nearbit stabilisers

Reduces bit walk

6
SLICK assembly
Non-directional assembly only for drilling out suspect float equipment.

LEGEND FG = Full Gauge (Hole size to 1/16" under hole size)

UG = Under Gauge (1/16" to 3/8" under hole size)

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 TYPICAL SPACE-OUT OF MAGNETIC SURVEY
Section 15

INSTRUMENTS

 Allomax Ltd 2000

VERTICAL DEVIATED
o o
MAGNETIC SINGLE SHOT 0 - 15 16o - 60o 16o - 60o
WITH MUD MOTOR WITH MUD MOTOR WITHOUT MUD MOTOR
REQUIREMENT 30% up REQUIREMENT 40% up REQUIREMENT 40% up REQUIREMENT 30% up

30'

30'

COMPASS
9' 30'

30'

9 MWD 108' 30'

s
30%
30 18'

Proces
13'
Surveying

MEASUREMENT WHILE DRILLING

56'
18' 30'
REQUIREMENT 30% up 13'
43'
96'
30'
21'
Drilling Operations Manual

MWD
8'
18'
30' 13'

30'
48'
MUD MOTOR MUD MOTOR
18'
MWD
13' 18'

13 21 43 30
27% 38% 40% 32%
48 56 108 96
APPENDIX B – TYPICAL SPACING FOR MAGNETIC SURVEY INSTRUMENTS

NON-MAGNETIC MWD TOOL SHOWING SENSOR

LEGEND COMPONENT POSITION
STEEL SINGLE SHOT LANDING RING OR UBHO (for
Revision: 0
18/05/2000

COMPONENT MUDMOTORS)
Ref: (NW, PMc)

Page 218 of 447

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Surveying Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 15 Page 219 of 447

APPENDIX C - DEVIATION SURVEY QUALITY CONTROL SHEET (GMS)

Well Name and Number DFE tvd ft above S.S. Datum:

Grid Surface Co-ordinates: Geographic Surface Co-ordinates:
North/South (+/-)(m): Longitude (d°, m’, s”):
East/West: (+/-)(m): Latitude (d°, m’, s”):
Foresight Grid Co-ordinates: Foresight Geographic Co-ordinates:
North/South (+/-)(m): Longitude (d°, m’, s”):
East/West: (+/-)(m): Latitude (d°, m’, s”):
Grid Convergence (Deg): Azimuth to Foresight (Grid) Deg:
Last casing size: Identification of Foresight
Last casing shoe depth ahdbdf (ft):

Angle unit type and range (Deg): Expected range of inclination Deg:
Survey top-bottom depth: Station Interval:
BHST °C: Reference Azimuth (Grid) Deg:
Expected date of Survey: Type of Survey (Single Shot / Multi-shot):
Tie-in
point:
Ahdbdf Incl. (Deg): Az (Deg): TVD (ft): N/S (m): E/W (m):
(ft):

Identification of Foresight:
Survey start date and time Total observed drift Deg:
Survey end date and time Total survey time hours
Winch slippage factor ft/300 ft Total observed drift rate Deg /hr:
Check Survey overlapping with last Survey tool run (if possible):
Ahdbdf (ft) last run: Incl. (Deg). last run: Az. (Deg). last run:
Ahdbdf (ft) this run: Incl. (Deg). this run: Az. (Deg). last run:
Drift correction applied: (y/n)
Inter Gimbal correction applied: (y/n)
Tilt correction applied: (y/n)
Preliminary acceptance check performed (Criteria below). Survey accepted (y/n)
Winch slippage Total slippage m / 2*HUD < 1 ft/300 ft surveyed:
factor:
Gyro Single Total observed drift (less than 5 Deg):

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Surveying Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 15 Page 220 of 447

Shot:
Gyro Multi Shot: Total observed drift rate (<10 Deg/hour):
If Incl. > 10 Deg. Az. in run/out run (within 1 Deg):
Incl. in run/out run (within 0.25 Deg):

Agreed and accepted correct:

Contractor Survey Engineer Drilling Supervisor

Contractor Focal point

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Surveying Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 15 Page 221 of 447

APPENDIX D -DEVIATION SURVEY QUALITY CONTROL SHEET (MWD AND EMT)

Well Name and Number DFE tvd m above S.S. Datum:
Grid Surface Co-ordinates: Geographic Surface Co-ordinates:
North/South (+/-)(m): Longitude (d°, m’, s”):
East/West: (+/-)(m): Latitude (d°, m’, s”):
Declination (Deg): Last casing size:
Grid Convergence (Deg): Last casing shoe depth ahdbdf (ft):

Survey top-bottom depth: Station Interval:

BHST °C: Reference Azimuth (Grid) Deg:
Date of Survey: Type of Survey (MWD/EMT/Others):
Tie-in
point:
Ahdbdf (ft): Incl. (Deg): Az (Deg): TVD (ft): N/S (m): E/W (m):

Length of NMDC’s in ft:

Spacing of sensor from bottom of NMDC’s in (ft):
Length of BHA below the NMDC’s in (ft):
Well Site survey tool pre-job and post-job quality check:
Tool number
Calculated: Pre-job check Post-job Allowed variation w.r.t
check calculated
Magnetic Field Strength +/- 0.175 µT
µT:
Gravity Field Strength g: 1.000 +/- 0.005 g
Dip Angle Deg: +/- 0.3 Deg
Check Survey overlapping with last Survey tool run (if possible):
Ahdbdf (ft) last run: Incl. (Deg.) last run: Az. (Deg.) last run:
Ahdbdf (ft) this run: Incl. (Deg.) this run: Az. (Deg.) last run:
Rotational shots (both for EMT and MWD survey runs) to be taken at depth with expected inclination
above 2 Deg and at least 100ft below casing shoe, but not in kick off sections with steerable assy:
Ahdbdf (ft) rotational shots: Amount of rotational shots (min. 6):
Ahdbdf (ft) rotational shots: Amount of rotational shots (min. 6):
Contractor Software correction Programme results:
Amount of stations rejected: Depth of stations rejected:
Print-out and electronic copy of raw, uncorrected contractor software files to be issued to DSV.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Surveying Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 15 Page 222 of 447

Agreed and accepted correct:

Contractor Survey Engineer Drilling Supervisor

Contractor Focal Point

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Special Operations Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 16 Page 223 of 447

16 SPECIAL OPERATIONS
16.1 MILLING - GENERAL GUIDELINES
16.1.1 Guidelines During Milling
The following guidelines shall be adhered to during milling:
• • To effectively remove the cuttings while milling, it shall be ensured that:
• • The yield point of the mud is increased as high as possible prior to
commencing milling.
• • The flow is turbulent to prevent cuttings from blocking the annulus, (a
minimum annular velocity of 2 ft/sec is recommended)
• • Viscous pills are pumped at regular intervals.
• • Rotation shall start a minimum 1 ft above the fish. WOB and rpm shall be adjusted
to find the best milling rate while noting the rotating torque
• • Milling shall commence with a low rpm ie., 30 rpm (increasing to a maximum of 100
rpm), dependent on the torque exhibited by the fish and guidelines from Milling
Contractor.
• • A constant milling weight shall be maintained. The tool shall not be allowed to drill
off
• • In order to provide a high circulation rate all subs and auxiliary tools shall be full
bore where possible. The tools shall be picked up, circulated and rotated at regular
intervals
• • BOP cavities shall be flushed upon completion of milling
• • Jars shall not be run when milling (weight cannot be accurately controlled and
spudding cannot be carried out)
• • A minimum of two ditch magnets shall be used at the shale shakers or flowline.
These magnets shall be cleaned regularly and the weight of steel recorded.
• • Trough/flowline screens and flowline design shall be considered for an extensive
casing milling job
• • When milling inside casing smooth tool joints shall be used and not newly hard
faced ones
• • Reverse circulation with open ended drillpipe is a good way to remove cuttings
accumulations
• • When milling washpipe, liner or casing, cuttings can accumulate inside the fish.
When cuttings removal is not optimum inside the fish, the well shall be periodically
cleaned out to bottom with a junk mill or the circulation reversed.
• • The wear pattern on the mill will tell a lot about the performance of the mill in the
hole. If the blades have a hook wear pattern, milling is progressing satisfactorily, If
the blades are tapered it usually means too much weight was used which flared the
top of the fish.
•

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Special Operations Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 16 Page 224 of 447

16.1.2 Reading Cuttings

• • Ideal cuttings are about 1/32” thick and up to 3” long
• • Hair-like cuttings with low penetration rates mean the weight should be increased
• • Fish-like cuttings when pilot milling or section milling (common when milling
H-40 pipe) indicate that the penetration rate can be improved by decreasing the
weight and increasing the rotary table speed
• • It is normal to expect cuttings finer than other grades of pipe when milling P-110
pipe.
•
16.1.3 Recording
While milling, a record shall be kept of the:
• • Progress made
• • Torque
• • Pump pressure
• • Weight on mill
• • Rpm
• • Circulation rate
• • Metal recovery from magnets.
•
16.1.4 Stabilisers
Under gauge stabilisers shall be run to centralise the mill, but the number of stabilisers shall
be kept to a minimum to prevent excessive torque and bird nesting of cuttings. Normally, a
stabiliser is run one or two collars above the mill.
Where stabilisers are placed inside casing during milling, consideration shall be given to the
use of soft blade or non-rotating stabilisers.
16.1.5 String Casing Protectors
Further casing protection can be achieved if required by the use of non-rotating drillpipe
protectors, particularly across build up/drop off intervals. Follow general guidelines from the
supplier.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Special Operations Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 16 Page 225 of 447

16.1.6 General Operating Recommendations

The following table gives the recommended rpm’s and weight’s for the different types of milling
tools.

Type rpm Weight (lbs) Remarks

Junk Mill +/- 100 4,000 - 10,000 Spud mill from time to time
Pilot Mill +/- 100 6,000 - 10,000 Vary weight to find best ROP.
Taper Mill +/- 100 2,000 - 4,000 Start with light weight and low rpm
Flat Mill +/- 100 2,000 – 8,000 Start mill above fish
Rotary Mill +/- 100 2,000 - 6,000 Pick up from time to time. Check
overpull and torque. Do not spud
unless absolutely necessary

Note: Best ROP’s are made when a constant weight is applied.

16.1.7 Expected Milling Rates

The following table gives the expected milling rates for each milling tool milling different
materials:

Material Junk Mill Pilot Mill Flat Mill Washover Shoe

(ft/hr) (ft/hr) (ft/hr) (ft/hr)
Drillpipe 2–6 2–4 - 6
Drill Collars 1–2 1–2 - 4 – 6.5
Packers 4 - 2–3 -
Bit cones etc. 2–4 - - -
General junk 3-5 - 2-4 -
Washover 2–4 4 – 10 - -
pipe/string
Casing 2-4 4 – 10 - -

Note: The above tables are taken from SERVCO Handbook - Fourth Edition

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Special Operations Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 16 Page 226 of 447

16.1.8 Factors Affecting Milling Rates

The factors affecting milling rates are:
• • Type and stability of fish
• • Weight on mill
• • Speed of mill
• • Hardness of cement when milling casing
• • Well cemented or uncemented casing.
•
16.1.9 Rubber
Rubber in association with a fish can cause trouble during milling operations. If rubber is
reducing milling rates, the pump pressure should be reduced or the pump stopped for short
intervals. The mill should be spudded frequently to help the mill get some bites on the rubber.
16.1.10 Rough Operation
Any mill works best when it runs smoothly. To do this, the following procedures should be
used:

Step Action
1 To stop bouncing or rough running, LOWER the table speed to
about 50rpm and REDUCE weight to about 3,000lbs.
2 RUN for an hour or two, gradually increasing weight.
IF... THEN...
...the mill runs smoothly ...CONTINUE at this
and penetration is good speed
...the penetration rate is ...INCREASE speed
low
...the mill starts to run ...BACK OFF on the
rough again speed until the mill
runs smoothly again
and HOLD that speed

3 When milling casing, a rough running or bouncing mill -

particularly a pilot mill or a section mill - often indicates that
the casing is not properly cemented and is wobbling.
Reducing table speed should help to overcome this
condition.

16.1.11 Centralisers and Scratchers

Centralisers and scratchers behind casing sometimes cause trouble in milling, although less
difficulty is generally encountered if the casing is well centred. For best results, a mill with
blades that extend completely over the centralisers and scratchers shall be used.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Special Operations Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 16 Page 227 of 447

16.2 MILLING - JUNK MILL

16.2.1 Junk Mill
When milling loose junk, spudding shall be periodically carried out to pound junk down to the
bottom of the hole where it can be effectively milled. The following procedure shall be used:

Step Action
1 DETERMINE the neutral point where the mill is just above the
junk. MARK the pipe.
2 PICK UP the pipe 3 - 6 ft.
3 DROP and CATCH the string just above the mark on the pipe.
Note:This action causes the string to stretch and spud the mill
on the bottom.
4 SPUD 3 or 4 times turning the mill 1/4 turn each time.

An increase in torque is an indication that junk has worked alongside the mill. Spud the mill to free the
tool.

16.2.2 Junk in Open Hole

• The following guidelines shall be adhered to during milling junk in open hole:
• When milling in open hole, the mill shall be only 1/8in to 1/4in less than the open hole
diameter
• When possible, use at least 10,000lbs of drill collars
• A junk sub or multiple junk subs shall be placed in the milling assembly
• Beware of casing shoes at deviations greater than 30o inclination. The junk sub may
hang up whilst POH
• Mill with 4,000 – 10,000lbs depending upon the strength of the fish being milling
• After reaming the hole down, always set down on the fish while turning and bring the
weight up to the milling weight without delay. Never apply weight without rotating
first
• Do not stop milling by sitting on the fish with a light weight and spin. This causes the
fish to work harden and restarting milling operations will be difficult. If milling has to
stop for any reason, pick up the mill.
•

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Special Operations Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 16 Page 228 of 447

16.2.3 Junk Inside Casing

• Similar conditions apply to milling junk in open hole with the addition of:
• • A non-rotating stabiliser or soft-bladed stabiliser shall be run above the mill with the
same OD as the mill head
• • The OD of the mill shall be approximately the same as the drift ID of the casing
• • The wear parts on the mill should be the same OD as the OD of the mill head
• • At least one junk sub shall be placed in the milling assembly.
•
16.3 MILLING - PILOT MILL
16.3.1 Uses of Pilot Mills
• Pilot mills are used for milling:
• • Adapters
• • Liners
• • Casing
• • Swaged casing
• • Drillpipe
• • Wash pipe.
•
16.3.2 Procedure
The procedure for milling with a pilot mill is as follows:

Step Action
1 ROTATE the string above the fish to establish the free rotating
torque.
2 While rotating approximately 30 rpm, slowly ENTER the fish.
Torque shall increase when the mill blades start milling on the
fish.
3 ADD approximately 2,000lbs weight and STOP rotating
suddenly. A gradual slowdown or spin indicates that the mill has
entered the fish and is properly aligned. If there is a stinger
below the mill, stopping rotation suddenly may cause backing
off below the mill.
Note: Determine the optimum weight and rpm as the job
progresses.
4 After establishing the penetration rate, the string shall not be
picked up again. CONTINUE until the mill is worn out.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Special Operations Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 16 Page 229 of 447

16.3.3 General Guidelines

• The following general guidelines should be used when milling with a pilot mill:
• In selecting a pilot mill, the blade OD should be about ¼” larger than the OD of the
tooljoint or coupling of the fish to be milled. The pilot OD should be the same as the
drift diameter of the fish.
• The best speed and weight to run a pilot mill must be determined for each job.
Conditions may change from one pilot milling job to the next in the same well so that
different speeds and weights may be required at different times. In the absence of
experience, an initial speed of between 100 and 150 rpm and 2,000 – 6,500lbs of
weight should be used for best results.
• When milling liner or casing that has been gun perforated, damaged with a spear, or
collapsed, use about 70 rpm with the order of 2,000lbs or less.
• If when milling swaged casing a sudden drop off in milling rate is experienced, the
trouble may be a loose ring of steel formed at a joint or weld that is turning with the
pilot mill. The pilot mill should be spudded gently to break up the ring and help
position it for milling.
• If cutting stops altogether (after trying the method above) when milling wash pipe,
casing, or liner and there is no appreciable increase in torque, there is a good
chance the fish is turning. If this is the case, pull the mill and make a run with a
spear.
•
16.3.4 Considerations When Milling Liner, Hangers and Adapters
On most liner milling jobs, a pilot mill is used to mill the liner hanger, or adapter, and then the
liner. In some cases the liner hanger, or adapter, is milled with a junk mill, and then the liner is
milled with a pilot mill. This latter method is preferred if there is hard cement behind the liner or
if the hanger has numerous bow-springs, slips, etc. A pilot mill with blades that will cut just
over the pipe couplings should be selected and a minimum of cement will be encountered.

16.3.5 Pilot Mill Ideal for Wash Pipe

The pilot mill is the most efficient tool for milling stuck wash pipe. If drillpipe or drill collars are
inside the wash pipe, however, they shall first be milled with a junk mill or smaller pilot mill.

16.3.6 Drillpipe and Drill Collars

Drillpipe and drill collars are sometimes milled with pilot mills if the ID is open. If the drillpipe is
cemented inside casing, particularly in deviated holes, the pipe probably is lying to one side
with its centre eccentric to the casing. This often makes the job extremely difficult for a pilot
mill. Under these conditions, a full gauge junk mill is recommended. A pilot mill will do a
reasonable job on drill collars provided the cuttings can be removed as the milling progresses.
If cuttings tend to fall into the ID and plug it, then a junk mill must be used.

16.3.7 Casing
If casing above has been cut and pulled, then the lower remaining casing can be milled with a
pilot mill in the same manner that washpipe is milled.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Special Operations Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 16 Page 230 of 447

16.4 MILLING - TAPER MILLS

16.4.1 Uses of Taper Mills
Taper mills can be used for reaming out collapsed pipe such as casing and liners. They can
also be used to clean up permanent whipstock windows, to mill through jagged or split guide
shoes and to enlarge restrictions through retainers and adapters.
16.4.2 Procedures
The following procedure shall be used when milling with taper mills:

Step Action
1 ROTATE while entering the fish.
• Notes: i. The weight on the mill shall be kept low
(approximately 4500lbs).
• Ii. Do not torque up exceeding 6,000 ft.lbs and
75 rpm.
2 After the restriction has been enlarged, the rpm can be
increased to 80 - 100 rpm while reciprocating the mill through
the interval several times.

16.4.3 Optimising Taper Mills

• • Taper milling table speeds are governed by torque encountered, but should seldom
exceed 75 rpm
• • Never start a taper mill on the fish. The fish should be entered with a rotary speed of
75 rpm or less.
• • Use less weight when running a taper mill than a junk mill or pilot mill. After entering
the fish, the weight should be increased slowly to 1,000-2,000lbs. Torquing up
should be monitored.
• • When milling with a taper mill, the diameter of the taper mill shall be equal to the
desired enlargement required.

16.4.4 Whipstock Windows

A taper mill can be used to clean a whipstock window using the following guidelines:

Step Action
1 USE a taper mill of the same diameter as the largest mill used
to mill the window or slightly larger than the bit to be used.
2 RUN the taper mill in the hole to within 5 ft of the top of the
window.
3 START the rotary table and ROTATE at approximately 40 rpm
down the face of the whipstock.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Special Operations Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 16 Page 231 of 447

Step Action

4 KEEP the weight under 1,000lbs as excessive weight may

cause the taper mill to slip out of the window prematurely.
5 ROTATE slowly with light weight down the full length of the face
of the whipstock DO NOT attempt to make hole with this tool.
6 To clean up all rough edges REPEAT the above procedure
several times until the mill runs smoothly for the full length of
the whipstock.

16.4.5 Reaming Out Collapse Casing

The following guidelines should be used when reaming out collapsed casing:
•
• Determine the approximate diameter of an impression block or bit that will pass
through the collapsed interval. Do not use a taper mill if collapse has passed centre.
• Use a taper mill about ¼” larger than the minimum ID of the collapsed section and
mill out the collapsed interval by stages. In other words, if the collapse is great, use
several different sizes of mills to bring the ID of the pipe to full gauge. This will
minimise any tendency to sidetrack.
• A string taper mill can be used if there is any danger that sidetracking may occur. The
length and diameter of the string taper mill will be governed by the casing
conditions. If used, the action is pure reaming.
• Begin milling at a table speed of about 50 rpm
• The milling weight is governed by the torque encountered. In most cases, milling
weights of around 2,000 – 3,000 lbs. are used.
• Where the pipe is collapsed greatly, the lower portion of the collapsed interval may
act as a whipstock. The taper mill, in this case, may cut through the upper portion of
the collapsed interval and be deflected into the formation by the lower section of the
damaged casing. In some cases of extreme collapsed pipe, it is better to run a
stabilised, rigid hookup with a junk mill and use very light weight with a table speed
of about 150 rpm to mill out the collapsed portion and enter the undamaged casing
below. A string taper can be used, as previously mentioned if there is an opening
large enough to get a tubing or “macaroni” lead through the opening.
•
16.4.6 Enlarging Restrictions Through Retainers and Adapters
The following guidelines should be used when enlarging restriction through retainers and
adapters with taper mills:
• Use a taper mill with a diameter equal to the desired enlargement (usually the drift ID
of the casing).
• Mill at about 70 rpm and with weight from 2,000-6,500 lbs. Both the speed and the
weight should be governed by the torque. If the torque is high, the speed and weight
should be reduced until the mill turns freely.
• After milling through the restriction, increase speed to between 80 and 100 rpm and
rotate up and down through the interval several times until it is smooth and free.
•

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Special Operations Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 16 Page 232 of 447

16.5 FISHING - PLANNING AND PREPARATION

16.5.1 Considerations Prior to Fishing
When equipment has been lost or is stuck in the hole, the following points shall be considered
in deciding the optimum course of action:
• The type of equipment in the hole to be fished (drillpipe, collars, junk bit cones etc)
• The condition of the hole/mud. Will formation instability cause the hole to deteriorate?
• Is the fish stuck? If yes, what is causing it to stick?
• Is it possible to get free?
• The size and condition of the fish.
• Can tools be run inside or outside the fish?
• What fishing assembly should be run?
• What was the drilling situation prior to getting stuck?
• Consider all ways to get loose from fish
• Will wireline tools have to be run through the fishing assembly?
• What are the anticipated times and costs to free the fish?
• Are there open reservoirs below the fish?

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Special Operations Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 16 Page 233 of 447

The options available, once a fish has been lost in the hole, are shown in the following
flowchart:

Fish Lost

Cost = lost tool cost +

Is fishing to be
No cement cost + sidetrack
attempted ?
and redrill cost

Yes

Cost = fishing cost +

Will fishing be lost tool cost + cement
No
successful ? cost + sidetrack
and redril cost

Yes

Cost = fishing cost

Figure 16.1 Fishing Economics

16.6 FISHING ECONOMICS

A choice has to be made between two alternatives:

• The known costs that would be incurred if fishing attempts were abandoned.
• The unknown costs of continuing fishing operations.
•
The right decision is the one that costs the least money, and the problem is to find a strategy for minimising
losses.
16.6.1 Alternative Method
A guide to deciding when to stop fishing attempts is to suspend fishing after a calculated
number of days using the following equation:

Fishing should be abandoned after (days) = alternative operating cost ($)

2 x daily fishing rig costs ($/day)
16.6.2 Example : Land rig scenario
Estimated plug-back, sidetrack and re-drill cost = $ 140,000
Total fishing rig cost = $ 35,000 / day

Fishing should be abandoned after (days) = alternative operating cost ($)

2 x daily fishing rig costs ($/day)

= 140,000
 Allomax Ltd 2000
 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Special Operations Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 16 Page 234 of 447

2 x 35,000

= 2 days

16.6.3 When the Fish is Located Between Communicating Reservoirs

Fishing may have to continue beyond the economic acceptable cost.
In cases where the fish is located between reservoirs (that are in communication) fishing may
have to continue. In this case annular shut off could be difficult as there is no guarantee of
success when cementing around the fish. Environmental constraints and tool costs might
prolong fishing jobs eg., stuck radioactive logging tools.

16.6.4 Considerations When the Fish is Abandoned

When attempts to recover the string and regain access to the existing hole are abandoned, the
following alternatives are usually available:
• Setting a cement plug and sidetracking, the costs involved are:
• The replacement value of abandoned tools
• Possible calliper log materials
• Cementing operator
• Rig time to set plug
• WOC time and dressing plug
• Tool rental for sidetracking
• Deviation company charges.
• Plug back and sidetrack, costs are as above plus bits and rig time to drill to original
depth.
• Plug back and abandon the hole, move the rig (usually only considered if in top hole),
the costs involved are:
• Bits and rig time to drill to original depth
• Time base mud costs.
• Abandon the hole below the fish but complete the well.
•
Evaluation must be undertaken with a view to relative costs and the objectives of the well.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Special Operations Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 16 Page 235 of 447

16.6.5 Tool Selection

A general classification of types of fishing tools and their applications is tabulated below:

Type of Fishing Job Type of Fishing Tool Names of Tools

Recovery of Tubular Fish Connecting Tools • • Overshot
-External Catch • • Die collar
-Internal Catch • • Taper tap
(poor class
-Accessories of tool:
overshot
always
preferable if
available)
• • Spear
(provides
Washover Tools very good
connection)
• • Bent
drillpipe
Force Multiplier single
• • Hydraulic
knuckle
joint
• • Hydraulic
wall hook
• • Wall hook
• • Washover
safety joint
• • Washover
pipe
• • Washover
shoe
• • Jar,
hydraulic or
mechanical

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Special Operations Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 16 Page 236 of 447

Recovery of Other Fish Disengagement Tools • • Safety joint

• • Bumper
safety joint
• • External
tubing/drillpi
pe cutter
• • Internal
tubing/drillpi
pe cutter
Information Tools • • Jet cutter
• • Chemical
cutter
• • Electric
cable back-
off
• • Impression
block
• • Free Point
Indicator
Recovery of Non-Tubular Milling/Spearing • Junk basket
Fish Circulating • • Circulating
junk basket
(+coring)
• •
Reve
rse/circulati
ng,
globe/type
basket
• • Magnet
• • Wireline
spear
• • Junk sub
Fish Destruction Milling/Jetting • • Milling shoe
• • Packer
retriever
• • Section mill
• • Jet
bottomhole
cleaner

16.6.6 Equipment Availability

16.6.7 Requirements
The fishing equipment that the Drilling Contractor is required to have on the drilling rig is
specified in the Drilling Contract.
All equipment run in hole shall have fishing equipment available at the rig site which can be
mobilised without causing operational delay.
 Allomax Ltd 2000
 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Special Operations Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 16 Page 237 of 447

16.6.8 Certification
String and fishing component inspection requirements shall be completed before fishing
commences and during protracted fishing operations. All fishing equipment shall have valid
certification and inspection documentation.
16.6.9 Recommendations
It is recommended that the following fishing equipment be made available at the well site:
• Overshots and oversized guides, complete with baskets grapples and mill control to
catch all sizes of tools in hole.
• Fishing bumper sub (18in stroke) matching with drill collar string in use.
• Hydraulic jar with matching accelerator for the drill collar string in use.
• Surface jar with matching drillpipe connections.
• Coring basket.
• Junk sub with the same or larger OD as the drill collar strings.
• Lead impression blocks for the various hole sizes.
• Flat mills for all hole sizes.
•
16.7 FISHING – GENERAL PRACTICES
16.7.1 Guidelines
The following guidelines shall be adhered to during fishing operations:
• Prior to beginning fishing operations which may involve jarring, refer to DOM, Section
14, Freeing Stuck Pipe - Drilling Jar Practices for jarring guidelines.
• All fishing tool details shall be recorded on a drawing prior to running the tool. The
safe working load for all fishing tools and associated equipment shall be determined.
• Internal diameters of fishing tools to be run shall be checked to verify that back-off
tools can pass through
• Where a twist-off has occurred, the fish shall be tagged prior to pulling out of the hole
and the pipe shall be strapped on the trip out
• If a twist-off occurs the hole shall be circulated clean and mud conditioned prior to
pulling out of the hole. The required overbalance for well control shall be ensured.
• The size, shape, and condition of the fish shall be determined
• A bumper sub shall be considered for use in all fishing assemblies
• The pull shall be limited to 80% of the minimum yield strength of the pipe
•

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Special Operations Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 16 Page 238 of 447

• Prior to connecting to the fish the following information shall be obtained:

• Establish circulating pressures and rates.
• String weight up/down and rotating (with and without circulation)
• Free rotating torque of string.
• Pipe stretch and stroke of bumper sub, jars, etc.
• After engaging a fish, circulation shall be established for well control purposes
• After freeing the fish, circulate bottoms up before POH, if circulation is possible
through the fish (the degasser shall be checked for proper operation).

16.7.2 Recommended Fishing Assembly

The choice of fishing component ie., overshot, spear etc. is dependent on the actual fishing
operation. The fishing BHA shall be made up of the following:
• Fishing component eg., spear, overshot, mill
• Bumper sub
• Hydraulic jar
• Drill collar
• Accelerator
• 3 x drill collar
• Drillpipe.
16.8 FISHING - FORCE MULTIPLYING TOOLS
16.8.1 Purpose
The purpose of the force multiplying tools is to generate controlled blows onto a stuck fish.
These blows can be in an upward or a downward direction, or selectively applied in either
direction.
16.8.2 Operation
The use of these tools by an experienced operator enhances their utility. Operator’s
experience and tool knowledge are essential to prevent severe damage to surface equipment
and/or the string.

16.8.3 Types of Force Multiplying Fishing Tools

16.8.4 Drilling/Fishing Jars
For information on the use of drilling/fishing jars see DOM, Section 14, Stuck Pipe, Freeing
Stuck Pipe.
If a fishing specialist contractor is used, the contractor should be consulted on a case by case
basis for the optimum selection and placement of jars.
16.8.5 Accelerators (Jar Intensifiers)
A gas-charged (N2) accelerator or “intensifier” may be run to greatly increase the effectiveness
of the jarring action. They are positioned above the jar separated by one joint of drill collars.
Accelerators are also available in double-acting mode, to match the jar action. Typical
accelerator strokes are 6in - 15in depending on the tool used.
Without an accelerator, the drillstring absorbs some of the impact force of the jar, reducing its
effectiveness. The string is also subject to undesirable jarring shock loads. Both effects are
increased when the hole is deviated, and pipe to wall friction exists.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Special Operations Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 16 Page 239 of 447

Where an accelerator is used, less drill collars may be run without reducing the jarring impact
force, which is beneficial in minimising wear on tools and running strings. Also, jarring can be
conducted at shallower depths where less string stretch and overpull is available, preventing
the jar from achieving a full blow.
When the jar trips, the accelerator imparts its stored energy to the drill collars and jar mandrel
in the form of an accelerated force causing the jar to strike a high impact blow. The accelerator
shall be matched to correspond to the stroking action of the jar below it. When the two have
matched strokes, they are optimally set up to achieve the maximum jarring strokes per minute.
Use of an accelerator, by maximising the impact of the jar and reducing the shock load effect
on the string can enhance the jarring impact force by a factor of 1.5 - 2 in optimal conditions.
16.8.6 Bumper Subs
Bumper subs provide a means of delivering upward or downward blows.
This tool is primarily used to assist the release of an overshot or spear from a fish. Its
secondary purpose is to bump down on the fish, since the majority of fishing jars only act in an
upward direction.
The bumper sub shall be installed immediately above the fishing tool or safety joint.
The bumper sub is able to bump downwards as well as transmit torque that is required to
break fishing tool engagement and release it from the fish.
16.8.7 Bump Down in the Hole
The procedure to bump down in the hole is as follows:

Step Action
1 PICK UP the string enough to open the tool completely and
TAKE a strain or stretch in the string.
Note: This shall be the length of the stroke plus the
permissible stretch in the fishing string.
2 DROP the string to within 4” of the closed position of the tool
and stop the string abruptly (maximum strength may not be
required).
Note: If sufficient stretch has been taken in the string, the
lower end of the fishing string shall bump downward,
closing the bumper sub and due to the elasticity of the
string, deliver a downward blow to the tool below the
sub.
16.8.8 Releasing Fish by Applying Torque
To release fish by applying torque:

Step Action
1 PICK UP the string enough to open the bumper sub to half of
stroke. DO NOT take stretch. ROTATE string to the right to
release fishing tool. If no release, MAINTAIN torque and
PROCEED to Step 2.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Special Operations Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 16 Page 240 of 447

2 DROP the string sharply this full length without braking. This
causes the bumper sub to close quickly and the lower end of
the mandrel body strikes the shoulder on the tool lower end of
the mandrel, transmitting a single solid, downward blow to the
tool below.
3 Cautionary Comment:
Downward blows could cause an overshot to ‘bump out’ with
the potential to get stuck on the fish. Always maintain right hand
torque while ‘bumping down’ so grapple can move to release
position.

Note: During fish operations always consult fishing specialist when available.
16.9 FISHING - OVERSHOTS
16.9.1 General Considerations
The following shall be considered:
• A pack-off shall be installed in order to circulate through the fish before pulling out of the
hole
• If the hole size is appreciably larger than the overshot OD, an oversized guide shall be
considered
• If the pipe is lying in a recess or against the side of the hole, a hook wall guide or bent
joint shall be considered
• If the fish cannot be engaged, an extension sub and a milling guide shall be considered. A
milling guide shall always be run with a basket grapple.
• To catch an upset or box section of a tool joint, a basket grapple with long catch stop shall
be considered
• To catch a coupling with a ruptured piece of pipe engaged in its upper end, a basket
grapple with short catch stop, which has a double set of wicker of two different IDs shall
be considered
• The penetration of the fish into the overshot shall be limited in order to facilitate releasing
it from the fish
• An overshot can be used to back off as left hand torque tightens the grapple bite on the
fish so right hand rotation can release the grapple
• Unless an upward strain is maintained, the fishing string shall never be rotated to the right
while an overshot is engaged on the fish, other than when attempting to come off the fish
• Before the start of releasing operations slack off until slight compression at overshot.
Release with right hand torque
• When lowering the overshot over the fish, once a pressure increase is noted, circulation
shall be stopped in order to prevent damaging the seal/packer. Bleed off any pressure
trapped prior to engaging the fish.
• When the fish has been freed, the well shall be flow checked and circulated bottoms up as
required, if circulation is possible through the fish
• Make up circulating sub on fishing assembly
• Start to rotate using chain tongs for rotating slowly
• After fish is engaged, do not turn to the right as this will generally release overshot
• Top of fish usually needs washing - but beware of washing away pack-off (see Fishing
Procedures With Overshot).

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Special Operations Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 16 Page 241 of 447

16.9.2 Generic Procedure

The following procedure shall be adapted for each particular job:

Step Action
1 Before engaging the fish, ESTABLISH up/down and rotating
weight.
2 With the overshot directly above the fish, a combination of
rotating and lowering shall result in the following:
• The guide directs the fish into the overshot
• The fish can easily pass through the grapple
because of its helical shape and mode of rotation
• Too much rotation can damage/wear the grapple.
3 If the basket grapple used is not a long catch stop type, USE a
stop to stop the grapple going completely over the upset of the
fish. If the grapple goes over the upset of the fish, it would be
almost impossible to release the overshot from the fish.
4 When the fish is properly located in the overshot, EXERT an
upward pull. ALLOW pull to ‘soak’ to allow setting of the grapple
and penetration into fish. From this point onwards, MAINTAIN
positive overpull on fish at all times. The grapple will be
contacted by the upward taper in the bowl and the fish held
securely. The pack-off rubber seals around the fish enabling
fluid to be forced down through the fish.
5 By lowering the string weight or bumping down against the fish,
the grapple can be freed from the bowl. By slowly rotating to the
right and slowly raising the string, the spiral grapple unwinds or
the basket grapple expands disengaging the string from the
fish.

16.9.3 Overshot with Spiral Grapple

Spiral grapples shall be used when the diameter of the fish is near to the maximum OD of the
overshot.
16.9.4 Overshot with Basket Grapple and Grapple Control Packer
Basket grapples shall be used when the fish diameter is below the maximum catch size of the
overshot.
16.9.5 Fishing Procedure with Overshot
The following procedure shall be used when fishing with an overshot:

Step Action
1 RUN fishing assembly to top of fish (TOF).
2 CIRCULATE to clean off TOF (beware of washing away pack-
off)

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Special Operations Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 16 Page 242 of 447

3 TAKE up/down and rotating weights. MARK point of start moving

up, start moving down and ESTABLISH neutral point
MEASURE stretch and compression.
4 LOWER overshot slowly to touch TOF.
5 CHECK depth against points established in Step 3.
6 START rotation to right and STOP circulation.
7 RUN fishing assembly over fish until ‘swallow’ is full engaged.
8 STOP and OBSERVE weight indicator for weight decrease.
9 STOP rotation and RELIEVE torque in string.
10 PULL UP slowly and OBSERVE weight indicator for weight
increase (to confirm engaged fish).
11 CIRCULATE bottoms up without rotation to clean hole prior to
POH with fish.
12 POH with fish (do not rotate string).
16.9.6 Fish Release
The following procedure shall be used to release a fish:

Step Action
1 ATTEMPT with light compression only (1,000-2,000 lbs).
2 BUMP down against overshot to release grapple.
3 ROTATE fishing assembly to right.
4 RAISE assembly gradually until top of overshot is clear of fish.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Special Operations Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 16 Page 243 of 447

16.10 FISHING - SPEARS

16.10.1 General Considerations
The following guidelines should be used when running a spear:
•Spears shall be dressed with a pack-off rubber to circulate when required. A stop
ring or stop sub shall be used to prevent the spear from entering too deeply into
the fish, to provide the ability to re-set the jars, and to enable easier release of the
tool.
• Be aware the shoulder has the potential to lock up the slips as the shoulder
prevents down movement to release slips. Cocking a jar with a spear without
shoulder can be done by holding moderate circulation pressure.
• Before commencing the operation to release the spear, the fishing string shall be
bumped down. After the hold on the fish is broken, rotate to the right while pulling
the string and the left hand wicker on the spear slips or grapple will then screw
the tool off the fish.
• When smaller spears are used, a circulation sub shall be installed in the fishing
assembly.
16.10.2 Generic Procedures
Engage and Pull Fish
To engage and pull the fish:

Step Action
1 CIRCULATE with the spear 3-6 ft above the top of the fish.
Once clean, CUT the pump back (STOP pump if pack-off is
installed) and LOWER the spear into the fish.
2 ROTATE the string to turn the tool one half to one full rotation to
the left to set the spear. Left hand rotation turns the mandrel of
the tool through the grapple setting it in its engaging position.
3 The fish can now be pulled as this will wedge the grapple into a
positive engagement on the fish.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Special Operations Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 16 Page 244 of 447

16.10.3 Release from the Fish

To release from the fish:

Step Action
1 BUMP DOWN (maximum allowable) weight of the fishing string.
This breaks engagement. ROTATE two or three turns to the
right and PICK UP the string until the spear is clear of the fish.
2 Right hand rotation moves the mandrel up through the grapple,
forcing the grapple down against the release ring and puts the
spear in the release position.
3 If the spear does not release, BUMP DOWN while
simultaneously rotating to the right and picking up the string
until the spear is clear of the fish.
4 If the spear still does not come free, use of the surface jar shall
be considered depending on the depth of the top of fish.
16.10.4 Fishing - Washover Strings
16.10.5 Purpose
Washover strings can be used when:
• The formation has bridged off and stuck the string
• The string has become cemented in the hole
• Dressing the top of the fish for latching on with an overshot
• Milling over stuck packers
• Milling over stabilisers and reamers.
•
16.10.6 Feasibility
Consideration shall be given to the cost of the washover operation as in many cases this will
outweigh the loss of the fish in the hole plus possible sidetrack operations.
16.10.7 Shoe Selection
Select the washover strings shoe according to the following table:

Shoe Position Shoe Selection

Inside casing Hard facing only on the bottom and on the inside
of the shoe, so that it does not cut on the outside
diameter.
In open hole Hard facing can be on inside and outside.
Washing over in open hole shall only be
considered in exceptional circumstances.
Clearance is small Use thin walled shoe. Free movement and
torque shall be carefully monitored in this
operation.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Special Operations Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 16 Page 245 of 447

16.10.8 General Guidelines

The following general guidelines shall be used when running washover strings:
• Hardbanding should have same specifications as specified for drillpipe
• A safety joint and drive sub shall be installed above the washover string to
release the string if the washover string becomes stuck
• No more than three or four joints shall be run initially, depending on the hole
inclination and dogleg severity
• Low rpm and weight shall be used during washovers to reduce the possibility of
splitting or flaring the shoe
• In order to monitor torque build-up and string resistance, rotation shall be stopped
periodically. If torque or resistance become excessive, the washover string length
shall be reduced. Each time rotation is re-established, a new cutting pattern shall
be created on the washover shoe. To re-establish a new cutting pattern, the string
shall be raised slowly while rotating and gently lowered back to bottom. The
washover string shall be kept in motion as much as possible to prevent sticking.
• A junk sub shall be installed above the washover string if stabiliser blades are to
be washed over
• The mud may be “slicked up” by adding lubricants. This may help reduce friction
between borehole and the washover assembly.
•
16.10.9 Procedure

Step Action
1 RIH to 10 ft above TOF.
2 CIRCULATE and WASHOVER fish while slowly lowering string.
3 After washover has swallowed fish, ROTATE string at 30-50
rpm.
4 CHECK torque. If torque is too high POH and change
washover.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Special Operations Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 16 Page 246 of 447

16.11 FISHING - JUNK RETRIEVERS

16.11.1 Types of Junk Retrievers
16.11.2 Coring Type Basket
The coring type basket cuts a short core. As the core is being cut, junk is forced into the
barrel of the tool. The following procedure shall be used:

Step Action
1 TAG bottom using maximum pump volume and ENSURE that
all fill has been washed away.
2 PULL BACK off bottom, REDUCE the pump rate, and START
slow rotation (about 20 rpm).
3 LOWER the string to bottom and with light weight to allow the
shoe to form a pattern. Gradually INCREASE the weight.
4 When enough penetration has been made to retrieve the fish,
STOP rotation and circulation and BREAK the core. The upper
and lower catchers of the tool maintain the core in place. POH.

16.11.3 Reverse Circulation Junk Basket or Jet Retriever

This tool works on the Venturi principle; mud is diverted through jets by pumping a drop ball
from surface causing the mud to be directed outward and downward from the body of the
tool. This causes a pressure drop inside the tool resulting in a flow from the bottom of the
hole into the junk sleeve. Once the junk has been washed into the tool, catch fingers prevent
it from dropping out.
This type of junk basket may also be available with a coring shoe, which is recommended for
use in some circumstances.
The following procedure shall be used:

Step Action
1 MAKE UP to the bottom of the fishing string and RIH to within a
metre of the bottom.
2 While slowly rotating the string, START the pump slowly and
INCREASE to maximum safe circulating pressure.
Note:All of the drilling fluid circulates through the centre of the
tool and none through the jet nozzles.
3 Upon completion of pumping operations, DROP the ball and
PUMP DOWN at a moderate speed.
Note:When the ball seats itself in the junk retriever, the fluid
flow will be diverted through the jet nozzles to the outside
of the retriever causing a drop in pressure inside the
retriever.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Special Operations Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 16 Page 247 of 447

4 INCREASE the pump pressure to the safe maximum operating

pressure. The reverse flow of the drilling fluid will wash the junk
up inside the retriever to be retained by the catch fingers of the
catchers.
5 HOLD the pump pressure at maximum safe operating pressure
while slowly rotating. RECIPROCATE to gently contact the
bottom of the hole.
6 When the rotary shoe no longer hangs up and runs smoothly,
the junk has been removed and the string can be pulled.

16.12 FISHING – JUNK SUBS

16.12.1 Structure
Junk subs are constructed with rib guides which are welded to the main body. These guides
assist in preventing the cup from becoming crushed and guide the tool. Junk subs are
available in various lengths.
16.12.2 Guidelines
The following guidelines shall be used when running junk subs:
• The mud stream agitates the junk and causes it to rise as drilling or milling proceeds
• The annular clearance is small at the bottom of the sub (resulting in high annular flow
rates which lifts the junk off bottom) and larger above the sub (resulting in smaller
annular flow causing the junk to fall into the cup of the junk sub). Vary circulation
rates from maximum to zero while reciprocating string
• The junk is retrieved when the bit or mill is retrieved
• In packer milling operations, junk subs can be run in tandem to handle the large
volume of junk produced by the milling operation
• Junk subs may be run above a casing scraper to implement quicker, cleaner scraping
jobs
• In completion fluids, a viscous pill may be required to lift the junk into the cups of the
junk sub
• Confirm junk subs have been inspected and certified before use. Beware of ‘rig-
made’ junk subs.
16.13 FISHING - MISCELLANEOUS FISHING TOOLS
16.13.1 Magnets
The following guidelines should be used when using magnets:
• The force of some magnets decreases with the age of the magnet. For this reason,
when the magnet is not in use, the cover plate on the face shall be installed
• The pull of the magnet shall be checked prior to running it in the hole
• If a circulating magnet is not available, an open circulating sub or pin hole sub shall
be placed above the magnet.
•

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Special Operations Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 16 Page 248 of 447

16.13.2 Lead Impression Blocks

The following guidelines should be used when using lead impression blocks:
• A lead impression block may be used if additional information regarding the top of the
fish is needed
• When the tool has reached a point just above the fish, circulation shall be started to
clear the top of the fish before lowering the tool down to tag the top of the fish
• Weight shall be applied as required and the tool is brought back to the surface where
the impression can be examined and interpreted
• A circulation sub or pin hole sub in the open position shall be installed above the lead
impression block.

16.13.3 Rope Spears

The following guidelines should be used when using rope spears:
• Rope spears may be used to fish broken wireline from the hole
• A stop ring shall always be run with a rope spear to prevent the spear from passing
too far past the top of the wire rope
• After the tool has entered the wire rope it shall be rotated one or two turns only and
overpull shall be taken until the line comes free or breaks at the weak point.

16.13.4 Taper Taps and Die Collar

The following guidelines should be used when using taper taps and die collars:
• These tools are difficult to release once engaged and therefore a safety joint and jar
shall be run with them. They shall generally only be run as a last resort.
• External fishing tools and spears shall be run first
• Taper taps and die collars shall only be run by experienced personnel and extreme
care shall be exercised when they are used to avoid sticking the entire string
• Taper taps have insufficient bore to allow passage of wireline tools such as back off
charges or cutters, hence external tools are prefered. A bumper safety joint must
always be run with a die collar or taper tap.

Note: Bumper safety joint releases with left hand torque (coarse thread) only when in
bumped position (normally locked). Tool ‘bumps’ when applying pre-set
compression.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Special Operations Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 16 Page 249 of 447

16.14 UNDERREAMING
16.14.1 Considerations
Underreaming procedures vary from tool to tool. However, it shall be verified that:
• The tool is function tested with the mud pumps on surface before running in
• The cutters are secured inside the tool body with a small piece of rope or tape to ensure
a safe trip in the hole without damage to the cutters
• Pump pressure gradually increases while the tool is rotating until the cutter arms cut to
the maximum diameter
• A constant drilling weight is maintained while underreaming. Do not slack off
intermittently and do not spud the tool. A good rule of thumb for maintaining constant
drilling weight is 100 - 200 lbs per inch of body diameter.

Note: In soft formations, the initial cut may only take a few minutes but in hard
formations, it can take in excess of one hour. In hard formations, apply time-
drilling, allowing cutter arms to expand into the newly drilling over-sized hole.
A penetration rate that is too high will result in poor hole cleaning and possibly
under gauge or spiral hole being drilled.

16.15 SIDETRACKING - GENERAL GUIDELINES

16.15.1 Introduction
The following are general guidelines. Detailed procedures should be agreed with the
Directional Drilling Contractor for each specific case.
16.15.2 Requirements
The main requirement in sidetracking a well is the development of a lateral force to allow
the bit to cut on the side of the hole.
16.15.3 BHA Geometry
The required lateral force shall be provided by the geometry of the BHA. The most effective
BHA configuration to achieve a successful sidetrack kick-off is a mud motor with bent sub.
16.15.4 Guidelines for Successful Kick-off
16.15.5 Kick-off Point Selection
If possible, the kick-off location shall be selected where a soft or soft-medium formation is
present to increase the chances of obtaining a successful kick off and to reduce operational
difficulties and minimise time.
A controlled ROP time-drilling circa 0.5 ft/min shall be maintained until confirmation of a
successful kick-off is achieved.
16.15.6 Kick-off Plugs
The general procedure for the placement of cement plugs is included in DOM, Section 9,
Cementing, Cement Plugs.
If a series of plugs have to be set, the TOC of the last plug shall be established before POH
for kick-off assembly.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Special Operations Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 16 Page 250 of 447

The kick-off plug cement shall have a higher than normal density to provide a firm kick-off
surface. If possible it is better to batch mix the plug and rotate string whilst displacing
cement. Drilling out of this plug shall not be attempted until the plug is capable of taking
45,000 – 75,000 lbs. or string weight at 50 rpm as a maximum.

16.15.7 Casing Windows

When preparing to cut a casing window, the following guidelines shall be considered:
• Start out just below a collar if possible
• When making the initial cut, care shall be taken to avoid casing collars and centralisers.
The cut shall be initiated a minimum of 8 ft above a casing collar.
• Generally the lengths of window to facilitate an effective side-track are given in the
following table:

Window Length (ft)

Casing Size Minimum Optimum
7in 30 50
9 5/8in 35 65
13 3/8in 40 80
16.15.8 BHA Composition
A suitable assembly shall be agreed between the Directional Driller in consultation with the
Drilling Supervisor. The number of non-magnetic components can usually be reduced by
applying a survey correction algorithm to survey data. The following guidelines shall be
considered:
• The deflection of the bent sub will depend on the hole size, formation hardness and
required deviation. The geometry of the assembly shall be checked to ensure there is
lateral loading with the chosen motor length and bent sub for the hole size in which the
assembly is run.
• It is more economic to carry out the initial sidetrack with the mud motor/bent sub
combination and then trip for a more optimum assembly for the remaining section
• If the assembly is to be used to drill ahead after the kick-off, a motor bearing bit shall be
selected
• It is possible to run the MWD tool directly above the bent sub and utilise survey
correction algorithms
• If side-tracking out of a casing window, the string shall be oriented using tool face high
side readings or alternatively a universal bottom hole orientation sub (UBHO and gyro
above the MWD).

16.15.9 Side-tracking on the Low Side of the Hole

The low side side-track can proceed to take off rapidly. There is a risk of creating high dog-
legs coming off on the low side and it therefore may be preferable to come off low side to
the right or left rather than purely low side.
Once the new hole has been cut, lateral separation shall be maintained to prevent collapse
of the old hole onto the new hole.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Special Operations Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 16 Page 251 of 447

16.15.10 Maximising Kick-off Success

In cases where external factors can reduce the chances of achieving a first time kick-off
(eg., hard formations, deep kick-offs, or restricted window lengths) a recommended
assembly to maximise kick-off probability is:
PDC Side - tracking bit, mud motor, 1.9o - 2.0o bent sub, MWD, UBHO sub, DC’s.
Experience suggests that a 1.9o deflection bent sub is best. Initially, the assembly shall be
time drilled until approximately 30 ft with 100 % formation returns, then the BHA shall be
pulled to reset the deflection.
16.16 SIDETRACKING - SIDETRACKING OUT OF CASING
16.16.1 ‘Window Master’ Whipstock
16.16.2 Introduction
The ‘Window Master’ whipstock is a one trip system to mill a full size hole in casing in the
required direction. The whipstock is mechanically set and requires a bridge plug to be set at
a suitable depth so that weight can be put down on it to initiate the setting process.
16.16.3 Dogleg Severity
The dogleg caused by the whipstock is initially +/- 6o/100 ft. However once the pocket is
milled, to allow the full gauge watermelon mill to exit the casing, the effective dogleg will be
+/- 2o/100 ft, due to the tendency of the pilot mill to slide down the formation. This should be
accounted for when planning the sidetrack.
16.16.4 Torque and Directional Control
The torque applied in milling the window will have some effect on the actual direction of the
window. Once the casing has been exited, directional control surveying is difficult, due to the
effect of the casing, until sufficient departure has been achieved.
16.16.5 Pre-Job Planning
16.16.6 Introduction
When planning a sidetrack:
•ensure that casing collars and/or centralisers will not be milled.
•it should be borne in mind that if the hole angle is close to vertical a Gyro (UBHO
included in BHA) will be required to orientate the Whipstock face. An MWD can be used if
the hole angle is higher than 6o using high side readings.
16.16.7 Gyro’s
If planning to use a Gyro, ensure the bottom static temperatures do not exceed the working
limit of the gyro, if they do circulate and spot cold mud immediately prior to running the gyro.
16.16.8 Sidetracking
The Sidetracking programme should include the longitude as well as the latitude, or if using
the UTM system, the Central Meridian should be included. In addition it is important to:
• Make drawings of everything that will be RIH, especially the stroke of the whipstock and
distance from the starter mill until the full size watermelon mill will be out of the casing.
• Set the bridge plug, as close as possible to the depth, where the window has to be milled
to activate the setting anchor where a kelly is used (a top drive allows more flexibility).
Note: Once the anchor is activated it will no longer be possible to lower the string.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Special Operations Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 16 Page 252 of 447

• Space out the string such that a minimum of 10 ft, but preferably 20 ft +, of the kelly is
above the table once the whipstock is set, otherwise the window mill cannot be retracted
from the whipstock assembly due to the presence of the kick-off pad (the 8in water melon
mill, positioned on top of the window mill, has to mill this pad first to give a 8in clearance).

Note: Once the whipstock is set, the kelly can’t be raised, unless the Whipstock is pulled
up as well (if still possible) which could have serious well control implications. For
this reason a CBL is required and milling should only take place if hydrocarbon
bearing zones are isolated

• Plan for a milling fluid with a good carrying capacity for metal eg., high yield point, and
sweep hole at regular intervals
• Plan the job with the contractor and consider the mill requirements for the type and weight
of casing and the formation behind the casing
• Ensure fishing equipment for fishing whipstock is available
• Locate ditch magnets in flowline.

16.16.9 Whipstock and Milling Assembly

A suggested whipstock and drilling assembly comprises:
• Whipstock anchor
• Whipstock
• Window mill, undergauged, c/w shear sub
• Watermelon mill, undergauged
• Flex joint
• Watermelon mill, full gauge
• 1 joint HWDP
• UBHO sub
• 9 joints drill collars
• 12 joints HWDP
• Jar
• 3 joints HWDP
• Drillpipe to surface.

Notes: UBHO should be aligned to the whipstock face. Mills shall be gauged. Shear
bolt shall be secured with a lock ring and installed in downshear mode. Ensure
‘bit’ breaker is available for window mill. Assemble and torque up milling
assembly prior to picking up Whipstock assembly and Anchor.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Special Operations Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 16 Page 253 of 447

16.17 RUNNING AND ORIENTATING WHIPSTOCK

When running and orientation the whipstock the following procedure should be followed:

Step Action
1 RIH the Whipstock assembly to one joint above the bridge plug.
2 SPACE-out the string.
3 RUN Gyro while working torque out of the string.
4 ORIENTATE whipstock face to the required Azimuth +/- 30 deg.
5 POH Gyro.

Notes: RIH at controlled speed and set slips gently to avoid weakening shear bolt. Use drillpipe
wiper while RIH. Check UBHO depth, in relation to pipe tally, while running the gyro wire
line.

16.17.1 Setting Whipstock

• To set the whipstock:

Step Action
1 TAG bridge plug with the kelly installed with a maximum of
4,000 lbs. and CHECK spaceout, (minimum 10 ft, preferably 20
ft plus, of kelly above the table).
2 PULL BACK 3 ft and CIRCULATE to milling/drilling mud if
required.
3 TAKE up and down readings with and without pumps on.
4 LOWER the string and ACTIVATE the anchor, by applying
weight on top bridge plug, the shear pin should shear with +/-
10,000 lbs. .
5 SET the anchor with 15,000 - 17,000 lbs down weight.
6 CHECK anchor set by pulling 4,000 lbs above pick-up weight.
7 SHEAR the window mill from the whipstock in stages of 10,000
lbs until the bolt shears +/- 35,000 lbs.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Special Operations Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 16 Page 254 of 447

16.17.2 Milling Window

The following are only guidelines and should be adjusted to suit the actual conditions after
discussion with the contractor supplying the equipment:

Step Action
1 BREAK circulation and PUMP at +/- 3 bbl/min.
2 PICK-UP to neutral and attempt to ROTATE string at +/- 20
rpm, RECORD the required torque.
3 SLOWLY INCREASE pump rate to +/- 5 bbl/min and
INCREASE rotary speed to +/- 45 rpm while maintaining neutral
weight.
4 MAKE initial cut with 2,000 - 3,000 lbs WOB, maintaining these
parameters for at least 3 ft.
5 INCREASE parameters gradually to +/- 80 to 100 rpm, 4,000 –
10,000 lbs WOB and pump rate according to mud parameters
and returns seen on surface.
Note: As a rule of thumb for milling casing in general, when
milling well cemented casing, the penetration rate can
be increased by using higher weight and rotary speed.
Conversely, when milling badly cemented casing, low
weight and rotary speed should be used.

6 MILL and DRILL pocket sufficient enough to ensure that the full
size watermelon mill has exited the window.
7 BACKREAM gently to starting position and ream window once
more.
8 CHECK window clear by lowering the mills through it without
rotating. If more than 3,000 lbs excess drag is observed REAM
the window once again (excessive reaming will lead to
excessive wear on the Whipstock slide).
9 SWEEP hole and POH.
10 RE-MEASURE the diameter of the upper watermelon mill when
the milling assembly is on surface. If the mill is more than 1/8”
undergauge a reaming trip with a full gauge mill should be
made.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Special Operations Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 16 Page 255 of 447

16.18 CHEMICAL CUTTERS

16.18.1 Chemical Cutters for Stuck Tubing or Drillpipe
The chemical cutter is a tool designed to cut and allow retrieval of stuck tubing or drillpipe in
a well. The primary advantages of this tool over explosive methods are its ability to sever
tubing without causing the following undesirable problems:

• Damaging the well casing or adjacent tubing

• Enlarging or leaving a burr on the OD of the cut.

In addition to cutting, the tool can be adapted to perforate one to four holes in the same
plane to establish circulation or equalise pressure.
For operational procedures see chemical cutter supplier procedure.

16.18.2 Safety Precautions

The chemical cutter, when used and handled properly, is a safe tool; however, like any
oilfield pipe cutting device, when safety procedures and precautions are not observed, the
tool can become dangerous. Always adhere to contractor procedures.

The following safety precautions shall be observed when preparing and running a chemical
cutter:
• As the chemicals are extremely dangerous, no personnel other than wireline
service personnel who are fully trained and properly instructed in the use and
safe handling of the chemical cutting tool shall be allowed to handle the tool.
• Radio silence should be obtained before arming the chemical cutter.
• Personnel handling the chemical cutter either before or after firing shall only
handle the tool when wearing rubber gloves and goggles or face shield.
• The protective sleeve is an aluminium sleeve that covers the lower half of the tool
from the middle of the chemical cylinder to the bull plug. The protective sleeve
shall always be used over the tool and shall be secured with the three allen
screws provided.
• The cutter must not be in the lubricator during pressure testing operations. The
maximum allowable surface pressure for a low pressure cylinder tool is 1,000 psi
and 4 500 psi for a high pressure cylinder tool.
• It is critical that the well information given to the service company is accurate. If
tubing weights or fluid data are not correct problems may be experienced in
recovering the tool from the well.
• The chemical cutters will not work in gas, therefore it should be ensured that
there is a maximum of 100 ft of fluid above and below where the cut is to be
made.
• The maximum allowable clearance between the cutting head and the tubing to be
cut should be no greater than ¼” per side.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Abandonment and Suspension Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 17 Page 256 of 447

17 ABANDONMENT AND SUSPENSION

17.1 INTRODUCTION
Abandonments and Suspensions will be carried out in such a way that the well can be left in a safe
condition without any unplanned intervention.
Before the safe condition can be achieved, a minimum of two barriers to flow will be present,
reference Policy Statements 15.0.
Barriers to flow are (lines of defence):
• The casing string
• Mud column
• Well cap & tubing hanger check valve
• Cement or mechanical plug
• Downhole safety valve.

17.2 ABANDONMENT
17.2.1 Background
Wells are abandoned:
• To leave the well in a safe condition such that if the wellhead is accidentally
damaged or removed, the well will retain pressure integrity and will not flow
• To leave the seabed around the wellhead clear of drilling related debris
• Because the well was dry.
17.2.2 General requirements
Abandonments must comply with government requirements.
Under normal circumstances abandonment operations will be accordance with a programme
approved by the Drilling Manager. The Drilling Supervisor is responsible for ensuring an
accurate abandonment/suspension diagram is drawn-up and transmitted to the drilling office.
For all drilling operations the following guidelines will be observed:
Zonal Isolation
All permeable zones will be isolated with cement plugs.
Note: Two zones are deemed to be effectively isolated when they are separated by a good
cement column (i.e., pressure, weight tested where applicable) with a minimum
length of 300 ft.
Open Hole Abandonment
Open hole abandonment will only be performed when it has been confirmed that all logging
requirements have been satisfied.
All zones requiring isolation will be isolated with effective cement plugs extending from 150 ft
below the zone to 150 ft above the zone.
Abandonment plugs set in open hole will be weight tested with 10,000-15,000 lb. In the case of
multiple plugs normally only the top plug will be located and tested.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Abandonment and Suspension Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 17 Page 257 of 447

Cased Hole Abandonment - Casing Shoe

A tested cement plug shall be set across the shoe of the last drilled out casing extending from
150 ft below the shoe to 150 ft inside the casing shoe. The cement plug shall be located with
a bit, dressed off and weight tested with 15,000-22,000 lbs.
All cement plugs in cased hole will be pressure tested (or inflow tested) provided the casing
above the cement will allow it.
Completed Intervals
All perforated intervals requiring isolation will be cemented off by a tested cement column
extending from 150 ft below to 150 ft above the perforated interval.
Top of Liner
All liner laps shall be pressure tested for integrity, normally done during drilling operations, see
Casing Design Manual section 7.3, for details.
If successful and combined with a recent CBL indicating a good cement bond over the entire
liner lap, then the top of the liner does not need to be secured with a cement plug.
In all other cases the top of the liner shall be secured with a cement plug set from 150 ft below
to 150 ft above the top of the liner.
Casing Retrieval
A cement plug shall be set from 150 ft below to 150 ft above the stump remaining after cutting
and pulling a casing string.
Casing Fluid
All sections of casing which are to be abandoned using cement plugs higher up in the hole
shall be displaced with a mud and a gradient sufficient to balance any expected pressures.
Brine can also be used if operationally more attractive.
Note: Weighted mud is unlikely to remain a barrier to flow for long as over time the
properties will deteriorate and the weighting medium will drop out.

17.3 ONSHORE ABANDONMENT

17.3.1 Surface Cement Plug and Wellhead
A 500 ft cement plug shall be set back to the base of the cellar. It does not have to be located
or tested other than visually. All remaining casing annuli shall be top-filled with cement.
The wellhead shall be cut just above the base of the cellar. A plate shall be welded on top of
the casing stub with the well name prior to covering the stub with concrete.
Note: The wellhead shall not be recovered where attempts to eliminate annular pressures
are unsuccessful. The spool sealing the annulus of the innermost casing string shall
be left in place and a blind flange installed on the top of spool. Valves shall be
removed from all side outlets and replaced with companion flanges dressed with bull
plugs and needle valves.
17.3.2 Location Abandonment
The location shall be restored in accordance with DOM, Chapter 3, Land Site Restoration.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Abandonment and Suspension Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 17 Page 258 of 447

17.4 OFFSHORE ABANDONMENT

Prior to leaving the location a seabed survey must be taken and certified clear of debris from the
vacinity of the wellhead.
Casing strings must be cut at a minimum 10 ft below the seabed.
Two methods are available to cut casing for abandonment purposes:
• Mechanical cutting
• Explosives.
Mechanical cutting is the preferred option but the eventual decision between mechanical/explosive
cutting must be made on economic grounds.

17.4.1 Wellhead Severance for Semi-Submersibles

Explosive Severance - Deep water
Explosives will be the primary method of severance in deep water (>1,000 ft) due to the need
to rotate a long unsupported drill string.
Explosive Severance - Shallow waters (< less than 300’)
In shallow waters the rig will have to move off location.
Attempts will be made to retrieve the TGB if installed. In some cases this has been found to
be impossible to the TGB being buried below the mudline and in this case it is sufficient to cut
the guidewires at the seabed.
Mechanical Severance
The smaller diameter strings should be recovered by mechanical cutting and the BOP’s pulled.
Mechanical Severance is the Nimir Petroleum Limited preference for well severance.
Care must be exercised in all aspects of the operation to minimise the damage in recovering
the wellhead as they can be reused. If the damage from cutting and grappling is too severe the
wellhead may have to be pressure downrated or worse, scrapped.
Care and time should be taken when cutting. An unsuccessful cut can jeopardise the
abandonment operation, leading to increased costs and wastage of rig time.
In cases where unsuccessful attempts have been made to abandon a well, the following
considerations should be taken when deciding the future course of action:
• 2-3 attempts will be made to sever the casing mechanically
• Prevailing weather conditions could severely influence matters. If bad weather is
expected to delay anchor handling, then further attempts would be justified. If
anchor handling could be completed before the onset of bad weather, then further
severance attempts should stop. If long periods of WOW are expected this option
should be considered prior to any severance attempts.
• The likely condition of the wellhead to be recovered and its suitability for
refurbishment should be considered and the existing stocking levels and possible
shortages
Note: Wellheads are generally re-used for 2-3 wells before being scrapped.
• The economic implications of using the rig as opposed to a diving vessel.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Abandonment and Suspension Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 17 Page 259 of 447

The system to carry out the cutting and recovery operation should be carefully studied. The
objective is to cut and successfully recover the 20” and 30” in one operation, see figure 17.1,
Wellhead Recovery Flowchart.
Abandonment tools and techniques have been developed to reduce contact between the
wellhead, the wellhead internal profiles and the cutting and pulling assembly.
Cutting in tension is the preferred option. With the DC’s and the DP in tension while cutting,
there is no pipe buckling effect and the current effects are virtually eliminated. A successful
cut is easily noticed as a reduction in the overpull at surface.
Stabilisation
When the casing cutter is well stabilised above and below the cutting knives, cutting will be
faster with a decreased chance of off-centre cutting. Drift sized stabilisers should be placed
above and below the cutter. If casing design includes a reduced swaged diameter below the
wellhead, a stabiliser should be included in the reduced diameter.
Note: The minimum diameter of the wellhead when gauging stabilisers for the cutting
assembly.
Stabiliser blades should be of the no-rotating type tapered top and bottom. Blades can have a
thin “skin” of brass or similar material brazed onto their edges. This acts as a sacrificial layer
when the stabiliser is passed through the sealing bore areas of the wellhead reducing contact
damage.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Abandonment and Suspension Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 17 Page 260 of 447

Recover small diameter

strings using Mechanical
Cutter & Pull BOPS
Note (1)

Can
Fire explosive charge YES explosives be used NO Make Mechanical Cut at
10' below seabed without moving rig? 10' below Seabed
Note (2)

YES YES Wellhead

Wellhead COMPLETE
recovered
recovered? ABANDONMENT Note (3)

NO NO

Do Knives
indicate the full cut YES
of 30" conductor
Fire 2nd explosive Note (2)
charge 10' below
seabed
NO

Was a 30"
Top up job YES
Performed ?
Wellhead
note (3)
recovered?
YES
NO
NO

Make 2nd Mechanical

Cut at 10' below
Seabed

Wellhead NO Move rig off-location and

recovered? fire explosive charge 10'
Note (3) below seabed.

YES

YES
Wellhead
recovered?

NO

Consider all other factors

DEn, Weather, Wellhead
stocks, Rig Rate, Vessel
Recovery Etc.
Note (4)

Figure 17.1 Well Head Recovery Flowchart

Note:

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Abandonment and Suspension Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 17 Page 261 of 447

1. The smaller diameter strings i.e. 9 5/8” and possibly 7” should be run to surface, should first be
recovered by mechanical cutting and the BOP’s pulled.
2. In cases where unsuccessful attempts have been made to abandon a well, the following
considerations should be borne in mind when deciding the future course of action:
a) Government Bodies expect companies to make a reasonable attempt at wellhead
recovery at the time of well abandonment. Under normal circumstances, the 2 or 3
attempts recommended in the flowchart (figure 17.1) can be considered reasonable.
b) Prevailing weather conditions could severely influence matters. If bad weather is expected
to delay anchor handling, then further attempts would be justified.
However if anchor handling could be completed before the onset of bad weather, then
further severance attempts should stop. (Indeed in certain circumstances, this option may
be considered prior to any severance attempts if a long period of WOW can be avoided.)
3. The likely condition of the wellhead to be recovered and its suitability for refurbishment should
be borne in mind, along with the existing wellhead stocking levels and any possible shortages.
Note: At present wellheads are re-used for a total of 2 – 3 wells before being scrapped.
4. The economic implications of using the rig as opposed to a diving vessel. The use of a diving
vessel to recover the wellhead at a fixed cost reduces the risk exposure when wellhead
removal proves to be troublesome.

Problems associated with cutting and retrieving

• If any special 20"/30" centralisers were run, the cut must be at least 5 ft above or
below the centraliser.
• If after cutting the casings, no progress is made in pulling the casings and guide
bases, unlatch the retrieval mechanism and pull the cutting assembly. Carefully
inspect the knives to check that they have been cutting at their maximum diameter.
If the knives show e.g. only the 20” has been cut, re-run the assembly with new
knives and cut the 30”. If both casings have been cut satisfactorily but the wellhead
cannot be pulled free, consider running a fishing assembly to jar the wellhead and
casings free.
Economics may dictate that running an explosive charge rather than a fishing
assembly to jar free the casings and guide bases may be more cost effective.
• The idea associated with cutting casings in tension is well established. As long as
the equipment is working satisfactorily, rutting should be continued for a minimum of
6 hours, until the casings and wellhead can be pulled free. For simultaneous cutting
of the 20” and 30”, if surface indications are such that both casings are cut, rotation
should be stopped and the string overpulled in an attempt to pull the wellhead and
both strings tree. Circulation should be continued whilst pulling to assist in washing
away formation or cement from the 30” and guide bases. If it is recognised at any
time during the cutting operation that the knives are either worn or have broken, the
spear should be released and the assembly pulled for inspection.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Abandonment and Suspension Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 17 Page 262 of 447

• Poorly cemented or, uncentralised 20” when cut will have a tendency to move when
cutting the 30”. If this occurs, off-centre cutting may occur, resulting in the 30” being
partially cut on one side only. If after repeated pulling and cutting no progress is
made, unlatch the spear and pull the cutting assembly for inspection.
• After examination of the knives, indications will be evident as to how large a
diameter the knives have been cutting. If both strings have not been cut, redress the
cutter with new knives and run the assembly back into the hole. If both casings have
been cut, a cement sheath around the conductor may be preventing the casing
coming free. An explosive charge should be run to fracture the cement sheath. A
spear is then run to retrieve the casings and guide bases.
• Economic considerations may overrule a second run with a cutting assembly to
complete the cutting of the 30” conductor. In that case an explosive charge is used
to sever the conductor and to ensure that any cement sheath is fractured.
• Cutters can be fitted with a flo-tel device. This device can be adjusted to show a
pressure decrease when the knives have reached their maximum cutting diameter.
Usually if the casings are completely cut, and depending whether cutting was done
in tension or under compression, the pipe will fall on top of the knives. A pressure
drop will be noticed if the 30” is well cemented as the knives shear into the cement
sheath. It is optional whether the flo-tel device is used. The decision to stop cutting
should not be made on the basis of a pressure drop alone.
• If it is decided to release the spear or grappling mechanism from the wellhead on
the seabed, problems ran occur when attempting to release the grappling tool. If the
knives are jammed in the cut pipe it may be difficult to release the spear from the
wellhead, when using tension cut assemblies. To overcome this possibility a bumper
sub can be placed in the assembly between the pipe cutter and the spear. This
allows the spear to travel downwards the length of the stroke of the bumper sub.
However a bumper sub placed in this position introduces a weak point in the
assembly. Each situation should be given careful thought. Do not run a bumper sub
in this position without consultation with the Drilling Superintendent.
This covers simultaneous 20/30” cutting, poorly cemented annulus etc.

17.5 SUSPENSION
Wells may be suspended for the following reasons:
• The well has not been completed, but the rig has to move off location for some reason
• The well has been successfully drilled but has not been fully tested
• The well has been drilled and tested and may possibly be required in the future as part of a field
development.
17.5.1 General Requirements
Similar requirements apply to suspension, see Abandonments General requirements Section
17.1.2
In all cases the requirements of well suspension are:
• To leave the well in a safe condition downhole such that if the wellhead is
accidentally damaged or removed, the well will retain pressure integrity and will not
flow
• To allow the well to be re-entered at a subsequent date and the BOP installed without
recourse to repair work

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Abandonment and Suspension Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 17 Page 263 of 447

• To leave a well in a condition such that subsequent abandonment can be carried out
by a Diving Support Vessel which will be able to retrieve the wellhead without rig
intervention (this means there will be no requirement to cement off casing annuli
when the casing strings are cut)
• A corrosion cap is run and set to protect the wellhead and its sealing areas.

17.6 LONG TERM SUSPENSION

17.6.1 Normal Circumstances
In the event that a well is to be suspended for any unplanned reason, at any point in the
operation, the following criteria will be adhered to:
Open Hole Sections
• Zonal isolation shall be ensured, see Section 17.1.2.
• If the open hole will not be re-entered at a later stage, it shall be abandoned in
accordance with the guidelines under, section 17.1.2
• If it is possible that the open hole might be re-entered at a later stage, a mechanical
bridge plug shall be set in the shoe track with a 150 ft cement column above it.
Note: This is preferred above setting a cement plug over the shoe track since
drilling out the cement at a later stage increases the risk of sidetracking.
Perforations
• Zonal isolation shall be ensured, see Section 17.1.2.
Pressure Testing
• After setting the last cement plug, the casing shall be pressure tested to a value to be
advised in the programme but not exceeding the lower of 80% burst rating or the
maximum anticipated wellhead pressure
• If pressure testing the casing is not advised, eg., creation of micro-annuli opposite
high pressure gas/oil/water formation, an inflow test to a minimum of 1,000 psi draw
down shall be performed after establishing, by weight testing, that the top cement
plug is set.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Abandonment and Suspension Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 17 Page 264 of 447

• If the casing is set as part of the Suspension Programme, it shall be tested as per the
Programme.
Kill String
• A kill string shall be installed of sufficient depth such that the well can be circulated
dead upon re-entry using mud weights not in excess of 4 ppg above the mud weight
in use
• Sufficient space shall be left below the kill string to prevent the settling of mud solids
sticking the string.
Drilling Mud
• The suspended well shall be left with an inhibited mud, by raising the pH to 11,
biocide may be added. The mud should be of a sufficient gradient to over balance
any expected pressures as per Well Control policy
• The yield point of the mud shall be raised in order to prevent early barite settling
• Care shall be taken to ensure adequate inhibition of the mud to prevent degradation
of the mud properties with time
• Inhibited brine can also be used if operationally more attractive.
17.6.2 Emergency Suspension
Onshore
In the event that a well must be suspended in an emergency, the following actions must be
taken:
• The drillstring or casing string shall be suspended in the casing head housing (CHH)
• The well shall be secured by closing all wellhead, choke and kill line valves.
In situations where drilling operations are required to be suspended at short notice (eg., major
catastrophe occurs near the rig) and the well is expected to be re-entered within a few days
(possibly/probably without moving the rig off site), the contingency flow charts shown in Figure
17.2 and Figure 17.3 shall be used.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 DRILLING PHASE Section 17

WELLHEAD PROTECTION

 Allomax Ltd 2000

NONE 20" HYDRIL COMPLETE STACK

RUNNING CASING/
DRILLING LOGGING
DRILLING RUNNING DRILLING LOGGING RUNNING CASING LINER
CASING
PULL TO SHOE
STOP ALTERNATIVE 1
/
LOGGING
PULL TO SHOE ALTERNATIVE 1 ALTERNATIVE 2 RIH TO SHOE
STOP
/
POH CONTINUE LOGGING CONTINUE
RIH TO SHOE
RIH OEDP
CONTINUE PULL CASING SUSPEND
TO SHOE
STRING
CEMENT

CEMENT RIH WITH CEMENT SUSPEND

SUSPEND RIH WITH OEDP
OEDP TO STRING
STRING TO SHOE SECURE ALTERNATIVE 2
SHOE
WELL

SECURE PULL TO SHOE

SUSPEND
WELL
STRING
SECURE SUSPEND
WELL STRING SUSPEND STRING
Drilling Operations Manual
Abandonment and Suspension

SECURE WELL

NOTE: THE ALTERNATIVE WITH THE SHORTEST SECURE

EXECUTION TIME WILL BE SELECTED WELL ALTERNATIVE 3

Secure Well

Figure 17.2 - Emergency Suspension - Drilling Phase

- Close and lock blind / shear rams PULL CASING/LINER
- Close all wellhead valves
Suspend drill string Suspend casing string - Close kill line valves and remove handles
- Install plug type tester and GRAY - Install mandrel type - Close choke line valves and remove handles RIH OEDP TO SHOE
valve hanger - Close all wellhead valves and remove handles
- Suspend string in CHH - Suspend string in CHH - Lock hydraulic operated valves
SUSPEND STRING
- Retrieve landing joint - Retrieve landing joint - Disconnect kill and choke line and install blind flanges with 1/2"
test valve
- Install blind flange with 1/2" test valve on all wellhead outlets SECURE WELL

- Bleed off hydraulic operating pressure

Revision: 0
18/05/2000

- De-Pressurise Koomey unit

Ref: (NW, PMc)

Page 265 of 447

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Abandonment and Suspension Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 17 Page 266 of 447

Well Not Perforated

Suspend Operations
COMPLETION PHASE

Suspend with plugs

and sleeves closed
Final Stages
Well Perforated

Drill Pipe in Mast

RIH to top perfs

on Tbg Head
Install tubing

Secure Well
landing joint
Land String

Install BPV
Install X-

Install X-

Retrieve
Drillpipe
Over to

Over to

hanger
Tubing

Spool
Running Completion String

No Drill Pipe in Mast

Continue to tail

Install tubing

in Tbg Head

Secure Well
landing joint
Land String
at top perfs

Install BPV
Retrieve
hanger

Spool

Figure 17.3 - Emergency Suspension - Completion Phase

Offshore
As per the Policy Statements Manual Section 12, a drillstring hang off tool will be made up
and racked in the derrick ready for use while the BOP is connected to the wellhead. The
hang off tool will be suitable to hang off in the wellhead or on the pipe rams. The onshore
contingency flowcharts (Figures 17.2 & 17.3) can be used to select the best course of action
for and offshore emergency suspension.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Completions and Workovers Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 18 Page 267 of 447

18 COMPLETIONS AND WORKOVERS

18.1 INTRODUCTION
This section has been included into the Drilling Operations Manual to allow Drilling Personnel an
overview into completion and workover operations. It is out-with the scope of this manual to describe
specific details as this would be covered in dedicated manuals.
For completion operations, under normal circumstances, specialist personnel will conduct the normal
day to day operations with the Drilling Supervisor being the ultimate responsibility. The Drilling
Supervisor’s authority is normally delegated to the Senior Well Services Supervisor who runs the
completion operations
18.2 BACKGROUND
The objective of completion and workover operations is to re-enter and complete wells in a safe,
efficient and cost effective manner using a fit for purpose conduit between reservoir and surface so
that the Production Department can meet its objectives of producing and processing hydrocarbons.
18.2.1 Hazardous Operations
Completion and workover operations are potentially hazardous because on many occasions
staff have to deal with non-routine operations. This chapter should be viewed as a source of
information and guidelines to assist operating personnel in the preparation, planning and
execution of these operations.

18.3 WELL CONTROL REQUIREMENTS

A capability to control well pressure must be available at all times during the life of a well regardless of
the condition of the well or the activities ongoing at the time by using wellhead equipment, sub surface
safety valves and rig kill systems.
The well control equipment to be installed shall comply fully with Nimir Well Control Manual.

18.3.1 Packer Fluid Gradients

The fluid gradient shall provide a minimum of 100 psi over the maximum reservoir pressure.
For brines, the required gradient shall be corrected for the temperature effect to give the 100
psi required overbalance.
The only exception is the annulus fluid in wells completed with 13 Cr material tubulars and
accessories where the annulus fluid shall consisting of inhibited 2 micron filtered freshwater.
18.3.2 Downhole Safety Valves
If a well is capable of sustained natural flow, whether they are natural producers or artificially
lifted, downhole safety valves must be installed regardless of the location.
Wells not capable of sustained natural flow at any time during its completion life will not be
fitted with downhole safety valves e.g. water injectors.
Long term closed in wells with no plans for re entry in the next 3 months must be fitted with a
second mechanical barrier such as a plug in the tailpipe until a downhole safety valve can be
fitted.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Completions and Workovers Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 18 Page 268 of 447

18.4 OPERATING REQUIREMENTS

18.4.1 General
Workover and Completion operations often require non standard operations which increases
the possibility of a loss of well control. This increased risk is controlled by:
• Ensuring a structured planning and programming pose for each operation
• Maintaining equipment to the highest standards
• Only utilising fully trained personnel
• Ensuring the potential hazards and safety precautions are communicated to all
personnel
18.4.2 Casing Cementation
In the preparation of workover (Re-entry) programmes, the records of the surface
cementations should be checked and the workover carried out in accordance with the known
condition of cementation.
18.4.3 Hazard Analysis
A hazard analysis must be completed for each work programme
18.4.4 NORM (LSA) - Normally Occurring Radioactive Material
If applicable to the location each well re-entry must be considered a NORM operation and the
appropriate procedures must be applied.
18.4.5 First Hydrocarbons to Surface
Flowing hydrocarbons to surface after perforating shall only commence during daylight hours,
unless the well is a development well, and the known H2S concentration is below 10 ppm.
18.4.6 Radioactive Sources
All radioactive sources must only be handled by a trained person, usually the TCP or logging
contractor.
18.4.7 Explosives Handling
Radio Silence procedures must be used whenever explosives are run in the well.
The Permit to Work system must be followed for all wireline entry operations.
18.4.8 Clean Out Trips
Unless operations follow the cement drill out, a clean out trip must be made to the top of
cement.
18.4.9 Tubing Make Up
Torque turn equipment and analyser shall be used for all tubing make up.
A dedicated tubing contractor shall be used to run all premium threaded tubulars.
Previously recovered tubing shall be used for all well suspensions where available. When
unavailable, new tubing may be used providing it is then used for the completion.
18.4.10 Brine Filtration
All completion/packer fluids must be filtered to 2 microns to prevent impairment of the
formations by invading particles and solids fall out on top of wireline tools, therefore these
fluids must be free from bridging and plugging particles.
Brine to be pumped into the well must be clean and should have a turbidity below 50 NTU.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Completions and Workovers Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 18 Page 269 of 447

18.5 RE-ENTRY - PREPARATION

The re-entry phase details are always specified in each programme. The re-entry phase is part of
each workover, initial completion or abandonment. It covers:
• The installation of the rig
• The installation of well control equipment
• Well kill operations
• Removal of existing completion equipment from the well
• Other operations to make the well ready to install a new completion.
18.5.1 Short Term Suspension
The detailed short term suspension procedure will vary from well to well, reference DOM 17
and Policy Statement 15.0. The generic procedure is described in the following flowchart:

Set plug below

packer and test

Is leak below
Any leak ? Yes Yes
packer ?

No
No

Pressure test annulus

(Maintain pressure in tubing if
required)

Contact Drilling
Casing Integrity,
No Superintendent
O.K ?
for ammendment

Yes

Set and test BPV

Figure 18.2 Short Term Suspension Procedure

18.5.2 Well Kill Requirements

Where possible in circulation kills the fluid returns should be directed to the production flowline
to form a closed system (no exposure of staff and environment to hydrocarbons). If the flowline
cannot be used then a dedicated storage tank needs to be used.
The fluid gradient should be calculated to create an over pressure of 100 psi on the highest
pressurised interval from the last recorded BHP survey in the well.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Completions and Workovers Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 18 Page 270 of 447

If circulation is required and the SSD cannot be opened, then a slick line tubing puncher shall
be used. If a proper slick line tubing puncher is not available the tubing can be perforated by
the electric line contractor.
18.5.3 Xmas Tree Removal
Prior to beginning to remove the tree it shall be ensured that:
• The short term suspension has been completed
• Procedures have been implemented for heavy lifts and wireline activities
• All equipment is available for the work.

18.6 RE-ENTRY PROCEDURES - PULLING THE COMPLETION

18.6.1 Introduction
A phase by phase approach to completion and workover operations is used to:
• Aid pre planning and time estimating
• Support the decision making process during the execution phase
• Provide a ‘live’ set of procedures for workover operations.
These procedures should only be used as guidelines for the individual work programme.
Fishing activities are included as a guideline for some of the possible scenarios that may be
encountered.
18.6.2 Guidelines
The following guidelines shall apply to all completion and workover activities:
• Losses shall be cured to an acceptable level prior to workover operations to help
ensure that the well remains under control at all times.
• The tubing shall be retrieved to the deepest required access depth to simplify
subsequent fishing operations.
• Up and down string weights plus the slow circulation rates and pressures must be
recorded prior to attempting fishing operations.
• Assemblies must always be pulled through the wellhead and BOP’s with care,
particularly if a fish is attached.
• Do not exceed 80% of the pipe yield when pulling tubing.
• All accessories must be carefully recorded by the Drilling Supervisor when pulling a
completion.
• Wellhead and BOP cavities must be flushed after completion of milling operations.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Completions and Workovers Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 18 Page 271 of 447

18.7 RE-ENTRY PROCEDURES - MILLING PACKERS

18.7.1 Milling Permanent Packers (see DOM 16 – Special Operations)
Permanent packers are designed to withstand pressures from above and below, and therefore
have slips set against the casing that require milling for their removal.
There are two options when milling a packer:
• Either mill and retrieve or
• Mill and push down to bottom.
If the packer does not need to, or cannot be retrieved, but can be pushed to the PBTD without
hampering operations above it by use of a wash over mill, the packer can still be recovered
with a short catch overshot. The best results are achieved with a grapple 1/8” undersized.
18.7.2 Guidelines when Running in Hole
When running in hole the following points shall be observed:
• An accurate tally shall be kept when running the tool so that the relative position of
the milling tool and packer is known at all times.
• Avoid running into the packer or plugs as damage to the milling tool could occur.
• If intending to retrieve the packer then when the packer is tagged, there shall be
enough of the kelly in the hole to get the kelly bushing in the rotary and sufficient
“kelly up” (+/- 15ft) to completely mill over the packer.
• Before tagging the packer, record the free, moving up, moving down and rotating
weights.
• Great care shall be taken if engaging the packer. The catch sleeve can be released
and a trip will be necessary to reset the catch sleeve.
• If the packer has not been tagged with the work string that will be used to mill it, the
last three singles of pipe should be run on the kelly.
• If the packer is deep in a high angle well, with a big difference between the up and
down weights, then these three singles should be run alternating singles of drill pipe
with a 15’ drill pipe pup joint. This will ensure that the kelly does not have to be run
in so deep that there is not room left on it to mill the packer.
Note: After milling the upper slips the rubber needs to be milled. The circulation
pressure increases due to the better sealing properties of the rubber. The
milling progress may decrease, which should not be immediately interpreted
as an indication that the mill is worn out. Some variation of weight and
rotation may be beneficial during this stage.
Note: Do not attempt to get steel cuttings circulated to surface by increasing the
viscosity of the drilling fluid deliberately. The more viscous the drilling fluid, the
more likely it is to get a “hydraulicing effect” at the mill shoe, lifting the shoe up
as an increase in WOB indicated by weight indicator and an increase in
circulating pressure. An actual progress of 2-4 ft milled away must be made
before the packer may be free to move down. It is important to minimise the
hydraulicing effect by minimising the viscosity of the drilling fluid. Do not worry
about getting no steel cuttings over the shale shaker. Most of them will be
recovered in the junk basket, and in most cases it does not matter if some
steel drops to bottom.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Completions and Workovers Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 18 Page 272 of 447

Note: If progress slows or stops, it may be necessary to shut off the pumps at times
to “weld” together any parts that may be rotating on the packer. The mill head
can tolerate this for reasonable periods of time without damage.
18.7.3 After Milling
1. For semi-submersible operations, immediately after milling operations, or even during
milling operations (in case of prolonged milling), secure the well, and flush out the ram
cavities with a flush tool. For platform and onshore operations, OPEN the BOP stack,
inspect and clean the cavities and rams (the annular preventer should also be cleaned and
checked).
Note: Variable bore rams in particular are easily damaged by metal cuttings in the
cavities. Damage on these items can easily result in long and expensive
downtime. More importantly, it can result in a potential hazard when the
equipment fails to operate.

2. When the packer has dropped, stop rotation and pumps and flow-check the well.
Note: Pay particular attention when milling a packer with a tailpipe attached as gas
or oil can become trapped below the packer. Gas will then rapidly rise and
expand, reducing the hydrostatic head and permitting the well to kick.
3. Work the string and check for additional drag and to work any junk into the junk subs.
4. Work the packer out of hole.
Note: The packer may tend to hang up on casing collars when pulling out of the
hole. It can be worked up and down to about 100,000 lb., and if it hangs up
completely, it may be milled in place until it drops again. The packer should be
pulled slowly to prevent swabbing and the well shall be monitored carefully on
the trip tank for indications of swabbing whilst POH.
5. Work packer through wellhead.
Note: In wells where the casing that the packer is set in extends to surface, great
care shall be taken at the wellhead. This is the area where any remaining slips
will tend to jam, and the depth where there is little elasticity left in the drill
string to allow warning that the packer is stuck. The packer shall always be
pulled very slowly through wellheads
18.7.4 Well Clean Up
The following procedures should be used for well clean up operations:

Step Action
1 MAKE UP and RIH a bit and scraper. SPACE OUT
scrapers to scrape future packer setting depths.
2 WASH and CLEAN to bottom.
Note:SCRAPE several times the future packer setting
depths.
3 CIRCULATE the well to two micron filtered inhibited fresh
water (or brine of the required density).
4 POH and LAY DOWN the drill pipe

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Completions and Workovers Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 18 Page 273 of 447

18.8 RE-ENTRY PROCEDURES - TESTING CASING

18.8.1 Calculate Casing Burst
The burst rating of the casing can be calculated with the API formula, using the results of the
inspection log:

Burst (psi) = 0.875 x 2 x Yield strength (psi) x wall thickness (inch)

Outside diameter (inch)

The 0.875 safety factor is related to a tolerance of 12.5 % on the wall thickness of the casing.
When new the 7in casing has the following specs:
• Yield = 80,000 psi
• OD = 7 inch
• ID = 6.184 inch
• Wall thickness = 0.408 inch
• Burst = 8,160 psi.

18.8.2 Pressure Test Casing

The production casing shall be pressure tested:
• When the well has been killed prior to rigging up with the test against the top
production packer in the well, (this is the preferred timing, however this can not be
done when the top packer is leaking or when no packers have been installed)
• When the well needs to be suspended to replace the tubing head spool.
• With a dedicated retrievable packer run on a work string (drill pipe or tubing), (the
packer must be set deeper than the top production packer planned depth)
• After setting the production packer.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Completions and Workovers Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 18 Page 274 of 447

18.9 RE-ENTRY PROCEDURES - NON-ROUTINE PROCEDURES

18.9.1 Cut and Pull Casing
The following procedures should be used when cutting and pulling casing: An example is
cutting and pulling 7” casing.

Step Action
1 MAKE UP 7in mill. RIH on 3 1/2in DP.
2 CUT 7in casing at the specified depth (+/- 10 ft below the
7in casing collar). MILL +/- 3 inch of 7in casing to obtain a
clean top. POH..
3 MAKE UP 7in casing spear on 3-1/2in HWDP and
ENGAGE 7in casing below the wellhead.
4 PULL the 7in casing free. REMOVE the 7in casing slip and
seal assembly.
5 LAY DOWN 7in casing.
Note: Inspect for NORM scale. KEEP joint with hole(s)
separate for analysis. CONFIRM correct cutting
depth (i.e. below the casing collar).
6 RUN plug type tester and TEST 7in seal area to 2,000 psi
from above.
7 RUN 9 5/8in cup type tester. TEST 9 5/8in casing top and
wellhead above the packer to 2 000 psi to confirm wellhead
integrity.
8 RUN dress mill to the top of the stump. CARRY OUT leak
off test on the formation below the 9 5/8in casing shoe.
OBSERVE C-annulus for returns (indicating leaking 9 5/8in
casing).
9 DRESS OFF the top of the 7in casing stump +/- 2 inch.
CIRCULATE viscous pill and POH.
10 RUN 8 3/8in LIB on 3 1/2in DP and TAKE IMPRESSION of
top of stump. CONFIRM top is dressed off properly.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Completions and Workovers Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 18 Page 275 of 447

18.9.2 Installing a Casing Patch

The following procedures should be used when installing a casing patch:

Step Action
1 CHECK 7in slip and seal passes the annular preventer.
2 MAKE UP lead seal casing patch.
3 RIH on new 7in L-80, 29 lb/ft, New Vam casing. SPACE
OUT so that with the patch fully over the 7in casing stump,
the seal area in the CHH is spaced out in the middle of a
joint of 7in casing.
4 CIRCULATE the well to the specified brine weight to have
the original weight of fluid back in the B-annulus.
5 LOWER the casing patch over the stump as per
manufacturer’s instruction until bottomed out.
6 SET DOWN 15,000 lbs weight to ensure good
engagement.
7 PULL 40,000 lbs overpull to set the casing patch.
Note: REFER to the lead seal casing patch running
instructions for detailed procedures
The rating of the patch when fully engaged is +/- 2,900 psi
(+/- 20%). The minimum integrity is therefore 2,320 psi and
with a safety factor of 0.85 the maximum test pressure is
2,000 psi.
8 LOWER the overpull to 10,000 lbs. PRESSURE TEST
patch to 1,000 psi to confirm integrity.
Note: This pressure test is only to detect a leak on
the patch. A proper test will be conducted later
with a retrievable packer.
9 INCREASE overpull. DROP 7in casing slip and seal
assembly. Lower string and energise slip and seal
assembly. ENSURE casing patch is between 10,000 to
15,000 lbs in tension.
10 PRESSURE TEST seal from above to 1,000 psi to confirm
integrity.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Completions and Workovers Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 18 Page 276 of 447

18.9.3 Milling on Junk

When standard fishing tools are no longer effective in making progress in fishing operations
then it is necessary to consider milling the junk away or cleaning up the top of the fish by
milling on it. The most common mills are the flat bottom and the dress mill.
A typical junk milling assembly consists of:
• Junk mill
• 2 x junk sub
• x dc’s
• drilling jar
• 1 dc
Note: Do not use a fishing jar for milling on junk because these are not made for
prolonged rotational activities.
Typical parameters for milling on junk:
• WOB: 2,000-4,000 lbs
• RPM: 60-130
• GPM: max. 3,000 psi.
Regular sweeps of viscous pills to be pumped to ensure that the hole is kept clean. If
prolonged milling is required then consider changing from a brine to a WBM/OBM system.

18.9.4 Wash over Operations

Washover operations are used when pipe is stuck in the hole (due to cement or other reasons)
and other methods to remove it have not been successful. Any cement or obstructions which
are holding the drill string or tubing in the hole can be milled away. By using joints of wash
pipe the rotary shoe is slipped over the drill string or tubing and lowered to where the fish is
stuck.
The following points should be considered:
• Plates may be welded inside the first wash over pipe to lift off pipe that is sitting
against the wall
• Use washover shoes that do not cut on the outside. Heavy wall pipe with a wall
thickness of more than 3/8in should be used to ensure:
• Adequate strength to prevent tearing
• Allowing wall thickness to hold enough carbide to accomplish washover and
milling operations.
• The ID of the washover shoe shall be at least 1/16in smaller than that of the
washpipe
• The o.d. to be at least 1/16in bigger than the o.d. of the washpipe
• Use light weight and moderate speeds when milling with rotary shoes. This reduces
the possibility of splitting or flaring the shoe. Try 50-100 rpm and slowly increase
weight from 2,000 to 6,000 lb. Watch the torque carefully.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Completions and Workovers Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 18 Page 277 of 447

18.9.5 Cutting Pipe

If the pipe cannot be retrieved because of the length of stuck pipe then consideration shall be
given to mechanically cutting the pipe externally. An external cutter is used in conjunction with
a washover string to make a well placed cut to remove the stuck pipe. Interchangeable Spring
Dog, Ratchet Pawl, or Slip Assemblies adapt the external cutter to any type of drill pipe or
tubing to be cut. The external cutter is an automatic spring-fed pipe cutter. The Spring Dog or
Rachet Pawl will actuate the cutter by catching under the coupling.

Procedure
The following procedure should be used when cutting pipe:

Step Action
1 WASHOVER to +/- one joint below the cutting depth
2 POH and MAKE UP the external cutter and RUN IN to the
top of fish
3 STAB over the fish to the required depth and PICK UP to
engage the cutter
4 ROTATE to cut the pipe.
Note: When the pipe is severed, there will be a
noticeable movement of the weight indicator.

18.9.6 Remedial Cement Squeeze (see DOM 9.21 Remedial Cementation)

The following procedures should be used to check circulation prior to conducting a remedial
cement squeeze through 7” casing:

Step Action
1 RIG UP shooting nipple and TEST to 500 psi. RIG UP electric
wireline.
2 HOLD safety meeting and PREPARE for radio silence.
3 MAKE UP a 6 ft long section of 4-1/2in casing guns
4 RIH and PERFORATE the specified interval. POH.
5 CHECK guns and RIG DOWN electric wireline.
6 CLOSE blind rams (OPEN the 'B' annulus side outlet) (land only)
7 CHECK for injectivity and returns at surface. DO NOT EXCEED
the fracture pressure of the formation. The maximum shoe
strength and the mud behind the casing must be specified.
REPORT pump pressures and pump rates. BLEED OFF and
CHECK returns.
8 OPEN blind rams (CLOSE 'B' annulus) (land only).
9 PICK UP a 7in cement retainer. RIH on 3-1/2in DP and SET the
retainer above the perforations.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Completions and Workovers Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 18 Page 278 of 447

10 RE-CHECK injectivity as per ITEM 7 closing the pipe rams and

with the 'B' annulus open. STING OUT.

18.9.7 Remedial Cement Squeeze

The following procedures should be used when conducting a remedial cement squeeze
through 7” casing:

Step Action
1 PRE-MIX 20 bbls of cement slurry
Note:Prior to pre-mixing cement slurry, all the surface lines
to be flushed with drill water.
2 PUMP and DISPLACE to the bottom of the cement stinger
the following:
Drill water volume to be specified
Pre-mixed cement slurry volume to be specified
Drill water chase volume to be specified.
Note: During the displacement APPLY sufficient back
pressure to minimise U-tubing.
3 PUMP the specified volume of drill water into the annulus.
4 STING IN, (OPEN 'B' annulus)(land only) and SQUEEZE
the cement into the perforations. SQUEEZE until the
injection rate is <0.1 bbls/min at the maximum squeeze
pressure established earlier. LIMIT squeeze volume to 10
bbls.
5 OBSERVE the final pressure for 5 minutes. If the pressure
drops, PUMP IT UP to the original pressure. REPEAT this
until the squeeze pressure holds. DO NOT EXCEED 50%
of the thickening time of the cement.
6 BLEED OFF the pressure and STING OUT. PULL BACK
and REVERSE CIRCULATE out excess cement. POH and
LAY DOWN the stinger assembly.
7 After the cement has set PICK UP a 6 inch bit without
nozzles and drilling assembly and RIH on 3-1/2in drill pipe.
8 DRILL OUT excess cement and cement retainers and
bridge plug, noting depths. CONFIRM HUD which must be
specified.
9 POH and PICK UP a 7in scraper as part of the BHA.
10 RIH and SCRAPE the casing from 30 ft above to 30 ft
below the permanent packer setting depths. CIRCULATE
to clean 2µ filtered brine/water and POH.
11 RIG UP electric wireline and RUN a CBL/VDL/CCL/GR
from HUD to TOC.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Completions and Workovers Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 18 Page 279 of 447

18.10 COMPLETION PROCEDURES - EQUIPMENT PREPARATION

18.10.1 Introduction
The stages to be considered to ensure the quality of equipment from the place of manufacture
to the rig installation are:
• The manufacturing standards and quality control
• The storage and handling in the yard
• The make up and testing of the sub assemblies
• The installation of the equipment.

18.10.2 Manufacturing Standards and QC

Tubing.
Various sizes and compositions are sourced from various suppliers around the world and are
manufactured to the relevant API specifications. 10% of the purchase order is subject to a third
party inspection at the mill (as stipulated by Nimir Petroleum Limited).
Wellhead Equipment
Various dimensions and compositions are used from a single/various supplier(s). This
equipment includes hangers, spools and trees. The wellhead equipment is manufactured in
accordance to the manufacturer's QC system which has been accepted by Nimir Petroleum
Limited.
Sub Assemblies
Packers, polished bore receptacles, sliding side doors, nipples, sub surface safety valves are
all supplied by a single/various supplier(s). The subassemblies are manufactured in
accordance to the manufacturer's QC system which has been accepted by Nimir Petroleum
Limited
Crossovers, pup joints and re threading of tubulars
Are prepared by a local workshop. The base material consists of tubulars which were
purchased under the same purchase order as the tubing to the same standards. The local
workshop holds a threading license from the tubing suppliers. These licenses require
compliance with the original manufacturer's quality standards and are audited by the
manufacturer on a regular basis
18.10.3 Handling in the Yard
On arrival of a shipment in the yard 5% of the shipment is subject to a third party inspection.
This inspection includes visual thread inspection and drifting. The marking on the tubulars is
checked against the purchase order and the grade is only confirmed by checking the colour
bands on the joints. There is no non destructive testing being carried out to confirm the
material grade. The third party inspection is carried out against a matrix which stipulates the
detailed inspection requirements. A work order is written out for each inspection and after
completion of the inspection a report is issued to the supply department.
18.10.4 Sub Assemblies
Component verification
Each subassembly component is called out from stock. The components are checked by the
workshop Completion Supervisor against the required subassembly listing as specified in each
completion programme
Component assembly
 Allomax Ltd 2000
 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Completions and Workovers Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 18 Page 280 of 447

Each subassembly is made up in the suppliers workshop using the same procedures and
make-up equipment as utilised at the rig site.
Assembly testing
After make-up each sub assembly is drifted to ensure that there are no obstructions. Each
plug profile is checked physically by installing the plugs and all subassembly are pressure
tested to 5 000 psi to check the integrity. Charts of the pressure tests are kept in the workshop
for verification afterwards in case leaks are discovered on the well site.
18.10.5 Installation
A full visual inspection of the premium thread connections is carried out after the tubing and
subassemblies have been laid out on the pipe racks by a reputable third party inspection
company. Non compliance’s are rejected. All the tubulars are drifted to the API drift dimension.
Non compliance’s are rejected.
All premium connections are made up using special hydraulic powered make-up tongs of
which the rpm is controlled by computer. Each make-tip is analysed utilising a computer and
the make-up graph is displayed against manufacturers recommended acceptance criteria. Non
compliance’s are rejected. The data of the make-up is retained on disc by the tubular services
contractor.
During installation the completion is regularly pressure tested. Non compliance is investigated
and if necessary the completion is pulled and re-run. The test pressure is recorded on graphs
which are included in the well file for reference. The results of each pressure test are reported
in the daily drilling report and the IADC report.
All premium thread connections are made up using API modified HP thread compound The
dope is applied on specific pin and box thread locations by a soft brush following the
manufacturer's advised doping procedures. Correct application is verified by the Well Services
Completions Supervisor.
The correct installed depth of critical items such as packers is verified with electric line (on
TCP shoot and drop or shut and pull operations) and with slick line when installing plugs in
nipples in the completion for initial testing.
At the end of each well a record of the pressure tests and the completion details including
fluids in the well are submitted to the production department as part of the official well hand
over.
18.11 COMPLETION PROCEDURE - TCP OPERATIONS
18.11.1 Preparation Procedures
• Loaded guns will be marked in the workshop according to the gun diagram and the
perforation programme. A separate area should be set aside for this operation.
• Loaded sections will be painted red
• Unloaded sections should be painted green
• The serial number of each gun section must be written on the gun diagram
• Before loading out the finished gun sequence should be checked.
18.11.2 Radioactive Markers
Radioactive markers are installed in the string to facilitate depth correlation and space out. The
emitted radiation is very low (around the same as a luminous watch) but must still be carefully
handled.
The TCP contractor must ensure correct storage and handling of the marker by a trained
person for both the running and recovery of the source.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Completions and Workovers Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 18 Page 281 of 447

In shoot and drop operations the radioactive marker should be above the drop off sub.
It is proposed that the following actions are taken when the bottom packer has to be taken out:
• Refer to the completion tally to determine the location of the RA marker. If the tally
shows that the marker can be recovered, highlight this in the programme and state
the location of the radioactive marker
• Following confirmation in the programme that the marker will be recovered the Drilling
Supervisor in charge mobilises a competent person. This person will handle the
marker after it has been pulled for subsequent transportation and safe storage.
18.11.3 Depth Correlation
Rigorous depth correlation is essential to ensure that the perforations are in the correct place.
The Drilling Supervisor must:
• Verify the completion components from the GR/CCL
• Confirm the location of the radioactive marker
• Tie in the formation from the reference log over a minimum 300ft.

18.12 COMPLETION FLUIDS

18.12.1 Use of Completion Fluids
Inhibited and filtered brine should be used as the completion fluid in the following
circumstances:
• Existing wells
During workovers when the reservoir pressure is above hydrostatic
• Initial completions
When the reservoir pressure is above hydrostatic and perforations are to be added
before running the completion with either casing guns or TCP shoot and pull guns.
18.12.2 Use of Water
Water should be used as the completion fluid in the following circumstances:
• Existing wells
During workovers when the reservoir pressure is below hydrostatic
• Initial completions
Irrespective of reservoir pressure when perforations are to be added after running
the completion with either through tubing or TCP guns as part of the completion
string.
18.12.3 Inhibition
All completion fluid used in carbon steel completions must be inhibited with a corrosion
inhibitor. 13% Chrome completions do not require an inhibitor as the oxygen is required to
form a protective layer on the exposed surface.
18.12.4 Responsibilities
The Drilling Contractor is responsible for the preparation and maintenance of the completion
fluids, including the operation of the filtration system. The overall responsibility rests with the
Drilling Supervisor.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Completions and Workovers Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 18 Page 282 of 447

18.12.5 Gradient
The gradient of any completion/packer fluid must be high enough to control the formation
pressures with a minimum over pressure of 100 psi, taking into account any temperature
effects.
18.12.6 Filtration
All completion/packer fluids must be filtered to 2 microns to prevent impairment of the
formations by invading particles and solids fall out on top of wireline tools, therefore these
fluids must be free from bridging and plugging particles.
Brine to be pumped into the well must be clean and should have a turbidity below 50 NTU.
18.12.7 Definitions
Generally the term brine applies to a salt solution in water. To avoid confusion the term brine
must be used in combination with the name of the salt used for preparing the solution, e.g.
• NaCl brine
• CaCl2 brine.
18.12.8 Disposal
Offshore, NaCl and KCl-brines can be disposed safely and easily. On land disposal is by
dilution to the waste pit. CaCl2 and CaBr2-brines must be returned to the mud plant for re-use.
18.12.9 Health, Safety and Environment considerations
While working with salts and concentrated salt solutions the following precautions must be
taken:
• Chemical goggles, protective clothing and gloves must be worn
• Brine spillage’s must be washed away with plenty of water
• Wet or salt contaminated clothing must be changed immediately
• Inhalation of CaCl2 dust must be prevented by the use of dust masks
• Rubber boots must be worn and long rubber gloves when working with CaCl2 brines
• Protective aprons must be worn and long rubber gloves when working with CaCl2
• Personnel must be made aware of solution temperature increases while dissolving
CaCl2 and/or CaBr2.
18.12.10 Programme requirements
The completion fluids procedure shall be included in the completion and work over programme
and shall address the potential for:
• Fluid losses and the type of LCM to be used
• The availability of brine
• Filtration capacity
• Acceptable volumes (and associated economics).
18.12.11 Responsibilities
The following table lists the specific personnel responsibilities relating to the preparation,
management and reporting requirements with respect to completion and workover fluids:

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Completions and Workovers Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 18 Page 283 of 447

Action Execution Quality Control

Prepare Completion / Drilling Engineer Mud Engineering
Workover Fluids Contractor
Programme
Approve Fluids Drilling
Programme Superintendent
Mixing and Treatment Rig Contractor Drilling Supervisor
of Fluids. Measuring
NTU’s
Reporting Drilling Supervisor

18.13 COMPLETION FLUIDS - MUD DISPLACEMENT

18.13.1 Objective
The procedures given here have the main objectives to ensure that:
• Clean brine enters the wellbore on a continuous basis
• Brine losses to the formation will cause minimum damage by cleaning the wellbore
prior to perforation.
18.13.2 General
Circulation to completion fluid should be carried out from hold-up depth during the last trip into
the hole (usually the scraper trip).
Prior to displacing mud from the hole it should be circulated to break any gel structure.
During any displacement circulation rates should be sufficient to ensure turbulent flow of the
displacing completion fluid. Where possible the string should be rotated and/or reciprocated to
aid the development of turbulence.

18.14 NTU TESTS

Nephelometric Turbidity Units (NTU) tests provide an indication of fluid quality with regards to solids
content. The testing is carried out in accordance with the following procedure.
The Mud Contractor shall record the NTU’s throughout the well bore for the Drilling Supervisor to
report. The wellbore is considered 'clean' when the returns exhibit a turbidity consistently below 50
NTU (Nephelometric Turbidity Unit). In some cases the returns may still exceed 50 NTU even after
all proper procedures have been followed. This should be seen on the graphs as the NTU level
remains steady after circulating out the repeated cleaning pills. In such instances the colour of the
brine may cause the high NTU readings or it may be concluded that the wellbore is as clean as
possible with available system and procedures.
In the special case of tinted brine, it may be impossible to reach the required turbidity value of less
than 50 NTU. To allow for distinguishing between colour or contaminating solids, the following
procedure is used:
• Filter a sample of well returns with the API low temperature-low pressure filter press,
commonly used for drilling fluids
• Use two filter papers and measure the turbidity of the filtrate
• The NTU value obtained should be considered the minimum that can be achieved.
• The NTU values shall then be corrected with this 'lowest possible value.
 Allomax Ltd 2000
 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Completions and Workovers Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 18 Page 284 of 447

Note: All samples should be de-aerated before measuring NTU’s as the method does not
distinguish between bubbles and particles.
18.15 ELECTRIC LINE OPERATIONS - RIG UP
18.15.1 General Guidelines
Objectives
Electric wireline operations are usually conducted to:
• Set a packer
• Log
• Initially perforate a well
• Occasionally to re-perforate or add perforations in an existing well.
18.15.2 Types of Wireline Perforating Operations
Wireline perforating operations are either operations in which wellhead pressure:
• Already exists or is anticipated, e.g. through tubing re-perforation operations, see
Figure 18.4 or
• Is not expected under normal conditions, e.g. perforating the upper interval in a dual
completion, see Figure 18.4.
With Wellhead Pressure
Working against pressure (a) requires the use of a lubricator to allow entry and removal of
tools from the wellhead and a hydraulic grease tube to permit wireline movement whilst
containing the wellhead pressure.
Because it is not possible to maintain a hydraulic seal around a multi-conductor cable all
electric wireline operations which have to be performed against wellhead pressure must be
conducted using the mono-cable.
No wellhead pressure
Where wellhead pressure is not anticipated and pressure control equipment is only used as a
precaution then a wireline BOP and stuffing box (with a packing seal that can be replaced
without removing the cable) are sufficient.
If pressure is encountered then the cable shall be stripped out through the stuffing box
replacing the packing seal as required by temporarily stopping the cable and closing the
wireline BOP.
The Drilling Supervisor must decide whether it is required to have a shooting nipple long
enough to pull the wireline tool above the blind rams i.e. effectively a lubricator.
18.15.3 Rig Up for Pressure
The following is a brief description of the main components of through tubing wellhead
pressure control equipment to be used with wellhead pressure, see Figure 18.4.

Part Description Function

(a) Bell Oil A hydraulically operated rubber pack-off used for preventing large amounts of
Saver oil and grease coating the cable and thereby contaminating the rig site.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Completions and Workovers Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 18 Page 285 of 447

(b) Stuffing Box A hydraulically operated pack-off used to close in the well should the grease
injection fail, or for any other reason.
(c) High A set of tubes whose internal diameters are slightly greater than the external
Pressure diameter of the cable. A seal is held against the well fluids by injecting
Grease viscous grease into the high pressure end of the grease tube. The grease fills
Tube the cable/flow tube annulus and is pushed slowly up the flow tubes by the
well pressure. A grease return line is connected to the uppermost part of the
HGT and the spent grease is dumped.
Note:Valves must be included in the grease injection and return lines to seal
off these pipes should the grease injection fail.
A non-return valve is connected on the input side of the HGT to
prevent gas leaking back into the grease pump and causing an
explosion.
WARNING: Never recycle the spent grease, because if it has become
gas cut, an explosion in the pump could result.
(d) Ball Check An automatic valve which shuts off the top of the riser should the cable be
Valve broken with pressure in the well.
(e) Tool A device which grips the fishing head on the tool when the tool reaches the
Catcher top of the riser. It prevents the tool dropping if the weak point is broken by
pulling up too far. The tool catcher is also used to hold the tool when
introducing well pressure to prevent cable damage should the tool jump due
to the induced pressure pulse. The tool is released hydraulically.
(f) Riser Used to increase the length of the system to accommodate varying tool
lengths.
(g) Tool Trap Hydraulic or manual flapper type trap which allows free upward movement of
the tool but prevents downward movement once the tool has passed
completely above the trap(similar use to a tool catcher).
(h) Lo-Torque Removes the need to pressure test the complete riser with a live perforating
Ball Valve gun inside it. Riser is first tested without the gun, the gun is then installed and
the connection below the lo-torque ball valve that was disconnected is tested
from below, against the lo-torque ball valve.
(i) Wireline Hydraulically or mechanically operated rams designed to close on the cable
BOP’s and seal off the riser above the rams from the well pressure, in case of a leak
in the riser or other mishap.
One, two or three BOP’s are used depending on the type of well. One for
3,000 psi working pressure; two for 5,000 psi.
In addition, for gas wells an extra set of rams is introduced either by using a
twin ram BOP or by using an additional single ram BOP. The additional rams
are inverted so that they hold pressure from above. This enables heavy
grease to be injected between two sets of rams to prevent gas migration
through the cable when the rams are closed. BOP’s must have an equalising
manifold.
(j) Wireline A remote operated pump open/closed wireline shear ball valve (which will
Cutter Valve seal after shearing) located directly below the wireline BOP’s.
(k) Equalising Equalises pressure across the rams before re-opening. Also the point at
Manifold which heavy grease is injected on gas wells. A drain line may be attached to
bleed off the pressure and a pressure recorder may be fitted here.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Completions and Workovers Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 18 Page 286 of 447

(l) Xmas Tree This adapter is supplied by the Wireline Contractor and is the connection
Adapter between the wireline contractor equipment and the wellhead. Only necessary
Flange if the tree does not have a permanent connection.
(m) Pressure Allows controlled pressuring of the system prior to opening the swab valve.
Equalising
Line

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Completions and Workovers Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 18 Page 287 of 447

a
b

d
e

ALTERNATIVE
GREASE
INJECTION
SYSTEMS
f

g
h
i

i k
j
i
l

SERVICE COMPANY EQUIPMENT

NIMIR EQUIPMENT

Figure 18.4 Standard Monocable Pressure Control Rig Up

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Completions and Workovers Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 18 Page 288 of 447

18.15.4 Rig Up with No Pressure

The main components to be used with no wellhead pressure, see Figure 18.5.

Part Description Function

(a) Hydraulic An hydraulically operated pack-off used to close in the well should
Line unexpected pressure be experienced.
Wiper/Stuffing
Box
(b) Wireline Hydraulically or mechanically operated rams to close on the cable and allow
BOP’s replacement of worn stuffing box components whilst POH. Equipped with a
Quick Union to the top of the shooting nipple.
(c) Shooting Sections of 7” or 9 5/8in casing to fit between drilling BOP’s and wireline
Nipple BOP’s to provide a pressure-tight vessel. A flanged profile on the lower end
provides an anchor under either casing rams or annular preventer, and a side
outlet at the upper end allows “bullheading” operations if required.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Completions and Workovers Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 18 Page 289 of 447

Hydraulic
Line Wiper a
Hand Pump

BOP-M b

Pump-in-Sub

Slips Rig Floor

Riser

Shooting Nipple

Hydril Closed Above Shaped

End of Shooting Nipple

or

Pipe Rams Closed Above

Flange on Shooting Nipple

Figure 18.5 Standard Shooting Nipple Rig Up

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Completions and Workovers Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 18 Page 290 of 447

18.16 OPERATIONS REQUIRING PRESSURE CONTROL EQUIPMENT

18.16.1 Use of Wireline BOP’s
Wireline BOP’s are not normally used for open hole logging operations or cased hole
operations where the Drilling BOP’s are installed. Exceptions to this rule are:
• Some open hole logging operations
• Cement bond logging with pressure applied to casing.
• Perforating overbalanced
• Running packers, bridge plugs in perforated wells.
18.16.2 Open Hole Logging Operations
Where losses or kicks have been encountered during drilling the Drilling supervisor and
Drilling superintendent shall decide if a 7in shooting nipple and large wireline BOP are
required. The Logging Contractor shall be advised in such cases as the equipment is not
normally carried to the rig for regular open hole logging.
18.16.3 Cement Bond Logging with Pressure Applied to Casing
This pressure (generally 500 psi) is applied when there are doubts about the cement quality
with the normal bond log. This helps to differentiate between cases of micro-annulus and
channelling. A 7in shooting nipple and large wireline BOP are required.
18.16.4 Perforating overbalanced
In fields where the pressure regime is well known, a 7in shooting nipple and large wireline
BOP are required.
18.16.5 Perforating Underbalanced
Perforating underbalanced or perforating overbalanced where the pressure regime is not well
known requires full pressure control equipment (wireline BOP’s and lubricator).
18.16.6 Running Packers, Bridge Plugs in Perforated Wells
Pulling these tools following a failure to set could result in loosing overbalance. A 7in shooting
nipple and large wireline BOP are required.
18.16.7 BOP Rig UP
The large wireline BOP’s may be mounted in two ways:
• By means of an API flange made up directly to the rig BOP stack, a short length of
riser and a quick union. This is the preferred assembly if pressure is expected.
• By means of a dedicated shooting nipple which engages directly in either the annular
preventer or pipe rams of the rig BOP stack.
18.16.8 Shooting Nipple Rig Up
In most operations where this equipment is used, the well will be in an overbalanced situation.
The primary use, therefore of the shooting nipple, large wireline BOP and stuffing box is for
well fluid containment rather than pressure control. When closed-in well pressure approaches
the shooting nipples test pressure of 500 psi, the blind/shear rams should be closed, killing the
well through rig BOP kill-line (volumetric kill or bull heading).
The doughnut flange at the bottom of the nipple is the primary retention mechanism. Safety
slings can be used to secure the shooting nipple while testing, but the slings are only meant to
restrain the nipple in the event of failure of the nipple. The slings always should have sufficient
slack to allow the nipple to rise up under the UPRs/Annular.
To assure integrity, the shooting nipple shall be:
 Allomax Ltd 2000
 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Completions and Workovers Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 18 Page 291 of 447

• Designed using low grade weldable casing and welded by certified welder
• Tested for cracks twice a year.
18.16.9 Installation and Testing of Shooting Nipple
Install the logging contractors 5.1/2in BOP and 7in shooting nipple and pressure test the
equipment as outlined below:

Step Action
1 CHANGE the top ram to 7in when using rams to hold nipple.
TEST bonnet to 1 500 psi with plug type tester (PTT). OPEN
CHH outlets. BACK OUT of PTT
2 CLOSE blind rams.
3 LOWER shooting nipple in hole till on top of blind rams.
4 PULL BACK so CLOSE pipe rams and SET IN slips.
5 OPEN blind rams and TEST nipple to 500 psi, through kill line
against PTT and 5.1/2in Schlumberger BOP with test bar
installed. REDUCE the closing pressure initially on the
UPRs/Annular until the nipple rises up and the flange locates
below the UPRs/Annular. RESTORE normal closing pressure.
6 MARK the shooting nipple at the rotary table to indicate correct
setting depth
7 When test is positive, CLOSE CHH outlets and REMOVE
shooting nipple and PTT. RE-INSTALL shooting nipple (care
should be taken to set nipple 1-2 inches lower as before using
the mark). SET IN slips.
Note:In case where blind rams are capable to hold 500 psi
pressure from above the use of a PTT can be omitted.
CHH side outlets to be open during testing

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Completions and Workovers Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 18 Page 292 of 447

18.17 ELECTRIC LINE OPERATIONS - HANDLING OF EXPLOSIVES

18.17.1 General
All operations involving the use of explosives must be performed under the “Permit to Work”
system.
18.17.2 Types of Explosives
Classes of Explosives
There are 3 classes of explosives which can be grouped as secondary and primary
explosives. Class 3 are generally called primary explosives and class 1 and 2 secondary
explosives:
• Class 1 - Secondary Explosives
• Class 2 - Secondary Explosives
• Class 3 - Primary Explosives
Class 1 - Secondary Explosives
Slow burning charges which burn without exploding, including packer and bridge plug setting
charges.
Class 2 - Secondary Explosives
High explosives which burn with difficulty and only explode when subjected to high
temperatures or another explosion, including perforating charges and prima cord.
Class 3 - Primary Explosives
Detonators which explode violently when exposed to shocks such as hammering, temperature
or electric currents. Class 1 and 2 explosives are usually set off using a class 3 explosive..
18.17.3 Storage
• There are two storage boxes available for primary and secondary explosives
respectively
• Explosives should only be taken out immediately before use
• Explosives and storage bunkers shall be in designated locations.
18.17.4 Radio Silence
Radio silence is required during the critical periods when any wireline tool utilising EED’s
(electro-explosive devices) is in use. The only exception to this is where a “Safe” perforating
system, which does not require radio silence, is being used.
These apply to the following tools:
• Perforating guns
• Side wall sample guns
• Cased hole RFT
• Tubing/casing cutters
• Back-off string shots
• Drill pipe severance tools
• Tubing punchers
• Packer and bridge plug setting tools.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Completions and Workovers Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 18 Page 293 of 447

Critical Periods
The critical periods are defined as follows:
• Running the tool; the time from commencing to arm the tool until the tool has reached
a minimum depth of 500 ft below BOP’s
• Retrieving the tool; the period from when the tool is at a depth of 500 ft m below
BOP’s until such time as the tool string has been laid out and all the explosives have
been confirmed as being fired or have been disarmed.
Radio Silence Procedure
Prior to the use of explosives a radio Silence checklist, should be completed and signed off by
the Drilling Supervisor, Logging Engineer and Contractor Toolpusher. A copy of the sheet shall
be retained in the well file.

18.18 ELECTRIC LINE OPERATIONS – PERFORATING

18.18.1 Responsibilities
Before commencing the operation, the allocation of responsibilities during perforating
operations must be clearly defined and agreed by all parties as follows:

Activity Responsible Party

Ensure accurate depth control Drilling Supervisor
Ensure pressure control Wireline Engineer
Operating wellhead equipment Well Services Completions
Supervisor
Retrieval of perforating guns Wireline Engineer
Check all shots have fired Drilling Supervisor
Close in Xmas tree after recovery Well Services Completions
Supervisor
Close in well at BOP’s after Drilling Supervisor
recovery
Overall Safety Drilling Supervisor

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Completions and Workovers Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 18 Page 294 of 447

18.18.2 Operating Procedures

The following procedures refers to the four stages of a standard perforating operation:

Job Preparation
Step Action
1 DISPLACE a new well with base oil/diesel to achieve desired
under balance
2 RIG UP with or without pressure control equipment
3 RUN GR/CCL log prior to perforating, if no correlation log is
available. CHECK correlation of gamma ray with LDT/CNL/GR
and MARK perforations on the GR/CCL.
4 ENSURE radio silence checklist has been completed.

Gun Assembly
Step Action
1 Wireline Contractor ASSEMBLE guns as per programme.
2 Wireline Engineer MEASURE:
• • CCL to bottom of gun
• • CCL to top shot of each gun section
• • Length of each loaded section (and unloaded sections if
using Enerjet guns)
• • Maximum OD of gun. CHECK for ballooning and
ENSURE gun string will pass through all wellbore
restrictions.
3 Drilling Supervisor/Operations Engineer CONFIRM measurements with Wireline
Engineer and MAKE drawing of the assembly.
4 Wireline Engineer CALCULATE adjustment to be made to CCL depth to put the
gun correctly on depth.
Note:Calculation to be confirmed with Drilling Supervisor / Operations Engineer.
5 Wireline Engineer CHECK for electrical potential difference between wellhead
and rig - this must be less than 0.25V AC or DC. MONITOR voltage throughout
perforating operations.
6 ARM perforating gun.
Note: This should be done electrically before ballistically
7 PICK UP tool string and PLACE in lubricator. DO NOT INSTALL perforating
guns in the lubricator before pressure testing.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Completions and Workovers Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 18 Page 295 of 447

Run In
Step Action
1 RECORD shut-in wellhead pressure (SIWHP). RIH.
Note:Access to the required depth should have been determined by a previous
drift run.
2 Once below the depth of the perforations CORRELATE depth of CCL against
the reference logs over a sufficient interval to make the correlation
unambiguous.
3 RECORD CCL log of perforating. COMMENCE log below the interval to be
perforated and LOG UPWARDS to the required depth.
4 RECORD the WHP. POSITION gun over the required interval.
5 RECORD line tension. FIRE gun (with the well flowing if necessary) and
RECORD any change in WHP and line tension. ENSURE line tension has
dropped
6 LOG UP over required interval to obtain a post perforating CCL log.

Pull Out for Next Run

Step Action
1 POH, taking care when retrieving the tool string into the WEG and
through restrictions in the tubing.
Note:Strip type guns in particular are susceptible to deformation on
firing.
2 ESTABLISH radio silence at 500 ft below BOP’s.
3 BREAK OUT and LAY DOWN the tool string. VERIFY all charges
have been fired.
Note: CLEAR area of all non-essential personnel prior to breaking
open the lubricator and laying down the gun.
4 REPEAT above procedures for any subsequent perforating runs, as
appropriate.
5 INFORM radio room that radio silence is no longer required on
completion of perforating operations

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Completions and Workovers Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 18 Page 296 of 447

18.19 ELECTRIC LINE OPERATIONS - WIRELINE SET PACKERS

18.19.1 Gauge Ring and Junk Basket Run
Prior to setting production packers on electric line a gauge ring/junk basket (GR/JB) should be
run within the 9.5/8in or 7in casing string according to the criteria in the following flowchart:

YE Has a scraper been run across

NO
S the setting interval ?

Have perforations been

added above the setting
YES NO
interval since the scraper
was run ?

Run gauge ring/ No gauge run Run gauge ring/

junk basket required junk basket

Figure 18.7 Running gauge ring/junk basket

Procedure
When the packer is run on electric line the following procedure should be used:

Step Action
1 RUN a bit and scraper to below the packer setting depth.
2 MEASURE the distance between the GR/CCL tool and the centre of
the packer element.
3 MAKE-UP the tailpipe and setting tool on surface.
Note:APPLY explosive handling procedures,
4 RIH with the tailpipe assembly.
5 CORRELATE depth against base logs. DETERMINE space out to
position to packer on depth.
6 SET packer at the required depth as per manufacturers instructions.

18.20 SLICK LINE PROCEDURES - RIG UP

18.20.1 General
Responsibilities
During wireline operations the wireline operator shall report to the Well Services Completion
Supervisor(WSCS) at all times. The WSCS shall inform the Drilling Supervisor at all times of
all operations ongoing at the time.
In the unlikely event of a wireline fishing job or a major problem the WSCS shall seek direction
from the Drilling Supervisor.
All wireline equipment shall be in good working order and well maintained condition.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Completions and Workovers Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 18 Page 297 of 447

18.20.2 Equipment
The wireline lubricator BOP and associated equipment shall be the correct pressure rating and
service rating for the job in hand. The lubricator and BOP shall be currently certified with test
dates displayed on the stainless steel band-it tapes which are strapped around the bodies of
the items.
Lifting bars and lifting slings shall be currently load tested. The wireline lubricator shall have
fitted a hydraulic stuffing box. The BOP shall be hydraulically operated with a remotely
operated pump.
18.20.3 Rigging Up and Down
All wireline lubricators and blow out preventers shall be made up on the catwalk prior to
starting the job.
The wireline lubricator can be fitted with a purpose built steel or aluminium protector cap to
prevent the wireline tools sliding out of the lubricator while hoisting to the rig floor. This can be
used in preference to the wireline clamp which can cause the wireline to kink should the
lubricator start to slide.
18.20.4 Circulating Heads
The circulating heads consist of a pump in tee with quick union connections on the pin and
box, a cross over to the appropriate tubing thread and a valve with quick union on the pin and
box if required.
During completion operations, the cross over should be torqued on to the tubing and the pump
in tee rigged up on top of the cross over. The wireline BOP's and lubricator should then be
rigged up on top of the pump in tee.
The wireline lubricator should be of sufficient length to accommodate the tool string above the
BOP's. This is to enable the BOP's to be closed with the tool string above, in the event that
bullheading is required.
Note: It is not thought to be necessary to include valves during completions as the rig up
can be pressure tested using a test cap below the pump in tee. The additional valve
should be used during re-completions as there is always a chance of hydrocarbons
at surface after pulling wireline plugs.
18.20.5 Testing Wireline Lubricators
Wireline lubricators require a pressure test at the initial rig up stage to the full working
pressure of the wellhead, normally 5,000 psi. This test shall be carried out against the
circulating head which has been made up to the tubing string. The initial pressure test on the
lubricator shall be sufficient for the entire completion provided the lubricator is kept fully
assembled for the duration of the operation.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Completions and Workovers Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 18 Page 298 of 447

Procedure for Testing Wireline Lubricators

The following procedure shall be followed and the pressure tests recorded on a chart recorder:

Step Action
1 FILL the lubricator slowly with water, and BLEED the air out of the
packing nut.
Note: This is done with the tool string inside the lubricator and
hydraulic packing nut open.
2 PUMP the packing nut closed once returns are visible from the
packing nut. Slowly INCREASE the pressure to that required.
3 TEST for 15 minutes solid.
4 CLOSE the blind rams of the BOP after the body test of the lubricator
has been carried out,. BLEED OFF the pressure above the rams and
OBSERVE for leakage for three minutes, from either rams or
equalising system
5 MAKE a visual check from a distance for any sign of leakage prior to
de-pressurising the lubricator

18.21 SLICK LINE PROCEDURES - SAFETY

18.21.1 Responsibilities
If during any part of the wireline operation, the Wireline Operator or his personnel encounter
any safety related problems or problems down hole which could impede future operations,
they must notify the WSCS. He will inform the Drilling Supervisor for rectification of the
problem. Any problems must also be noted it in the wireline job log which will be attached to
the completion report for the well file.
18.21.2 General Precautions
Wireline operations have the potential to be dangerous. Only people directly involved in the
operation should be in the area. The following precautions shall be taken:
• Ensure that the lines suspending the wireline lubricator are held taut at all times and
especially when jarring operations are in progress. This is to prevent possible
bending of the tubing joint at the rotary table due to the weight and movement of the
circulating head and lubricator during jarring.
• Ensure that two bleed valves are installed on the lubricator
• All hand held tools shall be appropriate for the job and shall be in well maintained
condition. i.e. pipe wrenches shall have jaws which are clean and all teeth in place
• Only steel hammers are allowed
• The work area shall be kept clean at all times, particular attention should be paid to
any oil spilled on the rig floor around the weight sensor. All pieces of wireline and
rag shall be cleared away at the conclusion of the job.
• On the rig floor, orange warning cones or warning tape shall be placed either side of
the wireline and up to the draw works to keep out non-essential personnel
• During wireline operations, lifting is not permitted in the vicinity of the wireline unit,
catwalk or rig floor

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Completions and Workovers Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 18 Page 299 of 447

• During rigging up and down of the wireline lubricator there shall be no other lifting
operation in the vicinity of the operation
• During pressure testing of the wireline lubricator, no other operation shall take place
on the drill floor.
18.21.3 Personnel Precautions
The following precautions shall be taken in respect to personnel:
• At certain times other persons will be involved with giving assistance but they should
vacate the area when finished
• Personnel shall not touch wireline hay pulley's or the wire unless part of the specific
operation
• Personnel are prohibited from stepping over the wire at all times
• The Wireline Operator shall ensure that the unit engine is always running
• Free falling the tool string into the well while the unit is not in gear is prohibited
• Personnel should avoid standing under the lubricator when it is suspended in the air,
especially whilst lowering or raising the tool string
• Hard hats, safety boots, and coveralls shall be worn at all times. Gloves must be
worn when handling wire and discarded when oil soaked.
• If working above 8 ft safety belts are to be worn or scaffolding used.
18.21.4 Quick Lock Connections
When using Quick lock connections for tool string make up, the following guidelines should be
used to avoid injury to personnel:
• Ensure personnel who are assisting during tool string make up are familiar with the
equipment in use
• Make sure everyody keeps fingers clear of pinch point areas
• Make sure Quick lock is fully engaged with indicator dogs in closed position
• If using a tool string clamp, the clamp should not be removed until all parties directly
involved in the operation are satisfied that the Quick lock is properly engaged.
If their is any doubt whether the Quick lock is properly engaged, no weight should be picked
up on the tool string.

18.22 SLICK LINE PROCEDURES - OPERATING CONSIDERATIONS

18.22.1 Rig Up Variations
Wireline operations during tailpipe testing can be carried out without using a wireline lubricator
if the well is on controllable losses, or if the well is fully cased, cemented and un-perforated.
Wireline operations in tubing strings in wells which are cased and un perforated can be carried
out without using a wireline lubricator, HOWEVER if the string is carrying Tubing Conveyed
Perforating guns (TCP) and where the firing head is run in conjunction with the TCP system,
wireline operations must take place through circulating head and wireline BOP.
18.22.2 Plugs for Well Suspensions
Application

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Completions and Workovers Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 18 Page 300 of 447

Wireline plugs are run for the purpose of suspending wells either prior to the rig moving over
the well or to enable the rig to move off the well after the well has been completed. These
plugs shall be locked in place and capable of holding a pressure differential from below and
above (see previous table). They shall be preferably set as deep as possible, i.e.:- set in the
lower most landing nipple below the lower most production packer and tested, either by inflow
testing of one hour duration by differential pressure or by pressure testing from above. In some
cases plugs may not be able to be set due to scale corrosion etc.
Hydrostatic Oil Wells and Injection Wells
In sub hydrostatic oil wells and injection wells plugs shall have the equalising ports enlarged,
to allow for equalisation of fluid should there be debris fallout which may block smaller ports.
The ports should be drilled no larger than 0.25in and the plugs marked to indicate the larger
size. These plugs shall not be used for production operations in gas wells where standard
sized equalising ports should be used.
Pump Open Plug
One type of plug which is acceptable for suspending the well prior to a workover is the Pump
Open Plug'. This plug is a positive set plug, which holds differential from below and a
predetermined pressure from above. On application of a set pressure from above a pin will
shear and the valve will open into the locked position. This allows the tubing string to be pulled
dry, saves rig time due to not requiring a wireline crew to pull a conventional plug. The pump
open plug can be pumped opened with debris on top which would normally require bailing by a
wireline crew. The shear pressure can be varied according to requirement.
Cerro Low
In cases where a wireline plug is to be left installed and the workover carried out above it is
strongly recommended to dump `Cerro low' over the top of the plug. This enables easy
retrieval of the plug due to an impermeable liquid barrier over the plug and prong. Cerro low is
a substitute for Mercury.
18.22.3 Drift Runs
To confirm the integrity of the torqued connections in a tubing string and prior to the setting of
any wireline plugs a drift shall be run.
Gauge cutters shall not be used for drift runs. Fit for purpose drifts are to be used which are
3.5 ft long or the API drift size for the particular tubing size.
Where there is a tapered completion both sizes should be drifted before running any plugs.
Wherever possible the drift run shall be made immediately prior to circulating the well and
setting the packer. This will enable suspended debris which has been dislodged from the
tubing wall to be removed from the well.
Drifts to be used shall be sized to the equivalent of the largest wireline device which is
expected to be run in that particular size of tubing during the production phase of the well i.e.,
wireline lock mandrel and running tool.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Completions and Workovers Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 18 Page 301 of 447

18.23 TUBING RUNNING AND HANDLING - SUB ASSEMBLIES

18.23.1 Introduction
Prior to transporting the sub assemblies to the rig the preparation tests given in the section
should be conducted.
18.23.2 Yard Testing
During the assembly preparation the following tests and checks should be performed:
• Drift
• Shear pins, setting pressures and release forces
• Make up pup joints to all equipment using torque machine
• Mark all connections with paint across the couplings
• Run plugs into all nipples and pressure test seals
• Install gas lift valves or dummies into SPM’s and pressure test
• Pressure tests
• Make up control line to SCSSSV and function valve
• Install tubing hanger BPV and pressure tested
• Function check and run are carried out on all non standard equipment e.g. multi-
lateral assemblies.
18.23.3 Rig Checks
The following rig checks should be made:
• Ensure that the completion sub-assemblies have arrived on location in good
condition.
• Check for damage to packer slips and damage to seals on seal assemblies by
removal of protective wrapping
• Re-install wrapping prior to pick-up onto rig floor
• Lay out the sub-assemblies on the tubing racks and check that the connections have
not loosened on the journey to the rig
• Check that all the sub-assemblies have arrived
• Check that there are enough various sized pup joints on location for spacing out
purposes
• Ensure that all protectors have been properly fitted
• Check and confirm critical dimensions of all items
• Confirm compatibility of equipment delivered with the programme requirement.
18.23.4 Rig Pressure Testing
It is not Nimir Petroleum Limited policy to test completion assemblies on the deck, however, if
circumstances dictate, assemblies should be tested. In particular, it is necessary to:
• ensure that the test area is cordoned off, that signs have been posted informing
platform personnel to keep clear and that a PA announcement has been made
• fit API test subs to both ends of each sub-assembly during all tests

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Completions and Workovers Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 18 Page 302 of 447

• ensure that the correct packer test sub is installed prior to applying pressure to the
packer
• conduct pressure tests to 5,000 psi, or as specified in the Completion Programme
• test the nipple profile sub-assemblies from both above and below against the pre-
installed wireline plug.
18.24 TUBING RUNNING AND HANDLING - RUNNING EQUIPMENT PREPARATION
18.24.1 Power Tongs
Power tongs with an analysing unit shall be used for the make up of all premium threaded
tubulars. It is important to ensure that:
• The power tongs being used are `Fit for Purpose'
• The tong dies are in good condition, clean and conform to the natural shape of the
tubing being run
• The tongs are in good condition and are free to rotate and release
• The dies in the back up unit are correctly sized and will not crush the tubulars on
make up
• The tong back up unit is hanging parallel to the tong, and that the unit is free to move
easily up and down
• If a compensators is used, rig up is completed in such a way as to absorb the make
up losses by free movement up and down
• The tong power pack engine is full of fuel and the engine oil has been checked.
• The hydraulic hoses between the power pack and tong are in good condition, i.e. not
worn or crushed
• If rig tong are used for make-up / back-. at all times the angle of the tongs V's back-
up line is at 90 degrees. Keep the distance between the tongs to a minimum to
reduce bending of the tubulars.
18.24.2 Torque Gauges
Regarding torque gauges, the following checks shall be made:
• Check with the tong operator and the Drilling Supervisor prior to the job start as to
whether the tong torque gauge has been calibrated to the tong being used for the
job and ask for calibration certificate or proof of calibration
• If no certificate is available and doubt exists about the tong gauge accuracy carry out
field calibration against a known weight, i.e. drill pipe or tubulars. This check can
also be carried out against a calibrated tong line pull gauge
• Ensure that the divisions on the gauge are small and correspond with the required
Torque range to be used
• Flex hydraulic line to confirm response of torque gauge.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Completions and Workovers Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 18 Page 303 of 447

18.24.3 Torque Gauge Calibration

To check the calibration carry out the following test:
• Suspend a known weight from the load cell
• The radius of the tong arm must be multiplied by the dead weight to provide a torque
reading to compare against that showing on the torque gauge
• Using the following formula to calculate:

Desired torque = Line Pull x Tong Arm Radius

For example:
Desired torque = 10,000 ft.lb.
Tong radius R = 3 ft
Required line pull = 10,000/3 = 3,333 lb.

To have a reading on the line pull gauge of 10,000 lbs it is required that 3,333 lbs weight is
indicated from the load cell.
Note: Conversion factor for ft/lb. to Nm. Multiply ft/lb. value by 1.356 to obtain equivalent Nm
value.
18.24.4 Elevators
To correctly test the elevators, ensure that the:
• Correct dies are fitted to the elevators and that the elevators are correct for the sizes
of tubing being run
• Dies are clean and in good condition
• String weight is in line with the rated weight of the elevator as cast on the elevator
body
• Strap is fitted to the elevator to keep the elevator horizontal while running tubing.
• Slips
• To correctly test the elevators, ensure that the:
• Correct dies are fitted to the slips to prevent crushing or mashing of the tubing
• Dies are clean and in good condition
• Diameter of the gripping surface matches the pipe diameter and that the angle and
length of the slips are such that the full tubing load is carried evenly along the
surface of the die
• Pins which hold dies in place are in good condition.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Completions and Workovers Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 18 Page 304 of 447

18.24.5 Stabbing Guides

Stabbing guides shall be used for all premium threaded tubing. It is important to ensure that
the:
• Correctly sized stabbing guides are available for the tubing sizes being run
• Guides are made of rubber or a heavy plastic
• Closure clamps are working freely
• Guide is of uniform shape and not bent.
18.24.6 Tubing Drifts
To correctly test the tubing drifts, ensure that the:
• Drifts used for the tubing strings and sub-assemblies conform to API
specifications. i.e.: 3 ½ ft long and the correct diameter for the pipe being drifted
• The drifts are not damaged
• The drifts are cleaned before pulling through the next joint of pipe
• Drifts used for plastic coated tubing are Teflon drifts.
18.24.7 Pipe Clamps
A collar type clamp (dog collar) must be used until there is sufficient tubing weight to hold the
slips from movement. Check that a clamp is available and that it is dressed for the size of
tubulars to be run and that it is in good condition. The clamp must be used during the make-up
especially when there is no collar or upset, i.e. for blast joints, mill out extension, flow
couplings and fitting of hanger.
18.24.8 Pipe Wipers
Ensure that pipe wipers are used during all stages of completion operations, are correctly
sized for the tubing being run and are anchored to prevent dragging through the BOP stack
when larger sized completion accessories are being run. Ensure that wiper is of split type to
facilitate easy removal and installation.
18.25 TUBING RUNNING AND HANDLING - CARBON STEEL TUBING
18.25.1 General Handling
The following general guidelines shall be adhered to during all tubing handling and preparation
activities:
• Thread protectors should be installed at all times when tubulars are being handled.
• Tubulars should be handled with certified cable lifting slings or lifting caps. Do not use
hooks on pipe ends.
• Avoid any rough handling which may damage the tubulars. Do not allow the tubing to
be dropped when unloading or moving.
• When rolling pipe, do so in a controlled manner.
• Use wooden strips to separate successive layers of pipe. At least four strips at right
angles to the pipe and directly above the tier below should be used
• Whenever practical pipe should not be stacked more than five tiers or ten feet high.
This will avoid distorting the pipe.
• Containers should not be stored on top of the racked pipe.
• Any inadvertent mishandling is cause for the tubing to be re-inspected.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Completions and Workovers Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 18 Page 305 of 447

• Drift each joint with the appropriate API drift.

• Number each joint with white paint in the middle of the joint.
18.25.2 Preparation
The following procedure is summarised in Figure 18.9. Pipe identification chart is described in
Figure 18.8.

Step Action
1 REMOVE pin and box protectors and CLEAN threads as each row is laid out.
Note: If diesel is used it must be completely removed with water.
2 TPI CHECK threads, paying particular attention to seal areas. MARK rejected point with
red paint and REMOVE from rack.
3 DRIFT with nylon, or plastic coated drift MARK rejected point with red paint and
REMOVE from rack.
Note: A nylon, or plastic coated drift should be used to prevent damage, although
Aluminium drifts are still in use.
4 RE-INSTALL thread protectors on both ends. ENSURE threads are clean and dry.
APPLY light oil if tubing will be standing for a long time.
5 PAINT on joint numbers before measuring the pipe. Drilling Supervisor ENSURE that
the numbers run consecutively.
6 Drilling Supervisor MEASURE and TALLY joints in each row. The drilling contractor
CONFIRM the tally and in case of any discrepancy RE-MEASURE the row.
7 WSS IDENTIFY the tubing to be run above the SCSSSV. PICK UP AND RACK BACK
tubing in the derrick in stands if operationally feasible.
8 When measuring is complete Drilling Supervisor COUNT total number of joints on site
and CHECK against the tally.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Completions and Workovers Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 18 Page 306 of 447

TUBING IDENTIFICATION CODE

API 5CT Grade Identificaction

Colour Code

13% Chrome Tubing & Special Coupling/Upset

Clearance Coupling Identification

P110
Colour Code P105
White

C95 Brown

Red
L80
Brown Band

White Band N80 Red

13% Chrome
(BSP Codes)

Special Black Band C75 Blue

Clearance (API Codes)
Coupling
J55 Green
K55

Handlight Yellow
Good Tubing White
Coupling
Acceptable for
Completion

Thread & Weight

Identification Good Tubing Yellow
Weight Recovered
Identification
Downgraded
String

Tubing Blue
Kill

(12.5 - 30% )
White Paint
Stenciled Reject Tubing Red Reject
Body Connection Red

Thread
Grade
Identification
Identification

Figure 7.4.1

Figure 18.8 Tubing Identification Code

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Completions and Workovers Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 18 Page 307 of 447

Lay out a row at a time.

Check grade

Remove protectors and clean

threads thoroughly

Dry and inspect connections

MARK WITH RED BAND AND

SET ASIDE
Accept No
REPLACE WITH FRESH
JOINT

Yes

Drift row
No

Yes
Accept?

Paint on numbers
Ensure
consecutive row s

DS and Drilling
contractor measure
joints and prepare tally

Ensure threads are dry.

Apply casing compound to
pin & box threads.
Re-install protectors

Another row ?

No

DS prepare final tally and

running list

WSS check and confirm tally

Figure 18.9 Tubing Handling Flowchart

18.25.3 Running Carbon Tubing

The following guidelines shall be used when running carbon tubing (see figure 18.10):
• Leave protectors in place while moving tubing. Remove the box protector, check the
threads are clean and dry. Lay out if threads are damaged.
• The box end protector should be removed in the Vee-door and the thread inspected. If
applicable dope shall be applied at this time.
• The single joint elevator is used to pull tubing from the Vee-door into the derrick.
• The pin end protector should be removed as the joint hangs in the derrick. The thread
should be inspected and dope applied at this time.
• Use a fresh canister of API dope. Protect dope from any contamination. Take particular
care that the dope is not exposed to water from thread cleaning operations or to the

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Completions and Workovers Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 18 Page 308 of 447

environment. Thread compound should be applied evenly. The thread form should still be
discernible after doping.
• Stab the joint using a non-metallic stabbing guide, keeping the pipe vertical.
• Lower the joint carefully to avoid damaging the connections.
• If the connection is mis-stabbed, pick up the joint, clean the pin and box and re-inspect.
• If the pipe tilts to one side after stabbing, pick up the joint, clean the pin and box and re-
inspect.
• Elevator slips should be set well below the connection area.
• Tubulars should be picked up and lowered carefully. Care should be exercised in setting
floor slips to avoid shock loading the string.
18.25.4 Doping Procedures for Premium Threads
New VAM - Chrome and Carbon
A thin coating of the minimum amount of dope should be applied 2/3 on box, 1/3 on pin end.
The minimum weight = 10 gram x pipe OD (inches). Ensure all parts are covered with
particular attention to filling the thread roots and covering the seal and torque shoulders.
NK3SB - Chrome
A thin coating of the minimum amount of dope should be applied to both box and pin, ensuring
all parts are covered with particular attention to filling the thread roots and covering the seal
and torque shoulders.
NK3SB – Carbon
A thin coating of the minimum amount of dope should be applied to the box end only ensuring
all parts are covered with particular attention to filling the thread roots and covering the seal
and torque shoulders. If the connection cannot be dried effectively dope must be applied to
both box and pin ends.
NS CT - Chrome and Carbon
Threads shall be cleaned with kerosene or other cleaning fluid, to be free of grease or dust on
the pin and box, then dried. Dope should be applied slightly and evenly over the entire thread,
seal and shoulder areas on both box and pin.
FOX - Chrome and Carbon
Dope should be applied evenly over the entire thread, seal and shoulder areas on both box
and pin.
18.25.5 Make Up
The following guidelines should be used when making up carbon steel tubing:
• Pipe must be vertical and allowed to spin freely
• Use the rig power tongs to make up the connections to the torque values in below
• Do not latch back-up tongs on the upsets or couplers of box ends
• Do not use pipe wrenches as back up tongs
• The joint should be placed in the slips at a height such as not to induce bending during
make up
• Closely monitor rotation speed for irregularities

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Completions and Workovers Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 18 Page 309 of 447

• Ensure that the back of the box metal seal has dope 360 deg around the seal area. Dope
the full thread area of both box and pin including the internal shoulder seal.
• Use a calibrated torque turn machine or JAM unit to control the make up speed and to
record a torque turn graph
• Make up should be started in high gear; minimum speed 3 rpm, maximum speed 15 rpm.
Torque build-up should not normally start until six or seven turns are complete. Any
torque increase before 1.5 turns from shouldering is indicative of a problem in make-up;
rotation should be stopped and the connection backed out and inspected.
• Make-up should be completed in low gear; maximum speed 5 rpm. The tongs should be
changed to low gear once an increase in torque is observed.
• If pipe has a tendency to wobble unduly at its upper end due to wind or rig heave and
roll, reduce the rotation speed to prevent damage. If wobble persists make up as per
chrome connections below.
18.25.6 Acceptance of Make Up
Minimum, maximum and optimum torque for production tubing connection types currently run
are specified in the following table. The following guidelines apply for the acceptance of make-
up:
• The Drilling Supervisor is responsible for the acceptance of make up
• Minimum shoulder torque should be set at 5% of optimum make up torque
• Maximum shoulder torque should be set at 70% of optimum make up torque
• Those connections with torque values falling outside the acceptable shoulder torque
minimum and maximum should be broken out and visually inspected for damage. If no
damage is evident then they may be re-run.
• Final torque in excess of the maximum acceptable final torque, or less than the minimum
acceptable final torque as set forth in the manufacturing procedure, should be rejected
• Avoid bumping the torque to achieve final torque values. If the final torque value is less
than the minimum, back out the pipe and check for damage. Repeat the make-up.
• Graphical display should be set to give maximum deflection over the remaining turns to
shoulder and final make-up
• Tong die marks more than 0.015in or marks that indicate slippage or sharp bottoms shall
be rejected at make-up.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Completions and Workovers Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 18 Page 310 of 447

Connection Minimum Optimum Maximum

Type
(ft-lbs) (ft-lbs) (ft-lbs)
5in 15 lbs/ft PC, 3,920 4,900 5,880
NK 3 SB
5in 15 lbs/ft 4,630 5,140 5,650
New VAM
4-1/2in 12.6 4,300 4,770 5,240
lbs/ft New VAM
3-1/2in 9.2 2,930 3,250 3,570
lbs/ft, New VAM
3-1/2in 9.2 2,610 2,900 3,190
lbs/ft, NK 3 SB
3-1/2in 9.2 2,670 2,870 3,070
lbs/ft, FOX
2-7/8in, 6.4 lb/ft 2,160 2,390 2,620
New VAM

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Completions and Workovers Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 18 Page 311 of 447

Transfer To Pipe Ramp

Remove Box End Protector

Reinstall Box End
Check Clean And Wipe Dry

Lift One Joint of

Lift With Single Elevators
Each String in Dual
Completion

Remove Pin End Protector

Check Cean & Dry

Mark Clearly With Red

Threads Good? No
Band And Set Aside

Yes
Yes
Apply Dope Sparingly
To Pin Threads

Stab With Stabbing Damage

No
Guide Sustained?

Cleanly Pick Up And Check

No
Stabbed? For Damage

No

Make Up With Power

Tong And Analyzer

Joint
Accepted?

Pick Up Smoothly
And RIH

Figure 18.10 Running Carbon Steel Tubulars

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Completions and Workovers Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 18 Page 312 of 447

18.25.7 Pulling Carbon Steel Tubulars

The following procedure shall be used when pulling a:
• DST string
• String during the completion phase due to leak
• Suspension string that is later to be used as the completion string.

When pulling an old completion, cleaning and inspection should not be carried out, it is only
necessary to install thread protectors and lay-out. The procedure is illustrated in Figure 18.11.

Procedure
When pulling carbon steel tubulars, the following procedure should be used:

Step Action
1 BREAK OUT joint with back-up jaws around the coupling.
Note: The break-out torque is likely to be considerably
greater than make-up, so the tongs must be suitably
powerful. Break-out shall be in low gear, with one full
turn being made before changing to high gear. Once
the threads bounce, a further 1/3 turn should be made.
2 LIFT pin out of the box and PULL CLEAR to prevent seal
damage.
3 CLEAN with high pressure water, DRY AND INSPECT pin and
box. INSPECT pipe body for evidence of slip or elevator
damage. MARK rejected joints with red paint and LAY aside.
4 RE-APPLY thread compound. INSTALL clean, dry pin and box
protectors before laying the joint down.
Note: If the tubing is to be racked back in stands, the pin
protector must be installed even though the set back
area is wood covered. When a tubing string is racked
back and is not immediately re-run, a fresh water pill
/cushion inside is recommended to avoid
crystallisation of the salt that may later interfere with
wireline work.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Completions and Workovers Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 18 Page 313 of 447

Place Back-up Jaws On

Coupling

Break-out In Low Gear

Expect Higher Break-out Torques

Change To High Gear After 1 Turn

Further 1/3 Turn After Bounce

Lift Gently
Pull Clear of Box

Install Thread Tubing to be

No
Protectors Rerun?

Yes

Clean, Dry And Inspect Threads

Examine Pipe Body For Damage

MARK CLEARLY WITH RED

Accept? No
BAND AND SET ASIDE

Yes

Re-apply Dope
Install Clean, Dry Thread Protectors

Lay Out Joint

Fit Coded Protectors As Appropriate

Figure 18.11 Pulling Carbon Steel Tubulars

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Completions and Workovers Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 18 Page 314 of 447

18.26 TUBING RUNNING AND HANDLING - CHROME TUBING

18.26.1 Chrome Tubulars
Corrosion Damage and Microscopic Damage
Chrome tubulars are extremely susceptible to corrosion damage in the well if subjected to
stress at any time during storage, transportation and running. In addition, chrome tubulars may
suffer microscopic cracking due to:
• Contact with any metal objects (including other chrome tubing)
• Excessive bending while lifting
• Thread cleaning with wire brushes
• Lifting with metal slings
• Prolonged exposure to seawater (e.g., in thread recesses)
• Excessive wireline work.
Measures to prevent such damage must be implemented at every stage of the handling
operation, and the rig site must be prepared in advance to accept chrome tubulars as
described in this section and as shown in Figure 18.12.
18.26.2 General Handling
In order to reduce/minimise the possibilities of damage to chrome tubulars, the following
guidelines shall be adhered to:
• Metal-to-metal impact should be minimised
• Transportation of tubulars should be by ‘rack-packs’. Removal of joints from rack
packs should be by plastic encapsulated certified slings.
• The rack packs should be utilised when laying out the pipe on the pipe deck to
maintain protection of the tubulars
• A hard wood beam (3in x 3in) should be fitted across the top of the Vee-door to
hold the pipe off the metal when lying in the Vee-door
• Single joint elevators shall be rigged in such a way that they hang freely over the
rotary table, so that thread engagement is unimpeded. If available a certified load
spring should be incorporated into the pick-up line to reduce the load on the
threads as they engage.
• The joints should only be lifted with nylon slings, and singly unless air-type thread
protectors are fitted at both ends to prevent metal contact
• Tubing handling equipment must be dressed for chrome tubular use:
• Power tongs shall be fitted with the correct size non-marking dies
• Rotary slips shall be dressed with low-stress dies
• Single-joint and side-door elevators shall be fitted with non-metallic inserts
• Stabbing guides shall be non-metallic
• A stabbing alignment system (e.g. Weatherford “Tubular Steady”) should be used
if available to minimise the risk of thread damage while stabbing.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Completions and Workovers Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 18 Page 315 of 447

18.26.3 Preparation
The following general guidelines should be used when preparing chrome tubing:
• Each row of tubing shall be thoroughly cleaned and tallied prior to laying out another row
on top
• If tubulars are to be left for over four hours prior to running, a light oil should be applied to
prevent corrosion. If the connections are cleaned more than two hours but less than twelve
hours before the tubing is run, storage compound and thread protectors should be
reapplied.
• Drift each joint, from box end to pin end with a non-metallic 42U API drift. Care should be
exercised to avoid damaging the box end threads when installing the drift. Drifting should
be performed prior to cleaning or inspection.
• A magnet should be used to check for any rogue carbon steel joints
• Once cleaned, the threads shall be checked by the TPI, with particular attention being paid
to the seal areas. Any rejected joints should be clearly marked at this stage with red paint
and removed from the rack.
• A nylon drift shall be used to prevent damage, regularly check the drift o.d. while drifting.
The drift i.d. shall be checked prior to use. Any rejected joints at this stage should be
clearly marked with red paint and removed from the rack.
• Once inspected and drifted, API modified casing dope shall be applied sparingly to the pin
and box threads, and the cleaned protectors re-installed on both ends. Dope shall be
applied in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations.
• Joint numbers should be painted on before measuring the pipe. The Drilling Supervisor
must ensure that the numbers are running consecutively.
• The joints in each row should now be measured and tallied by the Drilling Supervisor. The
drilling contractor shall confirm the tally and in case of any discrepancy re-measure the
row.
• The WSS shall identify the tubing to be run above the SCSSSV, and this shall be picked
up and racked back in the derrick in stands if operationally feasible
• When measuring is complete the Drilling Supervisor shall count the total number of joints
on site and check this against the tally.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Completions and Workovers Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 18 Page 316 of 447

Lay Out A Row At A Time

Check Grade

Remove Protectors And Clean Threads

Thoroughly

Thread Inspector Dry And Examine

Connections

MARK WITH RED BAND

AND SET ASIDE
REPLACE WITH FRESH
Accept No
JOINT

Yes

Drift Row
No

Yes
Accept?

Paint On Numbers With

Different Colours For Long
And Short Strings

Ensure Consecutive
Numbering Between Rows
PLASTIC STRIPPING ON PIPE RACK

CHROME SERVICE HANDLING GEAR

DS & Drilling/Casing
Contractor Measure Joints NYLON SLINGS ONLY
And Prepare Tally
NO SEAWATER TO BE USED

Ensure Threads Are Dry.

Apply Casing Compound To
Pin & Box Threads
Re-install Protectors

Another Row?

No

DS Prepare Final Tally And

Running List

WSS Check and Confirm

Tally

Figure 18.12 Preparing Chrome Tubulars

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Completions and Workovers Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 18 Page 317 of 447

18.26.4 Running Chrome Tubing

In addition to the guidelines used for carbon steel tubing, the following shall be followed when
running chrome alloy steels:

• Apply dope using the procedures described in Carbon Steel Tubing.

• The tubing shall be lifted onto the pipe ramp with nylon or plastic coated slings.
• Thread protectors shall be removed at the drill floor, ensuring that there are no foreign
particles in the previously applied thread compound.
• The joint shall be lifted with single-joint elevators and stabbed using a stabbing guide.
• During stabbing and initial turns, the joint shall be held vertical at stabbing board level.
18.26.5 Make Up
In addition to the guidelines used for carbon steel, the following shall apply during the make-up
of chrome alloy steels:
• The pipe should be slowly rotated by hand as the pin is engaged into the box
• Make-up should initially be walked in by hand for the first four turns utilising a strap wrench
with webbing strap (one man operation) until difficult to turn
• The final turns and make-up shall be completed with a properly equipped tubing tong with
integral back-up and monitored by joint make-up analyser. The tong should operate in high
gear at a maximum of 10 rpm until shouldering point, and full make-up completed at 2-
3rpm in low gear.
• Calibrate the torque gauge and make connections up to the recommended torque (ensure
the correct friction factor is applied to make-up torque if API modified dope is not being
used). If the make-up analyser rejects the joint, or if the joint is mis-stabbed the connection
must be backed out and the threads inspected.
• The Driller shall run tubing at a uniform speed, and apply the brake smoothly. Weight
should be picked up and slacked-off carefully when the slips are pulled and set to avoid
shock loading and impact damage.
18.26.6 Acceptance of Make Up
The guidelines for accepting the make up are the same as for carbon tubing. Minimum,
maximum and optimum torque for production tubing connection types are specified in the
following table:

Connection Type Minimum Optimum Maximum

(ft-lbs) (ft-lbs) (ft-lbs)
5in 15 lbs/ft, NS-CC 3,630 4,400 5,170
4-1/2in 12.6 lbs/ft New VAM 4,300 4,770 5,240
3-1/2in 9.2 lbs/ft, NK 3 SB 2,610 2,900 3,190
3-1/2in 9.2 lbs/ft, New VAM 2,930 3,250 3,570
3-1/2in 9.2 lbs/ft, FOX 2,570 2,760 2,950

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Completions and Workovers Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 18 Page 318 of 447

Transfer To Pipe Ramp

With Nylon Slings

Remove Box End Protector

Ensure No Foreign Particles In
Thread Compound HOLD PRE-JOB MEETING

NYLON SLINGS ONLY

Lift With Pick-up Elevators CHROME SERVICE HANDLING GEAR

NYLON STRAP WRENCH ONLY

Remove Pin End Protector
Ensure No Foreign Particles In SMOOTH DRAWWORKS OPERATION
Thread Compound

MARK CLEARLY WITH

Threads Good? No RED BAND AND SET
ASIDE

Yes
Yes

Stab With Stabbing Damage

No
Guide Sustained?

Cleanly Pick Up And Check

No
Stabbed? For Damage

Yes

Walk Joint In With Nylon Strap No

Wrench

Make Up With Power

Tong And Analyzer

Joint
Accepted?

Pick Up Smoothly
And RIH

Figure 18.13 Running Chrome Tubular

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Completions and Workovers Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 18 Page 319 of 447

18.26.7 Pulling Chrome Tubulars

The procedures given shall be used when pulling a:
• DST string
• String during the completion phase due to leak
• Suspension string that is later to be used as the completion string.
When pulling an old chrome completion, cleaning and inspection must be
carried out. The procedure is illustrated in Figure 18.14.

Procedure
The following procedure should be used when pulling chrome tubulars:

Step Action
1 Driller PULL tubing at uniform speed and APPLY brake
smoothly. PICK-UP and SLACK OFF weight when the slips are
pulled and SET to avoid shock loading and impact damage.
2 BREAK-OUT joint in low gear at 2 rpm with the back-up jaws
around the coupling.
Note: The break-out torque is likely to be considerably
greater than make-up, so the tongs must be suitably
powerful. Break-out shall be in low gear, with a nylon
strap wrench being used as soon as possible and
certainly before the threads bounce. Once the threads
bounce, a further 1/3 turn should be made.
3 LIFT pin out of the box and PULL CLEAR to prevent seal
damage.
4 CLEAN pin and box with high pressure water, DRY AND
INSPECT. INSPECT pipe body for evidence of slip or elevator
damage. MARK rejected joints with red paint and LAY aside.
5 RE-APPLY thread compound. INSTALL clean, dry pin and box
protectors before laying the joint down.
Note: If the tubing is to be racked back in stands, the pin
protector must be installed even though the set back
area is wood covered. The pipe body should be
cleaned inside and out with freshwater.
6 TRANSPORT joint from pipe ramp to transport boxes using
nylon slings.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Completions and Workovers Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 18 Page 320 of 447

Place Back-up Jaws On

Coupling

Break-out In Low Gear At 2 RPM

Expect Higher Break-out Torques

After 1 Turn Use Nylon Strap Wrench

Make Further 1/3 Turn After Bounce

Lift Gently HOLD PRE-JOB MEETING

Pull Clear of Box

SMOOTH DRAWWORKS OPERATION

CHROME SERVICE HANDLING GEAR

Install Tubing to be NYLON STRAP WRENCH

No
Proctectors Rerun?

USE NYLON SLINGS ONLY

Yes

Clean, Dry And Inspect Threads

Examine Pipe Body For Damage

MARK CLEARLY WITH RED

Accept? No
BAND AND SET ASIDE

Yes

Re-apply Dope
Install Clean, Dry Thread Protectors
Clean Body Inside And Out With
Fresh Water

Transfer Joints From Pipe Ramp To

Cargo Boxes Using Nylon Slings
Fit Coded Protectors As Appropriate

Figure 18.14 Pulling Chrome Tubulars

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Semi-Submersible Drilling Operations Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 19 Page 321 of 447

19 SEMI-SUBMERSIBLE DRILLING OPERATIONS

19.1 WELL ESTABLISHMENT
19.1.1 Drilling 12¼" Pilot Hole (Shallow Gas Procedure)
When a shallow seismic survey over a well location indicates the presence of seismic
anomalies and it is not possible to re-site the rig position, a pilot hole may be drilled in open
water. When a pilot hole is required the depth and equipment will be advised in the Drilling
Programme.
Well Control Manual section 11, Shallow Gas Procedures will be adhered to at all times to
minimise the risk to personnel and drilling unit.
A mud pit of kill mud will be prepared before commencement of drilling. The mud weight and
volume required will be specified in the Drilling Programme.
The Drilling Supervisor will ensure that all personnel and equipment for drilling the pilot hole
are on the rig. All equipment will have been checked and functioned, as appropriate, and fit for
purpose.
DOM section 4, reference items, 1.0 and 2.0 will be fully complied with, as appropriate, prior to
and during drilling the pilot hole.
19.1.1.1 Make up pilot hole assembly as specified in the Drilling Programme.

A typical pilot hole assembly would be:

• 12¼" rock bit - no nozzles

• Float valve - non ported
• Totco ring
• 9 x 8" DC
• X/O
• HWDP
• Drop-in dart sub
• HWDP to be added as drilling proceeds.

Note:

i) A drilling jar will be considered in the above BHA, dependent on pilot hole total
depth.

ii) The bit will be painted white to aid ROV observation.

iii) If a top drive is in use, a safety valve will be installed below the drillpipe pup
joint to arrest any flow through the drillpipe should the float valve fail.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Semi-Submersible Drilling Operations Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 19 Page 322 of 447

19.1.1.2 RIH with BHA to just above prognosed seabed depth.

19.1.1.3 Launch ROV. Confirm seabed clear of any obstructions and survey a 250ft radius around
intended location. A video of the survey will be made and retained for reference. (If not
already completed as part of the site survey).
19.1.1.4 At slack tide or minimum current, tag seabed. Record the distance between rotary table and
seabed corrected to Mean Sea Level (MSL). Record the following on the Daily Drilling
Report and IADC report. The ROV will confirm the measurements.
• Water depth at MSL (ft)
• Operating draft for the reported rotary table elevation (ft)
• Rotary table elevation above seabed (ft).
•
19.1.1.5 Spud the well and drill pilot hole to total depth. The ROV will remain on the seabed to
observe breakout of any gas (especially during connections). The first 30 ft will be drilled
using low flowrate and rotary speed. The spudding assembly will be spaced to ensure the
bit remains in the drilled hole whilst making the first connection.
• Typical drilling parameters are:
1) For the first 30 ft below seabed:

i) flowrate - to 300 gpm

ii) WOB - to 5000 lbs
iii) rotary speed - to 50 rpm

2) Increasing gradually to optimum parameters over the next 60 ft.

i) flowrate - to 600 gpm

ii) WOB - to 25000 lbs to maintain

controlled penetration rate

iii) rotary speed - to 120 rpm

• The hole will be drilled with seawater. A 25 bbl viscous pill will be displaced to
seabed as required, but at a maximum of every 90 ft.
• Teledrift inclination surveys will be taken at 50 ft below seabed or when formation
firms up, whichever is sooner, every 90 ft and at pilot hole total depth.
• Penetration rate will be controlled at 100 ft/hr.
• Penetration rate will be controlled at 25 ft/hr from within 50 ft of any anticipated
anomaly top. Once the anomaly has been penetrated, the penetration rate will be
increased, as required, dependent on hole cleaning and wellbore integrity.
Note:
The penetration rate is the maximum instantaneous rate and not an average drilling rate
including connections.

19.1.1.6 At total depth chase around a 50 bbl viscous pill and circulate clean with seawater.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Semi-Submersible Drilling Operations Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 19 Page 323 of 447

19.1.1.7 Stop circulation and observe for any flow.

19.1.1.8 If flow is observed, either after displacement to seawater or during drilling, the NPL Well
Control Manual Shallow Gas Procedures will be followed, see section 11 of Well Control
Manual.
19.1.1.9 The ROV will observe the hole location, prior to POOH, for subsequent drilling operations.

19.1.2 Running Temporary Guide Base (TGB)

DOM section 4, reference items 1.0 and 2.0 will be fully complied with, as appropriate, prior to
running the TGB.

A TGB will not normally be run. Refer to DOM section 6, 6.1.1 for circumstances under which
a TGB will be run.

19.1.2.1 Position the TGB on the spider beams during the tow to the new drilling location or whilst
running anchors.
19.1.2.2 Make up TGB HWDP running string. Drift all joints of drillpipe. Rack in derrick. This string will
be used only for running equipment to the mud line.
19.1.2.3 Load and secure the TGB with weight material to a total submerged weight of approximately
40000 lbs.
19.1.2.4 Attach four guidelines with shackles. Ensure pins are wired secure. Paint guidelines at 3 ft
intervals for the first 12 ft above the TGB. This will assist in determining the proximity of the
TGB when running BHA's. Mark TGB to identify guideline positions.
19.1.2.5 Attach ballast boxes, if required. Install 2 x slope indicators.
19.1.2.6 Grease and make-up J-Slot running tool to drillpipe running string.
Note:

A bumper sub(s) is not normally required. The heave compensator is adequate.

19.1.2.7 RIH and engage running tool into TGB J-slot. Lock rotary.
19.1.2.8 Pick up TGB. Observe total weight. Open spider beams.
19.1.2.9 RIH with TGB to just above prognosed seabed depth. Maintain slight tension on guidelines
to avoid fouling. Mark the drillstring whilst running to ensure it does not rotate whilst making
connections.
19.1.2.10 Launch ROV. Confirm TGB orientation and seabed clear of any obstruction. Survey a 250 ft
radius around intended location. A video of the survey will be retained for reference (if not
already completed as part of the site survey).
19.1.2.11 At slack tide or minimum current land TGB on seabed. Adjust compensator for drillstring
weight.
Record the distance between the rotary table and seabed corrected to Mean Sea Level (MSL).
Record the following on the Daily Drilling Report and IADC report:

• Water depth at MSL (ft)

• Operating draft for the reported rotary table elevation (ft)
• Rotary table elevation above seabed (ft)
•

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Semi-Submersible Drilling Operations Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 19 Page 324 of 447

19.1.2.12 Observe slope indicator readings. The maximum acceptable is 3 degrees.

If the inclination is in excess of 1½ degrees, the TGB will be picked up and repositioned.

19.1.2.13 Adjust guideline tensions as required above guideline buoyed weight.

19.1.2.14 Mark the four guidelines in a horizontal plane above the cellar deck using a permanent
fixture as a reference point.
Any change in the difference between this mark and the fixed reference point will be used
for depth correction to compensate for vessel draft and tide changes and of the TGB tilting
or settlement.

19.1.2.15 Release TGB running tool.

19.1.2.16 POH. Do not rotate drillstring.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Semi-Submersible Drilling Operations Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 19 Page 325 of 447

19.1.3 Equipment Check List

The Drilling Programme will specify the drillpipe weight and grade.

19.1.3.1 Drilling Pilot 12¼" Hole

ITEM QUANTITY DESCRIPTION

1. As required 12¼" rock bit c/w nozzles, bit breaker and bit gauge ring, 6 5/8"
Reg pin

2. 2 Totco ring for 6 5/8" Reg conns

3. 2 Float valve, non ported, for 6 5/8" Reg conns

4. 2 Teledrift, bored for float valve and associated survey equipment, 6

5/8" Reg conns

5. 2 Circulating sub, c/w drop ball and spares kit, 6 5/8" Reg conns

6. 9 8" steel drill collar, 6 5/8" Reg conns

7. 2 8" hydraulic drilling jar c/w lifting sub and safety sleeve, 6 5/8" Reg
conns

8. 2 Junk sub, 6 5/8" Reg conns

9. 2 X-over sub, 6" Reg pin x 4½" IF box

10. 12 5" HWDP, 4½" IF conns

11. As required 5" drillpipe, 4½" IF conns

12. 3 8" drill collar lifting sub, for use with 5" drillpipe elevator 6 5/8" Reg
conns

13. 2 sets 8" drill collar hand slips and elevator

14. 1 Drill collar safety clamp and spanner

15. 2 sets 5" drillpipe hand slips and elevator

16. As required Drill collar and drillpipe dope

17. 1 Totco, 0 to 8° surveying equipment c/w barrel, sinker bars and

overshot

18. As required Fishing equipment to catch all downhole equipment

19. As required 3½" drillpipe cement string, 3½" IF conns

20. 1 X-over, 3½" pin x 4½" IF box

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Semi-Submersible Drilling Operations Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 19 Page 326 of 447

ITEM QUANTITY DESCRIPTION

21. 1 set 3½" drillpipe hand slips and elevator

22. 1 3½" drillpipe single joint elevator

23. 1 Circulating head, 4½" IF pin x 2" Weco fig 1502

24. 1 2" Lo-torq valve, 2" Weco fig 1502

25. 1 Standby stab-in safety valve and operating key, 4½" IF conns

26. 1 Standby non return safety valve, 4½" IF conns

27. 1 Drop-in dart sub, 4½" IF conns, with fishable dart and overshot

28. As required Mud chemicals

29. As required L.C.M. material in fine, medium and coarse

30. As required Cement and additives

31. As required Bulk barytes

32. As required Bulk bentonite

33. As required Maximum drillwater

34. 1 ROV package

19.1.3.2 Running Temporary Guide Base

ITEM QUANTITY DESCRIPTION

1. 2 Temporary guide base, c/w accessories, as required

2. 1 Temporary guide base running tool, 4½" IF box

3. As required 5" HWDP, 4½" IF conns

4. As required Sacked barytes

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Semi Submersible Drilling Revision: 0
Operations
18/05/2000
Section 19 Page 327 of 447

19.2 36” HOLE / 30" CONDUCTOR

19.2.1 Drilling 36" Hole With TGB Established
The Drilling Supervisor will ensure that all personnel and equipment for drilling the 36" hole
section are on the rig. All equipment must have been checked and functioned as appropriate
and fit for purpose.

DOM section 4, reference items, 1.0 and 2.0 will be fully complied with, as appropriate, prior to
and during drilling the 36" hole.

Approximate section TD will be advised in the Drilling Programme allowing for a 10 ft sump
beneath the conductor float shoe.

19.2.1.1 Run wellhead as per manufacturer supplied procedures. Function test running tool and set
back in derrick.
19.2.1.2 Make up the spudding assembly as specified in the Drilling Programme.
• A typical spudding assembly would be:
• 26" bit - 4 nozzle type
• 36" hole opener
• Float valve - non ported
• Totco ring
• 3 x 9½" DC
• X/O
• 3 x 8" DC
• X/O
• HWDP - 12 pcs to be added as drilling proceeds.
Note:

i) The bit and hole opener will be painted white to aid ROV observation.
ii) The bit and hole opener nozzle configuration will be programmed for 60% and 40% flow through
the bit and hole opener respectively. Nozzle hydraulics will be verified by the hole opener
manufacturer.
iii) The assembly listed is for a stable homogeneous sub-surface formation without significant
drilling problems. If sub-surface conditions are not homogeneous, assemblies and drilling
parameters will be adjusted accordingly. If necessary a pilot hole will be drilled and opened to in
either one or two stages.

• Run BHA to spider beams.

• Centralise BHA within guidelines. Use soft rope or similar around drill collar and small
shackles over guidelines. (Secure shackle pin with wire).

Note:

A Universal Guide Frame (UGF) will be used in inclement weather conditions.

• RIH and stab into TGB with ROV surveillance. (Recover UGF as appropriate).

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Semi Submersible Drilling Revision: 0
Operations
18/05/2000
Section 19 Page 328 of 447

• Spud the well and drill to section TD. The first 30ft will be drilled using low flowrate and rotary
speed to avoid cratering and twisting the TGB. The spudding assembly will be spaced out to
ensure the bit remains in the drilled hole whilst making the first connection.

• Typical drilling parameters are:

For the first 30 ft below seabed

i) Flowrate - to 300 gpm

ii) WOB - to 5000 lbs
iii) Rotary speed - to 50 rpm

increasing gradually to optimum parameters over the next 60 ft.

i) Flowrate - to 1300 gpm

ii) WOB - to 25000 lbs to maintain a controlled

penetration rate
iii) Rotary speed - to 90 rpm

• The hole will be drilled with seawater. A 50 bbl viscous pill will be displaced to
seabed as required, but at a maximum of every 90 ft.
• Drilling will be with optimum hydraulics to maintain annular velocity and hole
cleaning. A minimum of two pumps will always be used.
• Totco inclination surveys will be taken 50 ft below seabed or when formation firms
up, whichever is sooner, thereafter every 90 ft and at section TD. If the inclination
exceeds 1 degree, the drilled section will be reamed repeatedly until it is less than 1
degree. The frequency of inclination surveys will be increased as required.
• Penetration will be controlled at a maximum of 100 ft/hr to minimise cuttings build up
in the annulus and reduce the possibility of losses.
Note:

The penetration rate is the maximum instantaneous rate and not an average drilling rate including
connections.

• The marks on the guidelines with reference to the fixed reference point, must be
observed constantly to monitor for twisting or sinking of the TGB.

19.2.1.3 At section TD, chase around 100 bbl viscous pill and circulate clean with seawater.
19.2.1.4 Displace open hole (+ 100% excess) to viscous mud.
19.2.1.5 Drop totco survey barrel.
19.2.1.6 POH to just below seabed. Wait one hour to rest the hole. Recover survey barrel.
19.2.1.7 Run back to bottom. Ream tight spots as required. Check for fill. If the fill is excessive, extra
hole will be drilled to accept the fill. In this case, items 19.2.1.7 to 19.2.1.11 (omitting item
1.9) will be repeated until an acceptable sump is obtained.
19.2.1.8 Displace open hole (+ 100% excess) to viscous mud, weighted as required for hole stability.
Drop survey barrel if previous survey unsuccessful.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Semi Submersible Drilling Revision: 0
Operations
18/05/2000
Section 19 Page 329 of 447

19.2.1.9 POH. Do not rotate drillstring. Strap out. Lay out 36" hole opener.

19.2.2 Drilling 36" Hole Without TGB Established

Drilling procedures for drilling 36” hole without TGB established are the same as for drilling
36” with TGB established, see DOM section 19.2, except for prior to spudding carry out items
19.2.2.1 – 19.2.2.3.

After spudding procedures and drilling parameters are the same to T.D.

19.2.2.1 RIH with BHA to just above prognosed seabed depth.

19.2.2.2 Launch ROV. Confirm seabed clear of any obstructions and survey a 250 ft radius around
intended location. A video of the survey will be made and retained for reference (if not
already completed).
19.2.2.3 At slack tide or minimum current, tag seabed. Record the distance between rotary table and
seabed corrected to Mean Sea Level (MSL). Record the following on the Daily Drilling
Report and IADC report.
Water depth at MSL (ft)
Operating draft for the reported rotary table elevation (ft)
Rotary table elevation above seabed (ft).

19.2.3 30” Conductor: Running and Cementing with TGB Established

The Drilling Supervisor will ensure that all personnel and equipment for running and cementing
the conductor are on the rig. All equipment will have been checked and functioned as
appropriate and be fit per purpose.

The conductor weight, grade and connector type will be specified in the Drilling Programme.

The Drilling Supervisor will chair a safety / operations meeting with the OIM, Toolpusher, rig
crew and relevant third party personnel before running and cementing the conductor.

The topics discussed will be:

• Acquaint all parties with the conductor and cementing operations.

• Discuss any problems foreseen and highlight areas of concern and critical
operations.
• Ensure all personnel conduct themselves in a safe and correct manner when
handling tubulars.

There will be a 10 ft sump below the conductor shoe.

19.2.3.1 Prior to running conductor, the following will be or have been prepared:
• Make up the 30" wellhead housing cam actuated running tool.
• Paint the first 20 ft of shoe joint with 2" white bands, numbered and 5ft apart
• Paint the first 15ft of conductor extension below the wellhead housing with 2" white
bands, numbered and 1ft apart

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Semi Submersible Drilling Revision: 0
Operations
18/05/2000
Section 19 Page 330 of 447

• Position PGB on spider beams at the earliest opportunity, with correct orientation
and guide posts numbered as required. Add two slope indicators at 90° to each
other and sonar beacon. The slope indicators will be level. Secure guidelines into
guideposts. Tension guidelines, equally as required to prevent the lines becoming
entangled
• Record the dimensions and serial numbers of the wellhead housing. Confirm against
manufacturers specification
• Weld four small chain links to conductor float shoe joint at 90 degree spacing and 10
ft from float shoe.
19.2.3.2 Rig up to run conductor.
19.2.3.3 Pick up float shoe joint (refer to DOM section 6, item 6.2.1), lower through rotary table and
stab through PGB. Flush seawater through conductor to ensure correct float shoe
operation.
19.2.3.4 Centralise conductor within guidelines. Use soft rope or similar through chain links and small
shackles over guidelines. (Secure shackle pin with wire).
19.2.3.5 Continue to run conductor into wellhead housing assembly. Stab and make up conductor
connectors to manufacturer specification
Note:
The Drilling Supervisor will verify the conductor joints not run correspond with the conductor running
programme.
19.2.3.6 Make up wellhead housing assembly to conductor string.
19.2.3.7 Pick up cam actuated running tool assembly from derrick. Make up to wellhead housing.
19.2.3.8 Run the conductor on HWDP and land the wellhead housing in PGB. Ensure correct
alignment. Lock wellhead housing into PGB as required.
19.2.3.9 Retract spider beams. RIH with conductor on HWDP until running tool is just below the
splash zone. Bumper subs may be used in adverse weather conditions.
19.2.3.10 Break circulation with seawater and displace all air from the conductor via open valves
installed at the top of the running tool. When all air is vented from conductor, pick up just
clear of splash zone and close valves. Continue to circulate to ensure float shoe integrity.
19.2.3.11 Continue to RIH with HWDP running string until conductor shoe is just above TGB. Fill
conductor with seawater as each joint is run below sea level. Space running string to avoid
making a connection at seabed.
19.2.3.12 Stab conductor shoe into TGB and previously drilled hole with ROV surveillance.
19.2.3.13 Continue to RIH with HWDP running string. When last stand is made up, activate motion
compensator to support complete hook load. Record conductor string up and down weights.
Position base of PGB ± 6 ft above seabed.

Ensure that there is sufficient overstand above the rotary table to compensate for the heave of the rig
during cementing.

Note:

The PGB will not be landed in the TGB (to minimise abandonment difficulties if the PGB and TGB are stuck
together, in the event that the 30” and 20” are cemented together).

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Semi Submersible Drilling Revision: 0
Operations
18/05/2000
Section 19 Page 331 of 447

19.2.3.14 Observe the PGB slope indicators. Maximum acceptable angle is 1 degree. If inclination is
out of tolerance the rig position will be adjusted to achieve desired inclination.
Note:
Should the desired inclination not be achieved, the Drilling Supervisor will be advised.

19.2.3.15 Rig up for cementation. It will be manifolded to facilitate immediate circulation using either
the mud pumps or cement unit. Pressure test surface cement lines to 1500 psi. Break
circulation slowly.
19.2.3.16 Circulate conductor contents plus 25% with seawater.
Note:
Constant observation of the pump pressure will be maintained at all times to detect possible plugging of the
annulus.

19.2.3.17 Cement the conductor to seabed thus:

Note:
Cement formulation will be sent to the rig 48 hours before the conductor cementation, see DOM section 9.
item 19.2.3.16, Note, will apply
• Mix and pump lead slurry. Slurry volume will be 200% excess over theoretical cased
open hole annular volume. The first 20 bbl of mix water will include a fluorescent dye
to aid observation.
• Mix and pump tail slurry to give 100 ft open hole coverage from TD up. Excess will
be as for lead slurry.
19.2.3.18 Displace the cement with seawater to within 60ft of the conductor float shoe. The cement
unit will be used for displacement. If buoyancy is a consideration, mud will be used for
displacement. The mud weight will be advised in the Drilling Programme. Maintain
conductor string weight on the compensator. Observe the differential pumping pressure at
the end of displacement. ROV will observe seabed for cement returns and retrieve a
sample if current permits. If not possible, observe degree of cementation around conductor
when conditions allow.
19.2.3.19 Release any back pressure and check float equipment. If back-flow is evident, the bled
back volume will be displaced back into the conductor. The static differential pressure will
be held on the conductor until surface samples set.
19.2.3.20 Hold the conductor in place until surface cement samples set. The ROV will monitor the
slope indicators at all times to ensure PGB is vertical.
19.2.3.21 Slack off compensated conductor weight and observe PGB for movement. The slope
indicators must remain in tolerance.
19.2.3.22 Support weight of HWDP running string, running tool and 10,000 lbs overpull.
19.2.3.23 Release cam actuated running tool with right hand rotation or wellhead manufactures
procedures. Observe operation with ROV. Check inclination of slope indicators on PGB are
in tolerance.
19.2.3.24 POH with HWDP running string. Position drillpipe cement stinger 3 ft inside wellhead
housing. Flush wellhead housing and PGB with seawater. Complete POH. Strap out.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Semi Submersible Drilling Revision: 0
Operations
18/05/2000
Section 19 Page 332 of 447

19.2.3.25 Record the distance between the rotary table and the top of the wellhead housing corrected
to Mean Sea Level (MSL). This depth will be the reference datum point for future sub-sea
operations.
Record the following on the Drilling Report and IADC report:
• Water depth at MSL (ft)
• Operating draft for the reported rotary table elevation (ft)
• Rotary table elevation above datum (ft).
•
19.2.3.26 Complete the conductor Interval Cementation Report. Send these to the Drilling
Superintendent.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Semi Submersible Drilling Revision: 0
Operations
18/05/2000
Section 19 Page 333 of 447

19.2.4 30” Conductor: Running and Cementing without TGB Established

Procedure for 30” conductor running and cementing without TGB established is the same as
for running 30” conductor and cementing with TGB established, refer to DOM section 19 2.3.

19.2.5 Equipment Check List

The Drilling Programme will specify the:

• Drillpipe weight and grade

• Conductor weight, grade and connector type
• Pressure rating of well control equipment
• Pressure rating of wellhead housing.

19.2.5.1 Drilling 36" Hole

If sub-surface conditions are not homogeneous, assemblies will be adjusted accordingly. If
necessary a pilot hole will be drilled and opened to 36" in either one or two stages. The
following equipment list covers this contingency.

ITEM QUANTITY DESCRIPTION

1. 2 36" hole opener c/w nozzles and applicable

formation cutters, 7 5/8" Reg box x pin

2. 2 26" hole opener c/w nozzles and applicable

formation cutters, 7 5/8" Reg box x pin

3. 2 26" rock bit centre jet type, c/w nozzles, bit

breaker and bit gauge ring, 7 5/8" Reg pin

4. 2 17½" rock bit centre jet type, c/w nozzles, bit

breaker and bit gauge ring, 7 5/8" Reg pin

5. 1 36" integral blade string stabiliser, 7 5/8" Reg

conns

6. 1 26" integral blade string stabiliser, 7 5/8" Reg

conns

7. 1 17½" integral blade string stabiliser, 7 5/8" Reg

conns

8. 2 Totco ring for 7 5/8" Reg conns

9. 2 Float valve, non-ported, for 7 5/8" Reg conns

10. 2 Float sub, 7 5/8" Reg box x box

11. 1 set Teledrift, bored for float valve and associated

survey equipment, 7 5/8" Reg conns

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Semi Submersible Drilling Revision: 0
Operations
18/05/2000
Section 19 Page 334 of 447

ITEM QUANTITY DESCRIPTION

12. 3 9½" steel drill collar, 7 5/8" Reg conns

13. 3 8" steel drill collar, 6 5/8" Reg conns

14. 2 X-over sub, 7" Reg pin x 6 5/8" Reg box

15. 2 X-over sub, 6 5/8" Reg pin x 4½" IF box

16. 12 5" HWDP, 4½" conns.

17. As required 5" drillpipe, 4½" IF conns

18. 3 9½" drill collar lifting subs, for use with 5" drillpipe
elevator, 7 5/8" Reg conns

19. 3 8" drill collar lifting subs, for use with 5" drillpipe
elevators, 6 5/8" Reg conns

20. 2 sets 9½" and 8" drill collar hand slips and elevators

21. 1 Drill collar safety clamp and spanner

22. 2 sets 5" drillpipe hand slips and elevator

23. As required Drill collar and pipe dope

24. 1 Totco, 0 to 8° surveying equipment c/w barrel

sinker bars and overshot

25. As required Fishing equipment to catch all downhole

equipment.

26. 600 ft 3½" drillpipe cement string, 3½" IF conns.

27. 1 X-over, 3½" IF pin x 4½" IF box

28. 1 set 3½" drillpipe hand slips and elevator

29. 1 3½" drillpipe single joint elevator

30. 1 Circulating head, 4½" IF pin x 2" Weco fig 1502

31. 1 2" Lo-torq valve, 2" Weco Fig 1502 conns

32. 1 Standby stab-in safety valve and operating key,

4½" IF conns.

33. 1 Standby non return safety valve, 4½" IF conns

34. As required Mud chemicals

35. As required Cement and additives

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Semi Submersible Drilling Revision: 0
Operations
18/05/2000
Section 19 Page 335 of 447

ITEM QUANTITY DESCRIPTION

36. As required Bulk barytes

37. As required Bulk bentonite

38. As required Maximum drillwater

39 1 ROV package

When 6 5/8" drillpipe is to be used the following will be required. It does not
include modifications to a top drive. This is rig specific.

40 As 6 5/8" HWDP, 6 5/8" FH conns.

require
d

41 As required 6 5/8" drillpipe, 6 5/8" FH conns

42 2 6 5/8" drillpipe air operated elevator

43 1 6 5/8" drillpipe manual elevator

44 2 6 5/8" drillpipe hand slips

45 1 6 5/8" single joint elevator.

46 1 each 6 5/8" drillpipe pup joint, 5 ft and 10 ft, 6 5/8" FH

conns.

47 2 Standby stab-in safety valve and operating key, 6

5/8" FH conns

48 1 Standby non-return safety valve, 6 5/8" FH conns

49 2 X-over, 6 5/8" Reg pin x 6 5/8" FH box

50 2 X-over 6 5/8" FH pin x 4½" IF box

51 2 Lift type nipples, 6 5/8" FH pin

52 1 set Variable bore rams to cover 6 5/8" OD

19.2.5.2 Conductor: Running and Cementing
ITEM QUANTITY DESCRIPTION

1. 2 30" conductor float shoe joint.

2. 2 30" conductor joint (heavy wall) with wellhead

housing.

3. As required 30" conductor.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Semi Submersible Drilling Revision: 0
Operations
18/05/2000
Section 19 Page 336 of 447

ITEM QUANTITY DESCRIPTION

4. As required Spare "O" ring for conductor connector.

5. 2 30" cam actuated wellhead housing running tool or

manufacturer supplied alternative, 4½" IF box .

6. 2 Permanent guide base, c/w accessories, as

required.

7. 2 Slope indicator.

8. 1 30" power tong.

9. 1 Power pack.

10. 1 set 30" manual tongs

11. 1 30" side door elevator

12. 1 set 30" split rotary bushing.

13. 1 30" temporary rotary bowl

14. 1 30" conductor hand slips

15. 1 30" safety clamp and spanner.

16. 1 30" conductor spear, 6 5/8" Reg box

17. As required Cement and additives.

18. As required 4" x 4" dunnage

19. 1 Circulating head, 4½" IF pin x 2" Weco fig. 1502.

20. 1 2" Lo-torq valve, 2" Weco fig. 1502.

21. 2 Bumper sub.

22. 1 "Hilti" gun for RL4 connectors, if required, c/w

spare heads and cartridges.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Semi Submersible Drilling Revision: 0
Operations
18/05/2000
Section 19 Page 337 of 447

19.3 26” HOLE / 20" SURFACE CASING

19.3.1 Drilling 26" Hole With Marine Riser
Under normal circumstances the surface hole will be drilled without a riser.

However, when there is a requirement to drill the surface hole with a fully mudded system for
borehole stability, a hydraulic latch pin connector will be considered, on the riser.

The conductor will be set at a depth to ensure that unconsolidated formations are cased off to
allow full returns of the mud required to drill the section.

If there is a possibility of shallow gas, refer to the Well Control Manual section 11, Shallow Gas
Procedures.

The Drilling Supervisor will ensure that all personnel and equipment for drilling the pilot and
26" hole sections are on board the rig. All equipment will have been checked and functioned,
as appropriate, and fit for purpose.

DOM section 4, reference items 1.0 and 2.0 will be fully complied with, as appropriate, prior to
and during drilling the pilot and 26" hole sections.

Approximate section TD will be advised in the Drilling Programme. The exact drilled depth will
be adjusted to place the 18¾" wellhead at datum reference point allowing for a 10 ft sump
beneath the float shoe.

19.3.1.1 Make up 18¾" wellhead running tool to S135 drillpipe and a single of 5" drillpipe below. The
single of 5" drillpipe will be the cement stinger. Set assembly in derrick.
19.3.1.2 Make up spare 18¾" wellhead running tool to S135 drillpipe pup joint. Lay out and make up
to 18¾" wellhead on deck. Make up the “clean out” assembly as specified in the Drilling
Programme.
A typical “clean out” assembly would be:

• 26" bit - 4 nozzle type

• Float sub with non ported float valve
• Totco ring
• 3 x 9½" DC
• X/O
• 3 x 8" DC
• X/O
• HWDP (12 pcs maximum)

Note:

The bit and float sub will be painted white to aid ROV observation.

19.3.1.3 Run BHA to spider beams.

19.3.1.4 Centralise BHA within guidelines. Use soft rope or similar around drill collar and small
shackles over guidelines (secure shackle pin with wire).

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Semi Submersible Drilling Revision: 0
Operations
18/05/2000
Section 19 Page 338 of 447

Note:

A Universal Guide Frame (UGF) will be used in inclement weather conditions.

19.3.1.5 RIH and stab into wellhead housing with ROV surveillance. (Recover UGF as appropriate).
19.3.1.6 Continue RIH to calculated TOC. Wash down last 30 ft with seawater.
19.3.1.7 Clean out cement in conductor, drill out conductor float shoe and clean out pocket to
previous section TD with seawater. Chase around 30 bbl viscous pill every 30 ft drilled.
Typical parameters for conductor clean out are:

i) Flowrate - to 1200 gpm

ii) WOB - to 15000 lbs
iii) Rotary speed - 50-70 rpm

19.3.1.8 At section TD chase around a 50 bbl viscous pill and circulate clean with seawater.
19.3.1.9 POH.
19.3.1.10 Move rig off location to ensure diverter nippling up / running operations are not directly over
the wellhead.
19.3.1.11 Set hydraulic latch pin connector on spider beams. Make up dump valve spool to same.
Pick up marine riser and flex joint. Make up to dump valve spool. Nipple up hydraulic
control hoses to connector and dump valve. Function test same. Record time taken and
fluid used for each function. Install guide frame. Secure to guidelines.
19.3.1.12 Run pin connector and dump valve spool with control hose on marine riser.
19.3.1.13 Make up telescopic joint. Install riser tensioning system.
19.3.1.14 Reposition rig over location.
19.3.1.15 Land and latch connector with ROV surveillance. Test pull connector with 40000 lbs over
and above pin connector assembly and marine riser weight.
19.3.1.16 Fill riser with seawater. Open dump valve. Observe loss in riser. Close dump valve. Refill
riser with seawater. Ensure level remains constant. Install diverter system / upper flex joint.
19.3.1.17 Make up pilot assembly as specified in the Drilling Programme.
A typical pilot assembly would be:

• Bit - see, Note i) below

• Float valve - non ported
• Totco ring
• 1 x 9½" SDC
• 1 x 9½" DC
• Stabiliser - see, Note i) below
• 1 x 9½" DC
• Stabiliser - see, Note i) below
• 2 x 9½" DC
• X/O

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Semi Submersible Drilling Revision: 0
Operations
18/05/2000
Section 19 Page 339 of 447

• 2 x 8" DC
• JAR
• 2 x 8" DC
• X/O
• HWDP - 12 pcs to be added as drilling proceeds

Note:

• The diameter of the pilot bit and stabilisers will depend on the reduced pin connector
bore but normally would be 12 ¼”.
• A drilling shock sub will be considered in the above BHA if there is a possibility of
hard formations.
19.3.1.18 RIH with BHA. Install diverter insert packer.
19.3.1.19 Break circulation with seawater and flush through the diverter system and mud return line.
Function test each element and valve of the diverter system from local and remote
operating stations. Record time taken and fluid used for each function. The diverter
overboard lines will open before the diverter insert packer closes.
19.3.1.20 Continue RIH to previous section TD.
19.3.1.21 Drill pilot hole to section TD.
Typical drilling parameters are:

i) Flowrate - to 1200 gpm

ii) WOB - to 25000 lbs to maintain controlled penetration rate.
iii) Rotary speed - to 120 rpm

• The hole will be drilled with the mud specification detailed in the Drilling Programme.
A 50 bbl viscous pill will be circulated around after each 200 ft drilled.
• Drilling will be with optimum hydraulics to maintain annular velocity and hole
cleaning. A minimum of two pumps will always be used.
• Wiper trips will be considered as hole conditions dictate subject to the total length of
the drilled section.
If a wiper trip is required:

• and a top drive is incorporated, pump out over the drilled section.
• if a top drive not available circulate around a 50-100 bbl viscous pill, pull back over
the drilled section and repeat the pill circulation.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Semi Submersible Drilling Revision: 0
Operations
18/05/2000
Section 19 Page 340 of 447

• Totco surveys will be taken every 90 ft and at section TD. If the inclination exceeds
3 degrees, the subsequent drilled sections will be reamed to maintain or reduce the
inclination. The frequency of inclination surveys will be increased / decreased as
required. The survey interval will not exceed 300 ft.
• penetration will be controlled at 100 ft / hour to control mud weight and reduce the
possibility of losses.
Note:

The penetration rate is the maximum instantaneous rate and not an average drilling rate including
connections.

19.3.1.22 At section TD, circulate around 50 bbl viscous pill and circulate clean.
19.3.1.23 Drop Totco survey barrel.
19.3.1.24 POH to wellhead housing.
19.3.1.25 Circulate riser to seawater. Open dump spool valve and drop riser contents to sea level (to
create conditions with riser removed).
19.3.1.26 Observe well for one hour. Recover survey barrel.
19.3.1.27 If the well is stable, and a logging programme is required, circulate the riser to mud and
POH. Lay out drillpipe as required for opening the hole.
19.3.1.28 Run wireline logging programme, as required.
19.3.1.29 Rig up riser handling equipment, recover diverter system and collapse telescope joint.
Release pin connector with ROV surveillance.
19.3.1.30 Recover riser, flex joint, dump valve spool and pin connector.
19.3.1.31 Make up hole opening assembly as specified in the Drilling Programme. Underreamers will
not be used.
A typical hole opening assembly would be:

• Bit - same size as pilot hole, normally 12 ¼”

• 26" hole opener
• Float valve - non ported
• Teledrift - bored for float valve
• Totco ring
• 1 x 9½" DC
• 26" stabiliser
• 3 x 9½" DC
• X/O
• 2 x 8" DC
• JAR
• 2 x 8" DC
• X/O
• HWDP - 12 pcs to be added as hole opening proceeds

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Semi Submersible Drilling Revision: 0
Operations
18/05/2000
Section 19 Page 341 of 447

Note:

i) If hard formations were encountered in the pilot hole section a drilling shock sub will be
incorporated in the above BHA.

ii) The bit will be painted white.

iii) The bit and hole opener nozzle configuration will be programmed for 30% and 70% flow
through the bit and hole opener respectively. Nozzle hydraulics will be verified by the hole
opener manufacturer.

19.3.1.32 Run BHA to spider beams.

19.3.1.33 Centralise BHA within guidelines. Use soft rope or similar around drill collar and small
shackles over guidelines. (Secure shackle pin with wire).
Note:

A Universal Guide Frame (UGF) will be used in inclement weather conditions.

19.3.1.34 RIH and stab into wellhead housing with ROV surveillance. (Recover UGF as required).
19.3.1.35 Continue RIH to bottom of 36" rat hole. Wash down last 30 ft with seawater.
19.3.1.36 Open pilot hole to 26" to section TD.

Typical hole opening parameters are:

i) Flowrate - to 1200 gpm

ii) WOB - to 25000 lbs to maintain controlled penetration rate.
iii) rotary speed - to 100 rpm.

The rotary speed will be maintained at 50-70 rpm until the 26" stabilisers are in open hole.

• The hole will be opened with seawater. A 50 bbl viscous pill will be displaced to
seabed as required, but at a maximum of every 90 ft.
• Hole opening will be with optimum hydraulics to maintain annular velocity and hole
cleaning. A minimum of two pumps will always be used.
• Wiper trips will be dictated by the pilot hole drilling conditions.
If a wiper trip is necessary:

• and a top drive incorporated, pump out / backream over the drilled section.
• If a top drive is not available, circulate around a 100 bbl viscous pill, pull back over
the drilled section and repeat the pill circulation.
• Totco shots will be taken initially every 90 ft and at section TD. If the hole inclination
follows the pilot hole section, survey intervals will be increased, as required. The
survey interval will not exceed 300 ft.
• Penetration will be controlled at 100 ft / hour to minimise mud weight and reduce the
possibility of losses.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Semi Submersible Drilling Revision: 0
Operations
18/05/2000
Section 19 Page 342 of 447

Note:

The penetration rate is the maximum instantaneous rate and not an average drilling rate including
connections.

19.3.1.37 At section TD, chase around 100 bbl viscous pill and circulate clean with seawater.
19.3.1.38 Displace open hole (+ 100% excess) to viscous mud. Drop totco survey barrel if required.
19.3.1.39 POH to 30" conductor shoe. Wait one hour to rest the hole. Recover survey barrel as
appropriate.
19.3.1.40 Run back to bottom. Ream tight spots as required. Check for fill. If the fill is excessive, extra
hole will be drilled to accept the fill. In this case items 19.3.1.37 to 19.3.1.40 will be
repeated until an acceptable sump is obtained.
19.3.1.41 Displace open hole (+ 100% excess) to viscous mud, weighted as required for hole stability.
Drop survey barrel if previous survey unsuccessful.
19.3.1.42 POH. Strap out
19.3.2 Drilling 26" Hole without Marine Riser
If there is a possibility of shallow gas, refer to the Well Control Manual
section 11, Shallow Gas.

The Drilling Supervisor will ensure that all personnel and equipment for
drilling the 26" hole section are on board the rig. All equipment will have
been checked and functioned as appropriate and fit for purpose.

DOM section 4, items 1.0 and 2.0 will be fully complied with, as
appropriate, prior to and during drilling the 26" hole section.

Approximate section TD will be advised in the Drilling Programme. The

exact drilled depth will be adjusted to place the 18¾" wellhead at datum
reference point allowing for a 10 ft sump beneath the float shoe.

19.3.2.1 Make up 18¾" wellhead running tool to 5” drillpipe and a single of 5"
drillpipe below. The single of 5" drillpipe will be the cement stinger.
Set assembly in derrick.
19.3.2.2 Make up spare 18 ¾” wellhead running tool to 5” drillpipe pup joint.
Layout and make up to 18 ¾” wellhead on deck.
19.3.2.3 Make up the 26" assembly as specified in the Drilling Programme.

A typical 26" assembly would be:

• 26" bit - 4 nozzle type

• Float valve - non ported
• Totco ring
• 1 x 9½" SDC
• 1 x 9½" DC
• 26" stabiliser
• 1 x 9½" DC

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Semi Submersible Drilling Revision: 0
Operations
18/05/2000
Section 19 Page 343 of 447

• 26" stabiliser
• 2 x 9½" DC
• X/O
• 2 x 8" DC
• JAR
• 2 x 8" DC
• X/O
• HWDP - 12 pcs to be added as drilling
proceeds

Note:

i) A drilling shock sub will be considered in the above BHA if there is a

possibility of hard formations.

ii) The bit will be painted white to aid ROV observation.

iii) The assembly listed is for a stable homogeneous formation without

significant drilling problems. If formation conditions are not
homogeneous, assemblies and drilling parameters will be adjusted
accordingly. A pilot hole will be drilled and opened to 26" in either one or
two stages as required.

19.3.2.4 Run BHA to spider beams.

19.3.2.5 Centralise BHA within guidelines. Use soft rope or similar around drill
collar and small shackles over guidelines. (Secure shackle pin with
wire).
Note:

A Universal Guide Frame (UGF) will be used in inclement weather conditions.

19.3.2.6 RIH and stab into wellhead housing with ROV surveillance ( recover
UGF as required).
19.3.2.7 Continue to 30” shoe. Wash down last 30 ft with seawater.
19.3.2.8 Clean out cement in conductor, drill float shoe and clean out pocket to
previous section TD with seawater. Use viscous pills to clean hole.
Typical parameters for conductor clean out and until stabilisers are in open hole
are:

i) Flowrate - to 1200 gpm

ii) WOB - to 15000 lbs
iii) Rotary speed - 50-70 rpm

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Semi Submersible Drilling Revision: 0
Operations
18/05/2000
Section 19 Page 344 of 447

19.3.2.9 Drill 26" hole to section TD.

Typical drilling parameters are:

i) flowrate - to 1200 gpm

ii) WOB - to 25000 lbs to maintain controlled
penetration rate.
iii) rotary speed - to 120 rpm

• The hole will be drilled with seawater. A 50 bbl viscous pill will be
displaced to seabed as required, but at a maximum of every 90 ft

• Drilling will be with optimum hydraulics to maintain annular

velocity and hole cleaning. A minimum of two pumps will always
be used

• Wiper trips will be considered as hole conditions dictate subject

to the total length of the drilled section.

If a wiper trip is required (refer to 19.3.1.37 in previous section).

19.3.2.10 At section TD, chase around 100 bbl viscous pill and circulate clean
with seawater.
19.3.2.11 Displace open hole (+ 100% excess) to viscous mud.
19.3.2.12 Drop totco survey barrel.
19.3.2.13 POH to 30" conductor shoe. Wait one hour to rest the hole. Recover
survey barrel.
19.3.2.14 Run back to bottom. Ream tight spots as required. Check for fill. If
the fill is excessive, extra hole will be drilled to accept the fill. In this
case items 2.6 - 2.10 will be repeated until an acceptable sump is
obtained.
19.3.2.15 Displace open hole (+ 100% excess) to viscous mud, weighted as
required for hole stability. Drop survey barrel if previous survey
unsuccessful.
19.3.2.16 POH. Strap out.

19.3.3 20” Surface Casing: Running and Cementing

The Drilling Supervisor will ensure that all personnel and equipment for
running and cementing the casing are on the rig. All equipment will have
been checked and functioned as appropriate and fit for purpose.

Centraliser spacing will be specified in the drilling programme.

Additional requirements for cementing can be found in DOM section 9.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Semi Submersible Drilling Revision: 0
Operations
18/05/2000
Section 19 Page 345 of 447

The casing weight, grade and connector type will be specified in the
Drilling Programme.

The Drilling Supervisor will chair a safety / operations meeting with the
OIM, Toolpusher, rig crew and relevant third party personnel before
running and cementing the casing. The topics will be:

• To acquaint all parties with the casing and cementing

operations.
• To discuss any problems foreseen and highlight areas of
concern and critical operations.
• To ensure all personnel conduct themselves in a safe and
correct manner when handling tubulars.
There will be a 10 ft sump below the float shoe.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Semi Submersible Drilling Revision: 0
Operations
18/05/2000
Section 19 Page 346 of 447

19.3.3.1 Prior to running casing, the following will be or have been prepared:
• Make up the 18¾" wellhead running tool to 5” drillpipe above
and a single of 5" drillpipe below.
• Make up spare 18¾" wellhead running tool with 5” drillpipe
pup joint handling sub to 18¾" wellhead assembly.
• Paint the first 20 ft of shoe joint with 2" white bands,
numbered and 5ft apart.
• Paint the first 15 ft of casing extension below the wellhead
with 2" white bands, numbered and 1 ft apart.
• Record the dimensions and serial numbers of the wellhead.
Confirm against manufacturer’s specification.
19.3.3.2 Rig up to run casing.
19.3.3.3 Pick up float shoe joint. (refer to section 6, item 6.2.1). Flush seawater
through casing to ensure correct float shoe operation.
19.3.3.4 Centralise casing within guidelines 10 ft from float shoe. Use soft rope
or similar around casing and small shackles over guidelines. (Secure
shackle pin with wire).
19.3.3.5 Run casing to just above wellhead housing. The programme will
clearly state the position of centralisers and additional casing
components. Stab and make up casing connectors to manufacturer’s
specification. Fill casing with seawater as each joint is run below sea
level.
19.3.3.6 Stab 20” casing shoe into wellhead housing with ROV surveillance.
19.3.3.7 Continue to run casing to wellhead assembly.
• The maximum casing running speed will be regulated by the
pressure surge calculations, calculated by the mud loggers on
board.
• Care will be taken passing intervals that proved sensitive
during drilling. If circulation is necessary, flowrate will be
increased slowly to minimise pressure surges.
Note:

The Drilling Supervisor will verify the casing not run corresponds with the
casing running programme.

19.3.3.8 Make up 18 ¾” wellhead assembly to casing string. Lay out spare

running tool.
19.3.3.9 Pick up 18 ¾” running tool assembly from derrick. Make up to
wellhead.
19.3.3.10 Continue to run casing with HWDP running string. item 19.3.3.7 will
apply. Fill each stand with seawater. Bumper subs may be used in
adverse weather conditions.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Semi Submersible Drilling Revision: 0
Operations
18/05/2000
Section 19 Page 347 of 447

19.3.3.11 Pick up last stand of HWDP running string. Activate motion

compensator. Set to neutral stringweight. Record casing string up
and down weights. Land the 18 ¾” wellhead in the wellhead housing.
Test pull 30000 lbs over drag up weight to confirm the wellhead is
fully seated and latched in the wellhead housing. Ensure there is
sufficient overstand above the rotary table to compensate for the
heave of the rig during cementing.
Note:

Observe landing of the 18 ¾” wellhead with the ROV. Monitor PGB slope
indicators. If there is any movement of the wellhead after landing, tension will
be maintained until the cement hardens.

19.3.3.12 Rig up for cementation. It will be manifolded to facilitate immediate

circulation using either the mud pumps or cement unit. Pressure test
surface cement lines to 2000 psi. Break circulation slowly.
19.3.3.13 Circulate casing contents plus 25% with seawater (or annular
volume, whichever is greater).
Note:

Constant observation of the pump pressure will be maintained at all times to

detect possible plugging of the annulus.

19.3.3.14 Cement the casing to seabed.

Note:

i) The cement formulation will be sent to the rig 48 hours before the casing
cementation.

ii) item 19.3 3.13, Note, will apply.

• Mix and pump lead slurry. Slurry volume will be 100% excess
over theoretical cased open hole volume or 20% over 4-arm
caliper integrated annular volume. The first 20 bbl of mix
water will include a fluorescent dye to aid ROV observation.
• Mix and pump tail slurry to give 300 ft open hole coverage.
Excess will be as for lead slurry.
19.3.3.15 Displace the cement with seawater to within 60 ft of the casing float
shoe. The cement unit will be used for displacement. Maintain
running string weight on the compensator. Observe the differential
pumping pressure at the end of displacement.
ROV will observe seabed for cement returns and retrieve a sample if
current permits. If not possible, observe degree of cementation
around casing / conductor when conditions allow.

19.3.3.16 Release any backpressure and check float equipment. If backflow is

evident, the bled volume will be displaced into the casing. The static

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Semi Submersible Drilling Revision: 0
Operations
18/05/2000
Section 19 Page 348 of 447

differential pressure will be held on the casing until the cement has
set sufficiently to prevent back-flow or until the surface samples set.
19.3.3.17 Support weight of HWDP running string, running tool and 10000 lbs
overpull.
19.3.3.18 Release running tool with right hand rotation. Observe operation with
ROV. Check inclination of slope indicators on PGB are in tolerance.
19.3.3.19 POH with HWDP running string. Position drillpipe cement stringer 3 ft
inside wellhead. Flush wellhead and seal face with seawater.
Complete POH. Strap out to check datum point reference depth.
Note:

ROV will observe wellhead seal face before returning to surface if visibility
allows.

19.3.3.20 Move rig off location - to ensure BOP nippling operations are not
directly over the wellhead.
19.3.3.21 Set 18 ¾” BOP stack on spider beams. Make-up Lower Marine Riser
Package (LMRP), as appropriate. Function test all rams, annulars
and valves on both pods from local and remote operating stations.
Record time taken and fluid used for each function. Rams and
annulars must not be closed fully. Pressure test kill and choke stab
connectors. Secure guidelines in BOP guide funnels. Pick up marine
riser and flex joint. Make up to LMRP. Add two slope indicators at 90°
to each other and sonar beacon
19.3.3.22 Run BOP package with control hose on marine riser, pressure testing
kill and choke lines every three joints.
19.3.3.23 Make up telescopic joint, install riser tensioning system and kill and
choke lines.
19.3.3.24 Reposition rig over location.
19.3.3.25 Land and latch connector with ROV surveillance. Monitor and record
PGB slope indicators. Test pull connector with 40000 lbs over and
above BOP package and riser weight.
19.3.3.26 Pressure test connector to 500 psi / 15 mins against shear rams.
19.3.3.27 Install diverter system / upper flex joint. Confirm locked with 30,000
lbs overpull.
19.3.3.28 Run BOP stack test tool directly below a painted single of drillpipe.
Pipe ram impressions on this single will determine the space out for
the emergency hang-off tool. A drawing referencing space out from
rotary table to each annular, pipe and shear ram corrected to MSL,
will be formulated. Bore / flex joint protectors and BOP test plug
space outs will be included, as required.
19.3.3.29 Pressure test wellhead connector, pipe / shear rams, annulars,
failsafe valves and kill and choke lines on one pod. Operate each
BOP function with the opposite pod from local and remote operating

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Semi Submersible Drilling Revision: 0
Operations
18/05/2000
Section 19 Page 349 of 447

stations. Record time taken and fluid used for each function. The
surface equipment will be pressure tested in conjunction with the
BOP pressure test. This will include standpipe and choke manifolds,
kelly / top drive, rotary hose and automatic, manual and stand-by
stab-in safety valves.
Note:

Test pressures will be specified in the Drilling Programme.

19.3.3.30 Run and set wellhead nominal bore protector and riser flex joint wear
bushing, as appropriate.
19.3.3.31 Complete the casing Interval Cementation Report. Fax these details
to the Drilling Superintendent.

19.3.4 Equipment Check List

The Drilling Programme will specify the:

i) Drillpipe weight and grade

ii) Surface casing weight, grade and connector type

iii) Pressure rating of the well control equipment.

iv) Centraliser frequency and type.

19.3.4.1 Drilling 26" Hole

If sub-surface conditions are not homogeneous, assemblies will be
adjusted accordingly. If necessary a pilot hole will be drilled and
opened to 26" in either one or two stages. The following equipment
list covers this contingency.

ITEM QUANTITY DESCRIPTION

1 2 26" hole opener, c/w nozzles and applicable

formation cutters, 7 5/8" Reg box x pin

ITEM QUANTITY DESCRIPTION

2 2 26" rock bit, centre jet type, c/w nozzles, bit breaker
and bit gauge ring, 7 5/8" Reg pin

3 2 17½" hole opener, c/w nozzles and applicable

formation cutters, 7 5/8" Reg box x pin

4 2 17½" rock bit, centre jet type, c/w nozzles bit

breaker and bit gauge ring, 7 5/8" Reg pin

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Semi Submersible Drilling Revision: 0
Operations
18/05/2000
Section 19 Page 350 of 447

5 2 12¼" rock bit, c/w nozzles, bit breaker and bit gauge
ring, 6 5/8" Reg pin

6 2 26" integral blade string stabiliser, 7 5/8" Reg conns

7 2 17½" string integral blade stabiliser, 7 5/8" Reg

conns

8 2 Totco ring for 7 5/8" Reg conns

9 2 Totco ring for 6 5/8" Reg conns

10 2 12¼" integral blade string stabiliser, 6 5/8" Reg

conns

11 2 Float valve, non ported, for 7 5/8" Reg conns

12 2 Float valve, non ported, for 6 5/8" Reg conns

13 2 Float sub, 7 5/8" Reg box x box

14 2 Float sub, 6 5/8" Reg box x box

15 4 9½" steel drill collar, 7 5/8" Reg conns,

16 2 9½" short steel drill collar, 7 5/8" Reg conns

17 4 8" steel drill collar, 6 5/8" Reg conns,

18 2 8" short steel drill collar, 6 5/8" Reg conns

19 2 8" hydraulic drilling jar c/w lifting sub and safety

sleeve, 6 5/8" Reg conns

20 2 9½" shock sub, 7 5/8" Reg conns

21 2 Junk sub, 7 5/8" Reg conns

22 2 Junk sub, 6 5/8" Reg conns

23 2 X-over sub, 7 5/8" Reg pin x 6 5/8" Reg box

24 2 X-over sub, 6 5/8" Reg pin x 4½" IF box

25 12 5" HWDP, 4½" IF conns,

26 As required 5" drillpipe, 4½" IF conns

27 3 9½" drill collar lifting sub, for use with 5" drillpipe
elevator, 7 5/8" Reg pin

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Semi Submersible Drilling Revision: 0
Operations
18/05/2000
Section 19 Page 351 of 447

28 3 8" drill collar lifting sub, for use with 5" drillpipe
elevator, 6 5/8" Reg conns

29 2 sets 9½" and 8" drill collar hand slips and elevator

30 1 Drill collar safety clamp and spanner

31 2 set 5" drillpipe hand slips and elevator

32 As required Drill collar and pipe dope

33 1 Totco, 0 to 8° surveying equipment c/w barrel, sinker

bars and overshot

34 As required Fishing equipment to catch all downhole equipment

35 600 ft 3½" drillpipe cement string, 3½" IF conns

36 1 X-over, 3½" IF pin x 4½" IF box

37 1 set 3½" drillpipe hand slips and elevator

38 1 3½" drillpipe single joint elevator

39 1 Circulating head, 4½" IF pin x 2" Weco fig. 1502

40 1 2" Lo-torq valve, 2" Weco fig. 1502

41 1 Standby stab-in safety valve and operating key, 4½"

IF conns

42 1 Standby non return safety vale, 4½" IF conns

43 As required Mud chemicals

44 As required L.C.M. material in fine, medium and coarse

45 As required Cement and additives

ITEM QUANTITY DESCRIPTION

48 As required Bulk barytes

49 As required Bulk bentonite

50 As required Maximum drillwater

51 As required Shale shaker screens

52 As required Mud cleaner screens

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Semi Submersible Drilling Revision: 0
Operations
18/05/2000
Section 19 Page 352 of 447

53 1 Hydraulic latch pin connector

54 1 Mini hydraulic control hose reel

55 1 Dump valve spool

56 1 Marine riser and associated equipment

19.3.4.2 Surface Casing: Running and Cementing

ITEM QUANTITY DESCRIPTION

1 2 20" casing float shoe joint

2 As required 20" casing

3 As required Spare 'O' rings for casing connector

4 2 18¾" wellhead c/w extension

5 1 18¾" wellhead running tool, 4½" IF box

6 1 "Hilti" gun for connectors, if appropriate, c/w spare

heads and cartridges

7 1 20" casing drift

8 As required 20" spring centraliser and nails

9 As required 20" centraliser stop collar and nails

10 2 20" side door elevator

11 2 20" casing hand slips

12 2 20" single joint elevator

13 1 20" safety clamp c/w spanner

14 2 20" power tong

ITEM QUANTITY DESCRIPTION

15 1 Power pack

16 1 20" manual tongs

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Semi Submersible Drilling Revision: 0
Operations
18/05/2000
Section 19 Page 353 of 447

17 1 20" casing spear, 6 5/8" Reg box

18 1 set 20" rotary split bushings

19 As required 20" spring centraliser and nails

20 As required 20" centraliser stop collar and nails

21 As required Cement and additives

22 As required 4" x 4" dunnage

23 1 Circulating head, 4½" IF pin x 2" Weco fig 1502

24 1 20" circulating swage, casing connector pin x 2"

Weco fig 1502

25 1 2" Lo-torq valve, 2" Weco fig 1502

26 1 set Surface readout gyro surveying equipment

27 1 Surface gyro wireline unit

28 1 BOP test tool c/w spare seals

29 1 Wear bushing

30 1 Wear bushing running tool

31 1 Wellhead and casing connector tool box c/w spares

as applicable

32 2 Bumper sub

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Semi Submersible Drilling Revision: 0
Operations
18/05/2000
Section 19 Page 354 of 447

19.4 17½" HOLE/13 3/8" INTERMEDIATE CASING

19.4.1 Drilling 17½" Hole
The Drilling supervisor will ensure that all personnel and equipment for
drilling the 17½" hole are on the rig. All equipment will have been
checked and functioned as appropriate and fit for purpose.

DOM section 4, reference items 1.0 and 2.0 will be fully complied with,
prior to and during drilling the 17½" hole section.

Approximate section TD will be advised in the Drilling Programme. The

exact drilled depth will be adjusted to place the 13 3/8" hanger, landed
in 18¾" wellhead and allowing for a 15ft sump beneath the float shoe.

BOP and / or choke drills will be implemented in accordance with

instructions included in the Well Control Manual.

19.4.1.1 Make up either the following:

i) If a subsea plug launch system is to be employed.

• Make up the 18¾" x 13 3/8" casing hanger running tool to

subsea release plug mandrel. Add this assembly beneath a
stand of drillpipe and set back in derrick.
• Make up plug container with bottom plug release ball, as
required, and top plug release dart installed to a joint of
drillpipe and lay out. The ball release mechanism, as
necessary, and plug release plunger will be secured locked
shut.
ii) If a surface plug launch system is to be employed.

• Make up the 18¾" x 13 3/8" casing hanger to full bore running

tool and lay out.
• Make up cement head with top and bottom plugs installed and
cross-overs as required to a joint of casing and lay out. The
plug release plungers will be secured locked shut.

The Drilling Supervisor will witness all plug, ball and dart loading operations.

19.4.1.2 Make up emergency hang-off tool assembly to a stand of drillpipe and

set back in derrick. A drawing referencing space out from rotary table
to selected hang-off point, corrected to MSL will be formulated.
19.4.1.3 Pressure test casing against pipe rams as required.
19.4.1.4 Lay out 26" hole assembly, as appropriate, and make up the drilling
assembly as specified in the Drilling Programme.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Semi Submersible Drilling Revision: 0
Operations
18/05/2000
Section 19 Page 355 of 447

A typical pendulum assembly incorporating MWD facilities would be:

• 17½" bit
• Float valve - ported
• Float sub
• MWD
• Totco ring
• 1 x 9½" DC (or SNMDC)
• 17½" stabiliser (or NM stabiliser)
• 1 x 9½" DC
• 17½" stabiliser
• 4 x 9½" DC

The pendulum assembly is for a stable homogeneous formation

without significant drilling problems. If formation conditions are not
homogeneous, a locked assembly will be run.

A typical locked assembly incorporating MWD facilities would be:

• 17 ½" bit
• Float valve - ported
• 17½" near bit stabiliser - bored for float
• MWD
• Totco ring
• 17½" stabiliser (or NM stabiliser)
• 1 x 9½" DC (or NMDC)
• 17½" stabiliser
• 4 x 9½" DC
• X/O
• 5 x 8” DC
• JAR
• 2 x 8” DC
• X/O
• 12 x HWDP

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Semi Submersible Drilling Revision: 0
Operations
18/05/2000
Section 19 Page 356 of 447

If MWD formation evaluation is required in the 17½" hole section it will be

complete with directional read out facilities. When assembled in the BHA it will
be function checked prior to passing through the rotary table, refer to DOM
section 15, Surveying.

Note:

i) A drilling shock sub will be considered in the above BHA's if there is a

possibility of hard formations.

ii) The 17½" BHA's will only contain non-magnetic drill collars (NMDC), short
non-magnetic drill collars (SNMDC) or non-magnetic stabilisers (NM
stabilisers) where it is predicted or known that the assembly going in the
hole will reach section TD when a multishot survey will be run or MWD is
included.

19.4.1.5 RIH to calculated TOC. Wash down last 30ft with seawater.
19.4.1.6 Drill out cement to float shoe with seawater. Chase around a 30 bbl
viscous pill every 30 ft drilled. Drill float shoe and clean out pocket to
previous section TD with 100 bbls viscous pill and displace to mud.
Record hardness of cement in casing and amount of cement, if any,
below the float shoe. If the displacement is to OBM, pump a dyed
base oil spacer to aid interface observation.
Typical parameters for casing clean out and until stabilisers are in
open hole are:

i) Flowrate - to 1500 gpm

ii) WOB - to 15000 with a maximum of
20000 lbs
iii) Rotary speed - 50 to 70 rpm

19.4.1.7 Drill 15 ft of new formation.

19.4.1.8 Circulate the mud system in balance and pull into casing shoe.
19.4.1.9 Pressure test surface lines to 1000 psi above expected formation test
pressure. Carry out formation leak-off test. The Drilling Programme
will specify whether the leak-off test will be to leak-off or limited to a
specified value.
Note:

The Drilling Superintendent will be advised if the anticipated leak-off is not

obtained.

Send test details to the Drilling Superintendent.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Semi Submersible Drilling Revision: 0
Operations
18/05/2000
Section 19 Page 357 of 447

19.4.1.10 Drill 17½" hole to section TD.

Typical drilling parameters are:

i) Flowrate

To 1000 gpm to maintain annular velocity and optimise hole cleaning.

The effect of ECD on weak formations must be taken into account.

ii) WOB

To maintain controlled drilling rate. The maximum will be 80% of drill

collar weight below the jar.

iii) Rotary speed - formation dependent.

The maximum parameters will be to manufacturers

recommendations.

• The hole will be drilled with the mud specification detailed in

the Drilling Programme.
• Major problems with the mud condition or solids control
equipment will be addressed immediately. Drilling will cease
until the situation is rectified.
• Drilling will be with optimum hydraulics. A minimum of two
pumps will always be used.
• Extra caution will be needed when drilling potential anomalies
or identified reactive formations.
• Wiper trips will be considered as hole conditions dictate
subject to the total length of the drilled section.
If a wiper trip is required:

• and a top drive is incorporated, pump out over

the drilled section.
• and top drive is not available, circulate
clean, pull back over drilled section and repeat
circulation.

• Totco inclination surveys will be taken as required. The

survey interval will not exceed 500 ft.
• If the inclination exceeds 3 degrees the subsequent drilled
section will be reamed to maintain or reduce the inclination.
The frequency of inclination surveys will be increased /
decreased as required. The survey interval will not exceed
500 ft.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Semi Submersible Drilling Revision: 0
Operations
18/05/2000
Section 19 Page 358 of 447

• Penetration will be controlled at 100 ft / hour to maximise hole

cleaning and reduce the possibility of losses.
• Penetration rate will be controlled at 30 ft / hr within 60 ft of
any anticipated objective or advised by Geologist. Circulation
for samples will be at the discretion of the Geologist.

19.4.1.11 Circulate bottoms up and continue until hole is clean, and mud is in
balance and gas free. A 200 psi trip margin will be applied if
formation pressure is known, (reference Well Control Manual section
4.4).
19.4.1.12 Make a wiper trip to casing shoe. Ream tight spots until clean. Check
for fill.
19.4.1.13 Circulate and condition mud for logging, if required, and running
casing. Continue to circulate until the hole is clean, and mud is in
balance, gas free and with a 200 psi trip margin, if applicable.
19.4.1.14 Drop electronic multishot survey (EMS) barrel.
Note:

If MWD is incorporated in the BHA, and directional data is functional, an EMS

will not be required, (reference DOM section 15.9, Surveying).

19.4.1.15 POH. If hole conditions are adverse repeat items 19.4.1.11 to

19.4.1.14, until the hole is in good condition for either / and logging
and running casing. Strap out. Recover survey barrel.
19.4.1.16 Rig up and run electric logging programme. If there is not a logging
programme, continue with item 19.4.1.18.
Note:

The logged and drilled depths will be compatible to ensure a 15 ft sump below
the planned casing float shoe depth. Any major depth discrepancies will be
resolved.

19.4.1.17 RIH for wiper trip, as required. Ream any tight spots clean. Check
for fill.
Note:

If logging operation indicated the hole to be in good condition, a wiper trip may
be omitted. This will be discussed with the Drilling Superintendent.

19.4.1.18 Circulate and condition mud for running casing. Continue to circulate
until the hole is clean and mud in balance, gas free and with a 200
psi trip margin if applicable. Drop EMS barrel if previous survey was
unsuccessful.
19.4.1.19 POH.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Semi Submersible Drilling Revision: 0
Operations
18/05/2000
Section 19 Page 359 of 447

19.4.1.20 Retrieve wellhead nominal bore protector.

19.4.2 13 3/8” Intermediate Casing: Running and Cementing.

The Drilling Supervisor will ensure that all personnel and equipment for
running and cementing the casing are on the rig. All equipment will have
been checked and functioned as appropriate and fit for purpose.
Cement accessories will be compatible with the float equipment.

The stabbing board will be checked, as per standard list, as fit for
purpose. The Casing Crew Chief and Toolpusher will sign to this affect.
The survey will be completed prior to any use of the stabbing board.

The casing weight, grade and thread type will be specified in the Drilling
Programme. Oversize casing strings will require special elevators and
casing accessories.

The Drilling Supervisor will chair a safety / operations meeting with the
OIM, Toolpusher, rig crew and relevant third party personnel before
running and cementing the casing. The topics discussed will be:

• To acquaint all parties with the casing and cementing

operations.
• To discuss any problems foreseen and highlight areas of
concern and critical operations.
• To ensure all personnel conduct themselves in a safe and
correct manner when handling tubulars.

There will be a 15 ft sump below the float shoe.

The casing will be cemented using a sub-sea release (SSR) plug

system or a conventional cement head.

19.4.2.1 Prior to running casing ensure, as appropriate, the assemblies

specified in section 19.4.1.1 are prepared.
19.4.2.2 Make up, if required, a circulation packer:
• if top drive incorporated, beneath top connection.
• if not available, beneath a drillpipe handling joint with side
outlet for circulating hose and laid out.
19.4.2.3 Rig up to run casing.
19.4.2.4 Make up 80 ft shoetrack. Flush through shoetrack to ensure correct
float equipment operation. Threadlock connections as per running
programme.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Semi Submersible Drilling Revision: 0
Operations
18/05/2000
Section 19 Page 360 of 447

19.4.2.5 Continue to run casing as per running programme. The programme

will clearly state the position of centralisers, threadlocked
connections and additional casing components. Short casing joints
and / or radioactive marker will be strategically placed in the casing
string, as required, for subsequent depth reference. The depths will
be determined after wireline logging or other means.
Note:

The radioactive marker will only be handled by certified personnel.

• Use safety clamp on first 10 joints of casing.

• Casing threads will be checked by an independent inspector,
as required, prior to make-up.
• Connections will be torqued to manufacturers specification.
Torque-turn equipment will be used, as required.
• Each joint will be filled, as run, and completely filled every five
joints.
• The maximum casing running speed will be regulated to
comply with pressure surge calculations done on the rig.
• Care will be taken passing intervals that proved sensitive
during drilling. If circulation is necessary, flowrate will be
increased slowly to minimise pressure surges.
• The mud logging unit will monitor returns for indication of
gains or losses. The Driller will be advised of pit levels at all
times.
19.4.2.6 Run casing to surface casing shoe.
19.4.2.7 Break circulation slowly and circulate casing contents plus 25%. When
circulating change over to slip type spider elevator and slips.
19.4.2.8 Continue to run casing to casing hanger assembly
Note:

i) With some deep set intermediate casing strings it may be necessary to

partially float the casing down to avoid excessive hook loads so that the
compensator can be used to land the casing.

ii) The Drilling Supervisor will verify the casing not run corresponds with
the casing running programme.

19.4.2.9 Pick up casing hanger running tool assembly from derrick.

(i) With subsea plug launch system:

• Make up pack-off to casing hanger.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Semi Submersible Drilling Revision: 0
Operations
18/05/2000
Section 19 Page 361 of 447

• Make up top cement displacement plug, shear pinned as

required, to plug mandrel. The shear out value is normally ±
1500 psi.
• When bottom displacement plug is required, it will be shear
pinned below the top displacement plug. The shear out value
is normally ± 300 psi.
Note: The Drilling Supervisor will witness the setting of the shear pins.

• Make up running tool to casing hanger.

• Run casing on drillpipe landing string. The drillpipe yield
strength will be adequate for casing string weight. Fill each
stand. The landing string will have been drifted to ensure a
clear passage for the bottom plug release ball and / or top
plug release dart. Bumper subs may be used in adverse
weather conditions.
• Pick up drillpipe single with plug container.
(ii) With surface plug launch system:

• Make up casing hanger running tool assembly to casing.

• Run casing with pre-selected casing landing string.
• Pick up casing joint with cement head.
19.4.2.10 If hole conditions permit, rig up for circulation. It will be manifolded to
facilitate immediate circulation using either the mud pumps or cement
unit. Break circulation slowly.
19.4.2.11 Activate motion compensator. Set to neutral string weight. Record
casing string up and down weights. Open kill and choke lines to
atmosphere. Wash down to wellhead slowly. Pass through BOP
stack with casing hanger / pack-off with care.
19.4.2.12 Land casing hanger in wellhead. There will be sufficient overstand
above the rotary table to compensate for the heave of the rig during
cementing. Confirm depth measurement of landing string. Close kill
and choke lines.
19.4.2.13 Rig up for cementation, manifolded as in item 19.4.2.10. Pressure
test surface lines to 1000 psi above casing test pressure. Break
circulation slowly. Circulate at least casing contents plus 25% or
annular volume, whichever is greater. Circulation rate will be the
highest possible for maximum mud removal but consistent with not
inducing losses. The mud condition will be appropriate for cementing
and gas free. Circulation will continue until these conditions are met.
A volumetric pump efficiency check will be conducted during
circulation.
Note:

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Semi Submersible Drilling Revision: 0
Operations
18/05/2000
Section 19 Page 362 of 447

Constant observation of the pump pressure will be maintained at all times to

detect possible plugging of the annulus.

19.4.2.14 Cement intermediate casing to 500 ft inside surface casing, thus:

Note:

i) The rig will receive the cement formulation and computer simulation design
of cement placement 48 hours before the casing cementation.

ii) The reduction in hydrostatic head from cement spacers will not
compromise well integrity.

Cementing with sub-sea plug launch system with top displacement plug
only:

• Pump cement and / or weighted spacer as required.

• Mix and pump lead slurry. Slurry volume will be 50% excess
over theoretical cased open hole annular volume, or 10%
over 4 arm caliper integrated annular volume.
• Mix and pump tail slurry to give 150 ft open hole coverage.
Excess will be as for lead slurry.
• Release top plug dart from plug container.
• Displace dart to cement displacement plug. The cement unit
will be used for displacement. Displacement rate will be
reduced to 2 bpm within 10% of calculated displacement
volume prior to dart plug engagement.
• Shear out displacement plug. Record pressure. Change over
to rig pumps.
Cementing with sub-sea launch system with top and bottom
displacement plugs:

• Pump chemical wash as required.

• Release bottom plug ball from plug container.
• Pump weighted spacer as required.
• Displace ball to bottom cement displacement plug. The
cement unit will be used for displacement. Displacement rate
will be reduced to 2 bpm within 10% of calculated
displacement volume prior to ball / plug engagement.
• Shear out displacement plug. Record pressure.
• Continue pumping spacer, if appropriate.
• Mix and pump lead slurry. Slurry volume will be 50% excess
over theoretical cased open hole volume or 10% over 4 arm
caliper integrated annular volume.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Semi Submersible Drilling Revision: 0
Operations
18/05/2000
Section 19 Page 363 of 447

• Mix and pump tail slurry to give 150 ft open hole coverage.
Excess will be as for lead slurry.
• Release top plug dart from plug container.
• Displace dart to top cement displacement plug. The cement
unit will be used for displacement. Displacement rate will be
reduced to 2 bpm within 10% of calculated displacement
volume prior to dart / plug engagement
• Shear out displacement plug. Record pressure. Change over
to rig pumps.
Cementing with surface plug launch system:

• Pump cement spacers as required.

• Release bottom plug.
• Pump weighted spacer as required.
• Mix and pump lead slurry. Slurry volume will be 50% excess
over theoretical cased open hole volume or 10% over 4 arm
caliper integrated volume.
• Mix and pump tail slurry to give 150 ft open hole coverage.
Excess will be as for lead slurry.
• Release top plug.
Note: The Drilling Supervisor will witness ball / dart release and ball / dart drop
indicator movement.

19.4.2.15 Displace cement. Displacement rate will be the highest possible for
maximum mud removal, but consistent with not inducing losses.
Displacement volume will be measured from the mud tanks,
whenever possible and pump strokes derived from volumetric pump
efficiency. There will be sufficient surface mud pit storage capacity
for cement displacement volume. The mud logging unit will monitor
returns for indications of gains or losses. The driller will be advised of
pit levels at all times. Displacement rate will be reduced to 3-4 bpm
within 300 strokes of total calculated displacement volume and
differential pumping pressure recorded.
19.4.2.16 Bump displacement plug(s) and pressure test casing for 15 minutes.
The pressure will be specified in the Drilling Programme. Record
volume needed from bump to final casing pressure.
19.4.2.17 Release casing test pressure and check float equipment. If backflow
is evident the bled volume will be displaced into the casing. The
static differential pressure will be held on the casing until the cement
has set sufficiently to prevent backflow or until surface samples set.
19.4.2.18 With no backflow, remove casing running equipment, cement lines
and cement head/ plug container, as appropriate.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Semi Submersible Drilling Revision: 0
Operations
18/05/2000
Section 19 Page 364 of 447

19.4.2.19 Energise Seal assembly (pack-off). Seal assemblies are supplied by

a number of manufacturers. The energise procedure will be specified
in the applicable suppliers service manual or Drilling Programme.
19.4.2.20 Pressure test seal assembly to a nominal pressure to ensure set via
the kill or choke line. The pressure will be specified in the Drilling
Programme. The cement unit will be used for pressure testing to
accurately monitor the volume pumped.
Note:

If the seal assembly leaks, pressure will be applied to the casing annulus with a
potential risk of collapsed casing. The volume required to attain the nominal
pressure will be calculated prior to applying the pressure. The resultant volume
will be compared to the recorded displacement plug bump to casing pressure
test volume (refer to item 19.4.2.16). The collapse rating of the intermediate
casing will be known. The maximum test pressure will be recorded in the
drilling programme which will be < casing collapse pressure.

19.4.2.21 POH with landing string.

19.4.2.22 Run BOP stack test tool directly below a painted single of drillpipe.
Pipe ram impressions on this single will determine the space out for
the emergency hang-off tool. A drawing referencing space out from
rotary table to each annular, pipe and shear ram correct to MSL, will
be formulated. Wear bushing / flex joint protector, pack-off and BOP
test plug space outs will be included, as required.
19.4.2.23 Pressure test wellhead connector, pipe rams, annulars, failsafe
valves and kill and choke lines on one pod. Operate each BOP
function with the opposite pod from local and remote operating
stations. Record time taken and fluid used for each function. The
surface equipment will be pressure tested in conjunction with the
BOP pressure test. This will include standpipe and choke manifolds,
kelly / top drive, rotary hose and automatic, manual and stand-by
stab-in safety valves.

Note: Test pressures will be specified in the Drilling Programme.

19.4.2.24 Run and set casing hanger wear bushing.

19.4.2.25 Complete the casing Interval Cementation Report. Send these details
to the Drilling Superintendent.

19.4.3 Equipment Check List

The Drilling Programme will specify:

i) Drillpipe weight and grade

ii) Intermediate casing weight, grade and thread type

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Semi Submersible Drilling Revision: 0
Operations
18/05/2000
Section 19 Page 365 of 447

iii) Pressure rating of well control equipment

19.4.3.1 Drilling 17½" Hole

Note:
This is a complete equipment list covering several potential scenarios. The drilling
programme will point out relevant deletions or any additions.

ITEM QUANTITY DESCRIPTION

1 As required 17½" rock bit, c/w nozzles, bit breaker and bit gauge
ring, 7 5/8" Reg pin

2 2 Totco ring for 7 5/8" Reg conns

3 2 Float sub, 7 5/8" Reg box x box

4 2 17½" integral blade near bit stabiliser bored for float

valve, 7 5/8" Reg box x box

5 4 17½" integral blade string stabiliser, 7 5/8" Reg

conns

6 2 17½" integral blade non-magnetic string stabiliser, 7

5/8" Reg conns

7 2 MWD, 7" Reg conns

8 2 Float valve, non ported for 7 5/8" Reg conns

9 2 9½" non-magnetic drill collar, 7 5/8" Reg conns

10 2 9½" short non-magnetic drill collar, 7 5/8" Reg conns

11 2 Circulating sub, c/w drop ball and spares kit, 7 5/8"

Reg conns

12 6 9½" steel drill collar, 7 5/8" Reg conns,

13 2 9½" short steel drill collar, 7 5/8" Reg conns

14 7 8" steel drill collar, 6 5/8" Reg conn

15 2 8" hydraulic drilling jar c/w lifting sub and safety

sleeve, 6 5/8" Reg conns

16 2 9½" shock sub, 7 5/8" Reg conns

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Semi Submersible Drilling Revision: 0
Operations
18/05/2000
Section 19 Page 366 of 447

17 2 Junk sub, 7 5/8" Reg conns

18 2 X-over sub, 7 5/8" Reg pin x 6 5/8" Reg box

19 2 X-over sub, 6 5/8" Reg pin x 4½" IF box

20 12 5" HWDP, 4½" IF conns (30 pcs available)

21 As required 5" drillpipe, 4½" IF conns

22 3 9½" drill collar lifting sub, for use with 5" drillpipe
elevator, 7 5/8" Reg pin

23 3 8" drill collar lifting sub, for use with 5" drillpipe
elevator, 6 5/8" Reg conns

24 2 sets 9½" and 8" drill collar hand slips and elevator

25 1 Drill collar safety clamp and spanner

26 2 sets 5" drillpipe hand slips and elevator

27 As required Drill collar, non-magnetic drill collar and drillpipe

dope

28 1 Totco, 0 to 8° surveying equipment c/w barrel, sinker

bars and overshot

29 As required Fishing equipment to catch all downhole equipment

30 600 ft 3½" drillpipe cement string, 3½" IF conns

31 1 X-over, 3½" pin x 4½" IF box

32 1 set 3½" drillpipe hand slips and elevator

33 1 3½" drillpipe single joint elevator

34 1 Circulating head, 4½" IF pin x 2" Weco fig 1502

35 1 2" Lo-torq valve, 2" Weco fig 1502

36 1 Standby stab-in safety valve and operating key, 4½"

IF conns

37 1 Standby non return safety valve, 4½" IF conns

38 As required Mud chemicals

39 As required L.C.M. material in fine, medium and coarse

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Semi Submersible Drilling Revision: 0
Operations
18/05/2000
Section 19 Page 367 of 447

40 As required Cement and additives

41 As required Bulk barytes

42 As required Shale shaker screens

43 As required Mud cleaner screens

44 As required Formation cutting sample boxes, c/w lids and nails

45 2 Mud saver, if OBM used, 4½" IF conns

46 1 suite Wireline logging tools c/w fishing equipment

47 1 set Electronic multishot survey equipment c/w barrel,

sinker bars and overshot

48 1 Wear bushing retrieving tool

19.4.3.2 13 3/8” Intermediate Casing: Running and Cementing

ITEM QUANTITY DESCRIPTION

1 1 13 3/8" casing float shoe joint, PDC compatible

2 1 13 3/8" casing float collar joint, PDC compatible, non

rotational

3 As required 13 3/8" casing

4 As required 13 3/8" pup joint

5 2 13 3/8" casing intermediate joint

6 1 Spare 13 3/8" float shoe, PDC compatible

7 1 Spare 13 3/8" float collar, PDC compatible, non

rotational

8 2 each 13 3/8" surface top and bottom cement displacement

plugs, PDC compatible, non rotational

9 2 13 3/8" casing hanger c/w extension

10 2 13 3/8" casing hanger pack-off

11 1 Pack-off retrieving and installation tool.

12 2 13 3/8" casing hanger full bore running tool c/w

extension

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Semi Submersible Drilling Revision: 0
Operations
18/05/2000
Section 19 Page 368 of 447

13 2 13 3/8" casing hanger drillpipe running tool, 4½" IF

box

14 1 Sub surface release (SSR) plug mandrel

15 2 SSR top and bottom cement displacement plugs,

PDC compatible, non rotational

16 2 SSR launching ball and dart, PDC compatible

17 1 Single plug container and pumping manifold, 4½" IF

pin

18 1 set Torque / turn casing make up equipment

19 1 Air inflatable circulation packer, 4½" IF box

20 1 5" slotted plate with bowl and slips for 5" drillpipe (for
installation of item 19)

21 2 13 3/8" stab-in guides

22 1 13 3/8" casing drift

23 As required 13 3/8" spring centraliser and nails

24 As required 13 3/8" centraliser stop collar and nails

25 2 13 3/8" side door elevator

26 2 13 3/8" casing hand slips

27 2 13 3/8" single joint elevator

28 1 13 3/8" slip type elevator

29 1 13 3/8" slip type spider

30 1 13 3/8" safety clamp c/w spanner

31 2 13 3/8" power tong

32 1 Power pack

33 1 set 13 3/8" tong jaws for an including manual rig tongs

34 1 13 3/8" casing spear, 6" Reg box

35 1 set 13 3/8" rotary split bushings

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Semi Submersible Drilling Revision: 0
Operations
18/05/2000
Section 19 Page 369 of 447

36 1 13 3/8" circulating swage, casing thread pin x 2"

Weco fig 1502

37 1 2" Lo-torq valve, 2" Weco fig 1502

38 1 Circulating head, 4½" IF pin x 2" Weco fig 1502

39 1 13 3/8" Quick latch, double plug cement head c/w

spare 'O' rings and pumping manifold

40 4 13 3/8" rubber inflatable thread protector

41 3 Bakerlok

42 As required AP1 modified casing dope

43 1 'RA' radioactive tag

44 As required Cement and additives including chemical wash and

spacer requirements

45 As required 4" x 4" dunnage

46 1 BOP test tool c/w spare seals

47 1 Wear bushing

48 1 Wear bushing running tool

49 1 Wellhead running tool and casing hanger toolbox c/w

spares as applicable.

50 1 set Long bail arms

51 2 Bumper sub

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Semi Submersible Drilling Revision: 0
Operations
18/05/2000
Section 19 Page 370 of 447

19.5 12 ¼"HOLE / 9 5/8" PRODUCTION CASING

19.5.1 Drilling 12¼" Hole
The Drilling Supervisor will ensure that all personnel and equipment for drilling and coring (as
required) the 12¼" hole are on the rig. All equipment will have been checked and functioned
as appropriate and fit for purpose.

DOM section 4, reference items, 1.0 and 2.0 will be fully complied with, prior to and during
drilling the 12¼" hole section.

Approximate section TD will be advised in the Drilling Programme. The exact drilled depth will
be adjusted to place the 9 5/8" hanger, landed in 18¾" wellhead and allowing for a 15 ft sump
beneath the float shoe.

BOP and / or choke drills will be implemented in accordance with instructions included in the
Well Control Manual.

H2S procedures will apply, as appropriate. Refer to Well Control Manual section 7.10.1.

19.5.1.1 Make up either the following:

i) if a subsea plug launch system is to be employed, follow procedures appropriate for a 9
5/8” casing hanger, reference 19.4.2.9.(i).
ii) if a surface plug launch system is to be employed, follow procedures appropriate for a 9
5/8” casing hanger, reference 19.4.2.9 (ii).
Note:The Drilling Supervisor will witness all plug, ball and dart loading operations.

19.5.1.2 Lay out 17½" hole assembly, as appropriate, and make up the locked assembly as specified
in the Drilling Programme.
A typical locked assembly incorporating MWD facilities would be:

• 12¼" bit
• Totco ring
• 1 x 8" SDC (or SNMDC)
• 1 x 8" DC (or NMDC)
• 12¼" stabiliser
• 1 x 8" DC
• 12¼" stabiliser
• 12 x 8" DC
• as previous “locked” assembly.

Where formations are homogeneous and without significant drilling problems or if the hole inclination
is to be reduced, a pendulum assembly will be run, unless otherwise specified in the drilling
programme.

A typical “pendulum” assembly incorporating MWD facilities would be:

• 12¼" bit

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Semi Submersible Drilling Revision: 0
Operations
18/05/2000
Section 19 Page 371 of 447

• MWD
• Totco ring
• 1 x 8" DC (or NMDC)
• 12¼" stabiliser (or NM stabiliser)
• 1 x 8" DC
• 12¼" stabiliser
• 12 x 8" DC
• as previous locked assembly

If MWD formation evaluation is required in the 12¼" hole section it will be complete with directional
read out facilities. When assembled in the BHA it will be function checked prior to passing though the
rotary table.

A typical “locked” assembly incorporating MWD facilities would be:

• 12¼" bit
• 12¼" near bit stabiliser
• MWD
• Totco ring
• 12¼" stabiliser (or NM stabiliser)
• 1 x 8" DC (or NMDC)
• 12¼" stabiliser
• 12x 8" DC
• JAR
• 2 x 8” DC
• X/O
• 1 x HWDP
• Drop-in dart sub
• 11 x HWDP

Note:

The 12¼" BHA's will only contain junk subs and non-magnetic drill collars (NMDC), short non-
magnetic drill collars (SNMDC) or non-magnetic stabilisers (NM stabilisers) where it is predicted or
known that the assembly going in the hole will reach coring point or section TD (when a multishot
survey will be run) respectively, or if MWD is to be run.

19.5.1.3 RIH to calculated TOC. Wash down last 30 ft.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Semi Submersible Drilling Revision: 0
Operations
18/05/2000
Section 19 Page 372 of 447

19.5.1.4 Drill out cement, displacement plugs, float equipment and clean out pocket to previous
section TD. The mud will be treated for cement contamination. Record hardness of cement
in shoetrack and amount of cement, if any, below the float shoe.
If required, displace hole to OBM. A base oil spacer will be used.

Typical parameters for casing clean out and until stabilisers are in open hole are:

i) flowrate - to 1200 gpm

ii) WOB - to 15000 with a maximum of 20000 lbs
iii) rotary speed - 50 to 70 rpm

19.5.1.5 Drill 15 ft of new formation.

19.5.1.6 Circulate the mud system in balance and pull into casing shoe.
19.5.1.7 Pressure test surface lines to 1000 psi above expected formation test pressure. Carry out
formation leak-off test. The Drilling Programme will specify whether the leak-off test will be
to leak-off or limited to a specified value.

Note: The Drilling Superintendent will be advised if the anticipated leak-off / limit is not obtained.

Complete the Formation Integrity Test data sheet. Send these details to the Drilling Superintendent.

19.5.1.8 Drill / core 12¼" hole to section TD.

Typical drilling parameters are:

i) Flowrate - to 1200 gpm to maintain annular velocity

and optimise hole cleaning.

ii) WOB - as required. The maximum will be 80%

of drill collar weight below the jar.

iii) Rotary speed - formation dependent. The maximum will

be to manufacturers recommendations.

For additional guidelines refer to 19.4.1.10 suitably adjusted for 12 ¼” hole.

If a wiper trip is required:

• And a top drive is incorporated, pump out over the drilled section.
• If not available, circulate clean, pull back over drilled section and repeat circulation.
• If run MWD inclination surveys will be taken every 100 ft, at bit changes and at
section TD. In case of Teledrift and MWD failure, totco inclination surveys will be
taken as required. The survey interval will not exceed 500 ft.
• If the inclination exceeds 3 degrees the subsequent drilled section will be reamed to
maintain or reduce the inclination. The frequency of inclination surveys will be
increased /decreased as required. The survey interval will not exceed 500 ft.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Semi Submersible Drilling Revision: 0
Operations
18/05/2000
Section 19 Page 373 of 447

• Penetration rate will be controlled at 30 ft/hr within 60 ft of any anticipated objective

or advised by Geologist. Circulation for samples will be at the discretion of the
Geologist.

19.5.1.9 When an objective is identified and coring is necessary the following will apply. If at section
TD, continue with 19.5.1.28.
19.5.1.10 Circulate and condition mud for coring. Continue to circulate until hole is clean and mud in
balance and gas free. A 200 psi trip margin will be applied if formation pressure is known.
19.5.1.11 Take inclination survey and drop a totco survey barrel. The survey barrel will drift the
drillstring to the totco ring and ensure safe passage of the core barrel circulating ball.
19.5.1.12 POH. Ream any tight spots clean. A drillpipe wiper rubber will be used to prevent any junk
falling into the hole. Check the bit for gauge size. If significantly under gauge a check trip in
the hole will be made with a full gauge bit. Empty the junk basket if run. Dependent on
recovery, a further junk run in the hole may be required.
19.5.1.13 Make up stabilised core barrel assembly. The stabilisers will be of the correct gauge, inner
barrel space out distance correct and bearing assembly serviced before RIH. The initial and
subsequent core barrel lengths will be specified in the Drilling Programme.

A typical core barrel assembly would be:

• Core head - normally 12¼"

• Stabilised core barrel, length as required
• X/O
• 12¼" stabiliser
• 8" DC - as required
• Jar
• 2 x 8" DC
• X/O
• 1 x HWDP
• Drop-in dart sub
• 11 x HWDP
Note:

(i) The drill collar assembly length will be minimised to the maximum core head weight required.

(ii) Core barrels and heads are supplied by a number of manufacturers. The systems differ in
design but not in principle. The Company does not state any preference for manufacturer or
design. The applicable suppliers service manual will be on the rig.

19.5.1.14 RIH with coring assembly slowly. Use drillpipe wiper rubber at all times. Ream as required.
Circulation will be maximised with low RPM and WOB. If hard reaming, trip the core barrel
and RIH for a check trip.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Semi Submersible Drilling Revision: 0
Operations
18/05/2000
Section 19 Page 374 of 447

19.5.1.15 Wash down last 50 ft. Tag bottom with high circulation rate. Wash the bottom of the hole
with no rotation. Space out to maximise continuous coring before a connection. Pup joints
will not be across the BOP stack at any time during coring operations.
19.5.1.16 Circulate bottoms-up. Ensure mud system stable.
19.5.1.17 Drop core barrel circulating ball. Seat same. Take SCR's and record on and off bottom
pressures.
19.5.1.18 Cut core as required.
19.5.1.19 Circulate until mud is in balance, with a 200 psi trip margin, if applicable. The overbalance
will minimise the increased swabbing potential.
19.5.1.20 POH. Do not rotate drillstring. Stage circulation via open chokes to remove trapped gas
when POH may be required. This is more applicable to HPHT wells.
19.5.1.21 Recover core. When handling the core barrel, a safety clamp will be used at all times.
19.5.1.22 When further coring is required, check core head and inner barrel space out and service
bearing assembly.
19.5.1.23 Repeat items 19.5.1.14 – 19.5.1.21
19.5.1.24 Lay out core barrel. Break all connections.
19.5.1.25 RIH with previous drilling locked assembly to the top of cored section.
19.5.1.26 Ream cored section with caution. Circulation will be maximised with low WOB and RPM as
slow as possible.
19.5.1.27 Drill to section TD. 19.5.1.8 will apply.
19.5.1.28 Circulate bottoms up and continue until hole is clean and mud in balance, gas free and with
a 200 psi trip margin, if applicable.
19.5.1.29 Make a wiper trip to casing shoe. Ream tight spots until clean. Check for fill.
19.5.1.30 Circulate and condition mud for logging, if required, and running casing. Continue to
circulate until the hole is clean and mud in balance, gas free and with a 200 psi trip margin,
if applicable.
19.5.1.31 Drop tandem electronic multishot survey (EMS) barrel. Refer to Drilling DOM section 15.9
for survey specification.

Note: If MWD is incorporated in the BHA, and directional data is functional, the EMS will not be
required.

19.5.1.32 POH. If hole conditions are adverse repeat items 1.27 to 1.31, omitting item 1.30, until the
hole is in good condition for either / and logging and running casing. Strap out. Recover
survey barrel.
19.5.1.33 Rig up and run electric logging programme.
Note: The logged and drilled depths will be compatible to ensure a 15 ft sump below the planned casing
float shoe depth. Any major depth discrepancies will be resolved prior to continuing with drilling
operations.

19.5.1.34 RIH for wiper trip, as required. Ream any tight spots. Check for fill.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Semi Submersible Drilling Revision: 0
Operations
18/05/2000
Section 19 Page 375 of 447

Note: If logging operation indicated the hole to be in good condition, a wiper trip may be omitted. This will
be discussed with the Drilling Supervisor.

19.5.1.35 Circulate and condition mud for running casing. Continue to circulate until the hole is clean
and mud in balance, gas free and with a 200 psi trip margin, if applicable. Drop EMS barrel
if previous survey was unsuccessful.
19.5.1.36 POH
19.5.1.37 Retrieve casing hanger wear bushing.

19.5.2 9 5/8” Production Casing: Running and Cementing.

Responsibilities and general preparation for running a 9 5/8” production casing are similar to
guidelines for 13 3/8” casing, reference section 19.4.2.

19.5.2.1 Continue to run casing as per running programme. The programme will clearly state the
position of centralisers, threadlocked connections and additional casing components. Short
joints and / or radioactive marker will be strategically placed in the casing string, as
required, for subsequent depth reference. The depths will be determined after wireline
logging or other means.
Note:

The radioactive marker will only be handled by certified personnel.

• Use safety collar on the first 10 joints of casing.

• Casing threads will be checked by an independent inspector, as required, prior to
make-up.
• Connections will be torqued to manufacturers specification. Torque-turn equipment
will be used, as required.
• Each joint will be filled, as run, and completely every five joints.
• The maximum casing running speed will be regulated by the pressure surge
calculations performed on site.
• Care will be taken passing intervals that proved sensitive during drilling. If
circulation is necessary, flowrate will be increased slowly to minimise pressure
surges.
• The mud logging unit will monitor returns for indication of gains or losses. The
Driller will be advised of pit levels at all times.
19.5.2.2 Run casing to intermediate casing shoe.
19.5.2.3 Break circulation slowly and circulate casing contents plus 25%. When circulating change
over to slip type spider elevator and slips.
19.5.2.4 Continue to run casing to casing hanger assembly.
Note:

i) With some deep set production casing strings it may be necessary to partially float the casing
down to avoid excessive hook loads, so that the compensator can be used to land the casing.

ii) The Drilling Supervisor will verify the casing not run corresponds to the casing running programme.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Semi Submersible Drilling Revision: 0
Operations
18/05/2000
Section 19 Page 376 of 447

19.5.2.5 Pick up casing hanger running tool assembly from derrick.

With subsea plug launch system:

• Make up pack-off to casing hanger.

• Make up top cement displacement plug, shear pinned as required, to plug mandrel.
The shear out value is normally ± 1500 psi.
• When bottom displacement plug is required, it will be shear pinned below the top
displacement plug. The shear out value is normally ± 300 psi.
Note: The Drilling Supervisor will witness the setting of the shear pins.

• Make up running tool to casing hanger.

• Run casing on drillpipe landing string. The drillpipe yield strength will be adequate
for casing string weight. Fill each stand. The landing string will have been drifted to
ensure a clear passage for the bottom plug release ball and / or top plug release
dart. Bumper subs may be used in adverse weather conditions.
• Pick up drillpipe single with plug container.
• With surface plug launch system:
• Make up casing hanger running tool assembly to casing.
• Run casing with pre-selected casing landing string.
• Pick up casing joint with cement head.

19.5.2.6 If hole conditions permit, rig up for circulation. It will be manifolded to facilitate immediate
circulation using either the mud pumps or cement unit. Break circulation slowly.
19.5.2.7 Activate motion compensator. Set to neutral string weight. Record casing string up and down
weights. Open kill and choke lines to atmosphere. Wash down to wellhead slowly. Pass
through BOP stack with casing hanger / pack-off with care.
19.5.2.8 Land casing hanger in wellhead. There will be sufficient overstand above the rotary table to
compensate for the heave of the rig during cementing. Confirm depth measurement of
landing string. Close kill and choke lines.
19.5.2.9 If not completed, rig up for cementation, manifolded as in 19.5.2.6. Pressure test surface
lines to 1000 psi above casing test pressure. Break circulation slowly. Circulate at least
casing contents plus 25% or annular volume, whichever is greater. Circulation rate will be
the highest possible for maximum mud removal but consistent with not inducing losses. The
mud condition will be appropriate for cementing and gas free. Circulation will continue until
these conditions are met. A volumetric pump efficiency check will be conducted during
circulation.
Note:

Constant observation of the pump pressure will be maintained at all times to detect possible plugging
of the annulus.

19.5.2.10 Cement production casing to 500 ft inside intermediate casing, thus:

Note:

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Semi Submersible Drilling Revision: 0
Operations
18/05/2000
Section 19 Page 377 of 447

i) The rig will receive the cement formulation and computer simulation design of cement placement
48 hours before the casing cementation.

ii) The reduction in hydrostatic head from chemical wash will not compromise well integrity.

iii) When cementing high temperature wells, consideration will be given to cementing the production
casing short of the intermediate shoe to allow temperature induced pressure in the casing
annulus to bleed off into the formation.

iv) Item 15.5.29, Note, will apply.

Subsea plug launch system with top displacement plug only:

• Pump chemical wash and weighted spacer as required.

• Mix and pump lead slurry. Slurry volume will be 50% excess over theoretical cased
open hole annular volume, or 10% over 4 arm caliper integrated annular volume.
• Mix and pump tail slurry to give 300 ft open hole coverage above the uppermost
hydrocarbon bearing formation. Excess will be as for lead slurry.
• Release top plug dart from plug container.
• Displace dart to cement displacement plug. The cement unit will be used for
displacement. Displacement rate will be reduced to 2 bpm within 10% of calculated
displacement volume prior to dart / plug engagement
• Shear out displacement plug. Record pressure. Change over to rig pumps.
Subsea launch system with top and bottom displacement plugs:

• Pump chemical wash as required.

• Release bottom plug ball from plug container.
• Pump weighted spacer as required.
• Displace ball to bottom cement displacement plug. The cement unit will be used for
displacement. Displacement rate will be reduced to bpm within 10% of calculated
displacement volume prior to ball / plug engagement.
• Shear out displacement plug. Record pressure.
• Continue pumping spacer, if appropriate.
• Mix and pump lead slurry. Slurry volume will be 50% excess over theoretical cased
open hole annular volume or 10% over 4 arm caliper integrated annular volume.
• Mix and pump tail slurry to give 300 ft open hole coverage above the uppermost
hydrocarbon bearing formation. Excess will be as for lead slurry.
• Release top plug dart from plug container.
• Displace dart to top cement displacement plug. The cement unit will be used for
displacement. Displacement rate will be reduced to 2 bpm within 10% of calculated
displacement volume prior to dart / plug engagement.
• Shear out displacement plug. Record pressure. Change over to rig pumps.
With surface plug launch system:
• Pump chemical wash as required.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Semi Submersible Drilling Revision: 0
Operations
18/05/2000
Section 19 Page 378 of 447

• Release bottom plug.

• Pump weighted spacer as required.
• Mix and pump lead slurry. Slurry volume will be 50% excess over theoretical cased
open hole annular volume or 10% over 4 arm caliper integrated annular volume.
• Mix and pump tail slurry to give 300 ft open hole coverage above the uppermost
hydrocarbon bearing formation. Excess will be as for lead slurry.
• Release top plug.
Note:

The Drilling Supervisor will witness ball / dart release and ball / dart drop indicator movement.

19.5.2.11 Displace cement. Displacement rate will be the circulation rate in item 15.5.2.9.
Displacement volume will be measured from the mud tanks, whenever possible and pump
strokes derived from volumetric pump efficiency. There will be sufficient surface mud pit
storage capacity for cement displacement volume. The mud logging unit will monitor returns
for indications of gains or losses. The driller will be advised of pit levels at all times.
Displacement rate will be reduced to 3-4 bpm within 300 strokes of total calculated
displacement volume and differential pumping pressure recorded.
19.5.2.12 Bump displacement plug(s) and pressure test casing for 15 minutes. The pressure will be
specified in the Drilling Programme. Record volume needed from bump to final casing
pressure.
19.5.2.13 Release casing test pressure and check float equipment. If backflow is evident the bled
volume will be displaced into the casing. The static differential pressure will be held on the
casing until the cement has set sufficiently to prevent backflow or until surface samples set.
19.5.2.14 With no backflow, remove casing running equipment, cement lines and cement head / plug
container, as appropriate.
19.5.2.15 Energise pack-off. Pack-offs are supplied by a number of manufacturers. The energise
procedure will be specified in the applicable suppliers service manual and Drilling
Programme.
19.5.2.16 Pressure test seal assembly to a nominal pressure to ensure set via the kill or choke line.
The pressure will be specified in the Drilling Programme. The cement unit will be used for
pressure testing to accurately monitor the volume pumped.
Note:

If the pack-off seal leaks, pressure will be applied to the casing annulus with a potential risk of
collapsed casing. The volume required to attain the nominal pressure will be calculated prior to
applying the pressure. The resultant volume will be compared to the recorded displacement plug
bump to casing pressure test volume. The collapse rating of the production casing will be known.

19.5.2.17 POH with landing string.

19.5.2.18 Run BOP stack test tool directly below a painted single of drillpipe. Pipe ram impressions
on this single will determine the space out for the emergency hang-off tool, reference
19.4.1.2. A drawing referencing space out from rotary table to each annular, pipe and
shear ram correct to MSL, will be formulated. Wear bushing / flex joint protector, pack-off
and BOP test plug space outs will be included, as required.
19.5.2.19 Pressure test wellhead connector, pipe rams, annulars, failsafe valves and kill and choke
lines on one pod. Operate each BOP function with the opposite pod from local and remote
operating stations. Record time taken and fluid used for each function. The surface

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Semi Submersible Drilling Revision: 0
Operations
18/05/2000
Section 19 Page 379 of 447

equipment will be pressure tested in conjunction with the BOP pressure test. This will
include standpipe and choke manifolds, kelly / top drive, rotary hose and automatic, manual
and stand-by stab-in safety valves.
Note:

i) Test pressures will be specified in the Drilling Programme.

19.5.2.20 Run and set casing hanger wear bushing.

19.5.2.21 Complete the casing Interval Cementation Report. Fax these details to the Drilling
Superintendent.
19.5.3 Equipment Check List
The Drilling Programme will specify the:

i) drillpipe weight and grade

ii) production casing weight, grade and thread type
iii) pressure rating of well control equipment

19.5.3.1 Drilling 12¼" Hole

Note:
This is a complete equipment list covering several potential scenarios. The drilling
programme will point out relevant deletions or any additions.

ITEM QUANTITY DESCRIPTION

1 As required 12¼" rock bit, c/w nozzles, bit breaker and bit gauge
ring, 6 5/8" Reg pin

2 As required 12¼" PDC bit, c/w nozzles and bit breaker 6 5/8"
Reg pin

3 2 Totco ring for 6 5/8" Reg conns

4 2 12¼" integral blade near bit stabiliser, 6 5/8" Reg box

x box

5 4 12¼" integral blade string stabiliser, 6 5/8" Reg

conns

6 2 12¼" integral blade non-magnetic string stabiliser, 6

5/8" Reg conns

7 2 MWD, 6 5/8" Reg conns

8 2 8" non-magnetic drill collar, 6 5/8" Reg conns

9 2 8" short non-magnetic drill collar, 6 5/8" Reg conns

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Semi Submersible Drilling Revision: 0
Operations
18/05/2000
Section 19 Page 380 of 447

10 2 Circulating sub, c/w drop ball and spares kit, 6 5/8"

Reg conns

11 16 8" steel drill collar, 6 5/8" Reg conns,

12 2 8" short steel drill collar, 6 5/8" Reg conns

13 2 8" hydraulic drilling jar c/w lifting sub and safety

sleeve, 6 5/8" Reg conns

14 2 Junk sub, 6 5/8" Reg conns

ITEM QUANTITY DESCRIPTION

15 2 X-over sub, 6 5/8" Reg pin x 4½" IF box

16 12 5" HWDP, 4½" IF conns

17 As required 5" drillpipe, 4½" IF conns

18 3 8" drill collar lifting subs, for use with 5" drillpipe
elevators, 6 5/8" Reg conns

19 2 sets 8" drill collar hand slips and elevator

20 1 Drill collar safety clamp and spanner

21 2 sets 5" drillpipe hand slips and elevator

22 As required Drill collar, non-magnetic drill collar and drillpipe

dope

23 1 Totco, 0 to 8° surveying equipment c/w barrel sinker

bars and overshot

24 As required Fishing equipment to catch all downhole equipment

25 600 ft 3½" drillpipe cement string, 3½" IF conns

26 1 X-over, 3½" pin x 4½" IF box

27 1 set 3½" drillpipe hand slips and elevator

28 1 3½" drillpipe single joint elevator

29 1 Circulating head, 4½" IF pin x 2" Weco fig 1502

30 1 2" Lo-torq valve, 2" Weco fig 1502

31 1 Standby stab-in safety valve and operating key, 4½"

IF conns

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Semi Submersible Drilling Revision: 0
Operations
18/05/2000
Section 19 Page 381 of 447

32 1 Standby non return safety valve, 4½" IF conns

33 1 Drop-in dart sub, 4½" IF conns, with fishable dart and

overshot

34 As required Mud chemicals

35 As required L.C.M. material in fine, medium and coarse

ITEM QUANTITY DESCRIPTION

36 As required Cement and additives

37 As required Bulk barytes

38 As required Base oil

39 1 set OBM recovery equipment (if required)

40 As required Shale shaker screens

41 As required Mud cleaner screens

42 As required Formation cutting sample boxes, c/w lids and nails

43 2 Mud saver, if OBM used, 4½" IF conns

44 1 suite Wireline logging tools c/w fishing equipment

45 1 set Electronic multishot survey equipment c/w barrel,

sinker bars and overshot

47 1 Wearbushing retrieving tool

48 As required Corehead c/w breaker

49 As required Corebarrel and associated equipment

50 1 Corebarrel tool box

51 As required Core wooden sample boxes, c/w lids and nails

52 As required Geologist coring requirements

19.5.3.2 9 5/8” Production Casing: Running and Cementing

ITEM QUANTITY DESCRIPTION

1 1 9 5/8" casing float shoe joint, PDC compatible

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Semi Submersible Drilling Revision: 0
Operations
18/05/2000
Section 19 Page 382 of 447

2 1 9 5/8" casing float collar joint, PDC compatible, non

rotational

3 As required 9 5/8" casing

4 As required 9 5/8" pup joint

5 2 9 5/8" casing intermediate joint

6 1 Spare 9 5/8" float shoe, PDC compatible

ITEM QUANTITY DESCRIPTION

7 1 Spare 9 5/8" float collar, PDC compatible, non

rotational

8 2 each 9 5/8" surface top and bottom cement displacement

plugs, PDC compatible, non rotational

9 2 9 5/8" casing hanger c/w extension

10 2 9 5/8" casing hanger pack-off

11 1 Pack-off retrieving and installation tool.

12 2 9 5/8" casing hanger full bore running tool c/w

extension

13 2 9 5/8" casing hanger drillpipe running tool, 4½" IF

box

14 1 Sub surface release (SSR) plug mandrel

15 2 SSR top and bottom cement displacement plugs,

PDC compatible, non rotational

16 2 SSR launching ball and dart, PDC compatible

17 1 Single plug container and pumping manifold, 4½" IF

pin

18 1 set Torque / turn casing make up equipment

19 1 Air inflatable circulation packer, 4½" IF box

20 1 5" slotted plate with bowl and slips for 5" drillpipe (for
installation of item 19)

21 2 9 5/8" stab-in guides

22 1 9 5/8" casing drift

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Semi Submersible Drilling Revision: 0
Operations
18/05/2000
Section 19 Page 383 of 447

23 As required 9 5/8" spring centraliser and nails

24 As required 9 5/8" centraliser stop collar and nails

25 2 9 5/8" side door elevator

26 2 9 5/8" casing hand slips

27 2 9 5/8" single joint elevator

ITEM QUANTITY DESCRIPTION

28 1 9 5/8" slip type elevator

29 1 9 5/8" slip type spider

30 1 9 5/8" safety clamp c/w spanner

31 2 Power tong dressed for 9 5/8" casing

32 1 Power pack

33 1 set 9 5/8" tong jaws for and including manual rig tongs

34 1 9 5/8" casing spear, 6 5/8" Reg box

35 1 set 9 5/8" rotary split bushing

36 1 9 5/8" circulating swage, casing thread pin x 2" Weco

fig 1502

37 1 2" Lo-torq valve, 2" Weco fig 1502

38 1 Circulating head, 4½" IF pin x 2" Weco fig 1502

39 1 9 5/8" Quick latch, double plug cement head c/w

spare 'O' rings and pumping manifold

40 4 9 5/8" rubber inflatable thread protector

41 3 Bakerlok

42 As required AP1 modified casing dope

43 1 'RA' radioactive tag

44 As required Cement and additives including chemical wash and

spacer requirements

45 As required 4" x 4" dunnage

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Semi Submersible Drilling Revision: 0
Operations
18/05/2000
Section 19 Page 384 of 447

46 1 BOP test tool c/w spare seals

47 1 Wear bushing

48 1 Wear bushing running tool

49 1 Wellhead running tool and casing hanger tool box

c/w spares as applicable.

ITEM QUANTITY DESCRIPTION

50 1 set Long bail arms

51 2 Bumper sub

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Semi Submersible Drilling Revision: 0
Operations
18/05/2000
Section 19 Page 385 of 447

19.6 8 ½" HOLE / 7" PRODUCTION/DRILLING LINER

19.6.1 Drilling 8½" Hole
The well is usually designed to drill the 8½" hole section from the production casing shoe,
through the objective to the intended total depth. If the objective is hydrocarbon bearing a 7"
production liner will be set. Refer to 19.6.2.7.

When the liner is set before entering the prospective zone, a 6" hole will be drilled to total
depth. Refer to DOM section 19.7. The 7" liner will then be called the "drilling liner".

If the 6" hole is hydrocarbon bearing, a 5" production liner will be set. Refer to DOM section
19.7.2.

The Drilling Supervisor will ensure that all personnel and equipment for drilling and coring (as
required) the 8½" hole are on the rig. All equipment will have been checked and functioned as
appropriate and fit for purpose.

DOM section 4, reference items, 1.0 and 2.0 will be fully complied with, prior to and during
drilling the 8½" hole section.

Final total depth (TD) will be advised in the Drilling Programme.

BOP and / or choke drills will be implemented in accordance with instructions included in the
Well Control Manual.

H2S procedures will apply, as appropriate. Refer to the Well Control Manual section 7.10.11.

The liner lap will be tested with a positive pressure test. Inflow tests are only with approval
from the Drilling Superintendent and procedures formulated.

19.6.1.1 Make up plug container and pump manifold c/w heavy duty swivel and drillpipe lifting sub
with liner hanger setting ball and drillpipe / liner wiper plug release dart installed to a joint of
drillpipe or cementing kelly and lay out.
• The ball release mechanism and plug release plunger will be secured locked shut.
• The Drilling Supervisor will witness ball and dart loading operations.
Note:

The liner hanger setting ball will be omitted for mechanical set liner hangers.

19.6.1.2 When the 8½" hole section is expected to exceed 30 days a casing wear log will be run over
the production casing, prior to drilling commencing. It will be re-run after 30 days and
results compared. A gauge ring / junk basket will precede the wear log and will be run over
the entire anticipated logged interval.
A cement bond log will be run if TOC behind the production casing needs to be identified.

19.6.1.3 Pressure test the production casing (as required if any wear has been measured) against the
shear rams or with a retrievable packer set at selected intervals. Adequate drill collar weight
will be above the packer to prevent premature unseating.
19.6.1.4 Lay out 12¼" hole assembly and make up the locked assembly as specified in the Drilling
Programme.
A typical “locked” assembly incorporating MWD facilities would be:

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Semi Submersible Drilling Revision: 0
Operations
18/05/2000
Section 19 Page 386 of 447

• 8½" bit
• 8½" near bit stabiliser
• MWD
• Totco ring
• 8½" stabiliser (or NM stabiliser)
• 1 x 6½" DC (or NMDC)
• 8½" stabiliser
• 18 x 6½" DC
• as previous locked assembly

If the hole inclination is to be reduced, a pendulum assembly will be run.

A typical “pendulum” assembly incorporating MWD facilities would be:

• 8½" bit
• MWD
• Totco ring
• 1 x 6½" DC (or NMDC)
• 8½" stabiliser (or NM stabiliser)
• 1 x 6½" DC
• 8½" stabiliser
• 18x 6½" DC
• as previous locked assembly

If MWD formation evaluation is required in the 8½" hole section it will be complete with
directional read out facilities. When assembled in the BHA it will be function checked prior
to passing through the rotary table.

Note:

The 8½" BHA's will only contain junk subs and non-magnetic drill collars (NMDC), short non-magnetic
drill collars (SNMDC) or non-magnetic stabilisers (NM stabilisers) where it is predicted or known that
the assembly going in the hole will reach coring point or final TD (when a multishot survey will be run)
respectively, or when used MWD.

19.6.1.5 RIH to calculated TOC. Wash down last 30 ft.

19.6.1.6 Drill out cement, displacement plugs, float equipment and clean out pocket to previous
section TD. The mud will be treated for cement contamination. Record hardness of cement
in shoetrack and amount of cement, if any, below the float shoe.
Typical parameters for casing clean out and until stabilisers are in open hole are:

i) Flowrate - to 500 gpm

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Semi Submersible Drilling Revision: 0
Operations
18/05/2000
Section 19 Page 387 of 447

ii) WOB - to 15000 lbs

iii) Rotary speed - 50 to 70 rpm

19.6.1.7 Drill 20 ft of new formation.

19.6.1.8 Circulate the mud system in balance and pull into casing shoe.
19.6.1.9 Pressure test surface lines to 1000 psi above expected formation test pressure. Carry out
formation leak-off test as specified in the Well Control Manual section 4.7.1. The Drilling
Programme will specify whether a leak-off test or a Formation Integrity Test (FIT) is
required.
Note:

The Drilling Superintendent will be advised if the anticipated leak-off / FIT is not obtained.

Complete the Formation Integrity Test data sheet. Send these details to the Drilling Superintendent.

19.6.1.10 Drill / core 8½" hole to total depth.

Typical drilling parameters are:

i) Flowrate - to 500 gpm

ii) WOB - as required. The maximum will be 80% of drill collar weight
below the jar.

iii) Rotary speed- formation dependent. The maximum will

be to manufacturers recommendations.

For additional guidelines refer to 19.4.1.10 suitable adjusted for 8 ½” hole

If a wiper trip is required:

See guidelines in 19.5.1.8 suitably adjusted for 8 ½” hole

For 8 ½” hole drilling/ coring / casing procedures refer to previous 12 ¼” items 19.5.1.9 –
19.5.1.37.

19.6.1.11 When an objective is identified and coring necessary, the following will apply. If at total
depth continue with item 19.6.1.29.
19.6.1.12 Circulate and condition mud for coring. Continue to circulate until hole is clean and mud in
balance and gas free. A 200 psi trip margin will be applied if formation pressure is known.
19.6.1.13 Take inclination survey and drop totco survey barrel. The survey barrel will drift the
drillstring to the totco ring and ensure safe passage of the core barrel circulating ball.
19.6.1.14 POH. Ream any tight spots clean. A drillpipe wiper rubber will be used to prevent any junk
falling into the hole. Check the bit for gauge size. If significantly under gauge a check trip in
the hole will be made with a full gauge bit. Empty the junk basket if run. Dependent on
recovery, a further junk run in the hole may be required.
19.6.1.15 Make up stabilised core barrel assembly. The stabilisers will be of the correct gauge, inner
barrel space out distance correct and bearing assembly serviced before RIH. The initial and
subsequent core barrel lengths will be specified in the Drilling Programme.
A typical core barrel assembly would be:

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Semi Submersible Drilling Revision: 0
Operations
18/05/2000
Section 19 Page 388 of 447

• 8½" core head

• Stabilised core barrel, length as required
• X/O
• ECS
• 8½" stabiliser
• 6½" DC-as required - see, Note i)
• JAR
• 2 x 6½" DC
• 1 x HWDP
• Drop-in dart sub
• 11 x HWDP

Note:

i) The drill collar assembly length will be minimised to the maximum core head weight required.

ii) Core barrels and heads are supplied by a number of manufacturers. The systems differ in design
but not in principle. NPL does not state any preference for any manufacturer or design. The
applicable suppliers service manual will be on the rig.

19.6.1.16 RIH with coring assembly slowly. Use drillpipe wiper rubber at all times. Ream as required.
Circulation will be maximised with low RPM and WOB. If hard reaming, trip the core barrel
and RIH for a check trip.
19.6.1.17 Wash down last 50 ft. Tag bottom with high circulation rate. Wash the bottom of the hole
with no rotation. Space out to maximise continuous coring before a connection. Pup joints
will not be across the BOP stack at any time during coring operations.
19.6.1.18 Circulate bottoms-up. Ensure mud system gas free.
19.6.1.19 Drop core barrel circulating ball. Seat same. Take SCR's and record on and off bottom
pressures.
19.6.1.20 Cut core as required.
19.6.1.21 Circulate until mud is in balance, gas free and with a 200 psi trip margin, if applicable. The
overbalance will minimise the increased swabbing potential.
19.6.1.22 POH. Do not rotate drillstring. Stage circulation via open chokes to remove trapped gas
when POH may be required. This is more applicable to HPHT wells.
19.6.1.23 Recover core. When handling the core barrel, a safety clamp will be used at all times.
When further coring is required, check core head and inner barrel space out and service
bearing assembly.

19.6.1.24 Repeat items 19.6.1.16 – 19.6.1.23.

19.6.1.25 Lay out core barrel. Break all connections.
19.6.1.26 RIH with previous drilling locked assembly to the top of the cored section.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Semi Submersible Drilling Revision: 0
Operations
18/05/2000
Section 19 Page 389 of 447

19.6.1.27 Ream cored section with caution. Circulation will be maximised with low WOB and RPM as
slow as possible.
19.6.1.28 Drill to total depth. Drilling procedures in 19.6.1.10 will apply.
19.6.1.29 Circulate bottoms up and continue until hole is clean and mud in balance, gas free and with
a 200 psi trip margin, if applicable.
19.6.1.30 Make a wiper trip to casing shoe. Ream tight sports until clean. Check for fill.
19.6.1.31 Circulate and condition mud for logging, if required, and running liner. Continue to circulate
until the hole is clean and mud in balance, gas free and with a 200 psi trip margin, if
applicable.
19.6.1.32 Drop tandem electronic multishot survey (EMS) barrel. Refer to DOM section 15.9 for
survey specification.
Note:

If MWD is incorporated in the BHA, and directional data is functional, the EMS will not be required.

19.6.1.33 POH. If hole conditions are adverse repeat items 19.6.1.29 – 19.6. 1.33, omitting item
19.6.1.30 until the hole is in good condition for either / and logging and running liner. Strap
out. Recover survey barrel.
19.6.1.34 Rig up and run electric logging programme. Wiper trips during logging programme will be as
required and in accordance with item 19.6.1.35.
Note:

The logged and drilled depths will be compatible. Any major depth discrepancies will be resolved.

The liner running string will be drifted in the derrick during wireline logging.

19.6.1.35 RIH for wiper trip, as required. Ream any tight spots. Check for fill.
Note:

If logging operations indicate the hole to be in good condition, a wiper trip may be omitted. This will be
discussed with the Drilling Operations Representative.

19.6.1.36 Circulate and condition mud for running liner. Continue to circulate until the hole is clean
and mud in balance, gas free and with a 200 psi trip margin, if applicable. Drop EMS barrel
if previous survey was unsuccessful.
19.6.1.37 POH.

19.6.2 7” Liner: Running and Cementing

A 7" liner will be run when a well is to be production tested. Alternatively, it may have been set
where it is necessary to case off formations before entering the prospect or as part of the well
design for deep well drilling.

Prior to running the liner, operational and safety checks will be carried out, (reference DOM
section 19.4.2, Running and Cementing).

The liner specification and liner weight, grade and thread type will be specified in the Drilling
Programme. The liner hanger assembly will include tie-back and integral packer facilities
where appropriate. It will be hydraulically set. Mechanically set liner hangers will only be used

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Semi Submersible Drilling Revision: 0
Operations
18/05/2000
Section 19 Page 390 of 447

when operational requirements preclude the use of hydraulically set liner hangers. The
following procedures are applicable to mechanically set liner hangers except for the pressure
limitation in item 19.6.2.6.

The liner will be spaced to place the float shoe 5 ft above final TD and the liner hanger midway
in a casing joint.

The liner lap will be ± 500 ft. With high temperature applications it may be necessary to tie-
back the liner to the wellhead.

The liner will be cemented in a single stage using a sub-sea release (SSR) plug system. The
cement slurry will be a single formulation and when practical, batch mixed to achieve a
homogeneous slurry.

Liner hangers and accessories are supplied by a number of manufacturers. The systems differ
in design but not in principle.

NPL does not state any preference for any manufacturer or design.

The applicable supplier service manual will be on the rig.

19.6.2.1 The production casing will be pressure tested prior to running the liner if any casing wear has
been identified. Refer to 19.6.1.2. A retrievable packer will be set ± 400 ft above the float
shoe and the drillpipe / casing annulus pressure tested to cementation casing test pressure
to confirm the production casing integrity.
19.6.2.2 Prior to running liner, ensure, as appropriate, the assembly specified in 19.6.1.1., is
prepared.
19.6.2.3 Rig up to run the liner.
19.6.2.4 Make up 120 ft shoetrack, (reference DOM section 6.3.2, Drilling Equipment). Flush through
shoetrack to ensure correct float equipment operation. Threadlock connections as per
running programme.
19.6.2.5 Continue to run liner as per running programme to liner hanger assembly. The programme
will clearly state the position of centralisers, threadlocked connections and additional casing
components. Short joints and / or radioactive marker will be strategically placed in the liner,
as required, for subsequent depth reference. The depths will be determined after wireline
logging or other means.
Note:

The radioactive marker will only be handled by certified personnel.

• Use safety collar on the first 15 joints of liner.

• Liner threads will be checked by an independent inspector prior to make-up.
• Connections will be torqued to manufacturers specification. Torque turn equipment
will be used, as required.
• Each joint will be filled, as run, and completely every five joints.
• The maximum liner running speed will be regulated by the pressure surge
calculations performed on site.
Note:

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Semi Submersible Drilling Revision: 0
Operations
18/05/2000
Section 19 Page 391 of 447

The Drilling Supervisor will verify the liner not run corresponds with the liner running programme.

19.6.2.6 Pick up pre-assembled liner hanger / setting tool assembly. Make up liner wiper plug, (shear
pinned as required), to setting tool slick joint. The shear out value is normally ± 800 psi.
Note: The Drilling Supervisor will witness the setting of the shear pins.

19.6.2.7 Make up assembly to liner. Function check running tool releasing mechanism, hanger cage
and slip assembly.
19.6.2.8 Break circulation slowly and circulate liner contents plus 20%. Visually inspect hanger
assembly / setting tool for leaks.
Note: At all times, prior to setting the liner hanger, circulation pressure will be limited to manufacturers
recommendation. The range of pressures / circulation rates up to this value and pick-up and slack-
off rates will be recorded.

19.6.2.9 Run liner on drillpipe running string to production casing shoe. HWDP will not be used.
Bumper subs may be used in adverse weather conditions.
• Pass liner hanger assembly through BOP stack with care.
• The running string and all associated components will have been drifted to ensure
clear passage for the liner hanger setting ball and drillpipe/liner wiper release dart.
All drillpipe rubber protectors will be removed.
• A drillpipe wiper rubber will be used to prevent any junk falling into the hole.
• Ensure running string does not rotate when making connections. A back-up tong will
be used at all times.
• Each stand of drillpipe will be filled as run, and completely after every five stands.
• The maximum liner running speed will be regulated by the pressure surge. The mud
logging unit will monitor returns for indication of gains or losses. The Driller will be
advised of pit levels at all times.

19.6.2.10 Break circulation slowly and circulate drillpipe running string and liner contents plus 25%.
19.6.2.11 Continue RIH with running string.
Note:

Care will be taken passing intervals that proved sensitive during drilling. If circulation is necessary,
flowrate will be increased slowly. The annulus must not be allowed to pack-off. Excessive differential
pressure within the liner may prematurely set the liner hanger. The circulation pressure will be limited
to manufacturers recommendation.

Do not slack off more than 80% of liner weight.

19.6.2.12 Pick up drillpipe or cementing kelly with plug container.

19.6.2.13 If hole conditions permit, rig up for circulation. There will be sufficient circulation hose to
pick up clear of PBR after liner cementation. It will be manifolded to facilitate immediate
circulation using either the mud pumps or cement unit. Break circulation slowly.
19.6.2.14 Activate motion compensator. Set to neutral string weight. Record pick-up and slack-off
weights. Wash down and tag bottom with 5000 lbs. Pull back 5 ft. There will be sufficient
overstand above the rotary table to compensate for the heave of the rig during cementing
and to set liner shoe on bottom if required. Confirm total depth measurement.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Semi Submersible Drilling Revision: 0
Operations
18/05/2000
Section 19 Page 392 of 447

19.6.2.15 If not completed, rig up for cementation, manifolded as in 19.6.2.13. Pressure test surface
lines to 1000 psi above liner test pressure. Break circulation slowly. Circulate at least liner
contents plus 20% or annular volume, plus 20%, whichever is greater. Circulation rate will
be the highest possible for maximum mud removal but consistent with not inducing losses.
The mud condition will be appropriate for cementing and gas free. Circulation will continue
until these conditions are met. The maximum ECD attained when drilling the 8½" hole will
not be exceeded.
Note: Constant observation of the pump pressure will be maintained at all times to detect possible
plugging of the annulus.

19.6.2.16 Release liner hanger setting ball. Circulate down at a maximum rate of 4-5 bbl/min,
19.6.2.8, Note, pressure limitation, will apply. Seat ball.
Note:The Drilling Supervisor will witness the liner hanger setting ball release and drop indicator
movement.

Set liner hangeras per manufacture’s guidelines, which generically are:

• Pressure liner in ± 500 psi stages to 1600 psi. The hanger setting pressure is
normally ± 1500 psi. Hold pressure for 10 mins. Release pressure.
• Slack-off liner weight to confirm liner hanger set.
If set:

• Set down with 15000 lbs weight. Shear setting ball from shear sub. The shear
pressure is normally ± 3000 psi.
If not set:

• Pull off bottom 5 ft.

• Pressure liner in 200 psi increments over normal liner hanger setting pressure to
setting ball shear out. A check for set will be made after each pressure increase.
• If unsuccessful, at setting ball shear out, set liner shoe on bottom and cement in
place. If a liner packer is required notify the Drilling Superintendent for possible
instructions to pull out assembly and re-run.
The liner setting and shear out pressures will be specified in the Drilling Programme.

Note: A mechanical liner hanger is set with RH rotation and slack-off weight. If not set, the liner shoe
will be set on bottom.

19.6.2.17 Pick up running string drag weight minus 20000 lbs. Release running tool with RH rotation.
Pick up running string weight plus 3 ft to ensure running tool has released. Set down on
liner hanger. The weight will be specified in the Drilling Programme. It must counteract the
pump-up force when liner wiper plug is bumped.
19.6.2.18 Break circulation slowly. Establish circulation and record circulation pressures at 1 bpm
intervals to the maximum ECD attained when drilling the 8½" hole.
19.6.2.19 Circulation rate will be the highest possible for maximum mud removal but consistent with
not inducing losses. The mud condition will be appropriate for cementing and gas free.
Circulation will continue until these conditions are met.
19.6.2.20 The mud logging unit will monitor returns for indication of gains or losses. The Driller will be
advised of pit levels at all times.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Semi Submersible Drilling Revision: 0
Operations
18/05/2000
Section 19 Page 393 of 447

19.6.2.21 Mix cement slurry in batch tank whilst circulating. Slurry volume will place TOC 200ft above
top of liner with drillpipe removed. Excess will be 20% over theoretical cased open hole
annular volume or 10% over 4 arm caliper integrated annular volume.
Note:

i) The rig will receive the cement formulation and computer simulation design of cement
placement 48 hours before the casing cementation.

19.6.2.22 Cement liner thus:

• Pump chemical wash and weighted spacer as required. The reduction in hydrostatic
head from chemical wash will not compromise well integrity.
• Pump slurry from batch mixer. The slurry properties will be completely
homogeneous. If batch mixing is impractical, mix cement conventionally.
• Release drillpipe / liner wiper plug dart.
• Displace dart to liner wiper plug. The cement unit will be used for displacement.
Displacement rate will be reduced to 2 bpm within 10% of calculated displacement
volume prior to dart / plug engagement.
• Shear out liner wiper plug. Record pressure. The shear out pressure will be
specified in the Drilling Programme.
Note:

The Drilling Supervisor will witness the drillpipe / liner wiper plug dart release and drop indicator
movement.

• Displace cement. The cement unit will be used for displacement. Displacement
volume will be measured from the cement unit displacement tanks. There will be
sufficient surface mud pit storage capacity for cement displacement volume. The
mud logging unit will monitor returns for indications of gains or losses. The Driller will
be advised of pit levels at all times. Displacement rate will be reduced to 2-3 bpm
within 10 bbls of total calculated displacement volume and differential pumping
pressure recorded.
• Bump liner wiper plug and pressure test liner for 10 minutes. The pressure will be
specified in the Drilling Programme. Record volume needed from bump to final
casing pressure.
Note:

i) If liner wiper plug shear was not observed, displacement will be the theoretical liner volume.

ii) If observed, record pump efficiency at shear. The displacement will be the calculated liner
volume from liner wiper plug to landing collar from time of shear.

iii) The cement unit operator will be vigilant in monitoring tank fill up / change over to minimise
displacement inaccuracies.

iv) There will be no over displacement if wiper plug fails to bump in i) and ii) above.

19.6.2.23 Release test pressure and check float equipment. If backflow is evident and;
• i) liner wiper plug bumped,

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Semi Submersible Drilling Revision: 0
Operations
18/05/2000
Section 19 Page 394 of 447

• displace bled volume into running string. Pressure liner to original test pressure.
Check for backflow. If positive, repeat as required.
• Ii) liner wiper plug not bumped,
• displace bled volume into running string. Check for backflow. If positive, repeat as
required.
If float equipment is still malfunctioning continue with item 19.6.2.24.

19.6.2.24 Pull back tie-back receptacle length. Set down weight to energise weight-set integral
packer, if applicable. The set down weight will be specified in the Drilling Programme.
19.6.2.25 (i) If bump observed - pressure drillpipe to 100 psi. Pull back until pressure is lost. Seal sub
on setting tool will be at the top of the PBR.
(ii) If bump not observed - pull back measured amount for seal sub to be clear of PBR.

19.6.2.26 Reverse circulate excess cement above PBR. Circulate clean conventionally.
19.6.2.27 POH. Lay out liner running tool.
19.6.2.28 Run jetting sub and jet wellhead area and BOP cavities if cement returns were observed at
surface while circulating conventionally.
19.6.2.29 Send liner Cementation Report details to the Drilling Superintendent.
19.6.3 7” Liner Clean Out
The liner will be cleaned out, pressure tested and wireline logged prior to production testing.

The Drilling Superintendent will confirm, prior to liner clean out, if the sump below the
lowermost perforations is adequate for well test conditions. If insufficient, a portion of the
shoetrack may be drilled and cleaned out.

The liner lap will be tested with a positive pressure test. Inflow tests are only with approval
from the Drilling Superintendent and procedures formulated.

The Drilling Supervisor will ensure that all personnel and equipment for liner clean out and
subsequent operations are on the rig. All equipment will have been checked and functioned,
as appropriate, and fit for purpose. DOM section 4, reference items, 1.0 and 2.0 will be fully
complied with, prior to and during liner clean out.

19.6.3.1 Retrieve wear bushing. Run BOP stack test tool directly below a painted single of drillpipe.
Pipe ram impressions on this single will confirm the space out for the emergency hang-off
tool, reference 19.4.1.2.
19.6.3.2 Pressure test wellhead connector, pipe rams, annulars, failsafe valves and kill and choke
lines on one pod. Operate each BOP function with the opposite pod from local and remote
operating stations. Record time taken and fluid used for each function. The surface
equipment will be pressure tested in conjunction with the BOP pressure test. This will
include standpipe and choke manifolds, kelly / top drive, rotary hose and automatic, manual
and stand-by stab-in safety valves.
Note: Test pressures will be specified in the Drilling Programme.

19.6.3.3 Run and set wear bushing.

19.6.3.4 If cement is above the liner lap, make up the slick assembly as specified in the Drilling
Programme. If not continue with, item 19.6.3.19.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Semi Submersible Drilling Revision: 0
Operations
18/05/2000
Section 19 Page 395 of 447

A typical “clean out” assembly would be:

(i) 8½" bit - no nozzles

(ii) Float sub c/w ported float valve
(iii) 12 x 6½" DC
(iv) 12 x HWDP

19.6.3.5 RIH to calculated TOC. Activate motion compensator to neutral string weight. Wash down
last 30 ft.
19.6.3.6 Clean out cement to within 5 ft of the top of the liner. The mud will be treated for cement
contamination. Record hardness of cement.
Under NO circumstances will the bit be rotated on top of the liner.

Typical parameters for casing clean out are:

i) Flowrate - to 350 gpm

ii) WOB - to 15000 lbs
iii) Rotary speed - 50-70 rpm

19.6.3.7 Circulate clean

19.6.3.8 POH.
19.6.3.9 Make up the following dual scraper assembly, as specified in the Drilling Programme.
A typical dual scraper assembly would be:

• 6" bit
• 7" rotating scraper
• X/O
• 18 x 4¾" DC
• 3½" DP - (see, Note i, below)
• PBR cleanout / dressing assembly - (see, Note ii, below)
• 9 5/8" rotating scraper
• X/O
• 7 x 6½" DC
• 6 x HWDP

Note: i) The PBR dressing mill will be spaced such that when landed on the liner, the bit and 9 5/8"
scraper are within 5-20 ft of the landing collar (or calculated TOC if plugs did not bump after
liner cementation) and top liner respectively.

ii) The PBR dressing and polishing mills will be spaced to suit the length of PBR as run.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Semi Submersible Drilling Revision: 0
Operations
18/05/2000
Section 19 Page 396 of 447

19.6.3.10 RIH to TOC.

19.6.3.11 Clean out cement to top of liner. Maintain maximum circulation rates.
19.6.3.12 Enter liner PBR with extreme caution.
19.6.3.13 Continue RIH to within 30 ft of landing collar or calculated TOC. Activate motion
compensator to neutral string weight.
19.6.3.14 Break circulation. Work string down slowly and tag dressing mill on top PBR. Confirm depth
measurement of liner top. Work string to polish PBR bore to remove any cement. Dress top
PBR with 30-60 RPM and 2-5000 lbs WOB. Maintain maximum circulation rates.
19.6.3.15 Circulate clean. Pump a viscous pill to remove any milled cuttings.
19.6.3.16 POH. Confirm PBR dressed from wear pattern on face of dressing mill.
19.6.3.17 Complete wireline logging programme.
The logging programme will include a gauge ring / junk basket to production packer setting
depth and cement bond log over the production casing and liner.

19.6.3.18 Pressure test liner lap against shear rams. The test pressure will be specified in the Drilling
Programme.
Note:

i) The pressure test will be performed as a leak-off test. The test pressure will be based on
future operations and will usually depend on pressure requirements of test tools. Reference
Well Control Manual section 4.7.1.

ii) If the pressure test fails a retrievable packer will be run and set at selected intervals to
identify the leak, if required. Adequate weight will be above the packer to prevent premature
unseating.

If the liner lap is leaking a tie-back packer will be set. Refer to DOM section 19.8.

19.6.3.19 If there is no cement above the liner lap, make up dual scraper assembly, reference item
19.6.3.9. RIH and continue with items 19.6.3.12 –19.6.3.18 and 19.6.3.20.
19.6.3.20 Prepare for production testing.
19.6.3.21 Following production testing the future use of the well will be ascertained and the well will
be suspended or abandoned and seabed surveyed and certified clear as specified in the
DOM section 17, Suspension and Abandonment.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Semi Submersible Drilling Revision: 0
Operations
18/05/2000
Section 19 Page 397 of 447

19.6.4 Equipment Check List

The Drilling Programme will specify the:

i) Drillpipe weight and grade

ii) 7" liner weight, grade and thread type
iii) 7" liner hanger assembly
iv) Pressure rating of well control equipment

19.6.4.1 Drilling 8½" Hole

Note:
This is a complete equipment list covering several potential scenarios. The drilling programme will point out
relevant deletions or any additions.

ITEM QUANTITY DESCRIPTION

1 As required 8½" rock bit, c/w nozzles, bit breaker and bit gauge ring, 4½" Reg pin

2 As required 8½" PDC bit, c/w nozzles and bit breaker 4½" Reg pin

3 2 Totco ring for 4½" Reg conns

4 2 8½" integral blade near bit stabiliser, 4½" Reg box x 4½" IF box

5 4 8½" integral blade string stabiliser, 4½" IF conns

6 2 8½" integral blade non-magnetic string stabiliser, 4½" IF conns

7 2 MWD, 4½" IF conns

8 2 6½" non-magnetic drill collar, 4½" IF conns

9 2 6½" short non-magnetic drill collar, 4½" IF conns

10 2 Circulating sub, c/w drop ball and spares kit, 4½" IF conns

11 2 16½" steel drill collar, 4½" IF conns (30 available)

12 2 6½" short steel drill 4½ IF conns

13 2 6½" hydraulic drilling jar c/w lifting sub and safety sleeve, 4½" IF conns

14 2 Junk sub, 4½" Reg box x 4½" IF box

15 1 25" HWDP, 4½" IF conns (30 pcs available)

ITEM QUANTITY DESCRIPTION

16 As required 5" drillpipe, 4½" IF conns

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Semi Submersible Drilling Revision: 0
Operations
18/05/2000
Section 19 Page 398 of 447

17 2 sets 6½" drill collar hand slips and elevator

18 1 Drill collar safety clamp and spanner

19 2 sets 5" drillpipe hand slips and elevator

20 As required Drill collar, non-magnetic drill collar and drillpipe dope

2 11 Totco, 0 to 8° surveying equipment c/w barrel, sinker bars and overshot

22 As required Fishing equipment to catch all downhole equipment

23 600 ft 3½" drillpipe cement string, 3½" IF conns

24 1 X-over, 3½" pin x 4½" IF box

25 1 set 3½" drillpipe hand slips and elevator

26 1 3½" drillpipe single joint elevator

27 1 Circulating head, 4½" IF pin x 2" Weco fig 1502

28 1 2" Lo-torq valve, 2" Weco fig 1502

29 1 Standby stab-in safety valve and operating key, 4½" IF conns

30 1 Standby non return safety valve, 4½" IF conns

31 1 Drop-in dart sub, 4½" IF conns, with fishable dart and overshot

32 As required Mud chemicals

33 As required L.C.M. material in fine, medium and coarse

34 As required Cement and additives

35 As required Bulk barytes

36 As required Base oil

37 1 set OBM recovery equipment (if required)

ITEM QUANTITY DESCRIPTION

38 As required Shale shaker screens

39 As required Mud cleaner screens

40 As required Formation cutting sample boxes, c/w lids and nails

41 2 Mud saver, if OBM used, 4½" IF conns

42 1 suite Wireline logging tools c/w fishing equipment

43 1 set Electronic multishot survey equipment c/w barrel, sinker bars and overshot

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Semi Submersible Drilling Revision: 0
Operations
18/05/2000
Section 19 Page 399 of 447

44 1 Wear bushing retrieving tool

45 As required Corehead c/w breaker

46 As required Corebarrel and associated equipment

47 1 Corebarrel tool box

48 As required Core wooden sample boxes, c/w lids and nails

49 As required Geologist coring requirements

50 1 9 5/8" RTTS, or similar, c/w circulating sleeve and safety joint, 4½" IF
conns

51 1 9 5/8" casing scraper c/w x-over to 4½" IF box

52 1 Ditch magnet

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Semi Submersible Drilling Revision: 0
Operations
18/05/2000
Section 19 Page 400 of 447

19.6.5 7” Liner: Running and Cementing

If the 7" liner is a "drilling liner", the float equipment, landing collar and cement displacement plugs
will be PDC compatible. The landing collar and displacement plug will be non-rotational.

If the 7" liner is a "production liner", the shoetrack components will not be PDC compatible and non-
rotational.

ITEM QUANTITY DESCRIPTION

1 1 7" liner float shoe joint

2 1 7" liner float collar joint

3 1 7" landing collar joint

4 As required 7" liner

5 As required 7" liner pup joint

6 2 7" liner intermediate joint

7 1 each Spare float shoe and collar and landing collar

8 2 7" liner hanger assembly c/w extension

9 2 7" liner running tool c/w slick cementing stinger, 4½" IF box

10 2 Bumper subs

11 2 Liner hanger setting ball

12 2 Liner wiper plug

13 2 Drillpipe / liner wiper plug dart

14 1 Single plug container and pumping manifold c/w heavy duty swivel and
drillpipe lifting sub, 4½" IF pin

15 1 Cementing kelly, 4½" IF pin c/w drive bushing

16 1 set Torque / turn liner make up equipment

17 2 7" stab-in guides

18 1 7" casing drift

19 As required 7" spring centraliser and nails

ITEM QUANTITY DESCRIPTION

20 As required 7" rigid centraliser and nails

21 As required 7" centraliser stop collar and nails

22 2 7" side door elevator

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Semi Submersible Drilling Revision: 0
Operations
18/05/2000
Section 19 Page 401 of 447

23 2 7" casing hand slips

24 2 7" single joint elevator

25 1 7" safety clamp c/w spanner

26 2 7" power tong

27 1 Power pack

28 1 set 7" tong jaws for an including manual rig tongs

29 1 7" casing spear, 4½" IF box

30 1 7" circulating swage, casing thread pin x 2" Weco fig 1502

31 1 2" Lo-torq valve, 2" Weco fig 1502

32 1 Circulating head, 4½" IF pin x 2" Weco fig 1502

33 4 7" rubber inflatable thread protector

34 3 Bakerlok

35 As required API modified casing dope

36 1 'RA' radioactive tag

37 As required Cement and additives including chemical wash and spacer requirements

38 1 Bubble batch blender, air compressor and hose fittings

39 As required 4" x 4" dunnage

40 1 BOP test tool c/w spare seals

19.6.6 7” Liner Clean Out

ITEM QUANTITY DESCRIPTION

1 As required 8½" rock bit, bit breaker and bit gauge ring, 4½" Reg pin

2 As required 6" rock bit, bit breaker and gauge ring, 3½" Reg pin

3 2 Float sub, 4½" Reg box x 4½" IF box

4 2 Float valve, non ported for 4½" Reg conns

5 12 6½" steel drill collar, 4½" IF conns (30 available)

6 2 Junk sub, 4½" Reg box x 4½" IF box

7 2 Junk sub, 3½" Reg box x 3½" IF box

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Semi Submersible Drilling Revision: 0
Operations
18/05/2000
Section 19 Page 402 of 447

8 12 5" HWDP, 4½" IF conns (30 available)

9 As required 5" drillpipe, 4½" IF conns

10 2 sets 6½" drill collar hand slips and elevator

11 1 6½" drill collar safety clamp and spanner

12 2 sets 5" drillpipe hand slips and elevator

13 As required Drill collar and drillpipe dope

14 1 7" rotating scraper, 3½" Reg box x pin

15 1 X-over, 3½" Reg box x 3½" IF box

16 18 4¾" drill collar, 3½" IF conns (30 available)

17 As required 3½" drillpipe, 3½" IF conns

18 1 PBR cleanout/dressing assembly, 3½" IF pin x 4½" Reg pin

19 1 9 5/8” rotating scraper, 4½" Reg box x pin

20 1 X-over, 4½" Reg box x 4½" IF box

21 1 set 4¾" drill collar hand slips and elevator

22 1 4¾" drill collar safety clamp and spanner

23 1 3½" drillpipe hand slips and elevator

ITEM QUANTITY DESCRIPTION

24 1 3½" drillpipe single joint elevator

25 1 each Standby stab-in safety valve and operating key, 4½" IF and 3½" IF conns

26 1 each Standby non return safety valve, 4½" IF and 3½" IF conns

27 1 set Manual rig tongs with jaws to cover range 3½"-4¾"

28 As required Fishing equipment to catch all downhole equipment when working in casing
and liner

29 1 suite Cased hole wireline logging tools c/w fishing equipment

30 1 Circulating head, 4½" IF pin x 2" Weco fig 1502

31 1 Circulating head, 3½" IF pin x 2" Weco

32 1 2" Lo-torq valve, 2" Weco fig 1502

33 1 each RTTS or similar, c/w circulating sleeve and

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Semi Submersible Drilling Revision: 0
Operations
18/05/2000
Section 19 Page 403 of 447

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Semi Submersible Drilling Revision: 0
Operations
18/05/2000
Section 19 Page 404 of 447

19.7 6” HOLE / 5" PRODUCTION LINER

19.7.1 Drilling 6" Hole
The Drilling Supervisor will ensure that all personnel and equipment for drilling and coring (as
required) the 6" hole are on the rig. All equipment will have been checked and functioned as
appropriate and fit for purpose.

DOM section 4, reference items 1.0 and 2.0 will be fully compiled with, prior to and during
drilling the 6" hole section.

Final total depth (TD) will be advised in the Drilling Programme.

BOP and / or choke drills will be implemented in accordance with instructions included in the
Well Control Manual.

H2S procedures will apply, as appropriate. Refer to Well Control Manual section 7.10.11.

The liner lap will be tested with a positive test. Inflow tests are only be approved by the Drilling
Superintendent.

19.7.1.1 Retrieve wear bushing. Run BOP stack test tool directly below a painted single of drillpipe.
Pipe ram impressions on this single will confirm the space out for the emergency hang-off
tool, reference 19.4.1.2.
19.7.1.2 Pressure test wellhead connector, pipe rams, annular, failsafe valves and kill and choke lines
on one pod. Operate each BOP function with the opposite pod from local and remote
operating stations. Record time taken and fluid used for each function. The surface
equipment will be pressure tested in conjunction with the BOP pressure test. This will
include standpipe and choke manifolds, kelly / top drive, rotary hose and automatic, manual
and stand-by stab-in safety valves.
Note:Test pressures will be specified in the Drilling Programme.

19.7.1.3 Run and set wear bushing.

19.7.1.4 Make up plug container and pump manifold c/w heavy duty swivel and drillpipe lifting sub
with liner hanger setting ball and drillpipe / liner wiper plug release dart installed to a joint of
drillpipe or cementing kelly and lay out. The ball release mechanism and plug release will
be secured locked shut.
The Drilling Supervisor will witness ball and dart loading operations.

Note: The liner hanger setting ball will be omitted for mechanical set liner hangers.

19.7.1.5 If cement is above the liner lap, and wireline logging is required before drilling the shoetrack
lay out 8½" hole assembly and make up the slick assembly as specified in the Drilling
Programme. If not applicable, item 19.7.1.20 will apply.
The wireline logging programme will include:

i) A wear log when the 6" hole section is expected to exceed 30 days. It will be run over the
production casing and drilling liner. It will be re-run after 30 days and results compared. A
gauge ring / junk basket will precede the wear log and will be run over the entire anticipated
logged interval.

and / or

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Semi Submersible Drilling Revision: 0
Operations
18/05/2000
Section 19 Page 405 of 447

ii) A cement bond log over the production casing and drilling liner, if not previously completed.

A typical “slick” assembly would be:

8½" bit - no nozzles

Float sub - ported float valve
12 x 6½" DC
12 x HWDP

19.7.1.6 RIH to calculated TOC. Activate motion compensator to neutral string weight. Wash down
last 30 ft.
19.7.1.7 Clean out cement to within 5 ft of the top of the liner. The mud will be treated for cement
contamination. Record hardness of cement.
Under NO circumstances will the bit rotate on top of the liner.

Typical parameters for casing clean out are:

i) Flowrate - to 300 gpm

ii) WOB - to 15000 lbs
iii) Rotary speed - 50-70 rpm

19.7.1.8 Circulate clean.

19.7.1.9 POH.
19.7.1.10 Make up the dual scraper assembly as specified in the Drilling Programme.
A typical dual scraper assembly would be:

• 6" bit
• 7" rotating scraper
• X/O
• 4¾" DC - total will be for subsequent assemblies, reference item 19.7.1.20,
Note ii) after BHA's.
• 3½" DP - see, Note i)
• PBR cleanout/dressing assembly - see, Note ii)
• 9 5/8" rotating scraper
• X/O
• 6 x 6½" DC
• 6 x HWDP
Note:

i) The PBR dressing mill will be spaced that when landed at top liner, the bit and 9 5/8" scraper
are within 20ft / 6 ft of the landing collar (or calculated TOC if plugs did not bump in liner
cementation) and top liner respectively.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Semi Submersible Drilling Revision: 0
Operations
18/05/2000
Section 19 Page 406 of 447

ii) The PBR dressing and polishing mills will be spaced to suit the length of PBR as run.

19.7.1.11 RIH to TOC.

19.7.1.12 Clean out cement to top of liner. Maintain maximum circulation rates.
19.7.1.13 Enter liner PBR with extreme caution.
19.7.1.14 Continue RIH to within 30 ft of landing collar or calculated TOC. Activate motion
compensator to neutral string weight.
19.7.1.15 Break circulation. Work string down slowly and tag dressing mill on top of PBR. Confirm
depth measurement of liner top. Work string to polish PBR bore to remove any cement.
Dress top PBR with 30-60 RPM and 2-5000 lbs WOB. Maintain maximum circulation rates.
19.7.1.16 Circulate clean. Pump a viscous pill to remove any milled cuttings.
19.7.1.17 POH. Confirm PBR dressed from wear pattern on face of dressing mill.
19.7.1.18 Complete wireline logging programme.
19.7.1.19 Pressure test liner lap against shear rams. The test pressure will be specified in the Drilling
Programme.
Note:

i) The pressure test will be performed as a leak-off test. The test pressure will depend on future
requirements.

ii) If the pressure test fails, a retrievable packer will be run and set at selected intervals to identify
the leak, if required. Adequate weight will be above the packer to prevent premature
unseating. If the liner lap is leaking, a tie-back packer will be set. Refer to DOM section 19.8,
Tieback packer.

Continue with item 19.7.1.20.

19.7.1.20 If there is no cement above the liner lap and:

i) wireline logging is required, make-up dual scraper assembly, RIH and continue with items
19.7.1.13 – 19.7.1.19.

ii) if logging is not required or already completed, continue with the locked assembly as specified
in the Drilling Programme.

A typical “locked” assembly would be:

• 6" bit - see, Note i)

• 6" near bit stabiliser
• Totco ring
• 1 x 4¾" SDC (or SNMDC)
• 6" stabiliser (or NM stabiliser)
• 1 x 4¾" DC (or NMDC)
• 6" stabiliser
• 4¾" DC - as required, see, Note ii)
• JAR

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Semi Submersible Drilling Revision: 0
Operations
18/05/2000
Section 19 Page 407 of 447

• 4 x 4¾" DC
• 3½" DP - as required, see, Note iii)
• X/O - see, Note iii)
• 1 x HWDP
• Drop-in dart sub
• 11 x HWDP

If the hole inclination is to be reduced, a pendulum assembly will be run.

A typical “pendulum” assembly would be:

• 6" bit - see, Note i)

• Totco ring
• 1 x 4¾" SDC (or SNMDC)
• 1 x 4¾" DC (or NMDC)
• 6" stabiliser
• 1 x 4¾" DC
• 6" stabiliser
• 4¾" DC - as required, see, Note ii)
• as previous locked assembly

If MWD formation evaluation is required in the 6" hole section it will be complete with
directional read out facilities. When assembled in the BHA it will be function checked prior to
passing through the rotary table.

A typical “locked” assembly incorporating MWD facilities would be:

• 6" bit - see, Note i)

• 6" near bit stabiliser
• MWD
• Totco ring
• 6" stabiliser (or NM stabiliser)
• 1 x 4¾" DC (or NMDC)
• 6" stabiliser
• 4¾" DC - as required see, Note ii)
• as previous locked assembly

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Semi Submersible Drilling Revision: 0
Operations
18/05/2000
Section 19 Page 408 of 447

A typical “pendulum” assembly incorporating MWD facilities would be:

• 6" bit - see, Note i)

• MWD
• Totco ring
• 1 x 4¾" DC (or NMDC)
• 6" stabiliser (or NM stabiliser)
• 1 x 4¾" DC
• 6" stabiliser
• 4¾" DC - as required, see, Note ii)
• as previous locked assembly.
Note:

i) PDC or similar bits will be considered to drill the shoe track and subsequent open hole.
Tricone bits in slim hole are unpredictable.

ii) The drill collar assembly length will be minimised to the maximum drill bit weight required.

iii) The 3½" drillpipe will be spaced to ensure, with the bit at the deepest prognosed total depth,
the 3½" / 5" drillpipe cross-over is above the top of the liner.

iv) To minimise drillstring torque a mud motor or turbine with a reduced BHA will be considered.

v) The 6" BHA's will only contain junk subs and non-magnetic drill collars (NMDC), short non-
magnetic drill collars (SNMDC) or non-magnetic stabilisers (NM stabilisers) where it is
predicted or known that the assembly going in the hole will reach coring point or final TD
(when a multishot survey will be run).

19.7.1.21 Enter liner PBR with extreme caution.

19.7.1.22 Continue RIH to landing collar or calculated TOC if plugs did not bump in liner cementation.
Wash down last 30 ft.
19.7.1.23 Circulate clean.
19.7.1.24 Pressure test liner lap against pipe rams. The test pressure will be specified in the Drilling
Programme.
Notes:

i) The pressure test will be performed as a leak-off test. The test pressure will not exceed the
previous shoe strength.

ii) If the pressure test fails, a retrievable packer will be run and set at selected intervals to identify
the leak, if required. Adequate weight will be above the packer to prevent premature
unseating. If the liner lap is leaking, a tie-back packer will be set. Refer to DOM section 19.8,
Tieback packer.

19.7.1.25 Drill out cement, displacement plugs, float equipment and clean out pocket to previous
section TD. The mud will be treated for cement contamination. Record hardness of cement
in shoetrack and amount of cement if any, below the float shoe.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Semi Submersible Drilling Revision: 0
Operations
18/05/2000
Section 19 Page 409 of 447

Typical parameters for liner clean out and until stabilisers are in open hole are:

i) Flowrate - to 250 gpm

ii) WOB - to 15000 lbs, but dependant on bit type
iii) Rotary speed - 50 to 70 rpm

19.7.1.26 Drill 20 ft of new formation.

19.7.1.27 Circulate the mud system in balance and pull into liner shoe.
19.7.1.28 Pressure test surface lines to 1000 psi above expected formation test pressure. Carry out
formation leak-off test. The Drilling Programme will specify whether the leak-off test will be
to leak-off or limited to a specified value.
Note:

The Drilling Superintendent will be advised if the anticipated leak-off is not obtained.

Send these details to the Drilling Superintendent.

19.7.1.29 Drill / core 6" hole to total depth.

Typical drilling parameters are:

i) Flowrate - to 300 gpm

ii) WOB - as required. The maximum will be 80% of drill collar

weight below the jar.

iii) Rotary speed - as required. The maximum will be to

manufacturers recommendations.

For Additional guidelines refer to item 19.4.1.10 suitably adjusted for 6” hole.

19.7.1.30 When an objective is identified and coring necessary, the following will apply. If at total
depth continue with item 19.7.1.48.
19.7.1.31 Circulate and condition mud for coring. Continue to circulate until hole is clean and mud in
balance and gas free. A 200 psi trip margin will be applied if formation pressure is known.
19.7.1.32 Take inclination survey and drop totco survey barrel. The survey barrel will drift the
drillstring to the totco ring and ensure safe passage of the core barrel circulating ball.
19.7.1.33 POH. Ream any tight spots clean. A drillpipe wiper rubber will be used to prevent any junk
falling into the hole. Check the bit for gauge size. If significantly under gauge a check trip in
the hole will be made with a full gauge bit. Empty the junk basket if run. Dependent on
recovery, a further junk run in the hole may be required.
19.7.1.34 Make up stabilised core barrel assembly. The stabilisers will be of the correct gauge, inner
barrel space out distance correct and bearing assembly serviced before RIH.
Core barrels will be with heavy duty threads to reduce connection belling and limited to 30 ft
in length.

A typical core barrel assembly would be:

• 6" core head

• Stabilised core barrel – 100 ft maximum

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Semi Submersible Drilling Revision: 0
Operations
18/05/2000
Section 19 Page 410 of 447

• X/O
• 6" stabiliser
• 4¾" DC - as required, see, Note i)
• JAR
• 4 x 4¾" DC
• 3½" DP - see, Note ii)
• X/O - see, Note ii)
• 1 x HWDP
• Drop-in dart sub
• 11 x HWDP

Notes:

i) The drill collar assembly length will be minimised to the maximum core head weight required.

ii) The 3½" drillpipe will be spaced to ensure, with the core head at the deepest prognosed
depth, the 3½" / 5" drillpipe cross-over is above the top of the liner.

iii) Core barrels and heads are supplied by a number of manufacturers. The systems differ in
design but not in principle. NPL does not state any preference for any manufacturer or design.
The applicable suppliers service manual will be on the rig.

Procedures for drilling the 6” core are similar to 12 ¼” section reference 19.5.1.14 –
19.5.1.36.

19.7.1.35 RIH with coring assembly slowly. Use drillpipe wiper rubber at all times. Ream as required.
Circulation will be maximised with low RPM and WOB. If hard reaming trip the core barrel
and RIH for a check trip.
19.7.1.36 Wash down last 50 ft. Tag bottom with high circulation rate. Wash the bottom of the hole
with no rotation. Space out to maximise continuous coring before a connection. Pup joints
will not be across the BOP stack at any time during coring operations.
19.7.1.37 Circulate bottoms up. Ensure mud system gas free.
19.7.1.38 Drop core barrel circulating ball. Seat same. Take SCR's and record on and off bottom
pressures.
19.7.1.39 Cut core as required.
19.7.1.40 Circulate until mud is in balance and with a 200 psi trip margin, if appropriate. The
overbalance will minimise the increased swabbing potential.
19.7.1.41 POH. Do not rotate drillstring. Stage circulation via open chokes to remove trapped gas
when POH may be required. This is more applicable to HPHT wells.
19.7.1.42 Recover core. When handling the core barrel, a safety clamp will be used at all times. With
further coring required, check core head and inner barrel space out and service bearing
assembly.
19.7.1.43 Repeat items19.7.1.1.35 - 19.7.1.43.
19.7.1.44 Lay out core barrel. Break all connections.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Semi Submersible Drilling Revision: 0
Operations
18/05/2000
Section 19 Page 411 of 447

19.7.1.45 RIH with previous drilling locked assembly to the top of the cored section.
19.7.1.46 Ream cored section with caution. Circulation will be maximised with low WOB and RPM as
slow as possible.
19.7.1.47 Drill to total depth.
19.7.1.48 Circulate bottoms up and continue until hole is clean and mud in balance, gas free and with
a 200 psi trip margin, if appropriate.
19.7.1.49 Make a wiper trip to casing shoe. Ream tight spots until clean. Check for fill.
19.7.1.50 Circulate and condition mud for logging, if required, and running liner.
19.7.1.51 Drop tandem electronic multishot survey (EMS) barrel.

Note:

If MWD is incorporated in the BHA, and directional data is functional, the EMS will not be required.

19.7.1.52 POH. If hole conditions are adverse repeat items 19.7.1.48 – 19.7.1.52, omitting 19.7.1.51,
until the hole is in good condition. Strap out. Recover survey barrel.
19.7.1.53 Rig up and run electric logging programme. Wiper trips during logging programme will be as
required and in accordance with the drilling programme.
Note:

i) The logged and drilled depths will be compatible. Any major depth discrepancies will be resolved.

ii) The liner running string will be drifted in the derrick during wireline logging.

19.7.1.54 RIH for wiper trip, as required. Ream any tight spots. Check for fill.
Note:

If logging operation indicated the hole to be in good condition, a wiper trip may be omitted. This will be
discussed with the Drilling Superintendent.

19.7.1.55 Circulate and condition mud for running liner. Continue to circulate until the hole is clean
and mud in balance, gas free and with a 200 psi trip margin, if appropriate. Drop EMS
barrel if previous survey was unsuccessful (if appropriate).
19.7.1.56 POH.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Semi Submersible Drilling Revision: 0
Operations
18/05/2000
Section 19 Page 412 of 447

19.7.2 5” Liner: Running and Cementing

Procedures for running and cementing 5” liner are similar to 7” liner, refer to DOM section
19.6.2.

A 5" liner will be run when a well is to be production tested.

The Drilling Supervisor will ensure that all personnel and equipment for running and cementing
the liner are on the rig. All equipment will have been checked and functioned as appropriate
and fit for purpose. Cement accessories will be compatible with the float equipment.

The stabbing board will be surveyed, as per standard list, as fit for purpose. The Casing Crew
Chief and Toolpusher will sign to this affect. The survey will be completed prior to any use of
the stabbing board.

The liner specification and liner weight, grade and thread type will be specified in the Drilling
Programme. The liner hanger assembly will include tie-back and integral packer facilities. It will
be hydraulically set. Mechanically set liner hangers will only be used when operational
requirements preclude the use of hydraulically set liner hangers.

The foregoing procedures are applicable to mechanical set liner hangers except for the
pressure limitation in item 19.7.2.8, reference, Note.

The Drilling Supervisor will chair a safety / operations meeting with the OIM, Toolpusher, rig
crew and relevant third party personnel before running and cementing the liner. The topics
discussed will be:

• To acquaint all parties with the liner and cementing operations.

• To discuss any problems foreseen and highlight areas of concern and critical
operations.
• To ensure all personnel conduct themselves in a safe and correct manner when
handling tubulars.
The liner will be spaced to place the float shoe 5 ft above final TD and the liner hanger midway
in a liner joint.

The liner lap will be ± 500 ft. With high temperature applications it may be necessary to tie-
back the liner to the wellhead.

The liner will be cemented in a single stage using a sub-sea release (SSR) plug system. The
cement slurry will be a single formulation and when practical, batch mixed to achieve a
homogeneous slurry.

Liner hangers and accessories are supplied by a number of manufacturers. The systems differ
in design but not in principle. NPL does not state any preference for any manufacturer or
design. The applicable supplier service manual will be on the rig.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Semi Submersible Drilling Revision: 0
Operations
18/05/2000
Section 19 Page 413 of 447

19.7.2.1 The production casing and drilling liner will be pressure tested prior to running the 5” liner if
any casing wear has been identified.
Note:

A retrievable packer will be set 400 ft above the float shoe and the drillpipe / casing liner annulus
pressure tested. The test pressure will not exceed the previous shoe strength.

19.7.2.2 Prior to running liner, ensure, as appropriate, the assembly specified in 19.7.1.4, is prepared.
19.7.2.3 Rig up to run the liner.
19.7.2.4 Make up 150 ft shoetrack, (reference DOM section 6.3.2). Flush through shoetrack to ensure
correct float equipment operation. Threadlock connections as per running programme.
19.7.2.5 Continue to run liner as per running programme to liner hanger assembly. The programme
will clearly state the position of centralisers, threadlocked connections and additional casing
components. Short joints and / or radioactive marker will be strategically placed in the liner,
as required, for subsequent depth reference. The depths will be determined after wireline
logging or other means.
Note:

The radioactive marker will only be handled by certified personnel.

• Use safety collar on the first 15 joints of liner.

• Liner threads will be checked by an independent inspector, prior to make-up.
• Connections will be torqued to the manufacturers specifications. Torque turn
equipment will be used, as required.
• Each joint will be filled, as run, and completely filled every five joints.
• The maximum liner running speed will be regulated by the pressure surge
calculations calculated at the rig.
Note:

The Drilling supervisor will verify liner omitted not run corresponds to the liner running programme.

19.7.2.6 Pick up pre-assembled liner hanger / setting tool assembly. Make up liner wiper plug, shear
pinned as required, to setting tool slick joint. The shear out value is normally ± 800 psi.
Note:

The Drilling Supervisor will witness the setting of shear pins.

19.7.2.7 Make up assembly to liner. Function check running tool releasing mechanism, hanger cage
and slip assembly.
19.7.2.8 Break circulation slowly and circulate liner contents plus 25%. Visually inspect hanger
assembly / setting tool for leaks.
Note:

At all times, prior to setting the liner hanger, circulation pressure will be limited to manufacturers
recommendation. The range of pressure / circulation rates up to this value and pick-up and slack-off
rates will be recorded.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Semi Submersible Drilling Revision: 0
Operations
18/05/2000
Section 19 Page 414 of 447

19.7.2.9 Run liner on 3½" / 5" drillpipe running string to drilling liner shoe. HWDP will not be used.
Bumper subs may be used in adverse weather conditions.
The 3½" drillpipe will be spaced to ensure, with liner shoe on bottom, the 3½" / 5" drillpipe
cross-over is above the top of the 7" liner.

• Pass through BOP stack with liner hanger assembly with care.
• The running string and all associated components will have been drifted to ensure
clear passage for the liner hanger setting ball and drillpipe / liner wiper release dart.
All drillpipe rubber protectors will be removed.
• A drillpipe wiper rubber will be used to prevent any junk falling into the hole.
• Ensure running string does not rotate when making connections. A back-up tong
will be used at all times.
• Each stand of drillpipe will be filled as run, and completely filled after every five
stands.
• The maximum liner running speed will be regulated by the pressure surge
calculations.
• Enter 7" liner PBR with float shoe and liner hanger and packer with extreme caution.
• The mud logging unit will monitor returns for indication of gains or losses. The Driller
will be advised of pit levels at all times.
19.7.2.10 Break circulation slowly and circulate drillpipe running string and liner contents plus 20%.
Item 19.7.2.8, Note, will apply.
19.7.2.11 Continue RIH with running string.
Note:

Care will be taken passing intervals that proved sensitive during drilling. If circulation is necessary,
flowrate will be increased slowly. The annulus must not pack-off. Excessive differential pressure
within the liner may prematurely set the liner hanger. The circulation pressure will be limited to
manufacturers recommendation.

Do not slack off more than 80% of liner weight.

19.7.2.12 Pick up drillpipe or cementing kelly with plug container.

19.7.2.13 If hole conditions permit, rig up for circulation. There will be sufficient circulation hose to
pick up clear of PBR after liner cementation. It will be manifolded to facilitate immediate
circulation using either the mud pumps or cement unit. Break circulation slowly. Item 19.7.
2.8, Note, will apply.
Activate motion compensator. Set to neutral string weight. Record pick-up and slack-off
weights. Wash down and tag bottom with 5000 lbs. Pull back 5 ft. There will be sufficient
overstand above the rotary table to compensate for the heave of the rig during cementing
and to set liner shoe on bottom if required. Confirm total depth measurement.

19.7.2.14 Rig up for cementation. Pressure test surface lines to 1000 psi above liner test pressure.
Break circulation slowly. Item 19.7.2.8, Note will apply. Circulate at least liner contents plus
20% or annular volume plus 20%, whichever is greater. Circulation rate will be the highest
possible for maximum mud removal but consistent with not inducing losses. The mud
condition will be appropriate for cementing and gas free. Circulation will continue until these

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Semi Submersible Drilling Revision: 0
Operations
18/05/2000
Section 19 Page 415 of 447

conditions are met. The maximum ECD attained when drilling the 6" hole will not be
exceeded.
Note:

Constant observation of the pump pressure will be maintained at all times to detect possible plugging
of the annulus.

19.7.2.15 Release liner hanger setting ball. Circulate down to a maximum rate of 3 bbl/min. 19.7. 2.8,
Note, pressure limitation, will apply. Seat ball.
Note:

The Drilling Supervisor will witness the liner hanger setting ball release and drop indicator movement.

Set liner hanger thus:

• Pressure liner in ± 500 psi stages to 1600 psi. The hanger setting pressure is
normally ± 1500 psi. Hold pressure for 10 mins. Release pressure.
• Slack-off liner weight to confirm liner hanger set.
If set:

• Set down with 15,000 lbs weight. Shear setting ball from shear sub. The shear
pressure is normally ± 3000 psi.
If not set:

• Pull off bottom 5 ft.

• Pressure liner in 200 psi increments over normal liner hanger setting pressure to
setting ball shear out. A check for set will be made after each pressure increase.
• If unsuccessful, at setting ball shear out, set liner shoe on bottom.
The liner setting and shear out pressures will be specified in the Drilling Programme.

Note:

A mechanical liner hanger is set with RH rotation and slack-off weight. If not set, the liner shoe will be
set on bottom.

19.7.2.16 Pick up running string drag weight minus 20000 lbs. Release running tool with RH rotation.
Pick up running string weight plus 3 ft to ensure running tool has released. Set down on
liner hanger. The weight will be specified in the Drilling Programme. It must counteract the
pump-up force when liner wiper plug is bumped.
19.7.2.17 Break circulation slowly. Establish circulation and record circulation pressures at 1 bpm
intervals to the maximum ECD attained when drilling the 6" hole.
Circulation rate will be the highest possible for maximum mud removal but consistent with
not inducing losses. The mud condition will be appropriate for cementing and gas free.
Circulation will continue until these conditions are met.

The mud logging unit will monitor returns for indication of gains or losses. The Driller will be
advised of pit levels at all times.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Semi Submersible Drilling Revision: 0
Operations
18/05/2000
Section 19 Page 416 of 447

19.7.2.18 Mix cement slurry in batch tank whilst circulating. Slurry volume will place TOC 200 ft above
top of liner with drillpipe removed. Excess will be 20% over theoretical cased open hole
annular volume or 10% over 4 arm caliper integrated annular volume.
Note:

The rig will receive the cement formulation and computer simulation design of cement placement 48
hours before the casing cementation.

19.7.2.19 Cement liner thus:

• Pump chemical wash and weighted spacer as required. The reduction in hydrostatic
head from chemical wash will not compromise well integrity.
• Pump slurry from batch mixer. The slurry properties will be completely
homogeneous. If batch mixing is impractical, mix cement conventionally.
• Release drillpipe / liner wiper plug dart.
• Displace dart to liner wiper plug. The cement unit will be used for displacement.
Displacement rate will be reduced to 2 bpm within 10% of calculated displacement
volume prior to dart / plug engagement.
• Shear out liner wiper plug. Record pressure. The shear out pressure will be
specified in the Drilling Programme.
Note:

The Drilling Supervisor will witness the drillpipe / liner wiper plug dart release and drop indicator
movement.

• Displace cement. The cement unit will be used for displacement. Displacement
volume will be measured from the cement unit displacement tanks. There will be
sufficient surface mud pit storage capacity for cement displacement volume. The
mud logging unit will monitor returns for indications of gains or losses. The Driller will
be advised of pit levels at all times. Displacement rate will be reduced to 2-3 bpm
within 10 bbls of total calculated displacement volume and differential pumping
pressure recorded.
• Bump liner wiper plug and pressure test liner for 10 minutes. The pressure will be
specified in the Drilling Programme. Record volume needed from bump to final
casing pressure.
Note:

i) If liner wiper plug shear was not observed, displacement will be the theoretical liner volume.

ii) If observed, record pump efficiency at shear. The displacement will be the calculated liner
volume from liner wiper plug to landing collar from time of shear.

iii) The cement unit operator will be vigilant in monitoring tank fill / change over to minimise
displacement inaccuracies.

iv) There will be no over displacement if wiper plug fails to bump in i) and ii) above.

19.7.2.20 Release test pressure and check float equipment. If backflow is evident and;
• Liner wiper plug bumped,

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Semi Submersible Drilling Revision: 0
Operations
18/05/2000
Section 19 Page 417 of 447

• Displace bled volume into running string. Pressure liner to original test pressure.
Check for backflow. If positive, repeat as required.
• Liner wiper plug not bumped,
• Displace bled volume into running string. Check for backflow. If positive, repeat
as required.
If float equipment is still malfunctioning continue with 19.7.2.21.

19.7.2.21 Pull back tie-back receptacle length. Set down weight to energise weight-set integral
packer, if applicable. The set down weight will be specified in the Drilling Programme.
19.7.2.22 If bump observed, pressure drillpipe to 100 psi. Pull back until pressure is lost. Seal sub on
setting tool will be at the top of PBR.
If bump not observed, pull back measured amount for seal sub to be clear of PBR.

19.7.2.23 Reverse circulate excess cement above PBR. Circulate clean conventionally.
19.7.2.24 POH. Lay out liner running tool.
19.7.2.25 Run jetting sub and jet wellhead area and BOP cavities if cement returns were observed at
surface while circulating conventionally.
19.7.2.26 Send these details to the Drilling Superintendent.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Semi Submersible Drilling Revision: 0
Operations
18/05/2000
Section 19 Page 418 of 447

19.7.3 5” Liner Clean Out

Procedures for 5” clean out are similar to 7” clean out. The liner will be cleaned out, pressure
tested and wireline logged prior to production testing.

The Drilling Supervisor will confirm, prior to liner cleanout, if the sump below the lowermost
perforations in adequate for well test conditions. If insufficient, a portion of the shoetrack may
be drilled and cleaned out.

The liner lap will be tested with a positive pressure test. Inflow tests are only with approval
from the Drilling Superintendent and procedures formulated.

The Drilling Supervisor will ensure that all personnel and equipment for liner clean out and
subsequent operations are on the rig. All equipment will have been checked and functioned,
as appropriate, and fit for purpose.

DOM section 4, reference items 1.0 and 2.0 will be fully complied with, prior to and during liner
clean out.

19.7.3.1 Retrieve wear bushing. Run BOP stack test tool directly below a painted single of drillpipe.
Pipe ram impressions on this single will confirm the space out for the emergency hang-off
tool.
19.7.3.2 Pressure test wellhead connector, pipe rams, annulars, failsafe valves and kill and
chokelines on one pod. Operate each BOP function with the opposite pod from local and
remote operating stations. Record time taken and fluid used for each function. The surface
equipment will be pressure tested in conjunction with the BOP pressure test. This will
include standpipe and choke manifolds, kelly / top drive, rotary hose and automatic, manual
and stand-by stab-in safety valves.
Note: Test pressures will be specified in the Drilling Programme.

19.7.3.3 Run and set wear bushing.

19.7.3.4 If cement is above the liner lap, make up the slick assembly as specified in the Drilling
Programme. If not applicable, 19.7.3.21 will apply.

A typical “slick” assembly would be:

• 6" bit - no nozzles

• Float sub - ported float valve
• 18 x 4¾" DC
• 3½" DP - see, Note
• X/O - see, Note
• 5" DP
Note:

The 3½" drillpipe will be spaced that with the bit 5 ft above the 5" liner, the 3½" / 5" drillpipe cross-
over is above the 7" liner.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Semi Submersible Drilling Revision: 0
Operations
18/05/2000
Section 19 Page 419 of 447

19.7.3.5 RIH to calculated TOC. Enter 7" PBR with extreme caution. Activate motion compensator to
neutral string weight. Wash down last 30 ft.
19.7.3.6 Clean out cement to within 5 ft of the top of the 5" liner. The mud will be treated for cement
contamination. Record hardness of cement.
Under NO circumstances will the bit rotate on top of the liner.

Typical parameters for liner clean out are:

i) Flowrate - to 250 gpm

ii) WOB - to 15000 lbs
iii) Rotary speed- 50-70 rpm

19.7.3.7 Circulate clean.

19.7.3.8 POH.
19.7.3.9 The rotational torque available on 2 7/8" drillpipe and 3 1/8" drill collars is minimal. The
cement above the liner lap, and the PBR will be cleaned out prior to any 2 7/8" drillpipe or 3
1/8" drill collars passing through the rotary table. Make up the following clean out assembly
as specified in the Drilling Programme.

A typical “clean” out assembly would be:

• PBR clean out / dressing assembly - see, Note i)

• 7" rotary scraper
• X/O
• 9 x 4¾" DC
• 3½" DP - see, Note ii)
• X/O
• 5" DP

Note:

i) The PBR dressing and polishing mills will be spaced to suit the length of PBR as run.

ii) The 3½" drillpipe will be spaced that with the PBR dressing mill landed on the 5" liner PBR the 3½"
/ 5" drillpipe cross-over is above the 7" liner.

19.7.3.10 RIH to TOC. Enter 7" liner PBR with extreme caution.
19.7.3.11 Activate motion compensator to neutral string weight. Clean out cement to top of 5" liner.
Maintain maximum circulation rates.
19.7.3.12 Enter 5" liner PBR with extreme caution. Work string to polish PBR bore to remove any
cement. Dress top PBR with 30-60 RPM and 2-5000 lbs WOB. Maintain maximum
circulation rates.
19.7.3.13 Circulate clean. Pump a viscous pill to remove any milled cuttings.
19.7.3.14 POH. Confirm PBR dressed from wear pattern on face of dressing mill.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Semi Submersible Drilling Revision: 0
Operations
18/05/2000
Section 19 Page 420 of 447

19.7.3.15 Make up the following dual scraper assembly, as specified in the Drilling Programme.

A typical “dual scraper” assembly would be:

• 4 1/8" bit
• 5" rotating scraper
• X/O
• 30 x 3 1/8" DC
• X/O
• 2 7/8" DP - see, Note
• PBR cleanout/dress assembly
• 7” rotating scraper
• X/O
• 3½" DP - see, Note
• X/O
• 5" DP

Note:

The 2 7/8" and 3½" drillpipe will be spaced that when the bit tags the landing collar (or calculated
TOC if plugs did not bump after liner cementation) the 2 7/8" / 3½" drillpipe and 3½ / 5" drillpipe cross-
overs are above the 5" and 7" liners respectively.

19.7.3.16 RIH and enter 7" and 5" PBR's with extreme caution.
19.7.3.17 Continue RIH to within 30 ft of landing collar or calculated TOC. Activate motion
compensator to neutral string weight.
19.7.3.18 Break circulation. Tag HUD. Record depth.
19.7.3.19 Circulate clean.
19.7.3.20 POH.
19.7.3.21 Complete wireline logging programme.
It will include a gauge ring / junk basket to production packer setting depth and cement
bond log over the production casing and drilling liner production liner, if not previously
completed.

19.7.3.22 Pressure test liner laps against shear rams. The test pressure will be specified in the
Drilling Programme.
Note:

i) The pressure test will be performed as a leak-off test. The test pressure will depend on future
requirements.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Semi Submersible Drilling Revision: 0
Operations
18/05/2000
Section 19 Page 421 of 447

ii) If the pressure test fails a retrievable packer will be run and set at selected intervals to identify
the leak, if required. Adequate weight will be above the packer to prevent premature
unseating.

iii) If the liner lap is leaking a tie-back packer will be set. Refer to DOM section 19.8, Tieback
packer.

19.7.3.23 If there is no cement above the liner lap, make up clean out assembly. RIH, enter 7" liner
with extreme caution and continue with items 19.7.3.12 to 19.7.3.22 and 19.7.3.24.
19.7.3.24 Prepare for production testing.
19.7.3.25 The well will be suspended or abandoned and seabed surveyed and certified clear.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Semi Submersible Drilling Revision: 0
Operations
18/05/2000
Section 19 Page 422 of 447

19.7.4 Equipment Check List

The Drilling Programme will specify the:

i) Drillpipe weight, grade and connections

ii) 5' liner weight, grade and thread type
iii) 5" liner hanger assembly
iv) Pressure rating of well control equipment

19.7.4.1 Drilling 6" Hole

Note:
This is a complete equipment list covering several potential scenarios. The drilling programme will point out
relevant deletions or any additions.

ITEM QUANTITY DESCRIPTION

1 As required 6" rock bit c/w nozzles, bit breaker and bit gauge ring, 3½" Reg pin

2 As required 6" PDC bit c/w nozzles and bit breaker 3½" Reg pin

3 2 Totco ring for 3½" Reg conns

4 2 Float sub, 4½" Reg box x 4½" IF box

5 2 Float valve, non ported, for 4½" Reg conns

6 2 Junk sub, 4½" Reg box x 4½" IF box

7 2 Junk sub, 3½" Reg box x 3½" IF box

8 12 5" HWDP, 4½" IF conns (30 available)

9 As required 5" drillpipe, 4½" IF conns

10 2 sets 5" drillpipe hand slips and elevator

11 As required Drill collar, non-magnetic drill collar and drillpipe dope

12 1 X-over, 3½" Reg box x 3½" IF box

13 18 4¾" steel drill collar, 3½" IF conns (30 available)

14 As required 3½" drillpipe, 3½" IF conns

15 1 PBR cleanout/dressing assembly, 3½" IF pin x 4½" Reg pin

16 1 X-over, 4½" Reg box x 4½" IF box

17 1 set 4¾" drill collar slips and elevator

18 1 4¾" drill collar safety clamp and spanner

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Semi Submersible Drilling Revision: 0
Operations
18/05/2000
Section 19 Page 423 of 447

19 1 set 3½" drillpipe slips and elevator

20 1 3½" drillpipe single joint elevator

21 1 each Standby stab-in safety valve and operating key, 4½" IF and 3½" IF conns

22 1 each Standby non return safety valve, 4½" IF and 3½" IF conns

23 1 X-over, 3½" IF pin x 4½" IF box

24 1 set Manual rig tongs with jaws to cover range 2 7/8"-4¾"

25 2 6" integral blade near bit stabiliser, 3½" Reg box x 3½" IF box

26 4 6" integral blade string stabiliser, 3½" IF conns

27 2 6" integral blade non magnetic string stabiliser, 3½" IF conns

28 2 MWD, 3½" IF conns

29 2 Teledrift and associated survey equipment, 3½" IF conns

30 2 4¾" non-magnetic drill collar, 3½" IF conns

31 2 4¾" short non-magnetic drill collar

32 2 4¾" short steel drill collars, 3½" IF conns

33 2 Circulating sub, c/w drop ball and spares kit, 3½" IF conns

34 2 4¾" hydraulic drilling jar, c/w lifting sub and safety sleeve, 3½" IF conns

35 1 Totco, 0 to 8° surveying equipment, c/w barrel, sinker bars and overshot

36 600 ft 2" tubing cement string, connections as applicable

37 1 X-over, 2 7/8" tubing pin x 3½" IF box

38 1 set 2 7/8" tubing slips and elevator

39 1 Drop-in dart sub, 4½" IF conns with fishable dart and overshot

40 As required Mud chemicals

41 As required L.C.M. material in fine, medium and coarse

42 As required Cement and additives

43 As required Bulk barytes

44 As required Base oil

45 1 set OBM recovery equipment (if necessary)

46 As required Shale shaker screens

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Semi Submersible Drilling Revision: 0
Operations
18/05/2000
Section 19 Page 424 of 447

47 As required Mud cleaner screens

48 As required Slimhole fishing equipment to catch all downhole equipment when working
in casing and liner

49 1 suite Cased and open hole wireline logging tools c/w fishing equipment

50 1 Circulating head, 4½" IF pin x 2" Weco fig 1502

51 1 Circulating head, 3½" IF pin x 2" Weco fig 1502

52 1 2" Lo-torq valve, 2" Weco fig 1502

53 As required Formation cutting sample boxes, c/w lids and nails

54 2 Mud saver, if OBM used, 4½" IF conns

55 1 set Electronic multishot survey equipment, c/w barrel, sinker bars and overshot

56 1 set Wearbushing retrieving tool

57 As required Corehead c/w breaker

58 As required Corebarrel and associated equipment

59 1 Corebarrel tool box

60 As required Core wooden sample boxes, c/w lids and nails

61 As required Geologists coring requirements

62 1 Ditch magnet

19.7.4.2 5” Liner: Running and Cementing

ITEM QUANTITY DESCRIPTION

1 1 5" liner float shoe joint

2 1 5" liner float collar joint

3 1 5" landing collar joint

4 As required 5" liner

5 As required 5" liner pup joint

6 3 5" liner intermediate joint

7 1 each Spare float shoe and collar and landing collar

8 2 5" liner hanger assembly c/w extension

9 2 5" liner running tool c/w slick cementing stinger, 3½" IF box

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Semi Submersible Drilling Revision: 0
Operations
18/05/2000
Section 19 Page 425 of 447

10 2 Bumper subs

11 2 Liner hanger setting ball

12 2 Liner wiper plug

13 2 3½" / 5" combination drillpipe / liner wiper plug dart

14 1 Single plug container and pumping manifold c/w heavy duty swivel and
drillpipe lifting sub, 4½" IF pin

15 1 Cementing kelly, 4½" IF pin c/w drive bushing

16 1 set Torque / turn liner make up equipment

17 2 5" stab-in glides

18 1 5" casing drift

19 As required 5" spring centraliser and nails

20 As required 5" rigid centraliser and nails

21 As required 5" centraliser stop collar and nails

22 2 5" side door elevator

23 2 5" casing hand slips

24 2 5" single joint elevator

25 1 5" safety clamp c/w spanner

26 2 Power tong dressed for 5" liner

27 1 Power pack

28 1 set 5" liner tong jaws for an including manual rig tongs

29 1 5" casing spear, 3½" IF box

30 1 5" circulating swage, casing thread pin x 2" Weco fig1502

31 1 2" Lo-torq valve, 2" Weco fig 1502

32 4 5" rubber inflatable thread protector

33 3 Bakerlok

34 As required API modified casing dope

35 1 'RA' radioactive tag

36 As required Cement and additives including chemical wash and spacer requirements

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Semi Submersible Drilling Revision: 0
Operations
18/05/2000
Section 19 Page 426 of 447

37 1 Bubble batch blender, air compressor and hose fittings

38 As required 4" x 4" dunnage

39 1 BOP test tool c/w spare seals

19.7.4.3 5” Liner Clean Out

ITEM QUANTITY DESCRIPTION

2 As required 4 1/8" rock bit, bit breaker and gauge ring, 2 3/8" Reg pin

3 As required 4 3/8" small gauge flat bottom mill, 2 3/8" Reg pin

4 2 Float sub, 3½" Reg box x 3½" IF box

5 2 Float valve, non ported for 3½" Reg conns

6 18 4¾" steel drill collar, 3½" IF conns (30 available)

7 2 Junk sub, 3½" Reg box x 3½" IF box

8 2 Junk sub, 2 3/8" Reg box x 2 7/8" PAC box

9 As required 5" drillpipe, 4½" IF conns

10 2 sets 4¾" drill collar hand slips and elevator

11 1 4¾" drill collar safety clamp and spanner

12 2 sets 5" drillpipe hand slips and elevator

13 As required Drill collar and drillpipe dope

14 1 5" rotating scraper, 2 3/8" Reg box x pin

15 1 X-over, 2 3/8" Reg box x 2 7/8" PAC box

16 30 3 1/8" drill collar, 2" PAC conns

17 As required 2 7/8" drillpipe, 2 7/8" PAC conns

18 1 PBR cleanout/dressing assembly, 27/8" PAC pin x 3½" Reg pin

20 1 X-over, 3½" Reg box x 3½" IF box

21 1 set 3 1/8" drill collar slips and elevator

22 1 3 1/8" drill collar safety clamp and spanner

23 1 3½" drillpipe slips and elevator

24 1 3½" drillpipe single joint elevator

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Semi Submersible Drilling Revision: 0
Operations
18/05/2000
Section 19 Page 427 of 447

25 1 2 7/8" drillpipe slips and elevator

26 10 2 7/8" PAC lifting nipple

27 1 X-over - 2 7/8" PAC pin x 3½" IF box

28 1 X-over - 3½" IF pin x 4½" IF box

29 1 each Standby stab-in safety valve and operating key, 4½" IF and 3½" IF conns

30 1 each Standby non return safety valve, 4½" IF and 3½" IF conns

31 1 set Manual rig tongs with jaws to cover range 2 7/8" - 4¾"

32 As required Fishing equipment to catch all downhole equipment when working in casing
and liner

33 1 suite Cased hole wireline logging tools c/w fishing equipment

34 1 Circulating head, 4½" IF pin x 2" Weco fig 1502

35 1 Circulating head, 3½" IF pin x 2" Weco fig 1502

36 1 2" Lo-torq valve, 2" Weco fig 1502

37 1 each 7"/5" RTTS or similar, c/w circulating sleeve and safety joint, 3½" IF and 2
3/8" IF conns

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Semi- Submersible Drilling Operations Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 19 Page 428 of 447

19.8 TIE-BACK PACKER

19.8.1 Tie-Back Packer: Running and Setting Procedures
A hydraulic or compression set tie-back packer will be run when a liner lap is leaking. The tie-
back packer will be hydraulically set and will include tie-back facilities. Mechanically set tie-
back packers will only be used when operational requirements preclude the use of
hydraulically set tie-back packers. The foregoing procedures are applicable to mechanically
set tie-back packers.

The Drilling Supervisor will ensure that all personnel and equipment for setting the tie-back
packer are on the rig. The tie-back packer dimensions and accessories will be compatible with
the PBR as run.

DOM section 4, reference items 1.0 and 2.0 will be fully complied with prior to tie-back packer
operations.

19.8.1.1 Make up plug container with setting ball installed to a joint of drillpipe and pump manifold c/w
heavy duty swivel and drillpipe lifting sub and lay out.
The ball release mechanism will be secured locked shut.

The Drilling Supervisor will witness setting ball loading operations.

19.8.1.2 Make up the PBR dressing and polishing assembly, if not previously completed, as specified
in the Drilling Programme.

A typical PBR dressing and polishing assembly would be:

• For a 7" liner lap leak:

• PBR clean out / dressing assembly - see, Note i)
• 9 5/8" rotating scraper
• X/O
• 6 x 6½" DC
• 6 x HWDP

For a 5" liner lap leak:

• PBR clean out / dressing assembly - see, Note i)

• 7" rotating scraper
• X/O
• 9 x 4¾" DC
• 3½" DP - see, Note ii)
• X/O
• 5" DP

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Semi- Submersible Drilling Operations Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 19 Page 429 of 447

Note:

i) The PBR dressing and polishing mills will be spaced to suit the length of PBR as run.

ii) The 3½" drillpipe will be spaced that with the PBR dressing mill landed on the 5" liner PBR, the
3½" / 5" drillpipe cross-over is above the 7" liner.

19.8.1.3 RIH to within 30 ft of PBR. Activate motion compensator to neutral string weight. (Enter 7"
PBR with extreme caution - applicable to 5" liner lap leak).
19.8.1.4 Break circulation. Work string down slowly and tag liner top with dressing mill. Work string to
polish PBR bore and remove any cement. Dress top PBR with 30-60 rpm and 2-5000 lbs
WOB. Maintain maximum circulation.
19.8.1.5 Circulate clean. Pump a viscous pill to remove any milled cuttings.
19.8.1.6 POH. Confirm PBR dressed from wear pattern on face of dressing mill.
19.8.1.7 If required and not previously completed, log with cement bond log and gauge ring / junk
basket.
19.8.1.8 Make-up tie-back packer to stand of running string. Function check running tool releasing
mechanism.
19.8.1.9 Run tie-back packer to within 30 ft of PBR. (Enter 7" PBR with extreme caution - applicable
to 5" liner lap leak). Bumper subs may be used in adverse weather conditions.
• Pass tie-back packer assembly through BOP stack with care.
• The running string will have been drifted to ensure clear passage of setting ball. All
drillpipe rubber protectors will be removed.
• A drillpipe wiper rubber will be used to prevent any junk falling into the hole.
• Ensure running string does not rotate when making connections. A back-up tong will
be used at all times.
• RIH slowly to avoid pressure surges. Backflow from drillpipe running string will be
evident due to small annular clearances between packer OD and casing / liner.
19.8.1.10 Pick up plug container with drillpipe single. Rig up to circulate. Pressure test lines to 1000
psi over tie-back setting pressure. Activate motion compensator to neutral string weight.
Record up and down weights.
19.8.1.11 Break circulation with 200 psi. Stab carefully into PBR. Stop pump as soon as pressure
increase is observed. Release pressure. ENSURE DRILLPIPE IS OPEN. Stab completely
into PBR. There will be sufficient overstand above the rotary table to compensate for the
heave of the rig during packer setting operations. A drillpipe tool joint will not be across the
BOP stack.
19.8.1.12 The specific tie-back setting and pressure testing procedures will be specified in the Drilling
Programme. The tie-back packer will not be set across a casing / liner coupling.
19.8.1.13 Pick up running string weight minus 15000 lbs. Release running tool with RH rotation.
19.8.1.14 Pressure test liner lap against pipe rams. The test pressure will be specified in the Drilling
Programme.
19.8.1.15 The pressure test will be performed as a leak-off test. The test pressure will not exceed the
production casing shoe strength.
19.8.1.16 POH.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Semi- Submersible Drilling Operations Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 19 Page 430 of 447

19.8.2 Equipment Check List

The Drilling Programme will specify the Tie-back Packer assembly.

19.8.2.1 7” Liner Tie-back Packer

Note:
This is a complete equipment list covering several potential scenarios. The drilling programme will point out
relevant deletions or any additions.

ITEM QUANTITY DESCRIPTION

1 2 7" tie-back packer assembly

2 2 7" tie-back packer running tool, 4½" IF box

3 1 Single plug container and pumping manifold c/w heavy duty swivel and
drillpipe lifting sub, 4½" IF pin

4 2 Tie-back packer setting ball

5 1 PBR cleanout/dressing assembly, 4½" Reg box

6 1 9 5/8" rotating scraper, 4½" Reg box x pin

7 1 X-over, 4½" Reg box x 4½" IF box

8 6 6½" steel drill collar, 4½" IF conns (12 available)

9 2 Bumper subs

10 6 5" HWDP, 4½" IF conns (12 available)

11 As required 5" drillpipe, 4½" IF conns

12 2 sets 6½" drill collar hand slips and elevator

13 1 6½" drill collar safety clamp and spanner

14 2 sets 5" drillpipe hand slips and elevator

15 As required Drill collar and drillpipe dope

16 1 Standby stab-in safety valve and operating key, 4½" IF conns

17 1 Standby non return safety valve, 4½" IF conns

18 As required Fishing equipment to catch all downhole equipment when working in casing

19 1 Circulating head, 4½" IF pin x 2" Weco fig 1502

20 1 2" Lo-torq valve, 2" Weco fig 1502

21 1 each 9 5/8"/7" RTTS or similar, c/w circulating sleeve and safety joint, 3½" IF and
4½" IF box

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Semi- Submersible Drilling Operations Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 19 Page 431 of 447

19.8.2.2 5” Liner Tie-back Packer

Note:
This is a complete equipment list covering several potential scenarios. The drilling programme will point out
relevant deletions or any additions.

ITEM QUANTITY DESCRIPTION

1 2 5" tie-back packer assembly

2 2 5" tie-back packer running tool, 3½" IF box

3 1 Single plug container and pumping manifold c/w heavy duty swivel and
drillpipe lifting sub, 4½" IF pin

4 2 Tie-back packer setting ball

5 1 PBR cleanout / dressing assembly, 3½" Reg box

6 1 7" rotating scraper, 3½" Reg box x pin

7 1 X-over, 3½" Reg box x 3½" IF box

8 9 4¾" steel drill collar, 3½" IF conns (18 available)

9 2 Bumper subs

10 As required 5" drillpipe, 4½" IF conns

11 1 X/over, 3½" IF pin x 4½" IF box

12 2 sets 4¾" drill collar hand slips and elevator

13 1 4¾" drill collar safety clamp and spanner

14 2 sets 5" drillpipe hand slips and elevator

15 As required Drill collar and drillpipe dope

16 1 each Standby stab-in safety valve and operating key, 3½" IF conns and 4½" IF
conns

17 1 each Standby non return safety valve, 3½" IF and 4½" IF conns

18 1 set Manual rig tongs with jaws to cover range 3½ - 4¾"

19 As required Fishing equipment to catch all downhole equipment when working in casing
and liner

20 1 Circulating head, 4½" IF pin x 2" Weco fig 1502

21 1 Circulating head, 3½" IF pin x 2" Weco fig 1502

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Semi- Submersible Drilling Operations Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 19 Page 432 of 447

22 1 2" Lo-torq valve, 2" Weco fig 1502

23 1 each 7"/5" RTTS or similar, c/w circulating sleeve and safety joint, 3½" IF and
23/8" IF box

24 1 X-over, 2 3/8" IF pin x 3½" IF box

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Jack-Up Rig Operations Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 20 Page 433 of 447

20 JACK-UP RIG OPERATIONS

20.1 PRE OPERATIONAL ACTIVITIES: JACK-UP
A site survey (Composed of a sidescan sonar and drop cores) is required prior to mobilizing the
drilling unit to location. The purpose of the survey is to identify hazards that could affect the stability of
the rig:

• Hard bottom, composed of coral or rock, causes high impact loads when the spud cans are
landed on the sea floor. This can cause damage to the spud cans and jacking system and
severely limit the sea-state in which operations can proceed.

• Very soft bottom involving a deep mud layer will lead to deep leg penetrations. This will limit
the effective water depth that the rig can operate in. At the well's end, an excessive amount of
time may be required to jet and pull the legs.

• A bottom composed of a hard crust, created by coral or other sediment, overlying a soft
sublayer can lead to a punch-through. This situation can cause major damage to the jacking
system.

• Firm, sandy bottom in areas with current often lead to scouring. These conditions must be
identified so that a monitoring and sandbagging program can be initiated.

• In platform operations, the footprint of previous rigs must be taken into account to ensure that
the desired heading can be achieved and to check that the desired cantilever extension can be
achieved.

• While approaching the location the rig legs must not be allowed to scour the seabed as it is
important not to have scour marks on the seabed which may complicate later development
and impinge on future operations.

20.2 SURVEYING AND MARKING THE LOCATION

The Drilling Superintendent is responsible for co-ordinating the surveying and/or positioning of the rig,
subject to NPL location positional requirements. The Drilling Supervisor is responsible for reporting
the co-ordinates.

20.2.1 Mobilizing and Jacking Up

Mobilizing and positioning the jack-up are the joint responsibility of the Contractor and NPL.
Decisions involving jacking up the barge are the sole responsibility of the Drilling Contractor.

20.3 PRIMARY DATA FROM THE SITE SURVEY.

• Marking of known hazards.

• Heading Selection.

The Drilling Supervisor is responsible for planning these operations to achieve all objectives in the
most time efficient manner.

20.3.1 Surveying Quality Checklist

(i) Ensure all surveying equipment has been brought on broad and is calibrated prior to
moving the rig.

(ii) Witness the final position fix to ensure that wellsite is within the programmed tolerance.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Jack-Up Rig Operations Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 20 Page 434 of 447

20.3.2 Heading Selection Checklist

(i) Select a heading consistent with the prevailing winds to facilitate helicopter take-offs
and landings.

(ii) Provide a comfortable leeward holding position for the standby work boat.

(iii) Attempt to select a heading that simplifies station holding when jacking down.

(iv) For platform operations, consider the footprint of previous rigs, and distance to skid,
when selecting heading.

20.3.3 Mobilizing and Jacking Operations Checklist

(i) Consult weather report prior to mobilizing.

(ii) Ensure safe havens are available (and reachable) if weather deteriorates.

(iii) Hold a premove meeting with the OIM, Drilling Supervisor, Toolpusher, survey
personnel, and tow boat captains to discuss the plan and potential problems.

(iv) Function test preload pumps.

(v) Tow the rig to location and make final approach at selected heading.

(vi) After taking the final fix, the barge will be jacked up to a 5' air gap and preloaded per
Contractor's procedures.

(vii) Dump the preload and jack up to the final air gap.

(viii) Note the preload, time held, leg penetrations, final heading, final surveyed position and
water depth on the morning report.

20.4 PRE SPUD OPERATIONS

• Ensure all drilling tools and equipment are on board, checked out and in a serviceable condition
prior to spud.
• Ensure all fishing tools appropriate to the drilling operations are available, checked out and in a
serviceable condition.
• Ensure casing running tools and casing running personnel are on board prior to reaching TD.
• Record the elevations from the rig floor datum point as these will be important in later space out
operations.
20.5 DRILLING OPERATIONS
20.5.1 Drilling 36” hole
20.5.1.1 Make up 36” assembly
26” bit
36” hole opener
Bit sub c/w float valve
1 x 9 ½” DC
36” stabiliser

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Jack-Up Rig Operations Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 20 Page 435 of 447

3 x 9 ½” DC’s
7 5/8” reg. Pin X 6 5/8” reg box XO
2 x 8” DC’s
Add 5” HWDP and a dart sub as drilling proceeds
Note: (i) Tandem 26”/36” assembly is used to prevent ledges
(ii) If the formation is hard, or the surveys show a tendency to drift, the assembly may
be changed to 17 ½” bit, 26” HO and 36” HO, or 17 ½” bit and 26” HO.
20.5.1.2 Tag seabed and record the distance between the seabed and the rotary table. ROV should
monitor the running of the string.
Record and report the following:
Water depth at Mean Sea Level
Air gap
Rotary Table elevation
Spud can penetration
20.5.1.3 In areas with high tidal currents wait and spud at slack tide to minimise lateral loading on the
BHA.
20.5.1.4 Spud well and drill to section TD
The well should be spudded with low circulation rates e.g. 250gpm increasing to
1000gpm after 100ft.
Drill the hole with seawater
A viscous pill should be pumped and displaced to seabed prior to each connection.
Vary the RPM and WOB to minimise the shock loading. Consider shock sub if necessary
to protect top drive ect.
Surveys should be taken at every connection below seabed
Maximum angle should be 0.5 degree at the mudline, and 2 degrees at section TD. If
angle exceeds 1 degree attempt to reduce by reaming.
20.5.1.5 At hole section TD take a final survey.
20.5.1.6 Displace hole to 9.5-10.0ppg viscous (e.g. pre-hydrated bentonite) mud and POH to seabed.
20.5.1.7 RIH and check for fill. Clean out hole if required.
20.5.1.8 Drop survey
20.5.1.9 Re-displace hole to 9.5-10.0ppg viscous (e.g. pre-hydrated bentonite) mud and POH.
20.5.1.10 Rig up to run 30” conductor

20.5.2 36” Hole Equipment Llist

Item Quantity Description

1 1 36” HO c/w nozzles (7 5/8” reg box-pin)

2 1 26” HO c/w nozzles (7 5/8” reg box-pin)

3 2 26” bit c/w jets

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Jack-Up Rig Operations Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 20 Page 436 of 447

4 2 17 ½” bit c/w jets

5 1 36” string stabiliser (or string roller reamer as an alternative)

6 1 26” string stabiliser

7 1 17 ½” string stabiliser

8 1 Bit sub c/w NRV

9 1 9 ½” UBHO if required

10 1 Totco ring

11 8 9 ½” DC’s (7 5/8” reg conns)

12 4 8” DC’s (6 5/8” reg conns)

13 2 XO sub 7 5/8” reg pin – 6 5/8” reg box

14 2 XO sub 6 5/8” reg pin – 4 ½” IF box

15 30 5” HWDP (4 ½” IF conns)

16 3 9 ½” DC nubbins

17 1 9 ½”DC slips/elevators

18 1 8” DC slips/elevators

19 1 DC safety clamp

20 1 Dart sub

21 1 Totco equipment and overshot

22 2 DP elevators

23 1 Survey equipment

24 1 Conductor running equipment

25 1 Fishing Tools

20.5.3 Preparation and Running 30” Conductor and Stab-In Cement Stinger Assembly

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Jack-Up Rig Operations Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 20 Page 437 of 447

20.5.3.1 Space Out and Running Order

20.5.3.1.1 Normally 30 “ conductor will be run to approximately 200 ft (five joints) below seabed.
The conductor should be spaced out to place the top of the Quick Connector Box at 3 ft
above the seabed. The depth will be the definitive depth for the conductor space out.

The mudline hanger suspension ring joint should be located one full joint below the
seabed. This will allow further casing strings to be backed out of their mudline hangers
during abandonment/suspension, avoiding casing cutting, but still complying with
legislative depth restrictions above seabed (if required).

20.5.3.1.2 The following running order should be used for 1” wall conductor
30” OD x 1” WT shoe joint w/stab-in float shoe x connector pin up
2 x 30” OD x 1” WT conductor joint w/connector box down x connector pin up
(numbers may vary depending on programmed 30” shoe depth.)
30” OD x 1” WT suspension ring joint w/connector box down x connector pin up
30” OD x 1” WT crossover joint w/connector box down x Quick connector box up
30” OD x 1” WTlanding joint w/Quick connector pin down x connector pin up

20.5.3.2 Preparation
20.5.3.2.1 Inspect all lip and “O” ring seals and seal areas on the connector and Quick connectors. If there is any
doubt as to the integrity of the seals, remove and discard them. Clean the seal housing and seal face using
a steam gun, high pressure water gun or degreasing agent. Ensure seal housings are dry and free from
degreasing agent before installing new seals. A light coating of grease on the seals will assist in
installation.
Lightly grease seal and seal areas.
2 “O” ring seals should be installed on the Quick connector pin.

Note:
If for any reason the 30” conductor needs to be retrieved, then all seals should again be
inspected and replaced if required. Ensure adequate spare seals are on board to re-run
the conductor assuming all seals would need to be replaced.

20.5.3.2.2 All connectors (as a minimum those above the Quick connector) should have anti-rotation dowells in the
box and corresponding slots in the pin to allow for disconnection at the Quick connector box.
20.5.3.2.3 Check ID’s of the mudline hanger suspension rings to ensure a 26” bit can pass.
Accurately measure the distance from the top shoulder of the mudline hanger
suspension ring to the shoulder of the connector pin above. This measurement will be
required for subsequent wellhead/mudline hanger space-out calculations.

20.5.3.2.4 Ensure that no connections coincide with 30” cutting depths for the jack-up, both for installation of the
diverter system or subsequent cut for installation of starter wellhead on first casing string.
20.5.3.2.5 Check the 30” stab-in float shoe and if appropriate the installation of the debris plug.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Jack-Up Rig Operations Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 20 Page 438 of 447

Ensure that the stab-in stinger is compatible with the 30” stab-in guide shoe and seals
are in good condition.
20.5.3.3 Running Conductor
20.5.3.3.1 Run conductor in correct order as indicated above.
20.5.3.3.2 Fill the conductor to sea level with seawater after running each joint.
20.5.3.3.3 Ensure ROV or divers are deployed to monitor and assist stabbing of the guide shoe into the 36” hole.
Note:
a) Whenever possible a large ROV capable of nudging the conductor should be
available so that stabbing of the 30” into the 36” hole is less dependent on slack
water.
b) It is normal to use divers in water depths of 150 ft or less.

20.5.3.3.4 Run the conductor to the required depth (top of Quick connector box, 3 ft above seabed) and confirm
position above seabed with ROV or divers. Land conductor in slips.
20.5.3.3.5 If necessary cut conductor so that stick-up is +/- 3 ft above rig floor and cut eyes to allow slings to be
attached.
20.5.3.3.6 Make a stab-in stinger to first joint of drillpipe and install 5”/30” ballon centraliser 3 ft above the stab-in sub.
Run the first joint into conductor.
20.5.3.3.7 Rig up and run remainder of drillpipe cement stinger assembly.
If there is no latch mechanism on the stab-in stinger, it may be necessary to use HWDP for the
cement stinger to ensure the cement stinger assembly cannot be pumped out of the float shoe.
The preferred method is to use a 30” spider adapter plate w/bowl and slips. Alternatively a “C”
plate w/double elevators can be used

20.5.3.3.8 Refer to section 20.5.4. for details of stabbing in, circulating and cementing.
20.5.3.3.9 Pull drillpipe cement stinger assembly and rig down elevators.
20.5.3.3.10 Pick up the 30” conductor only enough to recover the 30” slips and hold in place until surface samples
have set. (If the conductor was cut above the rig floor, then slings will be required to lift the conductor.)

20.5.4 30” Cementation using Stab-In Technique

20.5.4.1 30” Conductor
20.5.4.1.1 The 30” may be cemented with a stab-in shoe.
20.5.4.1.2 HWDP may be required as the cementing stinger to ensure stab-in assembly cannot be pumped out of the
float shoe if no latch assembly is used. A centraliser will be run above the stab-in stinger, on the bottom
joint of HWDP/DP.
20.5.4.1.3 Prior to stabbing into the shoe, rig up and circulate to confirm circulation through the drillpipe.
Stab-in to the shoe and fill 5” x 30” annulus with seawater. Note volume required and
ensure level is constant.
Circulate a minimum volume equal to the 30” x 36 “ annulus volume. Observe level
inside 30” remains constant confirming cement stinger seal is maintained.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Jack-Up Rig Operations Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 20 Page 439 of 447

20.5.4.1.4 The use of an iodine tracer and GR tool to monitor top of cement can be considered when applicable. On
jack-up rigs a ROV/divers should be used to monitor cement returns at the seabed. If a tracer is to be
used, rig up logging equipment and prepare to run the GR logging tool to +/- 10 ft from the DP centraliser
inside the 30”. The GR tool is to be run just after the tracer has been mixed to avoid saturating the tool.
20.5.4.1.5 Pump preflush and cement slurry volumes. Actual details will be specified in the drilling programme.
The preflush will normally be seawater, any alternative will be specified in the drilling
programme.
Lead cement to be class “G” mixed in seawater to 16.0 ppg. Tail cement to be 300
sacks class “G” mixed with seawater containing 2% by weight calcium chloride or
equivalent. Slurry weights to be 16.0 ppg. Alternatively, the entire job will be carried out
with the tail slurry.

Slurry volume to be:

a) If a tracer is used:
Minimum gauge hole volume
Maximum 200% excess on the gauge hole volume.
An initial 10 bbls of slurry will be mixed and pumped. Add Iodine tracer and then continue mixing
the lead slurry.

b) If no tracer, use 200% excess on the gauge hole volume.

Whilst mixing cement continuously monitor level in 5” DP x 30” conductor annulus.

20.5.4.1.6 Complete mixing slurry and displacement as follows:

a) If a tracer is used, then the GR tool has indicated the trace downhole, pull
back the tool in +/- 50 ft stages and note the cement rise, compare with calculated
rate. When trace is at required level start mixing and pumping tail slurry followed
by the displacement.
b) If no tracer, mix and pump calculated volumes of lead and tail followed by the
displacement.

20.5.4.1.7 Displace the cement with seawater to the 30” conductor shoe. Check for backflow at the cement unit.
If backflow occurs:
Re-displace the volume of backflow and a further over displacement of one barrel.
Hold pressure until surface samples are set.
Bleed off pressure and unsting from shoe and POH.

20.5.4.1.8 If no backflow, unsting from shoe while observing 5” DP x 30” annulus level for negative flow.
If negative flow occurs:

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Jack-Up Rig Operations Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 20 Page 440 of 447

Restab stinger immediately, pump volume flowed plus 1 bbl and wait until surface
samples are set.
Un-sting from shoe and POH.

20.5.4.1.9 If no negative flow, pull back 15 ft and circulate conventionally to remove any excess cement.
20.5.4.1.10 If run, pull GR tool and rig down wireline.
20.5.4.1.11 POH cement stinger assembly.
20.5.4.1.12 Ensure all cement bulk, cement unit equipment and lines are thoroughly overhauled, blown out and
cleaned immediately upon completion of cementing operation.
20.5.4.1.13 30 “ cementing calculations to be performed are:
1) Open hole volume and appropriate excess.
2) Cementing stinger volume.
3) Total Slurry volume.
4) Cement, additive and mixwater requirements for lead slurry (if used).
5) Cement, additive and mixwater requirement for tail slurry.
6) Final displacement volume i.e. DP capacity
7) Hydrostatic pressure inside 30” shoe prior to stinger withdrawal.
8) Hydrostatic pressure outside 30” shoe prior to stinger withdrawal.
9) Collapse pressure at 30” shoe prior to pulling stinger out of shoe.
10) Minimum cement height to balance seawater column inside 30” conductor after
final displacement.
11) Weight of 30” when landed
12) Volume of seawater to fill 5” x 30” annulus from sea level to surface.
13) Depth of trace when lead slurry is changed to tail slurry (if tracer is used).
14) Slurry mixing time.
15) Total job compared to thickening time.

20.5.5 Drilling 26” hole

20.5.5.1 Make up 26” assembly
26” bit
Bit sub c/w float valve
1 x 9 ½” DC
26” stabiliser
3 x 9 ½” DC’s
7 5/8” reg. Pin X 6 5/8” reg box XO
2 x 8” DC’s
Add 5” HWDP and a dart sub as drilling proceeds
20.5.5.2 Drill out 30” casing shoe and rat hole with 26” assembly to section TD

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Jack-Up Rig Operations Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 20 Page 441 of 447

Ensure diverter system is operational. Perform diverter drill.

Drill section with seawater with viscous pills
Control drill to ensure that annulus is not overloaded
Once TD reached circulate a viscous slug and ensure hole is clean.
Pump out of hole back to 30” shoe.
Run back to bottom and clean out any fill.
Pump out of hole and prepare to run 20” casing.
Ensure the landing off area at the mud line is clear of debris by jetting the area while POH

20.5.5.3 26” Hole Equipment List

Use 36” hole equipment list as a guide modified with appropriate 26” assembly equipment
see 20.5.2.
20.5.5.4 Preparation, Running and Cementing of 20” Casing
20.5.5.4.1 Preparation
Use the preparation and running procedures for 30” see 20.5.3
Make up circulating head
20.5.5.4.2 Running
Rig up and run 20” casing. Ensure that circulation is possible through float equipment
After running 3rd joint, check floats are operating.
Ensure that casing centralisers are fitted as per the centraliser programme.
The Mud Line Suspension (MLS) system and surface wellhead systems require that casing
of pre-determined lengths are required (determined from the MLS wellhead supplier). These
joints will be selected onshore and care must be taken to run these joints exactly in the pre-
determined order. The back up space joints should be set aside for ready access if required.
Pick up hanger/running tool assembly and make up into casing string.
Lower casing string until hanger is just above the rotary table and land in the slips.
Follow MLS system supplier wellhead and hanger installation procedures.
Follow circulating head assembly installation procedures.
Ensure 5” drill pipe used for stinger assembly has been drifted.
20.5.5.4.3 Cementing
Rig up surface lines to cement stinger and test.
Pump seawater mixed with dye.
Pump required cement. Ensure that cement is at the mudline.
Check for back flow. If float fails, maintain pressure for one hour and re-check for backflow.
If back flow is observed, pump backflow volume plus 1 bbl and hold pressure until surface
samples are hard. Open wash ports and circulate out cement.
Close washports and circulate annulus clean. Rig down circulating head.
Retrieve 20” landing joint and nipple down diverter.
20.5.5.4.4 Wellhead/BOP
Install 20” casing head as per wellhead supplier instructions.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Jack-Up Rig Operations Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 20 Page 442 of 447

Install BOP’s 21 ¼” BOP’s

Make up 20” BOP test tool and land out on the load shoulder in the 20” casing head.
Conduct BOP stack test.

20.5.6 Drilling 17 ½” hole and subsequent sections

20.5.6.1 The remaining hole sections (17 ½”, 12 ¼”, 8 ½” and 6”) are drilled, cased, and cemented
with similar procedures as for semi submersible drilling, see section 19 of the DOM.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Land operation Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 21 Page 443 of 447

21 LAND OPERATIONS

21.1 PRE-OPERATIONAL ACTIVITIES

All the necessary pre operational activities for land drilling operations such as Site Survey, Location
Acceptance, Rig Acceptance and Rig Positioning are covered in section 3 of the Drilling Operations
Manual (DOM). All responsibilities are covered in section 1 of the DOM.

21.2 MOBILIZING AND RIGGING UP

(i) The Drilling Superintendent shall ensure that the following items have been completed:

• A pre-hire rig inspection should have been conducted prior to finalising the contract.

• Inspection of all drillstring and BHA components per contract.

• Installation of any special equipment and ensure upgrades identified in the pre-hire inspection
are completed.

(ii) Drilling Supervisor and contractor toolpusher should go to the location prior to planning the rig
move.

(iii) Co-ordinate the hiring of trucks and cranes for the rig move with the toolpusher as required.

(iv) Ensure all water storage pits topped off prior to spud.

(v) Function test communication system.

(vi) Hold a mobilisation meeting with the Drilling Contractor and truck pusher and set time goals for
co-ordinate and movement of Company/Drilling Contractor equipment including:

• Mud logging unit.

• Mud products.

• Casing, wellheads, etc.

(vii) Plan movement of rig:

• Identify critical loads.

• Run trucks in organised sequenced convoys.

• Ensure facilities exist for drivers and crew meals and accommodation.

• Review safety considerations.

• Conduct rig acceptance test prior to spudding the well.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Land operation Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 21 Page 444 of 447

21.3 RIG PREPARATION

The construction of the cellar to accept the BOP’s in the sub-base below the rotary table is the
responsibility of the drilling contractor, and will be normally part of the drilling contract.

21.4 SETTING CONDUCTOR

Land wells can have various designs dependent on the total depth required. In some land wells the
conductors range from 30” for deep wells to 7” for shallow wells.

(a) Conductor Casing is set to accomplish various goals (see Casing Design Manual):

(i) Isolate shallow, unconsolidated sediments.

(ii) Provide a circulating path back to the mud pits.

(iii) Provide a hydraulic seal and connection for a diverter system.

(iv) Prevent washing out the foundation beneath the rig.

(b) A diverter system may be installed on this string of pipe. In some areas, a second string of
conductor casing may be set. Rig up the diverter system if:

(i) The area has a history of shallow gas or water flows.

(ii) Old offset wells may have charged shallow sands through casing leaks.

(iii) Bright spots have been identified on shallow seismic data.

(iv) No information available (rank wildcat).

(v) Refer to the NPL Well Control Manual for equipment requirements and operating
procedures for diverter systems.

(c) The shallow conductor pipe can be set in various ways, depending on soil conditions and
equipment availability:

(I) A small rig can drill a hole and set the conductor pipe prior to moving the main drilling rig. A
water well rig is commonly used for this purpose. Often the conductor can be pile driven by a
separate contractor prior to drilling rig arrival.

(ii) If the hole will be full of fluid when cementing, do not dump cement into the annulus. Use
side strings of tubing, or other "wet" cementing method to ensure a good cement seal.

(iii) Check that the conductor is centered in the hole and straight before cementing.

(d) The drilling rig can set the pipe after rigging up:

(I) The hole can be drilled and cemented conventionally.

(ii) A cellar jet will be required to drill the hole. Cementing is usually done through drillpipe and
a stab-in float collar.

(iii) An auger can be used to set shallow conductors in soft soil or where boulders may be
encountered.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Land operation Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 21 Page 445 of 447

(e)The pipe can be driven with a hammer after the drilling rig is rigged up:

(i) Refer to drilling contractor’s procedures for driving conductor. As a guide limit the blows/ft
to 200 dependent on the hammer size.

(ii) At least 100' of pipe will normally be driven.

21.5 SURFACE CASING

Surface casing is set to accomplish various goals (see Casing Design Manual):

• Achieve a casing seat with a fracture gradient at least one PPG higher than the maximum
anticipated mud weight required for the next section of hole.

• Isolate sources of fresh water.

• Provide structural support for subsequent casing strings.

Surface casing setting depths may be regulated in some areas.

The following guideline/procedures are generic for drilling and setting surface casing in land
operations. Fuller details can be found in section 19 of the DOM (Semi-submersible drilling
operations)

21.5.1 Drilling Out of Conductor pipe

(i) Check that cellar jet is functional.

(ii) Pick up BHA as per the drilling program and install a ported float in the bit sub.

(iii) Function test diverter system and pressure test to 200 PSI.

(iv) Hold a meeting to discuss diverting operations in the event shallow gas is encountered.

21.5.2 Drilling
(I) Drill with half of normal pump rate until all stabilisers will fit below the conductor shoe.

(ii) POH and pick up stabilisers per BHA program.

(iii) When shallow conductor is set, be prepared to handle lost returns to the cellar. The leak
path is often through the mousehole.

(iv) Plan space out for casing setting depth:

• If a threaded wellhead will be used, then plan for 15ft -20 ft of rathole.
• If a welded wellhead will be used, space out to land the casing with suitable stickup
above the cellar or ground level. The stickup depends on cellar depth, number of
casings and height of BOP flowline and rig floor.
(v) Control drill to casing point:

• Do not allow annulus mud weight to exceed fracture gradient of shallow formations.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Land operation Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 21 Page 446 of 447

• Use highest flowrate achievable without inducing losses.

• Circulate, sweep hole, and spot high viscosity pill.
(vi) Drop survey tool and POH, SLM.

(vii)Nipple down bell nipple and diverter.

• Run casing and cement with the diverter in place in high risk areas.
• If hole fill is anticipated, do not nipple down unless cellar jet is functional.
(viii)RIH. Check fill, circulate and spot high viscosity pill.

21.5.3 Running Casing

(i) Rig up and run casing:

• Make up shoe joint. Fill and check float operation.

• Centralise as per Drilling Programme.
• Centralise and run cement basket as per Drilling Programme (if required).

21.5.4 Cementing
Refer to DOM section 9 (cementing) and DOM section 19 (Semi- submersible drilling
operations) for details

(i) Hold cement planning meeting:

• Review job.
• Assign responsibilities.
(ii) Cement and displace as per Drilling programme:

• Tail in with 300 feet of accelerated neat cement.

• Ensure cement company has additional neat cement and calcium chloride for top
job.

21.5.5 Post Cementing

(I) WOC per program and check for flowback:

(ii) If top job required, run side string of tubing and top up annulus.

(iii) Install wellhead and BOP’s

21.5.6 Material and Service Requirements

(i) Surface casing.

(ii) Pup joints, crossovers, and landing joints as needed.

 Allomax Ltd 2000

 Drilling Operations Manual Ref: (NW, PMc)
Land operation Revision: 0
18/05/2000
Section 21 Page 447 of 447

(iii) Wellhead and hardware.

(iv) Wear bushing, test plug - running tool.

(v) Casing swage.

(vi) Bow spring centralisers, stop rings.

(vii) Rigid centraliser, stop rings.

(viii) Cement basket.

(ix) Plug container.

(x) Wiper plugs.

(xi) Float shoe and collar with backup.

21.6 INTERMEDIATE/PRODUCTION CASING

For procedures for drilling hole sizes to set setting Intermediate and Production casing strings refer to
DOM section 19 (Semi submersible drilling operations).

 Allomax Ltd 2000